Chevrolet - Accord Wagon - Workshop Manual - 1997 - 1997

A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 9777 Page 7646 Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Assembly Disposal and Deployment Damaged Airbag/Tensioner Special Procedure Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Acura/Honda District Technical Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: Damaged Airbag Special Procedure WARNING: IF AN AIRBAG CANNOT BE DEPLOYED, IT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED AS NORMAL SCRAP; IT SHOULD STILL BE CONSIDERED A POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE DEVICE THAT CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. 1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure. 2. In all cases, make sure a short circuit by twisting together the two airbag inflator wires. 3. Package the airbag in exactly the same packaging that the new replacement part came in. 4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Acura/Honda District Technical Manager for how and where to return it for disposal. Deployed Air Bag Handling When handling a deployed air bag assembly, a face shield and rubber gloves should be worn. Vehicle interior and A/C, vent, defroster and heater ducts should be vacuumed. If sinus or throat irritation is encountered during air bag removal, exit vehicle and breathe fresh air. If skin irritation is encountered, flush effected area with cool water. If sinus, throat, skin or any other type of irritation continues, consult a physician. After handling a deployed air bag assembly, wash hands and rinse thoroughly with water. An air bag that has been deployed should be removed from the vehicle. Prior to removing a deployed air bag assembly, place tape over air bag exhaust vents. After unit has been removed, it should be placed in a heavy duty plastic bag and sealed securely. The sealed plastic bag should then be placed with automotive scrap. An air bag assembly that has not been deployed, must be deployed prior to disposal. Driver's Air Bag Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: DEPLOYING AIRBAGS IN THE VEHICLE If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. 4. Remove the access panel (A), then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag (B) and the cable reel (C). A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 2904 Page 2063 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5614 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3657 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Component Locations Data Link Connector: Component Locations Photo View Front Console Page 3344 Page 1070 Page 7355 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Electrical Specifications Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Electrical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 5214 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4821 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Specifications Two-Way Valve: Specifications Vacuum Specifications Vacuum Specifications Sedan KL (LX with ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe Models With Vacuum Applied 0.2 - 0.6 in Hg With Pressure Applied 0.3 in Hg Sedan KL (SE, LX without ABS)/Wagon Models With Vacuum Applied 0.2 - 0.6 in Hg With Pressure Applied 0.4 - 1.4 in Hg Page 483 Page 1006 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Locations Center Of Trunk Lid Page 2619 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4945 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the shift control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the shift control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 3 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 6011 Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection - Remove the fail-safe relays and motor relay. See: Locations Relay Identification - Check for continuity between the terminals C and D. There should be continuity. - Check for continuity between the terminals A and B. There should be continuity when the battery is connected between the terminals C and D. There should be no continuity when the battery is disconnected. Page 8581 Keyless Entry Module: Programming and Relearning Keyless Transmitter Codes Input Procedure Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Page 5038 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7559 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. CONTROL PANEL REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the air mix control cable from the heater unit. 2. Remove the stereo radio/cassette player, and the glove box. Page 9418 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Warning Switch Replacement CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the hazard warning switch or the front console panel when prying the switch out. 1. Carefully pry the hazard warning switch out of the front console panel. 2. Disconnect the 10-P connector from the hazard warning switch. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Replace Timing Belt, Balancer Belt, and inspect Water Pump every 105,000 miles. Page 8831 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2408 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Inspection And Test CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the wire. Ignition Wire Inspection And Test 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. Ignition Wire Resistance: 25 K Ohms max. at 68° F (20° C) 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohms, replace the ignition wire. Page 4014 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1253: A problem in the Variable Valve Timing and Valve Lift Electronic Control (VTEC) Solenoid Valve circuit. Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications GAP GAP Spark Plug Air Gap 0.039-0.043 (in.) C539 C539 (12-GRY) Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid .............................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 2.0 Qt Specifications Pinion Gear: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Backlash 0.05 - 0.15 mm --Inside Diameter 18.042 - 18.066 mm --Pinion Gear to Pinion Shaft Clearance 0.055 - 0.091 mm 0.12 mm Page 3154 Page 4781 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................ZFR5F-11 Denso .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................KJ16CR-L11 Page 9387 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3147 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.) Page 582 Page 9135 Page 8851 Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch At Left Rear Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 4456 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6720 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair 1. Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. 2. Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. CAUTION: Check all clamps for deterioration and deformation; replace with new ones if necessary. Page 9676 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 370 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 6754 3. Remove the pump cam ring from the pump housing. NOTE: Replace the pump as an assembly if the cam ring must be replaced. 4. Remove the pump rotor and vanes. NOTE: Replace the pump as an assembly if the pump rotor or vanes must be replaced. 5. Remove the two rollers from the side plate. Page 7777 4. Place the flat portion of the jaws over the tongue stopper, and squeeze until the vise-grip jaws lock and deform the stopper shaft. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Belt Tongue Stopper: WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Warranty Coverage: Seat belts that fail to function properly during normal use are covered under warranty for the useful life of the car. Warranty Does Not Cover: ^ Malfunction due to abuse, alteration, accidental damage or damage resulting from a collision or misuse. ^ Replacement of a properly functioning seat belt for cosmetic or comfort reasons. Operation number: 854125 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour (one or two sides) Failed part: P/N 04814-SM1-AO2ZA [NEW] H/C 3919289 Defect code: L18 Contention code: A02 Page 9527 Key Cylinder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Photo View Oxygen Sensor: Locations Photo View Photo 12 Front Of Engine Photo 132 Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 563 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 7583 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 10064 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper Motor 1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the wiper motor. Fig. 15 Rear Wiper Motor Terminal Identification. 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the D terminal and ground to the C terminal. ^ If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Rear Window Wiper Motor Test 4. Connect an analog voltmeter between the B and A terminals, then run the motor. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V and more than 4 V alternately. Page 7248 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9451 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3587 ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. Page 6114 Piston Seal Removal 3. Remove the piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. 4. Install the special tool between the caliper body and spring cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside of the caliper cylinder during caliper disassembly. Special Tool Proper Use 5. Position the locknuts as shown, then turn the shaft until the plate just contacts the caliper body. NOTE: Do not compress the spring under the spring cover. 6. Turn the shaft clockwise 1/4 - 1/2 turn to compress adjusting spring B in the caliper body. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the inner components, do not turn the shaft more than 1/2 turn. Page 6644 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. With Keyless Entry Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection With Keyless Entry Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Leave the harness connected and make the test shown by probing the back of the connectors. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Page 7560 3. Remove the cruise control main/moonroof, dash lights brightness controller and rear window defogger switches. 4. Remove the six self-tapping screws, then pull out the instrument/heater control panels. Disconnect the connectors from the heater control panel, then remove the instrument/heater control panels. 5. Remove the five self-tapping screws and the heater control panel from the instrument panel. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the air mix control cable at the heater unit. If necessary, adjust the heater valve cable. Page 5896 Page 304 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8885 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 6178 4. Install the knuckle on the tie-rod end, upper arm and lower arm. Tighten the castle nuts and install the new cotter pins. Caution: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the point hole. Never align the nut by loosening. 5. Install the knuckle protector with the 6mm bolt. 6. On ABS equipped cars, install the wheel sensor with the sensor mounting bolts. 7. On ABS equipped cars, taking care not to twist the wires, install the wheel sensor wire bracket with the two flange bolts. 8. Install the caliper with the caliper bracket mounting bolts. Caution: Be careful not to twist the hose more than necessary. Page 9414 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Page 5815 Countershaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Locations Check Valve Location Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Control Actuator: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the solenoid valve, and remove the rear mount. 2. Clean and oil the diaphragm actuator rod, rear mount rotor lever, and lever linkage. 3. With a vacuum pump/gauge, apply vacuum of about 230 mm Hg (9.1 inch Hg.), and check if the rotor lever turns 80°. - Replace the rear mount if the rotor lever does not operate. Page 1154 Page 7194 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3982 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 4752 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4429 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 1213 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. 22P Connector Description, Signal & Terminal Name Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 6806 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Key-in Reminder System - Ignition Key Switch Test When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper in the integrated control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch. With ground at the "BLU/WHT" and "A1" terminals, the beeper sounds. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 5 and No. 8. ^ There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. ^ There should be no continuity with the key removed. Page 159 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8119 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9852 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4444 Page 5708 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Page 2162 Page 3177 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 5931 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3878 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 8982 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7567 Page 835 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 116 Right Side Of Cargo Area (Left Similar) Page 6997 9. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 10. Tighten the flange bolt. 11. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the rear damper to the specified torque. 12. Install the rear seat (Sedan) or the rear seat cushion and side-bolsters (Wagon) or the rear bulkhead cover and right gusset cover (Coupe). 13. Install the rear wheels. Page 1823 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation CAUTION: ^ Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with valves when torquing rocker assembly bolts. ^ Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. ^ To prevent rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. ^ Lubricate cam lobes after reassembly. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up. (No. 1 piston Top Dead Center (TDC)). 4. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 or No. 6 camshaft holders. ^ Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. ^ Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Page 6219 Brake Cable Removal & Installation ^ Remove the lock pin and clevis pin. Remove the cable clip and disconnect the cable from the arm. ^ Remove the banjo bolt and two sealing washers. Caliper Bolts Location ^ Remove the two caliper bolts and caliper body from the bracket. Pins & Pin Boot Placement ^ Remove the pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. Disassembly Page 3308 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1982 NOTE: ^ The synchronizing piston can be seen in the gap between the mid, secondary and primary rocker arms. ^ With the timing plate engaged in the groove on the timing piston, the piston is locked in the pushed out position. ^ Do not apply too much force when pushing up the timing plate. 6. Make sure that the intake primary and secondary rocker arms are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm does not move when pushed manually. ^ If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set. Body - Unibody Repair Guidelines Unibody: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Unibody Repair Guidelines 07-008 February 2, 2007 Applies To: ALL Clarification of Honda Unibody Repair Policy BACKGROUND Honda automobiles and trucks are built to precise standards so that they can perform well under many situations. For example, they offer a firm responsive ride yet yield when necessary under the forces of a collision to help protect the vehicle occupants. HONDA REPAIR POLICY Sectioning Frame Components When body repairs are necessary, Honda recommends that any repairs be performed by an experienced professional, using the Honda body repair manual, and that component replacement be accomplished along factory seams. Failure to do so can result in a number of problems, including improperly fitting parts, noises, tire wear, and most importantly, changes in vehicle dynamics and occupant protection in a subsequent crash. In particular, Honda strongly recommends against the process of joining cut pieces from separate vehicle~commonly referred to as clipping. This is not an authorized Honda repair method. Any problem with other components resulting from such improper vehicle repairs is not covered under Honda's factory or extended warranties. Also, because what's in a part is as important as how it looks, Honda strongly recommends the use of Honda Genuine repair parts. The material used to create the part, such as high-strength steel, and the subtle shapes of the part, determine how it will perform in normal operation or in a subsequent collision. Using Honda Genuine repair parts helps return the vehicle to its pre-crash condition. ADHESIVES/WELDING Using adhesives in place of welding for component replacement is not an authorized Honda repair method. It is important to repair at factory seams using the same procedure as the factory assembly process except where specified otherwise in the Honda body repair manual. The door skin is welded at the top and is glued around the crimp. Each body repair manual states that if the reinforcement in the door is damaged, the complete door must be replaced. NOTE: Because they are made of high-strength steel, door and bumper reinforcements must not be repaired or straightened. INFORMATION RESOURCES Extensive research and development goes into every Honda to provide safety for those inside as well as outside the vehicle. Therefore, it is critical that collision repair facilities do not change a vehicle during collision repair. Please visit the following websites for further information about Honda safety: ^ world.honda.com/safety, and ^ world.honda.com/news/2003/4030904_2.html Body repair manuals are available for every new Honda model series that is sold in the U.S. Each manual provides instructions for proper repair procedures, and drawings that show where each factory seam and weld on the vehicle is located. In a few instances, the manual also indicates where it is acceptable to cut panels and sections other than at factory seams. Body repair manuals can be purchased from Helm, Inc. using one of these methods: ^ Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 ^ Go online at www.helminc.com Collision repair facilities can also subscribe to all manuals at www. serviceexpress.honda.com. Dealers can log onto ISIS and view body repair manuals in the Search By Publication section. Page 2497 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7342 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3087 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6756 10. Inspect the pump housing for damage on the sealing surfaces. 11. Inspect the bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If any play or roughness is felt, replace the bearing. 12. Remove and discard the bearing using the special tool and a press. 13. Install the new bearing using the special tool and a press. Assemble CAUTION: The power steering components are made of aluminum. Avoid damaging the components during assembly. Page 5805 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6235 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid type DOT 3 or 4 Specifications Fuel Tank Drain Plug: Specifications Torque 36 ft.lb Page 819 Page 6119 Bearing & Component Installation 9. Fit the bearing A, spacer, adjusting spring B and spring cover on the adjusting bolt, and install them in the caliper cylinder. Brake Spring Compressor 10. Install the special tool on the spring cover, and turn the shaft until the locknut contacts the plate. 11. Check that the flared end of the spring cover is below the circlip groove. Page 3360 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9893 Vanity Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Dash And Console Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4859 Page 788 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Page 5826 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 7642 Airbag Assembly Replacement Remove the two Torx bolts using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's airbag assembly. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS Wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. 5. Install the new airbags: Airbag Assembly Replacement Place the driver's airbag assembly into the steering wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts. 6. Reconnect the airbag connectors. Airbag Assembly Replacement Connect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then install the access panel on the steering wheel. 7. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 8. After installing the airbag assembly, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. - Make sure both horn buttons work. - Take a test drive, and make sure the cruise control switches work. 9. Enter the code number to restore radio operation. Page 6856 11. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the valve body unit from the gearbox. 12. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 inch) diameter hole approximately 2.5 - 3.0 mm (0.10 - 0.12 inch) in depth in the staked point on the cylinder. CAUTION: ^ Do not allow metal shavings to enter the gearbox housing. ^ After removing the cylinder end, remove any burrs at the stake point. 13. Install special tool to the gearbox housing. Clamp the too in a vise with soft jaws as shown, then loosen and remove the cylinder end. CAUTION: Do not clamp the cylinder. 14. Remove the steering gearbox housing from the vise, and set it the in a press so the gearbox points upward. Page 4921 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 3860 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 1280 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Page 8428 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4609 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8767 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6499 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4207 Page 5629 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8338 8. Remove the glass run channel. Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Specifications Clutch: Specifications DIMENSIONS End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance: 1st ........................................................................................................................................................ .................... 0.65-0.85 mm (0.026-0.033 inch) 2nd ............................................................................ .............................................................................................. 0.65-0.85 mm (0.026-0.033 inch) 3rd ... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... 0.40-0.60 mm (0.016-0.024 inch) 4th ....................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.40-0.60 mm (0.016-0.024 inch) 1st-Hold ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.80-1.00 mm (0.031-0.039 inch) 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th End Plates 1-PN# 22551-PX4-003 = 2.10 mm (0.083 inch) 2-PN# 22552-PX4-003 = 2.20 mm (0.087 inch) 3-PN# 22553-PX4-003 = 2.30 mm (0.091 inch) 4-PN# 22554-PX4-003 = 2.40 mm (0.094 inch) 5-PN# 22555-PX4-003 = 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) 6-PN# 22556-PX4-003 = 2.60 mm (0.102 inch) 7-PN# 22557-PX4-003 = 2.70 mm (0.106 inch) 8-PN# 22558-PX4-003 = 2.80 mm (0.110 inch) 9-PN# 22559-PX4-003 = 2.90 mm (0.114 inch) 1st-Hold Clutch End Plates 1-PN# 22551-PX4-003 = 2.10 mm (0.083 inch) 1-PN# 22551-P0X-003 = 2.10 mm (0.083 inch) 2-PN# 22552-PX4-003 = 2.20 mm (0.087 inch) 2-PN# 22552-P0X-003 = 2.20 mm (0.087 inch) 3-PN# 22553-PX4-003 = 2.30 mm (0.091 inch) 3-PN# 22553-P0X-003 = 2.30 mm (0.091 inch) 4-PN# 22554-PX4-003 = 2.40 mm (0.094 inch) 4-PN# 22554-P0X-003 = 2.40 mm (0.094 inch) 5-PN# 22555-PX4-003 = 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) 5-PN# 22555-P0X-003 = 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) 6-PN# 22556-PX4-003 = 2.60 mm (0.102 inch) 6-PN# 22556-P0X-003 = 2.60 mm (0.102 inch) 7-PN# 22557-PX4-003 = 2.70 mm (0.106 inch) 7-PN# 22557-P0X-003 = 2.70 mm (0.106 inch) 8-PN# 22558-PX4-003 = 2.80 mm (0.110 inch) 8-PN# 22558-P0X-003 = 2.80 mm (0.110 inch) 9-PN# 22559-PX4-003 = 2.90 mm (0.114 inch) 9-PN# 22559-P0X-003 = 2.90 mm (0.114 inch) Page 2306 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Installation NOTE: ^ Install the timing belt and timing balancer belt in the reverse order of removal. ^ Only key points are described here. ^ When installing only the timing balancer belt, go to step 13. ^ Clean the upper and lower covers before installation. 1. Remove the timing balancer belt drive pulley. 2. Set the timing belt drive pulley so that the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC). Align the dimple on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the V pointer on the oil pump. 3. Set the camshaft pulley so that the No. 1 piston is at TDC. ^ Align the TDC mark on the camshaft pulley with the back cover upper surface. Page 3886 Page 7422 NOTE: When loosening the expansion valve nuts, use a second wrench to hold the expansion valve or evaporator pipe. Otherwise, they can be damaged. 10. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Make note of following items. - Replace the 0-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 - PR7 - A01) before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right 0-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Install the expansion valve capillary tube with the capillary tube in contact with the suction line directly, and wrap it with tape. - Reinstall the A/C thermostat sensor to its original location. 11. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil. - Replace the 0-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat refrigerant oil before installing them. - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system, and test its performance. Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 7582 Heater Fan Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1666 Part 2 Of 2 Page 2545 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Page 9695 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Light Flasher Relay Below Left Side Of Dash - Photo 146 Page 8716 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts . NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 4. Disconnect the 20-P connector between the combination switch harness and main wire harness. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Lever Replacement Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Lever Replacement CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Fan Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 5869 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Top Of Transmission Page 6633 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 8756 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 200 Page 9635 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection DRL Control Unit (Canada) Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) Page 881 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Page 7444 Page 8104 Page 2218 13. Remove the oil pump housing bolt to the left and below the front balancer shaft. 14. Install the oil seal retainer from the kit on the pump housing with the bolt you just removed. Torque the bolt to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 15. Reinstall the lower cover bolts, making sure the rubber seal seats properly in the cover. Torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the crankshaft pulley. Use the special tools and a torque wrench to torque the pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 lb-ft). Make sure you use a torque wrench; do not use an impact wrench. 17. Reinstall the splash shield mounting bolts. Torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 18. Reinstall the left front wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 19. Reinstall the dipstick tube with the new O-ring from the kit. Torque the bolt to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Reinstall the dipstick. 20. DOHC Prelude only: Reinstall the power steering reservoir and the power steering pump. 21. Reinstall the alternator belt and the power steering pump belt. 22. Tighten the adjusting bolts for the alternator and the power steering pump 20 turns, then torque the mounting hardware as specified in the appropriate service manual. Use belt tension gauge T/N 07JGG-001010A or TGG-001000A to check for proper belt tension. Page 9001 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection 1. Park the car on level ground. WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from the work area. Drain fuel only into an approved container. 2. Drain the fuel into an approved container. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Low Fuel Indictor System - Indicator Light Test 3. Add less than 8.6 litre (2.2 U.S. Gal, 1.9 Imp. Gal) of fuel, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The low fuel indicator light should come on within four minutes. ^ If the light goes on within four minutes, go on to step 5. ^ If the light does not go on within four minutes, go on to step 4. Low Fuel Indictor System - Indicator Light Test 4. Remove the fuel tank access panel, and disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Connect the LT GRN/RED terminal to the BLK terminal with a jumper wire. ^ If the light comes on, the problem is the sending unit. ^ If the light does not come on, the problem is an open in the LT GRN/RED wire to the gauge assembly, no power to the gauge, a bad bulb, or poor ground. 5. Add one more gallon (approx. 4 litre, 0.9 Imp. Gal) of fuel. The light should go OFF within four minutes. Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect connectors. Master Switch Replacement 2. Remove the power window master switch from the door panel. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 4145 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection 1. Check the PCV hoses and connections for leaks and clogging. 2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake manifold is lightly pinched with your fingers or pliers. If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. Page 591 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2716 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 3479 Page 3836 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Page 5331 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then connect the Honda PGM Tester to the 1 6P Data Link Connector (DLC) located under the driver's side of the dashboard next to the kick panel. 2. Turn on the ignition switch, then follow the prompts on the PGM Tester until you reach the Data List. 3. Start the engine. 4. While test-driving, check the engine coolant temperature. If it does not reach 176°F (80°C) within 10 minutes, proceed to the next step. If it does, disregard this bulletin, and follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. NOTE: This procedure only works if the outside temperature is below 30°F. 5. Wait until the engine is cool; then replace the thermostat and gasket (refer to page 10-9 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual). Refill the radiator with a 50/50 mix of genuine Honda antifreeze/coolant and water. 6. Test-drive the vehicle with the PGM Tester to confirm the engine reaches normal operating temperature. When it does, scroll to the A/T Data List and make sure the torque converter lock-up solenoid turns ON. If it does not, follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. Page 7772 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Page 9977 8. Remove the glass run channel. Page 6151 Raise the vehicle on a lift. Check for loose wheel bearings. You must replace loose wheel bearings before you refinish the brake discs. If you do not, the brake lathe will not correct for brake disc runout, resulting in an uneven finish and brake pulsation. Remove the front wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts with flat washers to compensate for the removed wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Remove the caliper assembly. Use a wire or a S-hook to hold the caliper to the spring or damper tower. Do not kink the brake hose or use it to support the caliper. If you are not using the power drive system and the vehicle has ICS or VSA, make sure you install a brake pad spreader between the pads on the hanging caliper. Also, make sure the ICS or VSA is turned off anytime the engine is started. If the system is not turned off, the brakes could activate, causing the brake pads on the hanging caliper to hit each other or the caliper pistons to fall out. Install the vibration damper on the brake disc. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure you install the protective band around the wheel nuts. If you are not using the power drive system, use a fabric tie-down strap to secure the brake disc that is opposite to the one you are refinishing. If you are working on a Prelude with ATTS, do not use a tie-down strap; let both wheels turn freely. Mounting the Brake Lathe Remove the tool bed from the brake lathe, then mount the brake lathe to the steering knuckle with a Honda 1-piece speed mount. These mounts provide quicker, more accurate mounting, and can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Page 6927 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: Accord, Odyssey P/N 04510-S84-000 H/C 6194054 Prelude P/N 04510-5L5-000 H/C 6194039 Defect Code: 297 Contention Code: K59 Skill Level: Repair Technician Disclaimer Note Wear eye protection during the entire procedure. Ball Joint Removal and Installation 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove and discard the spindle nut. 3. Remove the cotter pin and castle nut from the lower ball joint. Discard the cotter pin. 4. Separate the lower control arm from the ball joint with the special tool. To avoid damaging the ABS sensor harness, do not let the knuckle hang by its weight. 5. Prelude Type SH only: Separate the radius rod from the ball joint with the special tool. Take care not to damage the boot. Replace the boot if it is damaged during separation. Removal Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Removal 1. Make sure the wheels are aligned straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three minutes. 3. Remove the driver's airbag. 4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cruise control set/resume switch, then remove the steering wheel bolt (B). 5. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller (A). Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. 6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A). Page 446 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2084 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ GF-1, SG or SH Above -7° C (20° F) ......................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... 10W-30 All temperatures ..................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 5W-30 (preferred) Removal and Installation Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Removal and Installation CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Recover the refrigerant with a Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. 2. Disconnect the receiver line and the suction line from the evaporator. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting to avoid moisture and dust contamination into the system. Page 2503 Radiator Fan: Electrical Diagrams With Air Conditioning Fans (With A/C) (Part 1 Of 2) Page 10052 Windshield Washer Motor: Testing and Inspection Washer Motor Test 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the washer motor. Washer Motor Test 3. Test the washer motor operation by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. ^ If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. ^ If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or blocked washer hose, or a clogged pump outlet in the motor. A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Page 4600 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 6353 Description, Signal & Terminal Name Page 6262 Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Description and Operation PURPOSE The piston valve assembly consists of the piston, cut valve, and sleeve. There are four piston/valve assemblies in the modulator unit to control the brake fluid pressure to each caliper. The piston valve assemblies for the rear brakes also serve as proportioning control valves to prevent the rear wheels from locking it if the ABS malfunctions or when the ABS is not activated. Page 7363 Heater Control Panel: Testing and Inspection Mode Control Switch Test MODE CONTROL SWITCH TEST Refer to illustration for terminal identification. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 4977 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 9935 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the driver's door panel. Master Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures No. 1, 2, 3 and 7. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Master Switch Test Front Passenger's Switch: Page 8632 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 6-Way Power Adjustable 1. Remove the adjuster cover. Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 6-P connectors from the power seat switch, then remove the switch from the adjuster cover by removing its two mounting screws. Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 3736 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 6058 Modulator Remove & Install - Relieve ABS system pressure. See: Relieving System Pressure - Disconnect the modulator unit 14P connector and pump motor 2P connector. - Remove the wire harness clip from the modulator bracket. - Remove the three 8 mm nuts, and remove the modulator unit from the bracket. INSTALLATION Fluid Level Indicator 1. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level. Page 4340 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Torque 33 ft.lb Page 3629 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 505 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4879 Part 2 Of 2 Page 8262 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6677 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the front wheels from the vertical. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle. If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. Page 3117 Page 3864 Page 4510 A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 3519 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1461 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair Page 3981 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 4046 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Replacement 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). 2. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the VSS. NOTE: The VSS drive link is a very small part; be careful not to lose it. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 4867 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3194 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Page 6822 Page 1152 Page 3374 Page 770 A/C Thermostat: Description and Operation A/C Thermostat The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns OFF the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3°C (37°F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. The blower motor will keep running when the sensor turns OFF the compressor. Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Carefully pry the hazard warning switch out of the front console panel. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 2881 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Component Locations Radiator Fan: Component Locations Right Front Of Engine Compartment Page 5991 ABS Light: Description and Operation ABNORMALITY DETECTION The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit turns the ABS indicator light on when one or more of the following abnormalities are detected. This is only a partial list. When the operating time of the motor in the power unit exceeds the specified period. - When vehicle running time exceeds 30 seconds without releasing the parking brake. - When absence of speed signals from any of the four wheel sensor is detected. - When the activation time of all solenoids exceeds a given time, or an open circuit is detected in the solenoid system. - When solenoid output is not detected in the simulated ABS operation when the engine is started or the vehicle is driven. BULB CHECK To check the indicator light bulb, the light is activated when the ignition switch is first turned on. The light goes off after the engine is started if there is no abnormality in the system. Page 9330 Page 469 Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 195 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 172 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Blower motor relay Page 3960 Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2058 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6827 Steering Column Lock: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6255 Brake Hose/Line: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Page 9138 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression [1] Nominal ............................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 1,230 KPa (178 psi) Minimum .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 930 KPa (135 psi) Maximum Variation .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 200 KPa (28 psi) [1] 200 rpm and wide open throttle Component Locations Radiator Fan Relay: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Photo View Page 8788 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7251 Heater Fan Switch: Testing and Inspection Heater Fan Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table below. Page 6333 Check Valve Location Page 1315 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe-In Toe-in is the turning of the front wheels. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Page 1255 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Switch Removal CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Switch Removal 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 8367 7. Pull out the outer handle. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Diagram Information and Instructions Cornering Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Locations Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 7597 5. Disconnect the connector from the A/C thermostat. Remove the four self-tapping screws, two mounting nuts and the mounting bolt. Disconnect the drain hose, then remove the evaporator. 6. Pull out the A/C thermostat sensor from the evaporator fins. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - Install the A/C thermostat sensor to its original location. Page 3728 Page 8264 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3528 Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4558 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5515 Axle Shaft: Testing and Inspection DRIVESHAFT BOOT Check the boots on the driveshaft for cracks, damage, leaking grease and loose boot bands. If any damage is found, replace the boot and boot bands. LOOSE SPLINES Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the splines and joint are not excessively loose. If damage is found, replace the inboard joint. TWISTED OR CRACKED Make sure the driveshaft is not twisted or cracked. Replace it if necessary. Page 8023 Page 3109 Page 4765 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6930 18. Tighten the C-frame and press the ball joint into the knuckle. 19. 1997 Accord and all Odyssey only: Reinstall the brake rotor/hub assembly. Torque the flange bolts to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). Reinstall the brake caliper. Torque the mounting bolts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 20. Apply wheel bearing grease to the axle splines. 21. Remove the wooden block, then install the axle into the hub. To avoid damaging the ABS sensor harness, do not let the knuckle hang by its weight. * 22. Distribute the grease inside the ball joint by moving the ball joint stud left-and-right and back-and-forth about ten times. Then rotate the stud in a circle several times. * 23. Install the lower control arm onto the ball joint. 24. Install the ball joint castle nut. Torque the nut to 49-59 N.m (36-43 lb-ft). Install the new cotter pin. 25. Prelude Type SH only: Reinstall the radius rod to the ball joint. Torque the castle nut to 69-78 N.m (51-58 lb-ft). 26. Apply oil to the threads and flange of the new spindle nut. Install the new spindle nut; torque it to 245 N.m (181 lb-ft). 27. Stake the spindle nut. 28. Repeat steps 2 through 27 on the other side. 29. Reinstall the front wheels. Tighten the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 30. Lower the vehicle. 31. Center-punch a completion mark above the fourth character of the engine compartment VIN. Page 4252 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9488 Page 2966 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 9244 Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: Be careful not to damage the switch and the instrument panel. Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switches out of the instrument panel, and disconnect the connectors. Main Switch Test/Replacement 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Page 4849 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 9581 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8565 5. Check your work by running your fingers over the cleaned and lubricated surface to feel for any remaining contamination. ^ If you feel any particles on the cleaned surface fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, clean the section again, and recheck your work. ^ If the cleaned surface feels smooth, fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, and go to step 6. NOTE: You must carefully fold and knead the clay to keep a clean side next to the paint surface. Never use clay that has fallen on the ground. Any small pieces of dirt or sand that imbed in the clay will scratch the paint surface. If the clay falls on the ground, discard it and get a fresh piece. 6. Clean the remaining sections of the sprayed area (repeat steps 4 and 5). 7. Wipe the lubricant from all the cleaned sections with a clean terry cloth towel. 8. Clean the rest of the affected panel and any additional panels that need cleaning (repeat steps 3 thru 7). 9. Apply the manufacturer's recommended wax or glaze to all the cleaned panels. Disclaimer Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test Key Interlock Solenoid Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 7416 - If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 PR7 - A01). - Replace the 0-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 - PR7 - A01) before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right 0-rings for HFC 134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system, and test its performance. Page 222 VSS Test Component Locations ABS Component Locations Page 9070 Cigarette Lighter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Horn Relay ^ Cigarette lighter relay Page 2947 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6636 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 3865 Page 930 Right Rear Of Engine Page 8032 Page 8073 CD Changer Troubleshooting (All except Passport) CD Player Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Radio Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Page 4512 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3414 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 9853 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8037 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3890 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8917 Headlamp Reminder Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4205 Page 6317 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, perform the input test for the daytime running lights control unit. Page 1593 Fuses - Under-hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Page 9806 Page 880 Page 5906 A/T Gear Position Indicator - Circuit Diagram Locations Page 8813 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Sedan/Wagon (Driver's): Remove the power window switch from the door panel. Coupe: Driver's: Remove the armrest from the door panel Passenger's: Remove the power window switch from the door panel. 3. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 4. Coupe: Lower the glass fully, then peel off the channel guide cover. Remove the screws, then remove the center channel guide by pulling it upward. NOTE: When installing the channel guide cover, apply the double-faced adhesive tape to it. 5. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Specifications Stabilizer Bar: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Self-Locking Nut .................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 13 Nm (8 ft. lbs.) Holder Bolt ............................................................ ............................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Page 2054 Specifications High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Specifications TORQUE Relief Valve ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 13.2 Nm (9.76 lb ft) Page 4995 NOTE: Do not let any of the seven check balls fall out of the secondary valve body when removing the secondary valve body. 7. Remove the seven bolts securing the throttle valve body, then remove the throttle valve body and separator plate. 8. Remove the regulator valve body (one bolt). 9. Remove the stator shah and stop shaft. 10. Remove the detent spring from the detent arm, then remove the control shaft from the torque converter housing. 11. Remove the detent arm and detent arm shaft from the main valve body. 12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts). NOTE: Do not let any of the three check balls fall out of the main valve body when removing the main valve body. 13. Remove the 1st/2nd accumulator body (six bolts). 14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then remove the ATF pump gears. 15. Remove the main separator plate with three dowel pins. 16. Clean the inlet opening of the ATF strainer thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not clogged. 17. Replace the ATF strainer if it is clogged or damaged. NOTE: The ATF strainer can be reused if it is not clogged. Page 8213 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity with the lever released (hood opened). ^ There should be no continuity with the lever pushed down (hood closed). Page 7698 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4764 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Page 278 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7457 7. Remove the heater duct or the evaporator. 8. Disconnect the mode control motor connector, then remove the mounting bolt and the heater unit. 9. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the vent/ defroster duct. 10. Remove the self-tapping screw and pipe clamp. Page 5631 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 4725 Page 2570 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3208 Page 6891 4. Remove the covers. 5. Remove the TORX T30 bit bolts, then remove the airbag assembly. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the horn and cruise control switches. 7. Remove the steering wheel bolt. 8. Install a commercially-available steering wheel puller to the steering wheel to remove it. CAUTION: Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. - If you thread the puller bolts into the wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt. - Carefully inspect the driver's airbag assembly before installing. Do not install an airbag assembly that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag assembly. - Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead. - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other vehicle parts. - Do not replace the original steering wheel with any other design, since it will make it impossible to properly install the airbag. (Only use genuine Honda replacement parts) - After reassembly, confirm that the wheels are still straight ahead and that steering wheel spoke angle is correct. If minor spoke angle adjustment is necessary, do so only by adjustment of the tie-rods, not by removing and repositioning the steering wheel. - Confirm that the airbag assembly is securely attached to the steering wheel; otherwise, severe personal injury could result during airbag deployment. Page 3156 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6288 Proper Angle 2. Before installing the modulator unit on the vehicle, be sure to bleed the air from the suction port in the modulator unit by leaning the modulator unit to one side slowly (about 45 degrees) as shown. Brake Line Placement 3. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Check the letters stamped on the modulator body, and connect the brake lines properly. Tighten the flare nuts. Specs: Flare nuts 19 Nm (14 lb.ft.) 4. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Check that: ABS indicator light is off. - Brake fluid is not leaking from the brake line joints. 5. Stop the engine. Page 8797 Clock: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8971 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 7706 Page 8906 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7170 Recirculation Control Motor (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6977 Radius Rod: Service and Repair Installation CAUTION: The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. NOTE: - Wipe off the dirt, oil or grease on the threads before tightening the fasteners. - The right and left damper forks are not interchangeable. The left damper fork is marked with "V4L" while the right damper fork is marked with "V4R". - The right and left upper arms are not interchangeable. The left upper arm is marked with "VL" or "VLG" while the right arm is marked with "VR" or "VRG". - After installing the suspension arm, check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 9455 Page 1767 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3115 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 9140 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 540 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4619 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Top End Inspection 1. Check for rough or pitted distributor ignition (DI) rotor and distributor ignition (DI) cap terminals. 2. Scrape or file off the carbon deposits. Smooth the distributor ignition (DI) rotor terminal with an oil stone or #600 sandpaper if rough. 3. Check the distributor ignition (DI) cap for cracks, wear and damage. If necessary, clean or replace it. Page 1272 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Locations M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Synchronizer Hub: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Page 6860 CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and outer surface when removing the seal rings. 29. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve seal ring and O-ring at the groove the pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and O-ring. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring. 30. Remove the valve oil seal and backup ring from the pinion shaft. NOTE: ^ Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If there is any excessive play, replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an assembly. ^ The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do not intermix old and new pinion shafts and sleeves. Page 8710 Actuator Cable Replacement 7. Loosen the locknut, then disconnect the actuator cable from the throttle linkage. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust free play at the throttle linkage after connecting the actuator cable. Page 2201 Engine Mount Control Unit: Description and Operation NOTE: Unlike previous liquid engine mounts, this engine mount control system reduces vibration at idle range without affecting vibration damping above idle. DESCRIPTION The system is comprised of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the solenoid valve and the rear mount with built-in diaphragm actuator. OPERATION The PCM receives the engine rpm signals and sends a signal to the solenoid valve to open only at idle. When the solenoid valve opens, intake manifold vacuum is applied to the diaphragm actuator, and the rotor valve located in the rear mount rotates 80 degrees. The mount has Chamber A on its upper part and Chamber B on the lower part. The rotor valve located between these two chambers controls the quantity of liquid that flows between them. At idle, the rotor valve opens, and liquid flows through passages 1 and 2. Dampening decreases, and vibration at idle is reduced. Page 5066 3. Hold the 1st gear, and make sure the 3rd gear turns freely in the direction shown. Also make sure the 3rd gear does not turn in the opposite direction. 4. Install the needle bearing, thrust washer and 1st gear collar in the 1sV3rd gear assembly, then install them in the 1st-hold clutch. 5. Wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings, and install two new O-rings in the countershaft. 6. Install the 1st/3rd gear and 1st-hold clutch assembly on the countershaft. 7. Align the shaft splines with those of 1st-hold clutch, 1st gear collar and 3rd gear, then press the countershaft into 3rd gear using a press. NOTE: Place an attachment between the press and countershaft to prevent damage to the shaft. - Stop pressing the countershaft when the 1sthold clutch contacts the final drive gear. Page 6224 14. Remove the parking lever and cam as an assembly from the caliper body. Cam Boot Location 15. Remove the cam boot. Assembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: Coat piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. 1. Pack all cavities of the needle bearing with rubber grease. Page 4705 7. Reconnect the ECM/PCM 32-P connector. 8. Disconnect the 22-P connector from the gauge assembly, and check for continuity on the BLU wire between the ICM and tachometer. There should be continuity. 9. Check for continuity on the BLU wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. 10. If all the tests are normal, reconnect the 22-P connector to the gauge, and replace the ICM. * F22B1 ENGINE Page 7392 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5871 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the lock-up control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 1031 Diagram Information and Instructions General Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8930 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 515 Electrical Specifications Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 7927 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Use the following procedure when replacing one or both remote transmitters: 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's master door lock switch down in the UNLOCK position. 3. Quickly insert and remove the key from the ignition switch five times, then insert the key the sixth time, and leave it in the ignition switch. (This routine must be done within 10 seconds.) All the doors will lock and unlock to indicate that the control unit is in the program mode. 4. Press either button on the replacement transmitter. All the doors except the driver's door will lock and unlock to indicate that the control unit has accepted the transmitter into its memory. If either transmitter button is pressed again, all the doors will lock and unlock. 5. To program a second transmitter, press either button on that transmitter. The doors should lock and unlock as described in step 4. 6. Release the driver's master door lock switch. 7. To exit the program mode, close the driver's door or remove the key from the ignition switch. Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 9503 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 1907 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Installation NOTE: Before installing the crankshaft, apply a coat of 3 engine oil to the main bearings, rod bearings and balancer shaft bearings. 1. Install the thrust washers in the No. 4 journal of the cylinder block. 2. Insert bearing halves in the cylinder block and connecting rods. 3. Hold the crankshaft so rod journals for cylinders No. 2 and No. 3 are straight up. 4. Lower the crankshaft into the block, seating the rod journals into connecting rods No. 1 and No. 4. ^ Install the rod caps and nuts finger tight. 5. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, seat journals into connecting rods No. 2 and No. 3, and install the rod caps and nuts finger tight. NOTE: Install caps so the bearing recess is on the same side as the recess in the rod. 6. Check rod bearing clearance with plastigage, then torque the capnuts to 46 Nm (34 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Reference numbers on connecting rod are for big-end bore tolerance and do not indicate the position of piston in the engine. 7. Install the main bearing caps and bearing cap bridge. Main Bolt Torque Sequence Page 6194 Front Brake Bleeder Valve Rear Drum Brake Bleeder Valve Rear Disc Brake Bleeder Valve 3. Connect a hose to the brake bleed screw at the right rear wheel and place the open end in a container to collect the expelled fluid. 4 Loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. When the brake pedal reaches the end of it's stroke, hold the pedal down and tighten the bleed screw. Specs Front bleed screw 9 Nm (6.5 lb.ft.) Rear bleed screw 7 Nm (5 lb.ft.) Page 1378 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Spindle Nut ................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 245 Nm. (181 lb. ft.) Rear Spindle Nut .............................................. ..................................................................................................................................... 181 Nm. (134 lb. ft.) Page 2893 Page 5442 4. Measure the rivet depth from the lining surface to the rivets, on both sides. - Standard (New): 1.3 - 1.9 mm (0.05 - 0.07 inch) - Service Limit: 0.2 mm (0.01 inch) NOTE: If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. INSTALLATION 1. Install the ring gear holder. 2. Apply grease to the splines of the clutch disc, then install the clutch disc using the special tools as shown. NOTE: Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798 - 9002). [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Page 4864 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3217 Electrical Specifications Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 8523 1. Locate the security system control unit mounted under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst to confirm that you're in the programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at three-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to let you know that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter or between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps, and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 9. Push all the function buttons on each transmitter to make sure they work correctly. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 10 Service Specifications * Balance Shaft: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit No.1 Front Journal Diameter 42.722 - 42.734 mm 42.71 mm No.1 Rear Journal Diameter 20.938 - 20.950 mm 20.92 mm No.2 Front and Rear Journals Diameter 38.712 - 38.724 mm 38.70 mm No.3 Front and Rear Journals Diameter 34.722 - 34.734 mm 34.71 mm Journal Taper 0.005 mm --End Play (Front) 0.10 - 0.40 mm --End Play (Rear) 0.04 - 0.15 mm --- Total Runout 0.02 mm 0.03 mm Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 4110 Page 9672 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Locations Engine Mount Control Solenoid: Locations Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 6030 Behind Right Side Of Dash Page 5520 5. Install the knuckle on the lower arm, then tighten the castle nut and install a new cotter pin. NOTE: Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. 6. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. install the damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 7. Loosely install the flange bolt and the new self-locking nut. NOTE: The bolts and nut should be tightened with the vehicle's weight on the damper. 8. Install a new spindle nut, then tighten and stake the nut. 9. Install the front wheel with the wheel nuts. NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. 10. Tighten the flange bolt and the new self-locking nut with the vehicle's weight on the damper. Page 7829 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test 1. Remove the inside handle. 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Door Lock Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 3647 Page 5782 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8992 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5681 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 4175 M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Diagnosis by Symptom. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Page 6046 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Solenoid Valve Body PURPOSE The modulator unit opens and closes the inlet and outlet solenoid valves, and shifts the ABS high-pressure passage according to the signals from the ABS control unit. FUNCTION There are three solenoid valve assemblies, each containing an inlet and outlet valve, in the modulator unit; one for each front wheel, and one for both rear wheels. The inlet valves are normally open (open when there is no continuity to the coil), while the outlet valves are normally closed. Parking Brake Switch Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch Rear Console Page 7695 Page 6081 Bleeding Sequence 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. NOTE: Check fluid level frequently and refill as necessary to prevent air from being drawn into system. 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. NOTE: To flush and replace fluid, repeat procedure at each wheel until expelled fluid appears clean. Page 7021 7. Loosely install the two flange nuts. (The illustration shows rear damper for Sedan.) 8. Loosely install the flange bolt. 9. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 10. Tighten the flange bolt. 11. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the rear damper to the specified torque. 12. Install the rear seat (Sedan) or the rear seat cushion and side-bolsters (Wagon) or the rear bulkhead cover and right gusset cover (Coupe). 13. Install the rear wheels. Page 8491 Locations Illustrated Index Page 8028 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4383 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7681 7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the holes on the steering wheel, and install the steering wheel with a new steering wheel bolt. 8. Install the driver's airbag. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. - After the SRS indicator light has come off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the SRS indicator light does not come on. - Make sure both horn buttons work. 11. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Center Bolt ........................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) Page 7313 Condenser Fan: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6165 Brake Rotor/Disc: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Page 3757 Page 5689 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Page 6759 13. Apply clean power steering fluid to the vanes and cam ring. 14. Install the 68.5 x 1.9 mm O-ring on the pump cover. 15. Align the roller set holes in the pump cover with the rollers. 16. Align the projection on the pump housing and the projection on the pump cover, and tighten the four bolts. 17. Set the 13 x 1.9 mm O-ring on the inlet joint. 18. Install the inlet joint on the pump housing. 19. Align the pin of sub valve with the oil passage in pump housing and push down the sub-valve. Fix the sub valve with snap ring. 20. Rotate the pump drive shaft manually and make sure the pump drive shaft rotates smoothly. Diagram Information and Instructions Trunk Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8622 Underside Of Driver's Seat Photo 176 Page 7623 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 3714 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 4233 Connection with new retainer: Reconnection to existing retainer: 5. Make sure the connection is secure and the pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and by pulling the connector. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable, and turn the ignition switch ON. The fuel pump will run for about two seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two or three times, and check that there is no leakage in the fuel supply system. Removal Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: ^ Replace the timing belt and timing balancer belt at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) according to the maintenance schedule (normal conditions/severe conditions). If the vehicle regularly is driven in one or more of the following conditions, replace the timing belt and timing balance belt at 60,000 miles 100,000 km. ^ In very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C). ^ In very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C). ^ Turn the crankshaft pulley so the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC) before removing the belt. ^ Inspect the water pump. Refer to Cooling System. ^ The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the wheelwell splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the Power Steering (P/S) pump belt. Page 8846 Safety Indicators (Part 2 Of 2) Page 534 Component Locations ABS Component Locations Master Switch Input Test Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test Page 3939 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3927 Page 6204 Caliper Exploded View Page 1720 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection BEARING END PLAY 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch). 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Page 9085 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3650 Page 119 Radiator Fan Control Module: Locations Photo View Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Page 6964 Front Steering Knuckle: Service Precautions CAUTION: - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. Mainshaft Speed Sensor Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Side Of Transmission, Beneath Battery Page 7081 Tires: Service and Repair Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Page 1777 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Photo 38 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 8996 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1090 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Replacement 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). 2. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the VSS. NOTE: The VSS drive link is a very small part; be careful not to lose it. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Mainshaft Speed Sensor Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Side Of Transmission, Beneath Battery Locations Purge Flow Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 162 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4035 Page 10022 7. Check the operation of the window. 8. If needed, repeat steps 1 through 7 on the other front door. Page 7217 Blower Unit - Replacement 4. Disconnect the connectors from the blower motor, blower resistor and the recirculation control motor, then remove the three mounting nuts and the blower unit. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal, and make sure there are no air leaks. Page 3800 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8827 Diagram Information and Instructions Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5218 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Actuator Test Cruise Control Servo: Testing and Inspection Actuator Test 1. Disconnect the actuator cable from the actuator rod, and disconnect the 4-P connector. 2. Connect battery power to the D terminal and ground to the A, B, and C terminals. Actuator Test 3. Connect a vacuum pump to the check valve. Then apply vacuum to the actuator. Actuator Test 4. The actuator rod should pull in completely. If the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid. Actuator Test Page 8498 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Page 9734 Page 7305 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9644 Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Hazard Flasher Relay Left Kick Panel - Photo 93 Page 9384 Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4869 Page 7479 3. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater unit. CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage paint. Quickly rinse any spilled engine coolant from painted surfaces. NOTE: Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. 4. Remove the two mounting nuts from the heater unit. NOTE: When removing the mounting nuts, take care not to damage or bend the fuel pipes, brake pipes, etc. 5. Remove the dashboard. Removal Step One Page 5350 ATF Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information 89-022 May 16, 2008 Applies To: Vehicles With an In-Radiator ATF Cooler - ALL ATF Cooler Cleaner (Supersedes 89-022, dated June 18, 2004, to update the information marked by asterisks) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured A/T, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat A/T failure. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (PIN GTHTTCF6H) is a portable, electrically operated special tool that cleans the ATF cooler with high- pressure, heated ATF. This cleaning action melts down waxy varnish residue left by burnt ATF and purges metal particles, clutch material, and other contaminants. The ATF Cooler Cleaner has these features: ^ Quick-connect fittings and color-coded hoses for easy hookup. ^ Uses about 9.5 gallons of Honda ATF-Z1, which gets filtered and recirculated. ^ Heats ATF to a temperature of 1400 to 150°F and then pumps it through the ATF cooler at high pressure (100 psi) using a pulsating action and air purging. Switching the hoses cleans the ATF cooler in the reverse direction. ^ Two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters to trap purged contaminants. ^ Built-in tool tray. This service bulletin gives you information for ordering and servicing this special tool, and guides you through the entire ATF cooler cleaning process. *REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001 Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter: T/N GTHNBP12 (12-pack) T/N GTHNBP2 (6-pack) T/N GTHGNBP22 (2-pack) ORDERING INFORMATION Additional ATF cooler cleaners or magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order on the iN, click on SERVICE, then Service Bay, then Tool and Equipment Program. From the Tool and Equipment Program menu, click on the Online Catalog tab, and then search for the desired filter pack by part number.* Diagram Information and Instructions Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Specifications Oil Pressure Regulator Valve: Specifications Relief Valve Pressure [1]: At Idle .................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) At 3,000 Rpm ...................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 340 kPa (50 psi) min [1] Pressure setting with engine oil temperature at 176°F (80°C). Diagram Information and Instructions Turn Signal Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3585 NOTE: - When there is no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) stored, the MIL will stay on if the SCS service connector is connected and the ignition switch is on. - If this symptom is intermittent, check for: A loose ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - A loose No. 2 FUEL PUMP fuse (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C7) and the service check connector - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D4) and the MAP sensor - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D10), the TP sensor, EGR valve lift sensor and/or Fuel tank pressure sensor (Sedan KL (LX with ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe) - PGM-FI main relay. - See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Page 824 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1590 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Right Side Of Shift Lever Diagram Information and Instructions Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2771 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3638 Page 7138 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 5098 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 8522 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM button and the CD/TAPE button) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on all other transmitters. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 9 NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. Programming the Transmitter Page 9127 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5791 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9764 Switch Test 10. Remove the two Torx bolts using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's airbag assembly. Switch Test 11. Check for continuity between the horn positive terminal and steering wheel bolt with the horn switch pressed. ^ If there is continuity, check: - the cable reel. - the set/resume switch. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the horn switch. Page 746 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 5146 Page 2046 Page 4262 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Regulator Operating Pressure and Torque Regulator Operating Pressure and Torque Operating Pressure 260 - 310 kPa Note: Pressure with regulator vacuum hose disconnected. Torque 9 ft.lb Page 4985 Accumulator: Testing and Inspection 1ST/2ND ACCUMULATOR BODY NOTE: 1st/2nd accumulator body is part of valve body, see valve body for more information See: Valve Body/Service and Repair NOTE: - Clean all part thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out ail passages. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check ball; it may magnetize the ball. Page 3724 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3481 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2943 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1408 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Specifications Balance Shaft Gear: Specifications Driven Gear Bolt .................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Gear Case Mounting Bolts .................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Page 5779 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4304 Service and Repair Testing and Inspection Balance Shaft Belt: Testing and Inspection NOTE: ^ The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. ^ After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the upper cover. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 6. Remove the lower cover. 7. Install the crankshaft pulley. 8. Inspect the timing balancer belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: ^ Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. ^ Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 9. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Page 9079 Page 8570 U.S.-Produced (Marysville) Accords, paint code ends in -3 U.S.-Produced (East Liberty) Civics, paint code ends in -5 (East Liberty uses waterborne paints) Honda Passport Page 1548 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair FLUID REPLACEMENT NOTE: Check the reservoir at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. CAUTION: Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose to drain the reservoir. 2. Connect a hose of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. CAUTION: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. CAUTION: Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Page 6874 13. Install flange bolt into end of steering rack until it bottoms in hole, then back flange bolt out 1/4 turn. Hold flange bolt and tighten flange nut against rack by hand. 14. Press cylinder end seal and steering rack out of gearbox. Hold steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Remove 12 mm bolt and nut from steering rack, then the cylinder end seal from steering rack. Fig. 14 Back-up Ring Removal 16. Remove cylinder end seal and back-up ring from gearbox as follows: a. Insert 24 inch long, 3/8 inch drive extension and cylinder end seal remover attachment tool No. 07NAD-SR30200, or equivalent, into cylinder from gearbox side, Fig. 14. b. Set gearbox in press, then press out cylinder end seal and back-up ring from gearbox. Keep tool straight to avoid damaging cylinder wall. Check tool angle and correct it if necessary when removing cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove seal by striking remover tool. It will break the back-up ring and the cylinder end seal will remain in gearbox. 17. Carefully pry piston seal ring and O-ring off piston of rack. Page 3855 Page 3963 Page 8812 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 2248 1. Using the special tool, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 2. Using the special tool, drive in the front balancer shaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the balancer shaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 3. Using the special tool, drive the crankshaft oil seal into the right side cover to the point where the clearance between the bottom of the crankshaft oil seal and right side cover is 0.5-0.8 mm (0.02-0.03 inch). NOTE: Align the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the crankshaft. Page 150 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Fresh Air/Recirculation Actuator Mode Control Motor: Service and Repair Fresh Air/Recirculation Actuator 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the recirculation control motor. 2. Remove the two self-tapping screws, recirculation control motor and the flange collar. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal, and after installation, make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 5204 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4290 Page 8525 Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. One battery per transmitter is needed. Page 4875 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9092 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7211 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor (Part 1 Of 3) Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications DIMENSIONS Outer Diameter ........................................................................................................................................................ 21.994-22.000 (0.8659-0.8661 inch) Pin-To-Piston Clearance ...................................................................................................................................... 0.010-0.022 mm (0.0004-0.0009 inch) Page 1248 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Switch Replacement 1. Remove the inside handle case. 2. Disconnect the connectors. 3. Remove the passenger's window switch from the inside handle case by unscrewing the two mounting screws. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window switch. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window switch; the right rear window switch is symmetrical. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 5525 NOTE: - Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them thoroughly with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent. - Be careful not to damage the metal rings on the intermediate shaft during reassembly. 1. Press the intermediate shaft bearing into the bearing support using the special tools and a press as shown. Page 9565 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8803 Clock: Electrical Diagrams Clock - Circuit Diagram Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations A/C Pressure Switch Photo 138 - A/C Pressure Switch Page 3215 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8655 12. Reinstall the seat track end covers. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Keyless Entry Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Unit Input Test Page 2837 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3000 Page 3125 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1933 Piston Pin: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. ^ Piston Pin Diameter: Standard (New): 21.994-22.000 mm (0.8659-0.8661 inch) ^ Oversize: 21.997-22.003 mm (0.8660-0.8663 inch) NOTE: All replacement piston pins are oversize. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance. NOTE: Check the piston for distortion or cracks. If the piston pin clearance is greater than 0.024 mm (0.0009 inch), remeasure using an oversized piston pin. ^ Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance: Standard (New): 0.010-0.022 mm (0.0004-0.0009 inch) Page 3732 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Coded Theft Protection Audio Units Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Coded Theft Protection Audio Units NOTE:The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the radio fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. For information on how to obtain the code in the event the customer does not have the code please refer to the TSB below. TSB # 98-026 April 15, 1998 Applies To: ALL with Anti-Theft Audio Units Audio Unit Anti-Theft Code Labels BACKGROUND This service bulletin describes where to attach the audio unit anti-theft labels that come in the glove box of vehicles equipped with anti-theft audio systems. If a vehicle has an anti-theft audio system, there are three peel-off labels in the glove box. Two of the labels have both the anti-theft code and the audio unit's serial number, and a third label contains only the serial number for the audio unit. During Pre Delivery Inspection, stick the label with only the serial number on the glove box. If the radio code ever needs to be retrieved through the HONDANET 2000 system, this will save you the time and labor of removing the audio unit to record the serial number. NOTES: - Also perform this procedure when installing an accessory audio unit that is equipped with an anti-theft system. - If a remanufactured audio unit is installed in a vehicle, remove the old labels and install new ones on the glove box, Radio Identification Card, and the vehicle's service records. - If the glove box is ever replaced, transfer the labels from the old glove box to the new one. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This bulletin is for information only. Skill level: Maintenance Technician PROCEDURE Page 4168 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Page 4374 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8302 Page 2513 Radiator Fan (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1123 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Specifications Oil Pump Cover: Specifications Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.) Page 8537 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Door 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the actuator. Passenger's Door Lock Actuator Test Front Passenger's Door: Passenger's Door Lock Actuator Test Rear Passenger's Door: NOTE: The left rear actuator is shown; the right rear actuator is similar. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. Page 6505 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 77 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 17 Page 5618 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9391 Ceiling, Door Courtesy, Spot And Cargo Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7717 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Testing and Inspection The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On (Part 1 Of 3) Locations Antenna Motor: Locations Left Side Of Cargo Area Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Page 8895 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Page 4846 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7533 Page 8840 Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9129 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4362 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3295 Page 5375 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9463 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2800 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4008 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2195 Engine Mount Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Locations ABS Component Locations Page 3182 Page 9614 Page 9246 Page 2581 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2118 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Page 501 Page 2772 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5145 A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle .................................................................................................................................................. ................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) Minimum At 3,000 rpm ........................................................... .............................................................................................................. 340 kPa (50 psi) Minimum Page 2945 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9846 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Page 5065 REMOVAL 1. Using a hydraulic press, press the countershaft out from the 1st/3rd gear assembly while supporting the 1st-hold clutch. NOTE: Place an attachment between the press and countershaft to prevent damage to the shaft. - Hold onto the countershaft to keep it from falling when pressed clear. INSTALLATION NOTE: Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly. 1. Install the one-way clutch securely in the 1st gear in the direction shown, and install the thrust needle bearing in the 1st gear. 2. Assemble the 3rd gear and 1st gear by turning the 3rd gear in the direction shown. Page 4567 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 822 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5426 3. Install the valve, spring and cap in the valve body. Push the cap, then install the valve cap stop. Page 405 Page 7585 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 779 Page 6226 Bearing & Component Installation 9. Fit the bearing A, spacer, adjusting spring B and spring cover on the adjusting bolt, and install them in the caliper cylinder. Brake Spring Compressor 10. Install the special tool on the spring cover, and turn the shaft until the locknut contacts the plate. 11. Check that the flared end of the spring cover is below the circlip groove. Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Front Banjo Bolts 25 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 6.5 ft.lb Caliper Bolts 54 ft.lb Rear Akebono Banjo Bolts 25 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 6.5 ft.lb Caliper Bolts 18 ft.lb Caliper Bracket Bolts 28 ft.lb Flange Bolt 10mm 6.5 ft.lb Nissin Banjo Bolts 25 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 6.5 ft.lb Caliper Bolts 17 ft.lb Caliper Bracket Bolts 28 ft.lb Page 3785 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R Page 3113 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 825 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1005 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9619 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7451 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3901 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9040 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Valve Spring: Specifications INTAKE EXHAUST Free Length 51.08 mm 55.58 mm Page 8877 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4239 Front Axle Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Front Axle REMOVAL 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheels. 4. Drain the transmission oil or fluid. NOTE: It is not necessary to drain the transmission oil or fluid when the left driveshaft is removed. 5. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 6. Remove the self-locking nut and flange bolt. 7. Remove the damper fork. 8. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 9. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the special tool. 10. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. Page 7008 5. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. 6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Loosely install the front damper on the frame with the aligning tab facing inside, then loosely install the two flange nuts. Page 6287 Modulator Remove & Install - Relieve ABS system pressure. See: Relieving System Pressure - Disconnect the modulator unit 14P connector and pump motor 2P connector. - Remove the wire harness clip from the modulator bracket. - Remove the three 8 mm nuts, and remove the modulator unit from the bracket. INSTALLATION Fluid Level Indicator 1. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level. Page 7913 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Page 7318 Condenser Fan: Description and Operation Condenser Fan With ignition switch in ON (II) or START (II), and for 2 minutes after the ignition is switched OFF, the radiator fan control module also provides power to the condenser fan relay coil. The condenser fan runs under the same conditions as the radiator fan. The module can ground the relay coils only when the engine coolant temperature switch is closed. The condenser fan can run after the ignition is switched OFF, until the engine coolant temperature switches open, or the module removes power. Page 2086 Engine Oil: Service and Repair CAUTION: Remove the drain bolt carefully while the engine is hot; the hot oil may cause scalding. 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill with the recommended oil. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the drain bolt. NOTE: Use "Energy Conserving II" SH grade oil. SAE 5 W - 30 preferred. You can also use an oil that bears the API CERTIFICATION mark. - Oil Capacity: 4.0 (4.2 qt.) at oil change. - 4.3 (4.5 qt.) at oil change including filter. - 5.6 (5.9 qt.) after engine overhaul. SERVICE NOTES: - For normal conditions change every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months. - For severe conditions change every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months. NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. The numbers in the middle of the API Service label tell you the oil's SAE viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart. An oil with a viscosity of 5 W - 30 is preferred for improved fuel economy and year-round protection in the car. You may use a 10 W - 30 oil if the climate in your area is limited to the temperature range shown on the chart. Page 5521 11. Refill the transmission with recommended oil or fluid. 12. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 3717 Page 372 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 4356 Page 8393 6. Move the rear channel, and carefully pull the glass up. 7. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot as shown. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Page 2869 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Specifications Clutch Master Cylinder: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Clutch Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 19.0 Nm (14.0 ft. lbs.) 8 x 1.25 mm Nuts ................................................. ........................................................................................................................ 13 Nm (112.8 inch lbs.) Page 1383 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Top End Inspection 1. Check for rough or pitted distributor ignition (DI) rotor and distributor ignition (DI) cap terminals. 2. Scrape or file off the carbon deposits. Smooth the distributor ignition (DI) rotor terminal with an oil stone or #600 sandpaper if rough. 3. Check the distributor ignition (DI) cap for cracks, wear and damage. If necessary, clean or replace it. Page 4847 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9145 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4693 Page 1511 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 7395 Blower Motor Speed (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1048 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4720 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3526 Page 2337 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3748 Page 7672 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 9663 Horn Relay: Locations Picture Location Behind Front Console - Photo 72 Page 66 Control Unit Input Test 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Disconnect the 18-P and 12-P connectors from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace it. Page 296 Relay Box: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 5553 - Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up to prevent it from falling off. 10. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure below, then adjust the boots to halfway between full compression and full extension. NOTE: The ends of boots seat in the groove of the driveshaft and joint. M/T model: Left/Right: 486- 491 mm (19.1-19.3 inch) - A/T model: Left: 845 - 850 mm (33.3 - 33.5 inch) Right: 486 - 491 mm (19.1 - 19.3 inch) 11. Install new boot bands on the boots, and bend both sets of locking tabs. 12. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to reduce their height. 13. Position the dynamic damper as shown. a. Install a new dynamic damper band, and bend down both sets of locking tabs. b. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portion of the band to reduce its height. Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage 2.4 V at 5 in hg 1.9 V at 10 in hg 1.5 V at 15 in hg 1.0 V at 20 in hg 0.5 V at 25 in hg Page 2673 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. CAUTION: ^ Check for folds or scratches on the surface of the gasket. ^ Replace with a new gasket if damaged. Page 4447 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 553 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or at least for three minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, replace the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags were not deployed, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit. Do not disassemble the SRS unit. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, and disconnection of the 18P connector. Be sure the SRS unit is installed securely to the specified torque. TORQUE: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................... 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, and keep it away from dust. Store the SRS unit in a cool (less than 104° F/40° C) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Page 6768 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 4665 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3427 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Page 5155 Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 6350 ABS Control Unit: Description and Operation Diagnosis Function ABS Indicator Light ABNORMALITY DETECTION The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit turns the ABS indicator light on when one or more of the following abnormalities are detected. This is only a partial list. When the operating time of the motor in the power unit exceeds the specified period. - When vehicle running time exceeds 30 seconds without releasing the parking brake. - When absence of speed signals from any of the four wheel sensor is detected. - When the activation time of all solenoids exceeds a given time, or an open circuit is detected in the solenoid system. - When solenoid output is not detected in the simulated ABS operation when the engine is started or the vehicle is driven. BULB CHECK To check the indicator light bulb, the light is activated when the ignition switch is first turned on. The light goes off after the engine is started if there is no abnormality in the system. Fail Safe FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended by turning off the two fail-safe relays. This disconnects the ground circuits of all the solenoid valves to prevent ABS operation.Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one. RELAY The fail-safe relay's terminal side contact is normally open. When there is continuity at the relay coil, the fail-safe relay is closed, thereby connecting the ground circuit to the solenoid valve. Pump Motor Control The ABS control unit monitors the brake fluid pressure in the accumulator by the pressure switch ON/OFF signals. The ABS control unit turns the pump on when the pressure in the accumulator drops, and stops the pump when the pressure rises to the specified value. If the pressure does not reach the specified value after the motor has operated continuously for a specified period, the ABS control unit stops the motor and activates the ABS indicator light. Self-Diagnosis PURPOSE The self-diagnosis function, provided in the sub function of the Anti-Lock Brake Sysytem (ABS) control unit, monitors the main system functions by constantly transmitting the data between the two Central Processing Units (CPU). FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected, the ABS control unit turns the ABS indicator light on and stops the ABS, although the basic brake system continues to operate normally. When the ABS control unit detects an abnormality with the ABS and turns the ABS indicator light on, the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), which shows the problem part or unit, is recorded in the control unit. The DTC can be read by the blinking frequency of the ABS indicator light. Page 6296 Brake Master Cylinder: Adjustments PUSHROD CLEARANCE NOTE: Master cylinder pushrod4o piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before installing master cylinder. Master Cylinder Internal View 1. Set the special tool on the master cylinder body; push in the center shaft until the top of it contacts the end of the secondary piston by turning the adjusting nut. 2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position, install the special tool upside down on the booster. 3. Install the master cylinder nuts and tighten to the specified torque. 4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge 0-101 kPa (0-760 mmHg, 30 in Hg) to the booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg, 20 in Hg) vacuum. Brake Power Booster Check 5. With a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut as shown. NOTE: If the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 in), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 in), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 in) or more. Therefore it must be adjusted and rechecked. 6. If clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut and turn the adjuster in or out to adjust. NOTE: Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied to the booster. Hold the clevis while adjusting. 7. Tighten the star locknut securely. Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair WARNING: - After the engine has been run, the exhaust pipe will be hot; be careful when working around the exhaust pipe. - Be careful when loosening the drain bolt while the engine is hot. Burns can result because the oil temperature is very high. 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads and rubber seal on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. - Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. - Tightening torque: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - Eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed on the surface of the filter. Page 3264 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 5380 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 484 Fuel Pump Relay: Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 8868 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Synchronizer Ring: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Front Front Wheel Sensor Remove & Install Page 6654 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Page 6876 Fig. 15 Boot Air Hose Fitting Position 35. Adjust air hose fitting position of boots by turning, Fig. 15. 36. Connect air hose between right and left boot, then install clips on cylinder pipe B. 37. Install new boot bands on boot and bend both sets of locking tabs. 38. Lightly tap on doubled-over portions to reduce their height, then stake tabs firmly. 39. Slide rack right and left to be certain boots are not deformed or twisted. 40. Install steering gear. Page 8241 Page 4719 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8759 Page 1893 Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars) The Main Journal Codes are stamped in one of the following locations. Page 8943 Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Core: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 684 Rear Wheel Sensor Remove & Install Page 9254 Photo 59 Power Door Lock Control Module: Locations Photo 59 Front Of Driver's Door Page 3914 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 9948 Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window motor; the right rear window motor is similar. Passenger's Window Motor Test 3. Check window motor operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: When the motor slops running, disconnect one lead immediately. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Page 5048 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4865 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6555 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 3375 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6458 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Starter Cut Relay ^ Starter cut relay Page 98 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Locations Page 748 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4695 Page 3110 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4832 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4878 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 149 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8405 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 180 Behind Front Grille Page 3274 A/C Signal: Testing and Inspection Page 8916 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8946 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front WARNING: Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle and support on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. Front Brake Assembly 2. Remove the caliper bolt (pin A), and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. Pad And Shim Location 3. Remove the pad shims, pad retainers and pads. Page 7733 SRS Unit Replacement 4. Pull down the carpeting from both sides of the heater ducts. SRS Unit Replacement 5. Disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector from the SRS unit. NOTE: For disconnecting the spring-loaded lock type connector. 6. Remove the four Torx bolts from the SRS unit, then pull out the SRS unit from the passenger's side. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. - When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement, be careful to turn them in so that their beads rest squarely on the brackets. SRS Unit Replacement 7. Stick the SRS unit cover onto the upper surface of the new SRS unit, and install the new SRS unit. Page 6386 Wheel Sensor: Description and Operation WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Wheel Sensor Operation PURPOSE The wheel sensor is a contactless type that detects the rotating speed of a wheel. It consists of a permanent magnet and coil. FUNCTION When the gear pulsers attached to the rotating parts of each wheel turn, the magnetic flux around the coil in the wheel sensor alternates, generating voltages with frequency in proportion to wheel rotating speed. These pulses are sent to the ABS control unit, and the ABS control unit identifies the wheel speed. Page 9117 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Page 371 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 512 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 7301 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7997 Page 6752 3. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve. 4. Inspect the bore for the flow control valve for scratches or wear. 5. Slip the valve back in the pump, and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go on step 6; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not available separately. 6. Attach a hose to the end of the valve as shown. 7. Submerge the valve in a container of power steering fluid or solvent, and blow in the hose. If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than 100 kPa (14.2 psi), repair it as follows. 8. Hold the bottom end of the valve with a open end wrench. Page 7826 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1157 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9827 Ceiling, Door Courtesy, Spot And Cargo Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 33 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 9891 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7948 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1764 Photo 57 Door Switch: Locations Photo 57 At Driver's Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 6498 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8295 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6370 Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair 1. Remove the two screws and the clip, and remove the driver's door panel part of the way. Switch Removal 2. Disconnect the connectors from the driver's door panel. Switch Removal 3. Remove the power window master switch from the driver's door panel. Switch Removal 4. Carefully pry out the switch from the power window master switch. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the power window master switch. Specifications EGR Valve: Specifications Mouting Nuts Mouting Nuts Torque 16 ft.lb Page 1370 Page 5382 A/T Gear Position Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 6602 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 3006 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1001 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9239 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect the backup light switch connectors. 2. Remove the backup light switch. 3. Install the new washer and backup light switch. 4. Connect the backup light switch connectors. Page 28 Page 4563 Page 7441 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair 1. Remove the two screws and the clip, and remove the driver's door panel part of the way. Switch Removal 2. Disconnect the connectors from the driver's door panel. Switch Removal 3. Remove the power window master switch from the driver's door panel. Switch Removal 4. Carefully pry out the switch from the power window master switch. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the power window master switch. Page 6004 ABS Pump Motor: Service and Repair WARNING: The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid Be sure to bleed the high-pressure fluid from the modulator unit before removing the pump motor. - Bleed the high-pressure brake fluid from the modulator unit. - Remove the modulator unit from the vehicle. - Remove the 8 mm flange bolts from the modulator unit, and remove the pump motor. - Install the pump motor in the reverse order of removal. Specs: Flange Bolt 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) NOTE: After installing the modulator unit, add fresh brake fluid until the reservoir is refilled to the specified level, and bleed air from the system. - Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check for the ABS indicator light operation. Page 9724 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Warning Switch Replacement CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the hazard warning switch or the front console panel when prying the switch out. 1. Carefully pry the hazard warning switch out of the front console panel. 2. Disconnect the 10-P connector from the hazard warning switch. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 3761 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9304 Component Tests and General Diagnostics Keyless Entry Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Unit Input Test Page 3505 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2336 Page 2836 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 774 - If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 PR7 - A01). - Replace the 0-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 - PR7 - A01) before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right 0-rings for HFC 134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system, and test its performance. Page 4830 Page 4519 Page 3382 Page 708 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT sending unit. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 2. With the engine cold, use an ohmmeter to measure resistance between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). 3. Check the temperature of the coolant. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 4. Run the engine, and measure the change in resistance with the engine at operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 5. If the obtained readings are substantially different from the specifications above, replace the sending unit. Page 2699 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8832 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2272 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Engine Low Oil Pressure Indicator System - Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire from the engine oil pressure switch. 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). ^ There should be continuity with the engine stopped. ^ There should be no continuity when the engine runs. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure and, if necessary, inspect the oil pump. Page 9591 Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3722 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3561 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8243 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations On Top Of Transmission - Photo 44 Page 3601 Under Center Of Vehicle Page 1668 Tires: Testing and Inspection Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Page 3755 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5633 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. Page 6875 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Assembly 1. Coat piston seal ring guide with power steering fluid, then slide it onto rack, big end first. 2. Position new O-ring and new piston seal ring on piston seal ring guide tool No. 07HAG-SF10100, or equivalent, then slide down toward big end of tool. Replace piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set. 3. Pull O-ring off into piston groove, then pull piston seal ring off into piston groove on top of O-ring. Do not over expand seal rings. 4. Coat piston seal ring and inside of piston seal ring sizing tool No. 07HAG-SF-00200, or equivalent, with power steering fluid. 5. Carefully slide sizing tool onto rack and over piston seal ring. 6. Move tool back and forth several times to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in piston. 7. Coat sliding surface of cylinder end seal slider tool No. 07974-6890801, or equivalent, and new cylinder end seal with power steering fluid. 8. Place seal on slider tool with grooved side facing away from tool. 9. Apply thin coat of grease to inside of sliding tool, then install it onto steering rack. Ensure rack teeth do not face slot in tool. 10. Separate cylinder end seal from sliding tool, then remove tool from steering rack. 11. Install new back-up ring on steering rack, then place cylinder end seal to piston. 12. Grease steering rack teeth, then insert steering rack into gear housing. Be careful not to damage inner surface of cylinder housing with rack edge. 13. Install flange bolt into end of steering rack until it bottoms in hole, then back out flange bolt 1/4 turn. Hold flange bolt and tighten flange nut against rack by hand. 14. Install cylinder and seal into bottom of cylinder by pressing on bolt with suitable press. Do not push on bolt with excessive force as it may damage cylinder end seal. 15. Remove flange bolt, then center steering rack. 16. Install cylinder end seal guide tool No. 07GAG-SD40400, or equivalent, onto end of steering rack, then coat guide tool with power steering fluid. 17. Coat inside surface of new cylinder end seal with power steering fluid, then install seal onto steering rack with grooved side toward piston. 18. Remove guide tool, then push in cylinder end seal with finger. Take care not to damage cylinder end seal with threads and burrs at staked position of gearbox. 19. Install suitable puller yoke to steering gearbox, then clamp puller yoke in vise. 20. Grease inside surface of cylinder end, then install cylinder end by screwing it into cylinder housing. 21. Remove yoke from steering gearbox, then tighten cylinder end and stake point of cylinder housing. Stake cylinder in position opposite from where the stake was removed during disassemble. 22. Only reinstall original 32 mm shim(s) when steering gearbox is reassembled without replacing pinion shaft, valve housing and gearbox housing with new ones. Select new shim(s) as follows: a. Set four 32 mm shims on bearing surface of gearbox housing. Total thickness of four shims should equal no more than 0.7 mm. Shim set: four 32 mm shims (thickness: 0.1 mm, 0.15 mm, 0.2 mm, and 0.25 mm). b. Install valve body unit on gearbox and tighten flange bolts to specifications. c. Measure clearance between gearbox and valve body unit using feeler gauge as shown. Measure clearance at point midway between two mounting bolts. d. Determine required thickness of 32 mm shims by subtracting clearance obtained previously from the total thickness of four shims. Select shims so total thickness is close to, but less than required thickness. e. If required shim thickness is 0.1 mm or less, no shims are necessary. 23. Set selected 32 mm shims on bearing surface of gearbox housing, then coat new O-ring with grease and carefully fit it on valve housing. 24. Apply grease to needle bearing in gearbox housing, then install valve body unit on gearbox housing by engaging gears. Note valve body unit installation position (direction of pipe connection). 25. Tighten flange bolts to specifications. 26. Install cylinder pipes A and B, noting the following: a. Clean joints of cylinder pipes thoroughly. Joints must be free of foreign material. b. Install cylinder pipes by tightening flare nuts by hand first, then tighten flare nuts to specifications, starting with cylinder side nuts. 27. Grease sliding surface of rack guide and install it onto gear housing. 28. Apply thin coat of grease to new O-ring and install it onto rack guide screw. 29. Install spring, rack guide screw and locknut on gear housing. 30. Adjust rack guide screw as necessary. 31. Install stopper washer with chamfered side facing outside. 32. Screw each rack end into rack while holding new lock washer so its tabs are in slots in end of rack. Tighten rack end to specifications. 33. Bend lock washer back against flat spots on flange, then apply steering grease to rack end joint housing. 34. Coat rack end groove and inside of boot with silicone grease, then install boots in rack end with tube clamps. Install boots with rack in straight-ahead position. Page 5473 6. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring for wear at the release bearing contact area. 7. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge and feeler gauge. Measure across the pressure plate. - Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. - Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch). NOTE: If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. INSTALLATION 1. Install the ring gear holder. 2. Apply grease to the splines of the clutch disc, then install the clutch disc using the special tools as shown. NOTE: Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798 - 9002). Page 3461 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Page 4552 Page 8225 Trailer Connector: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 6692 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Inside Bolts .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 12 Nm (107 in. lbs.) Outside Bolts .................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (87 in. lbs.) Page 2942 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7705 Page 6536 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4045 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 1 through the YEL wire to the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts or more to the ORN wire. The VSS intermittently grounds the ORN wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Page 4328 Fuel Line: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Photo 106 Trailer Connector: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 8505 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Page 3750 Mechanical Specifications Thermostat: Mechanical Specifications Opening Temperature Starts to Open 169 - 176° F Fully Open 194° F Valve Lift Height 8.0 mm Note: Fully open. (min. height) Page 5575 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Photo 106 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 2741 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 3686 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 9848 Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Fuel Pump Relay: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 2802 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4686 Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3879 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 1876 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair SELECTION CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations Numbers or Bars have been stamped on the side of each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use them, and the letters or bars stamped on the crank (codes for rod journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Page 7734 SRS Unit Replacement 8. Connect the SRS main harness 18P connector to the SRS unit, then push it into position until it clicks. 9. Put the carpet back in place. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector to the SRS main harness, then reinstall the glove box. 12. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 13. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 14. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAF-SD40700 Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010400 Attachment 52 x 55 mm - 07965-6920201 Hub Dis/Assembly Base REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the steering knuckle from the hub unit. Refer to Steering and Suspension. 2. Remove the splash guard from the steering knuckle. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the splash guard for hub unit or wheel bearing replacement. Page 5443 3. Install the pressure plate and the mounting bolts finger-tight. 4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern as shown. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 5. Remove the special tools. 6. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height. Page 1292 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 6746 9. Close the pressure control valve, then close the shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. 10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. CAUTION: Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more then 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 6,400 - 7,400 kPa (924 - 1,067 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. Page 7994 Page 8776 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 9174 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - Gauge Test 1. Check the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT gauge sending unit and ground it with a jumper wire. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the pointer of the ECT gauge starts moving toward the "H" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "H on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge. ^ If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all, check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the wires are OK, replace the ECT gauge. ^ If the ECT gauge works, test the ECT sending unit. Page 2640 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Page 3243 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires Spark Plug Inspection Page 6814 Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Service Tips Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Service Tips NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original locations. ^ Inspect rocker shafts arms. ^ Rocker arms must be installed in the same position if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ When reassembling, fit the projection on the intake rocker shaft to the notch in the camshaft holder. Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply lubricant to any contact parts. Page 6342 Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection - Remove the fail-safe relays and motor relay. See: Locations Relay Identification - Check for continuity between the terminals C and D. There should be continuity. - Check for continuity between the terminals A and B. There should be continuity when the battery is connected between the terminals C and D. There should be no continuity when the battery is disconnected. Page 9832 Page 7713 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1149 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7985 Page 2583 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 7174 NOTE: Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 3. If the recirculation control motor does not run in step 1, remove it, and check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement. If the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. Page 3822 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Page 21 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5117 Servo Body The transmission strainer (filter) is located on the valve body inside the torque converter housing and is not replaceable Page 699 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Diagram Information and Instructions Steering Column Lock: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Electrical Specifications Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 2062 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7114 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 856 3. Disconnect the connector from the combination light switch, then remove the two screws and the switch. Page 9494 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3645 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations A/C Pressure Switch Photo 138 - A/C Pressure Switch Page 8270 Page 9379 Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 436 Page 7551 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 1641 Page 3455 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 9306 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9563 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Photo 82 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 9311 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7260 Page 9564 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2692 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Controled Idle Speed Man. Trans. 750 RPM Auto Trans. (N) 750 RPM Page 1047 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8124 Stereo Sound System (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7169 Mode Control Motor (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2868 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 630 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity with the lever released (hood opened). ^ There should be no continuity with the lever pushed down (hood closed). Customer Safety Information Brake Caliper: Customer Safety Information WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 9357 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection DRL Control Unit (Canada) Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Fuel Pump Relay: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Description and Operation Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system is designed to prevent blow-by gas from escaping to the atmosphere. The PCV valve contains a spring-loaded plunger. When the engine starts, the plunger in the PCV valve is lifted in proportion to intake manifold vacuum and the blow-by gas is drawn directly into the intake manifold. Page 4971 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the shift control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the shift control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 3 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 1160 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7540 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Page 6289 6. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh fluid until the reservoir is refilled to the MAX (upper) level. 7. Perform brake bleeding procedures. See: System Bleed 8. Perform ABS sunctional checks using the ALB checker. See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Reservoir Removal and Installation 1. Drain the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. 2. Remove the modulator unit from the vehicle. See: Removal and Installation Reservoir Location 3. Remove the reservoir from the modulator unit. 4. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal. 5. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 6. Install modulator unit. See: Removal and Installation 7. Bleed system. See: System Bleed NOTE: After installing the modulator unit and bleeding the brakes, start the engine and make sure that the ABS indicator light goes off. Wire Harness Removal and Installation - Remove the modulator unit from the vehicle. See: Removal and Installation Page 9522 Page 9341 Page 9221 Page 324 Page 8866 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5787 Page 2519 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8990 Page 2505 Fans Page 1783 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3541 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9834 3. Disconnect the connector from the combination light switch, then remove the two screws and the switch. Page 4457 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6285 B) Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. C) While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. D) Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. E) Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. F) Tighten the maintenance bleeder. 4. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. Fluid Level Check 5. Repeat steps A through F twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 6. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. 7. After replacement, start the engine and make sure that the ABS indicator light goes off. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Fluid Capacity (approx) 150 ml (5.0 fl.oz) Relieving System Pressure CAUTION: - Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely before performing the modulator function check, disposing the modulator unit, and ABS pump motor replacement. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Do not reuse the drained brake fluid. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. Page 1363 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3538 Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9795 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1388 Distributor: Service and Repair Reassembly Distributor Reassembly 1. When reassembling distributor, install the distributor ignition (DI) rotor so that it faces in the direction shown (toward the No. 1 cylinder). 2. Align the index mark on the distributor ignition housing whit the index mark on the end of the shaft. Page 8059 CD Changer Troubleshooting (All except Passport) CD Player Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Radio Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Page 343 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 4005 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3921 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Torque 13 ft.lb Page 4385 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Page 1418 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve clearance Valve clearance Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.009 to 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 to 0.013 in Page 3518 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8647 12. Reinstall the seat track end covers. Page 4698 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7015 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Replacement Shock Front Shock TOOL REQUIRED - Strut Spring Compressor REMOVAL CAUTION: The spring of the damper springs are different left and right. Be sure to mark the springs R and L before disassembling the front dampers. 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts from the front damper. 3. Remove the flange bolt. 4. Remove the flange bolt and self-locking nut, then remove the damper fork 5. Remove the front damper by removing the three flange nuts. Page 4282 Page 8074 CD Player/Changer Troubleshooting (Passport only) Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (All except Passport) One-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed disc. 3. If a disc is jammed between the player and the magazine, turn the loading gear until the disc returns to the player mechanism. Do not attempt to reload the disc back into the magazine. 4. After the disc is loaded into the player mechanism, turn the changer so that the front is facing you. Page 4294 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7157 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. CONTROL PANEL REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the air mix control cable from the heater unit. 2. Remove the stereo radio/cassette player, and the glove box. Page 6493 Fuse Block: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 5725 1. Remove the ball bearing using the tool and press. CAUTION: Remove the synchro hubs using a press and steel blocks as shown. Use of a jaw-type puller can cause damage to the gear teeth. 2. Support 5th gear on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub, as shown. 3. In the same manner as above, support the 3rd gear on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub, as shown. MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY INSPECTION Page 8770 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7538 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4650 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Inspection And Test CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the wire. Ignition Wire Inspection And Test 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. Ignition Wire Resistance: 25 K Ohms max. at 68° F (20° C) 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohms, replace the ignition wire. Page 796 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 9781 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9812 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 332 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression [1] Nominal ............................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 1,230 KPa (178 psi) Minimum .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 930 KPa (135 psi) Maximum Variation .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 200 KPa (28 psi) [1] 200 rpm and wide open throttle Page 1984 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation CAUTION: ^ Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with valves when torquing rocker assembly bolts. ^ Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. ^ To prevent rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. ^ Lubricate cam lobes after reassembly. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up. (No. 1 piston Top Dead Center (TDC)). 4. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 or No. 6 camshaft holders. ^ Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. ^ Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Electrical Specifications Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 306 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 416 Engine Control Module: Connector Views PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 6865 25. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering fluid, and slide it onto the rack, big end first. 26. Position the new O-ring and new piston seal ring on the special tool, then slide them down toward the big end of the tool. NOTE: ^ Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool). ^ Replace piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set. 27. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the O-ring. 28. Coat the piston seal ring and the inside of the special tool with power steering fluid. 29. Carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the piston seal ring. 30. Move the special tool back and forth several times to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston. 31. Coat the sliding surface of the special tool and new cylinder end seal with power steering fluid. 32. Place the seal on the special tool with its grooved side facing opposite the special tool. Page 3503 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4479 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3310 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4224 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 399 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2215 T/N 07MAB-PY3010A DOHC Prelude: Holder Attachment, 50 mm offset: T/N 07NAB-001040A ALL: Holder Handle: T/N 07JAB-001020A Belt Tension Gauge: T/N 07JGG-001010A or 07TGG-001000A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: This campaign ends January 1, 2003. After that date, warranty claims for installation of a retainer, or repairs required due to a failed oil seal, will not be accepted. Disclaimer Warranty Claim Filing Instructions - Updated *A. If the technician found that an oil seal retainer had already been installed, file a warranty claim with operation number 111008. B. If the technician installed an oil seal retainer, file a warranty claim with operation number 111108. C. If the technician replaced the oil seal because it was cocked or backed out, file a warranty claim with operation number 111124. This includes replacing the timing belt and balancer belt if they are contaminated with oil. This repair requires DSM approval. Flat Rate Time Accord - 2.5 hours Odyssey - 2.5 hours 1994-96 Prelude - 2.5 hours 1997 Prelude - 2.7 hours D. If the technician replaced the engine because there was significant internal engine damage due to extended driving after a complete loss of oil, file a warranty claim with operation number 111008 as the primary operation and 111099 as the secondary operation. Show actual repair time as the FRT with 111099, and list all parts used. This repair requires DSM approval. NOTE: If a vehicle with engine damage has high mileage, the DSM may authorize the installation of a reconditioned engine from an outside supplier rather than a new engine from Honda. In that case, refer to section 6.4.1, Reimbursement for Non-Honda Parts, in the Service Operations Manual for claim submission and credit guidelines.* Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code, if needed. Write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Page 1273 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 3007 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3910 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Diagram Information and Instructions Clock: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8610 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Open Photo 89 Above Left Kick Panel Page 6227 Snap Ring Removal & Installation 12. Install the circlip in the groove, then remove the special tool. NOTE: Check that the circlip is seated in the groove properly. 13. Coat a new piston seal with recommended silicone grease in the caliper seal set, and install it in the caliper. Grease The Caliper 14. Apply rubber grease to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and install it in the caliper. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston and piston boot. Piston Installation 15. Coat the outside of the piston with brake fluid, and install it on the adjusting bolt while rotating it clockwise with the special tool. Page 9729 Page 8151 Tape Player: Service and Repair NOTE:The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the radio fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Refer to the TSB listed below for information on how to obtain the code in the event the customer does not have the code. TSB # 98-026 April 15, 1998 Applies To: ALL with Anti-Theft Audio Units Audio Unit Anti-Theft Code Labels BACKGROUND This service bulletin describes where to attach the audio unit anti-theft labels that come in the glove box of vehicles equipped with anti-theft audio systems. If a vehicle has an anti-theft audio system, there are three peel-off labels in the glove box. Two of the labels have both the anti-theft code and the audio unit's serial number, and a third label contains only the serial number for the audio unit. During Pre Delivery Inspection, stick the label with only the serial number on the glove box. If the radio code ever needs to be retrieved through the HONDANET 2000 system, this will save you the time and labor of removing the audio unit to record the serial number. NOTES: - Also perform this procedure when installing an accessory audio unit that is equipped with an anti-theft system. - If a remanufactured audio unit is installed in a vehicle, remove the old labels and install new ones on the glove box, Radio Identification Card, and the vehicle's service records. - If the glove box is ever replaced, transfer the labels from the old glove box to the new one. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This bulletin is for information only. Skill level: Maintenance Technician PROCEDURE Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Page 1660 Tires: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. Honda will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. Honda will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. Unless otherwise specified, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. Page 6611 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 6861 31. Press the valve oil seal and roller bearing out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool shown below. Assembly NOTE: - Clean the disassembled parts with a solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in a solvent. - Always replace the O-rings and rubber seals with new ones before assembly. - Apply recommended power steering fluid to the parts indicated in the assembly procedures. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the power steering system. - Use the appropriate special tools where necessary. 1. Apply vinyl tape to the stepped portion of the pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 2. Install the backup ring with its tapered side as shown above. 3. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal with power steering fluid. 4. Slide the valve oil seal over the pinion shaft, being careful not to damage the sealing lip. CAUTION: Install the valve oil seal with its grooved side facing opposite the bearing. Fan Controls Test Radiator Fan: Testing and Inspection Fan Controls Test Fan Controls - Troubleshooting NOTE: Different wires with same color have been given a number suffix to distinguish them (for example YEL 1 and YEL 2 are not the same). NOTE: The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. Page 9976 Coupe: Check the guide pin for damage, and replace it if necessary. NOTE: Scribe a line around the guide pin to show the original location. 7. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. Page 4406 Specifications Balance Shaft Pulley: Specifications Mount Bolt ........................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Page 9292 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5354 ATF Cooler: Service and Repair COOLER FLUSHING WARNING: To prevent injury to face and eyes, always wear safety glasses or a face shield when using the transmission flusher. NOTE: This procedure should be performed before reinstalling the transmission. 1. Check tool and hoses for wear or cracks before using. If wear or cracks are found, replace the hoses before using. 2. Using the measuring cup, fill the tank with 21 ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable flushing fluid (J35944 - 20). Do not substitute with any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on the fluid container. 3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the tank with compressed air to between 550 - 829 kPa (80 - 120 psi). NOTE: The air line should be equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air system. 4. Hang the tool under the vehicle. 5. Attach the discharge hose of the tank to the return line of the transmission cooler using a clamp. 6. Connect the drain hose to the inlet line of the transmission cooler using a clamp. NOTE: Securely clamp the opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket or floor drain. 7. With the water and air valves off, attach the water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if available.) 8. Turn on the flusher water valve so water will flow through the ATF cooler for 10 seconds. NOTE: If water does not flow through the ATF cooler, it is completely plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced. 9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger down. 10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for 2 minutes, turn the air valve on for 5 seconds every 15-20 seconds to create a surging action. Air pressure: MAX 845 kPa (120 psi). 11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10. Page 6530 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 6911 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: Accord, Odyssey P/N 04510-S84-000 H/C 6194054 Prelude P/N 04510-5L5-000 H/C 6194039 Defect Code: 297 Contention Code: K59 Skill Level: Repair Technician Disclaimer Note Wear eye protection during the entire procedure. Ball Joint Removal and Installation 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove and discard the spindle nut. 3. Remove the cotter pin and castle nut from the lower ball joint. Discard the cotter pin. 4. Separate the lower control arm from the ball joint with the special tool. To avoid damaging the ABS sensor harness, do not let the knuckle hang by its weight. 5. Prelude Type SH only: Separate the radius rod from the ball joint with the special tool. Take care not to damage the boot. Replace the boot if it is damaged during separation. Page 3957 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7904 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Front Strut Page 2783 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8177 Page 2126 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation The low oil pressure indicator light works in two ways: it flashes continuously following a momentary loss of pressure, or it goes ON and stays ON with a complete loss of engine oil pressure. When the engine first starts, before its oil pressure rises above 4.3 psi, voltage is applied to the closed and grounded engine oil pressure switch and the light comes ON to test the bulb. With the engine running, voltage is applied at the WHT/BLU wire of the integrated control unit. With normal engine oil pressure, the engine oil pressure switch is open and the low oil pressure indicator light does not come ON. If the engine oil pressure switch closes momentarily (more than 0.5 second) but then opens again, the YEL/RED wire at the integrated control unit will sense ground through the switch. The integrated control unit will then provide and remove ground for the low oil pressure indicator light through the YEL/RED wire. The light will flash ON and OFF until you turn the ignition switch OFF. The flashing feature will not work until 30 seconds after initial voltage is applied to the WHT/BLU wire of the oil pressure indicator flasher circuit. This delay keeps the low oil pressure indicator light from coming ON during engine warm-up. If engine oil pressure falls below 4.3 psi and does not increase, the engine oil pressure switch will stay closed. The low oil pressure indicator light will then come ON and stay ON. Page 7612 Page 4557 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications GAP GAP Spark Plug Air Gap 0.039-0.043 (in.) Page 144 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3430 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Page 3333 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Page 7124 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection BEARING END PLAY 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch). 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Page 9560 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Control Actuator: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the solenoid valve, and remove the rear mount. 2. Clean and oil the diaphragm actuator rod, rear mount rotor lever, and lever linkage. 3. With a vacuum pump/gauge, apply vacuum of about 230 mm Hg (9.1 inch Hg.), and check if the rotor lever turns 80°. - Replace the rear mount if the rotor lever does not operate. Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair 1mDoor Panel/Plastic Cover Replacement 1. Remove the mirror mount cover panel. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door panel and other parts. . If applicable, remove the regulator handle by pulling the clip out with a wire hook. NOTE: Install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass closed. 3. Pry out the cap and remove the screw. Page 1677 Tires: Service and Repair Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 9548 Electrical Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 8717 Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 5. Check for continuity between the terminals of the 20-P connector in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. ^ If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the steering column covers. 7. Disconnect the combination switch harness 4-P connector from the cable reel. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 8. Check for continuity between the terminals as shown: ^ If there is no continuity, replace the combination switch harness. ^ If there is continuity, go to step 9. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 9. Carefully remove the set/resume switch cover by prying between the cover and the switch in the sequence shown. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 7907 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Page 2358 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 6669 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 5051 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Photo 128 Fuel Tank Unit: Locations Photo 128 Right Front Of Cargo Area Page 166 Engine Mount Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Page 9293 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 1917 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Tighten Crankshaft Pulley Bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.) NOTE: ^ Do not use an impact wrench when installing. ^ Clean, remove any oil and lubricate points shown. Page 8190 Intermittent Wiper System Intermittent Wiper System Integrated Control Unit Seat Belt Reminder And Key-in Reminder System Seat Belt Reminder And Key-In Reminder System Locations Page 3940 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3567 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8024 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 595 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Testing and Inspection PCM Terminal Locations PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 752 Page 9922 Power Window Relay: Locations Photographs Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 361 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Page 441 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1290 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Page 6863 NOTE: After installation, compress the seal rings with your fingers temporarily. 15. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the special tool. 16. Insert the sleeve into the special tool slowly. 17. Move the sleeve each direction several times to make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. NOTE: Be sure that the seal rings are not turned up. 18. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the pinion shaft. Assemble the sleeve over the pinion shaft by aligning the locating pin on the inside of the sleeve with the cutout in the shaft. Then install the new circlip securely in the pinion shaft groove. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring when inserting the sleeve. ^ Install the circlip with its radiused side facing out. 19. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the valve oil seal, then install the seal in the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tools as shown. CAUTION: Install the valve oil seal with its grooved side facing the tool. Page 9561 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Close Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Close Photo 89 Above Left Kick Panel Locations Tachometer Connector: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 5794 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Specifications Radiator: Specifications Bottom Bolts ........................................................................................................................................ .................................................. 9.8 Nm (87 in. lbs.) Upper Bracket ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 9.8 Nm (87 in. lbs.) General Precautions Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions General Precautions WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE INJURY, ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE DRIVER'S AND FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CONNECTORS (AUTOMATICALLY SHORTED) BEFORE WORKING NEAR ANY SRS WIRING. CAUTION: Whenever the ignition switch is ON(II) , or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. WARNING: DO NOT USE TEST EQUIPMENT ON THE YELLOW SRS WIRES AND CONNECTORS IN THE STEERING COLUMN, CONSOLE, DASHBOARD, AND FLOOR. YOU COULD UNINTENTIONALLY SET OFF THE AIRBAGS, WHICH COULD CAUSE INJURY TO YOU AND OTHERS. WHILE WORKING ON OTHER SYSTEMS, BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE SRS WIRING OR COMPONENTS. DAMAGE COULD MAKE THE AIRBAGS INOPERATIVE, WHICH COULD LEAD TO THE DRIVER'S OR THE PASSENGER'S INJURY OR DEATH IT THE CAR WERE IN A SEVERE FRONTAL COLLISION. NOTE: - If an intact airbag assembly has been removed from a scrapped vehicle or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed. - Before removing the steering gearbox, remove the driver's airbag assembly and steering wheel. - After installing the steering gearbox, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. - SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in Air Bags and Seat Belts before performing repairs or service. Page 7603 Page 9735 Page 4560 Page 1711 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Resistance 25 K ohms Note: Resistance at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Page 6109 Caliper Bolts Location ^ Remove the two caliper bolts and caliper body from the bracket. Pins & Pin Boot Placement ^ Remove the pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. INSTALLATION Pad Spring Location 1. Install the pad spring on the caliper. Page 5024 NOTE: In this figure, the return spring is for 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th clutches. The 1st-hold clutch return spring is a disc spring. 5. Install the special tools as shown. NOTE: For 1st-hold clutch NOTE: For 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th clutches Page 6483 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9021 Page 9740 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3209 Page 7362 Heater Control Panel: Testing and Inspection Heater Fan Switch Test HEATER FAN SWITCH TEST Refer to image for terminal identification. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 3999 Page 3317 Brake Signal: Testing and Inspection This signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is depressed. Page 3644 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 462 Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Relay Box: Locations Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 826 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7680 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Installation 1. Before installing the steering wheel, the front wheels should be aligned straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Set the cancel sleeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertically. 4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering column shaft. Then connect the 4P connector (B) to the cable reel, and connect the 2P connector (C) to the SRS main harness 2P connector (D). 5. Install the steering column covers. 6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and a half turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. Page 2656 Thermostat: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Opening Temperature Starts to Open 169 - 176° F Fully Open 194° F Page 4096 Two-Way Valve: Testing and Inspection Sedan KL (SE, LX Without ABS)/Wagon 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Remove the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve on the fuel tank, and connect it to a T-fitting from vacuum gauge and vacuum pump as shown. 3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize momentarily at 0.7 - 2.0 kPa (5 - 15 mmHg, 0.2 - 0.6 in.Hg). If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.7 kPa (5 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.0 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. 4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure side as shown. 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The pressure should stabilize at 1.3 - 4.7 kPa (10 - 35 mmHg, 0.4 - 1.4 in.Hg). If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve opens) at 1.3 - 4.7 kPa (10 - 35 mmHg, 0.4 - 1.4 in. Hg), the valve is OK. - If the pressure stabilizes below 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.4 in.Hg) or above 4.7 kPa (35 mmHg, 1.4 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. Page 3460 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Page 2569 Page 2324 Page 4922 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 8038 General Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6646 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 5127 3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure the thrust clearance of the ATF pump driven gear-to-valve body. ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard (New): 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 inch.) - Service Limit: 0.07 mm (0.003 inch.) Page 7712 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3734 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8876 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7011 2. Remove the spring compressor, then disassemble the rear damper as shown. INSPECTION 1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. Page 9212 Page 9088 Page 3623 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 379 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Page 7966 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Hands-Free Speaker Is Inoperative) Page 1107 A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 23 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2052 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1591 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 1073 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5854 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the shift lock solenoid 3-P connector from the main wire harness. NOTE: Do not connect power to the B (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 2. Connect battery power to the A terminal and ground to the 8 terminal momentarily. Check the solenoid. If it does not work, replace it. NOTE: ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (O.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. ^ If it is not, adjust the position of the shift lock solenoid. Page 1740 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 6305 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments ^ Pull the parking brake lever with to fully apply the parking brake. The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified notches. Specs: Notches For Full Lock 7 - 11 ^ Adjust the parking brake if the lever notches are out of specification. Page 4015 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Tests and General Diagnostics 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the Variable Valve Timing and Valve Lift Electronic Control (VTEC) solenoid valve. 2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground. - Resistance: 14-30 Ohms 3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the Variable Valve Timing and VTEC solenoid valve assembly from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter/O-ring for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil. Page 5652 4. Remove the friction damper from the spacer using a press and a socket as shown. COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY INSPECTION 1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the countershaft at points A, B, and C. a. Standard: - A: 38.000 - 38.015 mm (1.4961 -1.4967 inch) - B: 39.984 - 40.000 mm (1.5742-1.5748 inch) - C: 24.987 - 25.000 mm (0.9837 - 0.9843 inch) b. Service Limit: - A: 37.950 mm (1.4941 inch) - B: 39.930 mm (1.5720 inch) - C: 24.940 mm (0.9819 inch) NOTE: If any part of the countershaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one. 2. Inspect for runout. - Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 inch) max. - Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) NOTE: Support the countershaft at both ends as shown. If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the countershaft with a new one. COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY REASSEMBLE Page 6174 10. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE:If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 11. Once the tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still parallel as pictured above. 12. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. WARNING:WEAR EYE PROTECTION. THE BALL JOINT CAN BREAK LOOSE SUDDENLY AND SCATTER DIRT OR OTHER DEBRIS IN YOUR EYES. 13. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace if damaged. 14. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 15. Install a 12mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. Page 3656 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9873 Page 6631 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Page 6650 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 9466 Headlight Switch (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Page 3085 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5979 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 211 Blower Motor Speed (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1153 Page 9413 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Page 5344 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 22 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4759 Page 203 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1477 Hose/Line HVAC: Capacity Specifications A/C Suction Hose/Line REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY Add After Replacement ....................................................................................................................... .............................................. 10 ml (1/3 fl-oz) A/C Discharge Hose/Line REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY Add After Replacement ....................................................................................................................... .............................................. 10 ml (1/3 fl-oz) Page 4211 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8247 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6758 6. Install the preload spring in the pump housing. 7. Set the 4.5 x 49.8 mm roller in the 4.5 mm hole in the pump housing. 8. Set the side plate over the roller and install it on the pump housing. 9. Set the 5 x 26.8 mm roller in the 5 mm hole in the side plate. 10. Assemble pump rotor to the drive shaft with the "o" mark on the rotor facing upward. 11. Set the 10 vanes in the grooves in the rotor. NOTE: Be sure that the round ends of the vanes are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring. 12. Set the pump cam ring over the two rollers with the "oo" mark on the cam ring upward. Page 9847 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8511 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 2908 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Tailgate Latch Assembly/Switch Tailgate Latch: Locations Tailgate Latch Assembly/Switch Right Side Of Tailgate Page 609 Rear Defogger Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Rear Window Defogger Relay ^ Rear window defogger relay Page 9490 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1724 7. Press a new wheel bearing into the hub using the special tools and a press as shown. 8. Install the hub unit on the brake disc and tighten the flange bolts. NOTE: Before installing the hub unit, clean the mating surfaces of the hub unit and brake disc. Page 5792 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 802 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Page 7923 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM button and the CD/TAPE button) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on all other transmitters. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 9 NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. Programming the Transmitter Page 8880 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams Safety Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 6823 Page 8269 Page 8171 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3624 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8186 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7700 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4114 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3866 Page 6197 from the reservoir (air enters in the modulator unit) during brake fluid replacement, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. 11. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 12. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container (see the previous page). 13. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 14. Tighten the bleeder when the fluid starts to flow out of the bleeder. 15. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Page 6176 21. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end using a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. 22. Remove the knuckle from the hub unit. 23. Remove the four flange bolts, then separate the hub unit from the brake disc. Page 7871 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity with the lever released (hood opened). ^ There should be no continuity with the lever pushed down (hood closed). Page 6195 Bleeding Sequence 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. NOTE: Check fluid level frequently and refill as necessary to prevent air from being drawn into system. 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. NOTE: To flush and replace fluid, repeat procedure at each wheel until expelled fluid appears clean. Page 8482 Control Unit Input Test Page 1245 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test Passenger's Window Switch Test 1. Remove the passenger's window switch. Passenger's Window Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 4637 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4509 Page 2770 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4081 System Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair System Bleeding Anti-Lock Brake System Modulator Unit Relieving System Pressure/Brake Fluid Replacement/Bleeding CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this section is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder. NOTE: Do not remove the rubber tube and wrench yet. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 7. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: The modulator has a capacity of approximately 150 ml (150 cc, 5 FL-oz). Approximately 40 - 45 ml (40 - 45 cc, 1.3 - 1.5 FL-oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. 9. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. Photo 106 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 2301 Timing Belt: Adjustments CAUTION: Always adjust timing belt tension with the engine cold. NOTE: ^ The tensioner is spring-loaded to apply proper tension to the belt automatically after making the following adjustment. ^ Always rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise when viewed from the pulley side. Rotating it clockwise may result in improper adjustment of the belt tension. ^ Inspect the timing balancer belt before adjusting the belt tension. ^ Do not loosen the adjusting nut more than one full turn. ^ The original radio has a coded they protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Set the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). 5. Rotate the crankshaft 5-6 revolutions to set the belt. 6. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. 7. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. 8. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise 3-teeth on the camshaft pulley. 9. Tighten the adjusting nut. 10. After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Page 9128 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8121 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8619 Power Seat Motor: Locations Power Seat Up-Down Motor Underside Of Driver's Seat Page 2871 Page 1077 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 317 Page 5184 Page 9125 Page 3966 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2696 Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER If equipped with a service reminder flag, the oil and oil filter service interval reminder flags will activate after every 7500 miles of operation. To reset indicators, insert ignition key into slots below indicator flags at lower right corner of instrument cluster. Push key in until reminder window changes from Red to Green. Page 8406 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity with the lever released (hood opened). ^ There should be no continuity with the lever pushed down (hood closed). Page 8331 10. Before installing the plastic cover, make sure the door harness and connectors are fastened correctly on the door. Page 3872 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2456 3. Remove the water pump by removing five bolts. NOTE: Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the cylinder block. 4. Install the water pump in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ^ Keep the O-ring in position when installing. ^ Clean the spilled engine coolant. Page 432 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 387 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Page 4668 Page 4486 Locations Page 5522 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft REMOVAL 1. Drain the transmission oil or fluid. 2. Remove the left driveshaft. 3. Remove the three flange bolts. 4. Remove the intermediate shaft from the differential. CAUTION: Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage to the differential oil seal. DISASSEMBLE NOTE: Be careful not to damage the metal rings on the intermediate shaft during disassembly. Page 9277 Page 10044 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Switch Removal CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Switch Removal 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 8043 General Module: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit - Circuit Diagram Page 8863 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4526 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Photo 106 Trailer Connector: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 2027 Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (With A/C) Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension: 441-588 N (45-60 kgf, 99- 132 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt, (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the tension should be 932 - 1123 N (95 - 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Without Air Conditioning Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (Without A/C) Deflection Method: Page 93 Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection - Remove the fail-safe relays and motor relay. See: Locations Relay Identification - Check for continuity between the terminals C and D. There should be continuity. - Check for continuity between the terminals A and B. There should be continuity when the battery is connected between the terminals C and D. There should be no continuity when the battery is disconnected. Photo 82 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 8273 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3863 Page 3010 Page 7883 Control Unit Input Test Page 4390 Page 9810 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 2845 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 438 Page 1074 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1628 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 2514 Both Fans Technician Safety Information Tires: Technician Safety Information WARNING: This vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to the SRS component and wiring location view in order to determine whether you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring. when you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring, refer to the SRS service information. failure to follow warnings could result in possible air bag deployment, personal injury, or otherwise unneeded SRS system repairs. Page 492 Page 2715 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 9086 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4780 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque 13 ft lb (18 Nm) Page 6740 Page 3013 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8618 Underside of Driver's Seat Page 6744 from exceeding the given level by controlling the volume of the fluid to the pump return port. Page 6883 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal Procedures (see "Damaged Airbag Special Procedure") for disposing of the damaged airbag. Page 9000 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation A thermistor is mounted in the fuel tank unit. When the thermistor is cool, its resistance is very high. When the thermistor is warm, its resistance decreases. Fuel in the fuel tank transfers heat away from the thermistor fast enough to keep it cool so the thermistor's resistance stays high and the low fuel indicator light does not come ON. When the fuel level drops below about 2.4 gallons, the thermistor is no longer immersed in fuel. Without the fuel to cool it, the thermistor's resistance decreases, allowing current to flow through the low fuel indicator light and the thermistor to ground, and the low fuel indicator light comes ON. Page 8494 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Page 3666 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 8248 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9819 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3309 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4692 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9057 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation The low oil pressure indicator light works in two ways: it flashes continuously following a momentary loss of pressure, or it goes ON and stays ON with a complete loss of engine oil pressure. When the engine first starts, before its oil pressure rises above 4.3 psi, voltage is applied to the closed and grounded engine oil pressure switch and the light comes ON to test the bulb. With the engine running, voltage is applied at the WHT/BLU wire of the integrated control unit. With normal engine oil pressure, the engine oil pressure switch is open and the low oil pressure indicator light does not come ON. If the engine oil pressure switch closes momentarily (more than 0.5 second) but then opens again, the YEL/RED wire at the integrated control unit will sense ground through the switch. The integrated control unit will then provide and remove ground for the low oil pressure indicator light through the YEL/RED wire. The light will flash ON and OFF until you turn the ignition switch OFF. The flashing feature will not work until 30 seconds after initial voltage is applied to the WHT/BLU wire of the oil pressure indicator flasher circuit. This delay keeps the low oil pressure indicator light from coming ON during engine warm-up. If engine oil pressure falls below 4.3 psi and does not increase, the engine oil pressure switch will stay closed. The low oil pressure indicator light will then come ON and stay ON. Page 8765 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. In-Line Diode A Diode: Locations In-Line Diode A Below Left Side Of Dash Page 4250 Page 1572 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Hydraulic Component Bleeding and Fluid Service Modulator Unit Relieving System Pressure/Brake Fluid Replacement/Bleeding CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this section is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder. NOTE: Do not remove the rubber tube and wrench yet. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 7. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: The modulator has a capacity of approximately 150 ml (150 cc, 5 FL-oz). Approximately 40 - 45 ml (40 - 45 cc, 1.3 - 1.5 FL-oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. 9. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. 10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. When the brake fluid is completely drained Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Condenser 25 ml (0.85 oz) Evaporator 40 ml (1.35 oz) Line or Hose 10 ml (0.34 oz) Receiver/Dryer 10 ml (0.34 oz) Leakage Repair 25 ml (0.85 oz) Compressor 130 ml (4.40 oz) Volume of old compressor should equal oil drain from new compressor, but not more than 50 ml. Page 4026 Page 4599 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8239 Driver's Air Bag Assembly Air Bag: Locations Driver's Air Bag Assembly Steering Wheel Locations Knee Bolster / Dashboard Lower Cover Page 4730 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3622 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 666 Pressure Switch: Description and Operation ABS Pressure Switch PURPOSE The pressure switch monitors the pressure accumulation in the accumulator. When the pressure in the accumulator rises, the Bourdon tube in the pressure switch deforms outward, which in turn activates the microswitch by the force of the spring attached to the sensing lever. FUNCTION When the pressure in the accumulator drops due to Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) operation, the Bourdon tube moves in the opposite direction, and the micro-switch is eventually turned off. The ABS control unit detects the fluid pressure in the accumulator by the ON/OFF signals from the pressure switch. Page 5897 Page 9615 Page 9840 Page 7274 Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Correct Fluid/Capacity Correct Fluid/Capacity Type Honda Power Steering Fluid Note: Another brand of power steering fluid may be used as a replacement. DO NOT use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). System Capacity 0.90 qt (US) Reservoir Capacity 0.42 qt (US) Page 1271 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Page 7649 8. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely. Deploying Airbags/Tensioner (Outside Vehicle) Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Acura/Honda District Technical Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: DEPLOYING THE AIRBAG: OUT-OF-VEHICLE NOTE: If an intact airbag has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed as follows: WARNING: POSITION THE AIRBAG FACE UP, OUTDOORS ON FLAT GROUND AT LEAST THIRTY FEET (10 M) FROM ANY OBSTACLES OR PEOPLE. 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. 2. Connect a 12 Volt battery to the tool: - If the green light on the tool comes on, the airbag igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is ready to be deployed. 3. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least thirty feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or people. 4. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the airbag wires, and connect the special tool alligator clips to the airbag. Place the special tool approximately thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 5. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible; a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the airbags deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. WARNING: DURING DEPLOYMENT, THE AIRBAG CAN BECOME HOT ENOUGH TO BURN YOU. WAIT THIRTY MINUTES AFTER DEPLOYMENT BEFORE TOUCHING THE AIRBAG. Page 2685 Page 3144 Page 7815 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9446 Page 8108 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4061 Canister Purge Control Valve: Locations Evaporative Emission Purge Control Solenoid Valve Photo 22 Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Photo 161 Page 7818 Page 4039 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7236 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9445 Page 1106 Page 9049 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1822 7. Stop applying air pressure and push up the timing plate; the synchronizing pistons will snap back to their original positions. ^ Visually check the disengagement of the synchronizing pistons A/B. NOTE: ^ When the timing plate is pushed up, it releases the timing piston, letting the return spring move the synchronizing pistons to their original positions. ^ Replace the intake rocker arms as an assembly if either does not work correctly. 8. Remove the special tools. 9. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion assembly. It is compressed slightly when the intake mid rocker arm is lightly pushed and compressed deeply when the mid rocker arm is strongly pushed. ^ Replace the lost motion assembly if it does not move smoothly. 10. After inspection, check that the MIL does not come on. Lost Motion Assemblies Inspection 1. Remove the lost motion assembly from the cylinder head and inspect it. Pushing it gently with the finger will cause it to sink slightly. Increasing the force on it will cause it to sink deeper. ^ If the lost motion assembly does not move smoothly, replace it. A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Page 1776 Page 5621 Page 6506 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 78 Behind Left Side Of Dash Specifications Radiator Fan Control Module: Specifications Fan Timer "ON" Temperature ......................................................................................................................................................... 217-228°F (103-109°C) Fan Timer "OFF" Temperature [1] ................................................................ ................................................................................................ 7-16°F (4-9°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. Page 1627 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7158 3. Remove the cruise control main/moonroof, dash lights brightness controller and rear window defogger switches. 4. Remove the six self-tapping screws, then pull out the instrument/heater control panels. Disconnect the connectors from the heater control panel, then remove the instrument/heater control panels. 5. Remove the five self-tapping screws and the heater control panel from the instrument panel. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the air mix control cable at the heater unit. If necessary, adjust the heater valve cable. Page 6912 6. Remove the axle from the front wheel hub. If the axle is stuck to the hub, go to step 7. If the axle comes out easily, go to step 10. 7. Reinstall the knuckle on the lower control arm and loosely install the castle nut. 8. Using a heavy-duty hub puller, free the axle from the hub. Do not press it all the way out. 9. Remove the castle nut, lift and support the knuckle (to prevent damaging the ABS sensor wire harness), and press the axle out of the hub. 10. Lift the knuckle, then place a block of wood (about 2-3/4" x 1-1/2" by 5") between the upper control arm and the damper assembly. 11. Remove the boot from the lower ball joint. Page 9607 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1038 Page 6715 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S Page 2958 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Locations Diagnostic Connector - ABS: Locations Behind Right Side Of Dash Page 6295 Master Cylinder Exploded View Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6111 Caliper Shield 11. Install the caliper shield. 12. Fill the brake reservoir up, and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding 13. Operate the brake pedal several times, then adjust the parking brake. 14. After installation, perform the following checks. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the parking brake lever for operation, and adjust it if necessary. Removal WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Caliper Shield ^ Remove the caliper shield. Page 4673 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4611 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5932 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3896 Page 6060 6. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh fluid until the reservoir is refilled to the MAX (upper) level. 7. Perform brake bleeding procedures. See: System Bleed 8. Perform ABS sunctional checks using the ALB checker. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Reservoir Removal and Installation 1. Drain the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. 2. Remove the modulator unit from the vehicle. See: Removal and Installation Reservoir Location 3. Remove the reservoir from the modulator unit. 4. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal. 5. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 6. Install modulator unit. See: Removal and Installation 7. Bleed system. See: System Bleed NOTE: After installing the modulator unit and bleeding the brakes, start the engine and make sure that the ABS indicator light goes off. Wire Harness Removal and Installation - Remove the modulator unit from the vehicle. See: Removal and Installation Page 5234 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Side Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing. 3. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter housing. INSTALLATION Locations Body Control Module: Locations Left Kick Panel Page 6761 3. Hold the pulley with the special tool and tighten the pulley nut. 4. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley. Page 5034 Page 7387 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2742 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 8083 Compact Disc Player (CD): Service and Repair NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the radio fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Refer to the TSB listed below for information on how to obtain the code in the event the customer does not have the code. TSB # 98-026 April 15, 1998 Applies To: ALL with Anti-Theft Audio Units Audio Unit Anti-Theft Code Labels BACKGROUND This service bulletin describes where to attach the audio unit anti-theft labels that come in the glove box of vehicles equipped with anti-theft audio systems. If a vehicle has an anti-theft audio system, there are three peel-off labels in the glove box. Two of the labels have both the anti-theft code and the audio unit's serial number, and a third label contains only the serial number for the audio unit. During Pre Delivery Inspection, stick the label with only the serial number on the glove box. If the radio code ever needs to be retrieved through the HONDANET 2000 system, this will save you the time and labor of removing the audio unit to record the serial number. NOTES: - Also perform this procedure when installing an accessory audio unit that is equipped with an anti-theft system. - If a remanufactured audio unit is installed in a vehicle, remove the old labels and install new ones on the glove box, Radio Identification Card, and the vehicle's service records. - If the glove box is ever replaced, transfer the labels from the old glove box to the new one. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This bulletin is for information only. Skill level: Maintenance Technician PROCEDURE Page 8389 Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window motor; the right rear window motor is similar. Passenger's Window Motor Test 3. Check window motor operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: When the motor slops running, disconnect one lead immediately. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Page 3416 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 4605 Page 8791 Page 7568 Page 9305 Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance MIL Does Not Come ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Does Not Come ON NOTE: If this symptom is intermittent, check for a loose fuse No. 1 (BACK UP LIGHTS, METER LIGHTS, 10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box, a poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A18, or an intermittent open in the LT GRN/RED wire between the ECM/PCM (A181 and the gauge assembly. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 9259 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 10009 10. Remove the rear channel. 11. Remove the center channel. Page 9198 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9247 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 10029 7. Check the operation of the window. 8. If needed, repeat steps 1 through 7 on the other front door. Page 5603 Page 1015 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Photo 71 Cigarette Lighter Relay: Locations Photo 71 Behind Front Console Page 3544 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9551 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6844 When steering resistance is low, such as when driving at high speeds, or when driving straight ahead, the input shaft is near or in the neutral position, so there is little or no flow to any of the power cylinder orifices. Most of the feed pressure from the pump is bypassed to the reservoir. Because of this, the pressure stays the same in both sides of the power cylinder, resulting in low or no assist. High Assist At Lower Speeds: When steering resistance is high, such as when driving at low speeds, or when turning the wheel with the vehicle stopped, the difference in angle created between the input shaft and the valve opens the fluid passage on one side, and closes the fluid passage on the other side, at each pair of orifices. The fluid pressure increases in the side of the power cylinder fed by the larger fluid passage. This increased pressure pushes on the rack piston, allowing the steering wheel to be turned with light effort. On the other side of the power cylinder, the return passage opens allowing the steering fluid to return through the input shaft to the reservoir. The fluid passages to the power cylinder automatically change in size, increasing as the steering resistance increases. In other words, the passages become larger and power assist increases when the steering effort would normally be high, (for example, when parking or making low speed turns), and the passages become smaller and power assist decreases when the steering effort would normally be low, (for example, when driving at high speeds or straight ahead). Ex-R Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex-R Right Rear Of Engine Page 1770 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2733 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications R-134a Capacity 650 g (-50g) 23 oz (-2oz) Page 1554 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Page 493 Page 1096 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 5502 1. Install the new oil seal into the transmission housing using the special tools as shown. 2. Install the new oil seal into the clutch housing using the special tools as shown. Page 6290 Wire Harness Location - Remove the modulator unit cover, and remove the wire harness. Connector Location - Check the numbers stamped on the set plate, and connect each connector of the new wire harness to the set plate of the corresponding number. NOTE: Be sure that each connector is locked securely with the two locking tabs. - Install the modulator unit cover and modulator unit. - Check the ABS function using the ALB checker. See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Specifications Park Gear: Specifications DIMENSIONS distance between the parking brake pawl shaft and the parking brake lever roller pin. Standard: 64.5-65.5 mm (2.54-2.58 inch.) Page 2437 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 4894 Page 8226 Trailer Connector: Locations Photo 122 Left Side Of Cargo Area Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 9975 6. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Page 1805 Camshaft: Testing and Inspection NOTE: ^ Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection. ^ Remove the rocker arms and rocker shafts. 1. Put the camshaft and the camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque. ^ Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 2. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the distributor end of cylinder head. 3. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the distributor drive, then push the camshaft back and forth and read the end play. ^ Camshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 inch) - Service Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) 4. Remove the bolts, then remove the camshaft holders from the cylinder head. ^ Lift the camshaft out of cylinder head, wipe it clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or excessively worn. ^ Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder head, then set camshaft back in place. ^ Apply a plastigage strip across each journal. 5. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque as shown. 6. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest portion of plastigage on each journal. Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9377 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5653 1. Install the thrust washer, needle bearing, 1st gear, friction damper, synchro ring, and synchro spring. NOTE: Reassemble the 1st gear and friction damper before installation. 2. Install the 1st/2nd synchro hub by aligning the friction damper fingers with 1st/2nd synchro hub grooves. 3. Install the friction damper on the spacer using the special tools and a press as shown. Page 8380 6. Move the rear channel, and carefully pull the glass up. 7. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot as shown. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Windows - Front Door Glass Comes Out of Run Channel Technical Service Bulletin # 97-060 Date: 970922 Windows - Front Door Glass Comes Out of Run Channel 97-060 September 22, 1997 Applies To: 1994-97 Accord 4-door - All Front Door Glass Comes Out of Run Channel SYMPTOM When operating a front window (power or manual), the rear edge of the glass comes out of the B-pillar run channel. PROBABLE CAUSE The window regulator is out of adjustment. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the window regulator, the front channel, and the glass. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 72250-SV4-A11, H/C 4272282 Defect code: 030 Contention code: B01 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Thread Lock 3: P/N 08713-0003, H/C 2963841 Repair Procedure 1. Remove the front door panel. See section 20 of the appropriate Accord S/M. 2. Using a razor blade to cut through the adhesive, carefully peel back the plastic cover (rain protector) enough to expose the regulator, glass, and front channel fasteners. Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Torque 33 ft.lb Removal Distributor: Service and Repair Removal Distributor Removal 1. Disconnect the connector(s) from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts, then remove then distributor from the cylinder head. Page 6593 Relay Box: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 2060 Engine Mount Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3207 Page 2122 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8127 1. Stick the label containing only the serial number information on the glove box. 2. Stick the remaining two labels on the Anti-Theft Radio Identification Card and on the vehicle's service records. Page 3428 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Page 3163 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Page 6474 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 2390 Diagram Information and Instructions Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6996 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. 6. Lower the rear suspension, and position the rear damper with the welded nut pointed toward the front of the vehicle. 7. Loosely install the two flange nuts. (The illustration shows rear damper for Sedan.) 8. Loosely install the flange bolt. Page 8245 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1225 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 5855 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the solenoid pin. 2. Remove the self-locking nuts and shift lock solenoid. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 3. Install the new shift lock solenoid in the reverse order of removal, and adjust its position. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove, and tighten the self-locking nuts. NOTE: Use brand-new self-locking nuts. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement NOTE: Test the solenoid after you assembled it. Power Height Adjustable Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Height Adjustable 1. Remove the adjuster cover. Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 5-P connector from the power seat switch, then remove the switch from the adjuster cover by removing its two mounting screws. Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 8792 Page 7595 A/C Thermostat: Testing and Inspection A/C Thermostat - Test Connect battery power to the C terminal and ground the B terminal, and connect a test light between the A and C terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V, 3 W - 18 W test light. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. The light should go off at 36 - 39° F (2 - 4° C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41° F (4 - 5° C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Page 9608 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6358 Behind Right Side Of Dash Page 5211 Front Wheel Sensor: Locations Front Behind Left Front Wheel (Right Similar) A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 4999 Page 4545 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Adjustments 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (transmission in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Check that the throttle cable operates smoothly with no binding or sticking. Repair as necessary. 3. Hold the throttle link to the throttle lever, then there should be no clearance. 4. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable deflection should be 10 - 12 mm (0.39 - 0.47 in.) 5. If deflection is not within specs, loosen the locknut, turn the adjusting nut until the deflection is as specified, then retighten the locknut. 6. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Page 4420 Page 2393 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7437 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5302 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Parking Pin Switch Test/Replacement Parking Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the rear console. 2. Remove the front console panel. 3. Remove the stereo radio/cassette player. 4. Remove the front console. 5. Disconnect the parking pin switch 2-P connector from the main wire harness. Parking Pin Switch Replacement 6. Remove the self-locking nut and parking pin switch. Page 4699 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7945 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4071 Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 9850 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 2203 Engine Mount Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Page 2022 Drive Belt: Specifications Power Steering POWER STEERING PUMP BELT DEFLECTION [1] Used Belt ............................................................................................................................................. ....................... 13.0 - 16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 in) New Belt ..................................................................... ................................................................................................ 11.0 - 12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 in) POWER STEERING PUMP BELT TENSION Used Belt ............................................................................................................................................. .............................. 390 - 540 N (88 - 121 lbf) New Belt ...................................................................... ..................................................................................................... 740 - 880 N (165 - 198 lbf) [1] With a force of 98 N (22 lbf) applied, and measured between the A/C compressor and the crankshaft pulley. Page 6275 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Solenoid Valve Body PURPOSE The modulator unit opens and closes the inlet and outlet solenoid valves, and shifts the ABS high-pressure passage according to the signals from the ABS control unit. FUNCTION There are three solenoid valve assemblies, each containing an inlet and outlet valve, in the modulator unit; one for each front wheel, and one for both rear wheels. The inlet valves are normally open (open when there is no continuity to the coil), while the outlet valves are normally closed. Page 5918 Page 2866 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9352 Glove Box Lamp: Testing and Inspection 1. Open the glove box, and disconnect the 2-P connector. NOTE: If necessary, remove the glove box. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 7290 Condenser Replacement 4. Remove the four bolts and the two radiator upper mount brackets. Condenser Replacement 5. Remove the bolts, and disconnect the discharge line and the condenser line from the condenser. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting to avoid moisture and dust contamination into the system. Condenser Replacement 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and lift out the condenser as shown. NOTE: Do not damage the radiator and condenser fins when removing the condenser. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. ^ If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (ND-0IL8). ^ Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right 0-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. ^ Do not damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser. ^ Be sure to install the condenser mount cushions securely into the holes. ^ Charge the system, and test its performance. Page 1269 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 4101 Page 3059 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 8845 Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Safety Indicators (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Pinion Gear: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Backlash 0.05 - 0.15 mm --Inside Diameter 18.042 - 18.066 mm --Pinion Gear to Pinion Shaft Clearance 0.055 - 0.091 mm 0.15 mm Power Height Adjustable Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Height Adjustable 1. Remove the adjuster cover. Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 5-P connector from the power seat switch, then remove the switch from the adjuster cover by removing its two mounting screws. Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 1364 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Mechanical Specifications Evaporator Core: Mechanical Specifications RECEIVER PIPE TO EVAPORATOR Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 13 Nm (9.4 lb ft) SUCTION PIPE TO EVAPORATOR Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 31 Nm (23 lb ft) Page 352 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Page 8439 Console: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1294 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 4803 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Front Of Transmission Page 4335 Fuel Line: Testing and Inspection Sedan KL (SE, LX Without ABS)/Wagon NOTE: Check fuel system lines, hoses and fuel filter for damage, leaks or deterioration, and replace if necessary. NOTE: Check all hose clamps and retighten if necessary. Page 8539 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Tailgate Lock 1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the actuator. Tailgate Lock Actuator Test 3. Test actuator operation by connecting power and ground to the C and D terminals. Test the actuator in each direction by switching the leads. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the motor, connect power and ground only momentarily. 4. If the actuator fails to operate properly, replace it. Page 4702 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5435 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - . Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. 1ST/2ND Accumulator Body Page 2475 Radiator Fan Control Module: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Control Module Input Test NOTE: Perform the following tests with the radiator fan control module 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II) and the A/C switch OFF. If you find the cause of a problem, correct it before you continue. Page 4084 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6816 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5212 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8493 Page 5762 Shifter M/T: Service and Repair NOTE: - The shift arm cover can be removed and installed with the transmission in the car. - Lubricate all moving and sliding surfaces with the specified grease. - Turn the shin lever boot so the hole is facing down. - Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798 - 9002). - During reassembly, grease all sliding parts. - Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 087989002). REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the shim arm cover assembly. 2. Remove the spring pin, then remove the select lever, select arm and springs. Page 3967 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Photo 82 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 4608 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9213 Page 8495 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Page 1928 14. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods and set them aside with their respective caps. 15. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine in proper order. 16. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer. Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 17. Use the wooden handle of a hammer to drive the pistons out. 18. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps aver removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 19. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to avoid mix-up on reassembly. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size. Page 1569 Bleeding The Brakes With The Special Tool 5. Bleed high-pressure fluid from the maintenance bleeder with the special tool. 6. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few minutes, then stop it. Check the fluid level in the modulator reservoir and refill to the MAX level line if necessary. 7. Turn the Mode Selector switch of the checker to 2. 8. While depressing the brake pedal firmly, push the "Start Test" switch to operate the modulator. There should be kickback on the brake pedal. If not, repeat steps 5 to 8. NOTE: Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly when operating the checker. 9. Turn the Mode Selector to 3, 4, and 5. Perform step 8 for each of the test mode positions. 10. Refill the modulator reservoir to the MAX level line and install the reservoir cap. WARNING: Disconnect the ALB Checker before driving the car. A collision can result from a reduction or complete loss of braking ability, causing severe personal injury or death. Without Anti-Lock Brakes CAUTION: - Use only clean Honda Genuine DOT 3 Heavy Duty brake fluid or an equivalent DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add clean new fluid from a sealed container as required. Reservoir MAX Level 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. Page 5209 Page 5144 Page 4109 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Page 8046 Intermittent Wiper System Intermittent Wiper System Integrated Control Unit Seat Belt Reminder And Key-in Reminder System Seat Belt Reminder And Key-In Reminder System Page 8305 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9492 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 1337 M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Diagnosis by Symptom. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Page 2117 Page 516 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 2714 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 3114 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 757 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Specifications Catalyst Shield: Specifications Torque 87 in.lb Testing and Inspection Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 2321 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex Right Rear Of Engine Page 8611 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6648 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Page 3389 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8246 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 473 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Front Suspension Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Suspension Installation CAUTION: The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. Air Mix Control Heater Control Panel: Service and Repair Air Mix Control Heater Control Panel - Overhaul Air Mix Control Cable Replacement 1. Remove the self-tapping screw and clamp. 2. Lift the end of the temperature control lever up, then remove the air mix control cable. Heater Control Panel - Overhaul 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. ^ Be sure the end of the cable housing is against the top before tightening the cable clamp. ^ After assembly, check that the temperature control lever slides smoothly through the full stroke from right to left. Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8692 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Brake Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the switch. Brake Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Spindle Nut ................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 245 Nm. (181 lb. ft.) Rear Spindle Nut .............................................. ..................................................................................................................................... 181 Nm. (134 lb. ft.) Page 1366 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Safety Indicator - Component Location Index Safety Indicator - Component Location Index CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Page 3631 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 4701 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 447 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 2365 Idle Speed: Adjustments NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: M/T: 550 ± 50 rpm A/T: 550 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the idle adjusting screw. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector to the IAC valve, then remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to reset the ECM/PCM. 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: Page 7428 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Page 2775 Page 5374 Page 8843 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5795 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 406 Page 2832 Page 9934 Master Switch Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the power window master switch, and only controls driver's door window operations. 1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the 14-P and 1-P connectors from the master switch. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Page 9865 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Light Flasher Relay Below Left Side Of Dash - Photo 146 Page 6310 Parking Brake Lever: Service Precautions CAUTION: The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure. Page 2424 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires Spark Plug Inspection Page 6143 Installing Pads And Shims ^ Install the brake pads and pad shims on the caliper bracket. ^ Rotate the caliper piston clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad by turning the piston back. CAUTION: Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it sits properly. ^ Install the brake caliper Nissin Caliper ^ Install and tighten the caliper bolts while holding the caliper pins with a thin, open-end wrench. ^ After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. ^ Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then road-test. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. Akebono Calipers WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Block the front wheels before lacking up the rear of the vehicle. REMOVAL ^ Block the front wheels, loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, support the rear of vehicle on safety stands, then remove the rear wheels. ^ Release the parking brake. Specifications Radiator Cap: Specifications Release Pressure 93 - 123 kPa Front Front Wheel Sensor Remove & Install Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 9130 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect connectors. Master Switch Replacement 2. Remove the power window master switch from the door panel. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 1143 Page 5919 Page 7537 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2892 Page 6760 FLOW CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION 1. Coat the new O-rings with clean power steering fluid, then install them in the housing grooves. 2. Coat the flow control valve with clean power steering fluid. 3. Install the flow control valve, spring and control valve cover on the pump housing. 4. Tighten the three control cover bolts. PULLEY INSTALLATION 1. Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 2. Install the pump pulley as shown, then install the pulley nut. Page 8045 General Module: Testing and Inspection Integrated Control Unit - Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Integrated Control Unit - Input Test 1. Remove the driver's side kick panel, then disconnect the 16-P connector from the integrated control unit. 2. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Integrated Control Unit Page 1836 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3867 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 109 Behind Right Side Of Dash Service and Repair Release Bearing: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the release fork boot from the clutch housing. 2. Remove the release fork from the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring with pliers. Remove the release bearing. 3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by hand. CAUTION: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing with a new one. INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798 - 9002). 1. Install the release fork set spring on the release fork. 2. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. Page 9539 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 8815 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Page 3347 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4946 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the shift control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 4597 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7379 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4459 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3854 Page 2074 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection OIL PRESSURE TESTING If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install an oil pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: - Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) - Engine Oil Pressure: - At Idle: 69 kPa (10 psi) minimum - At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (50 psi) minimum If oil pressure is within specifications, replace the oil pressure switch and recheck. - If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect the oil pump. Specifications Countershaft: Specifications Countershaft Specifications Countershaft Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit COUNTERSHAFT Diameter of needle bearing contact area 38.000 - 38.015 mm 37.95 mm mm Diameter of ball bearing and needle bearing contact area 24.987 - 25.000 mm 24.94 mm mm Diameter of 1st gear contact area 39.984 - 40.000 mm 39.93 mm mm Runout (Maximum) 0.02 mm mm 0.05 mm COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR Inside Diameter 47.009 - 47.025 mm 47.08 mm mm End Play 0.06 - 0.23 mm 0.23 mm mm COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR Inside Diameter 47.009 - 47.025 mm 47.08 mm End Play 0.10 - 0.15 mm 0.18 mm Thickness 28.94 - 28.97 mm --- Page 5264 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 3935 Page 9786 Page 8799 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Radio - Static When Adjusting the Volume Radio/Stereo: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Static When Adjusting the Volume 97-008 BODY FEB 3, 1997 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Static When Adjusting the Radio Volume PROBLEM Static from the speakers when the radio volume knob is first adjusted. After you move the knob a few times, the static usually stops. If the vehicle sits for several hours, the problem may recur. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Accord: LX: Coupe - ALL LX: Wagon - ALL LX: 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGCD5... TA274904 EX:ALL 1997 Accord: LX: Coupe -Thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA000775 EX: 4-door -Thru VIN 1HGCD5. . . VA016515 V6 -Thru VIN 1HGCE6. . . VA002045 Coupe -Thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA003007 Wagon-Thru VIN 1HGCE1 . . . VA001323 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with the correct remanufactured unit listed under PARTS INFORMATION. For radio removal, refer to page 23-211 of the 1996 or 1997 Accord Service Manual. NOTE: To return a removed radio, follow the appropriate steps in Service Bulletin 89-029, Audio Unit In Warranty Exchange/Out of Warranty Repair; dated May 6, 1996. PARTS INFORMATION Auto Radio Tuner: LX: P/N 39100-SV4-A01RM H/C 4260428 EX: 4-door - P/N 391 00-SV4-A00RM H/C 4435046 Coupe - P/N 391 00-SV2-A00RM H/C 4435020 Wagon - P/N 39100-SV5-A40RM H/C 4435087 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 6070 Wheel Sensor: Testing and Inspection TESTING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Front Wheel Sensor Rear Wheel Sensor - Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. - Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the pulser all the way around while rotating the hub bearing unit by hand. Specs: Standard Gap 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 in), the probability is a distorted knuckle which should be replaced. Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: Customer Interest Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Page 3146 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1979 ^ Repeat for all rockers. - If over limit, replace rocker shaft and all overtolerance rocker arms. NOTE: If any intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary). Manual Inspection NOTE: When reassembling the primary rocker arm, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. 1. Inspect the rocker arm piston. Push it manually. ^ If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: ^ Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. ^ Bundle the rocker arms with a rubber band to keep them together as a set. ^ Set the timing plate and return spring as shown below. VTEC Rocker Arms Inspection VTEC ROCKER ARMS Manual Inspection 1. Set the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). 2. Remove the cylinder head cover. 3. Push the intake mid rocker arm on the No. 1 cylinder manually. Page 3401 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 3990 Page 4462 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 7701 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4314 Diagram Information and Instructions Key Cylinder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 8437 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Ball Joint Boot Replacement Ball Joint: Service and Repair Ball Joint Boot Replacement TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAG-SD40700 Ball Joint Boot clip Guide REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the set ring and the boot. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the boot installation section with grease. 2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip with grease. 3. Wipe the grease off the sliding surface of the ball pin and pack with fresh grease. CAUTION: ^ Keep grease off the boot installation section and the tapered section of the ball pin. ^ Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the boot in the groove of the boot installation section securely, then bleed air. 5. Install the upper and lower ball joint boot set rings using the special tools as follows: a. Lower ball joint: Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt until the end of the tool aligns with the groove on the boot. Slide the set ring over the tool and into position. b. Upper ball joint: Hold the tool over the ball joint, then slide the set ring over the tool and into position. CAUTION: After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination and wipe it if necessary. Page 5651 NOTE: If the thicknesses of 2nd gear and the spacer are less than the standard, replace them with new ones. - If the thicknesses of 2nd gear and the spacer are within the standard, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one. COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLE 1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench vise with wood blocks. 2. Raise the locknut tab from the groove in the countershaft, then remove the locknut and the spring washer. 3. Remove the ball bearing using a press as shown. Page 1619 Relay Box: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Specifications Parking Pawl: Specifications DIMENSIONS Parking Brake Pawl Shaft and Parking Brake Lever Roller Pin. Standard: 64.5-65.5 mm (2.54-2.58 inch.) Parking Brake Stop 1-PN# 24537-PA9-003 L1 11.00mm(0.433 inch) L2 11.00mm(0.433 inch) 2-PN# 24538-PA9-003 L1 10.80mm(0.425 inch) L2 10.65mm(0.419 inch) 1-PN# 24539-PA9-003 L1 10.60mm(0.417 inch) L2 10.30mm(0.406 inch) Front Page 3450 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Air Mix Cable Air Door Cable: Adjustments Air Mix Cable 1. Disconnect the air mix control cable from the air mix control arm and clamp. 2. Set the temperature control dial to MAX. COOL. 3. Turn the air mix control arm, as shown, then connect the end of the air mix control cable to the air mix control arm. 4. Gently slide the air mix control cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the air mix control cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move, then snap the air mix control cable housing into the clamp. NOTE: The heater valve cable should always be adjusted whenever the air mix control cable has been disconnected. Page 3683 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Page 9287 Page 7044 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Photo 57 Door Switch: Locations Photo 57 At Driver's Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 5037 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 1395 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires Spark Plug Inspection Page 120 Radiator Fan Control Module: Diagrams Radiator Fan Control Module Terminals Radiator Fan Control Module Terminals NOTE: Different wires with same color have been given a number suffix to distinguish them (for example YEL 1 and YEL 2 are not the same). Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations Driver's Door (Right Front Similar) Page 1650 Page 4433 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 4296 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8913 Page 9671 Page 3509 Page 5282 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the solenoid pin. 2. Remove the self-locking nuts and shift lock solenoid. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 3. Install the new shift lock solenoid in the reverse order of removal, and adjust its position. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove, and tighten the self-locking nuts. NOTE: Use brand-new self-locking nuts. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement NOTE: Test the solenoid after you assembled it. Page 7509 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser outlet line where refrigerant is in a high temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and open the circuit. This removes ground, and the compressor will stop running. Page 39 General Module: Testing and Inspection Integrated Control Unit - Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Integrated Control Unit - Input Test 1. Remove the driver's side kick panel, then disconnect the 16-P connector from the integrated control unit. 2. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Integrated Control Unit Page 2697 Page 8662 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 180 Behind Front Grille Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch A Page 470 Page 4332 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7520 Page 3814 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 307 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 1558 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications HFC-134a R-134a Page 1041 Page 1611 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7970 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Hands-Free Microphone Is Inoperative) Page 9189 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7951 Page 7352 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4264 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. 1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure regulator,then relieve fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose. 3. Remove the two 6 mm retainer bolts. NOTE: Replace the 0-ring. - When assembling the fuel pressure regulator, apply clean engine oil to the 0-ring and assemble it into its proper position, taking care not to damage the 0-ring. Page 7064 Tires: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. Honda will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. Honda will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. Unless otherwise specified, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. Page 9682 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Inner trim cover ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 3. Remove the corner sash trim. 4. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. 5. Remove the bolt and nut. Peel the glass run channel out of the rear channel. Page 5228 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Transmission Housing Removal Transmission Housing: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Removal TOOL REQUIRED - 07HAC-PK4010A Housing Puller - Or Equivalent NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. - Blow out all passages. - When removing the transmission housing, replace the following: Transmission housing gasket and Lock washer. 1. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts and hangers. 2. Align the spring pin of the control shaft with the transmission housing groove by turning the control shaft. Page 5711 B: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) C: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) Specifications Idler Gear: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Reverse Shaft Holder .......................................................................................................................... ................................................. 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Secondary Shaft .......................................................................................................................................... 226 Nm (166 ft. lbs.)-0-167 Nm (123 ft. lbs.) Page 6168 Disc Runout 2. Use wheel nuts and suitable plain washers to hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount a dial indicator as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.4 in) from the outer edge of the disc. Specs: Brake disc runout Service Limit 0.10 mm (0.004 in) Max Refinish Limit 23.0 mm (0.91 in) NOTE: New disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in). 3. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. DISC THICKNESS AND PARALLELISM Disc Runout 1. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 in) in from the outer edge of the disc. NOTE: Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Specs: Brake disc thickness 24.9-25.1 mm (0.98-0.99 in) Max refinishing limit 21.0 mm (0.83 in) Brake Disc Parallelism 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) max. 2. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Page 1877 Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars) The Connecting Rod Journal Codes are stamped in one of the following locations. Page 236 Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Hazard Flasher Relay Left Kick Panel - Photo 93 Page 9749 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6833 Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair Steering Lock Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Steering Lock Replacement 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable, then disconnect the starter (positive) cable. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9245 Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 572 Page 5622 Locations Cornering Lamp: Locations Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Page 461 Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS Operation The safing sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Diagram Information and Instructions Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8621 Underside of Driver's Seat Photo 168 Page 1911 15. Hold the rear balancer shaft with a 6 x 100 mm bolt, then install the balancer driven near. 16. Install the balancer gear case to the oil pump. NOTE: Align the groove on the pulley edge to the pointer on the gear case while holding the rear balancer with 6 x 100 mm bolt, then install the gear case. Page 5654 4. Install the needle bearing and the ball bearing using a special tool and a press as shown. 5. Install the spring washer. 6. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench vise with wood blocks. 7. Tighten the new locknut to the correct torque, then stake the locknut tab into the groove. Torque: 127 - 0 - 127 Nm (94 - 0 - 94 ft. lbs.). 8. To reassemble the components see installation of case. See: Transmission Housing/Service and Repair Page 8854 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Localized Tread Wear Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Controled Idle Speed Man. Trans. 750 RPM Auto Trans. (N) 750 RPM Page 2596 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - Gauge Test 1. Check the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT gauge sending unit and ground it with a jumper wire. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the pointer of the ECT gauge starts moving toward the "H" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "H on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge. ^ If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all, check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the wires are OK, replace the ECT gauge. ^ If the ECT gauge works, test the ECT sending unit. Functional Test Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - With the engine stopped, depress the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then depress the pedal hard and hold it for 15 seconds. If the pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is bypassing internally, or the brake system (master cylinder, lines, modulator, proportioning valve, or caliper) is leaking. - Start the engine with the pedal depressed. If the pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating normally. If the pedal height does not vary, the booster or check valve is faulty. - With the engine running, depress the brake pedal lightly. Apply just enough pressure to hold back automatic transmission creep. If the brake pedal sinks more than 25 mm (1.0 in.) in three minutes, the master cylinder is faulty. A slight change in pedal height when the AC compressor cycles on and off is normal. (The AC compressor load changes the vacuum available to the booster.) Electrical Specifications Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine Page 9226 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3082 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 2109 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Component Locations Compressor Clutch: Component Locations Lower Left Front Of Engine Page 7594 A/C Thermostat: Description and Operation A/C Thermostat The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns OFF the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3°C (37°F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. The blower motor will keep running when the sensor turns OFF the compressor. Page 4389 Page 7989 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6750 b. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. CAUTION: Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Page 5005 3. Install the special tool on the transmission housing, then remove the housing as shown. 4. Remove the reverse idler gear from the transmission housing. 5. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, reverse gear, secondary shaft 2nd gear, thrust washer, and thrust needle bearing together from the countershaft and secondary shaft. 6. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then remove the fork with the reverse selector from the countershaft. 7. Remove the needle bearings, thrust needle bearing, and splined washer from the secondary shaft. 8. Remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly. 9. Remove the mainshaft sub-assembly. 10. Remove the countershaft sub-assembly. 11. Remove the differential assembly. Page 9062 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Pin Switch Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 6325 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Leak Test - Depress the brake pedal with the engine running, then stop the engine. If the pedal height does not vary while depressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. - With the engine stopped, depress the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first depressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. If the pedal position does not vary, check the booster check valve. Page 4411 Page 2780 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Page 8152 1. Stick the label containing only the serial number information on the glove box. 2. Stick the remaining two labels on the Anti-Theft Radio Identification Card and on the vehicle's service records. Page 6534 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3506 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5050 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5053 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3469 Page 4517 Page 3976 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Page 6056 B) Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. C) While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. D) Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. E) Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. F) Tighten the maintenance bleeder. 4. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. Fluid Level Check 5. Repeat steps A through F twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 6. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. 7. After replacement, start the engine and make sure that the ABS indicator light goes off. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Fluid Capacity (approx) 150 ml (5.0 fl.oz) Relieving System Pressure CAUTION: - Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely before performing the modulator function check, disposing the modulator unit, and ABS pump motor replacement. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Do not reuse the drained brake fluid. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. Page 2951 Specifications Parking Brake Lever: Specifications Notches For Full Lock .......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 7 - 11 Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Right Side Of Tailgate Page 9657 Headlamp Relay: Locations Photo Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9452 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4183 Page 6366 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Brake Fluid Level Switch Test 1. Remove the reservoir cap. Check that the float moves up and down freely; if it doesn't, replace the reservoir cap assembly. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 855 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Remove the steering column covers. Page 1124 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9752 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2713 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 439 Page 7824 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8300 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4050 Alternator FR Signal: Testing and Inspection This signals the ECM/PCM when the Alternator (ALT) is charging. Page 9481 Switch Test 10. Remove the two Torx bolts using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's airbag assembly. Switch Test 11. Check for continuity between the horn positive terminal and steering wheel bolt with the horn switch pressed. ^ If there is continuity, check: - the cable reel. - the set/resume switch. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the horn switch. Ball Joint Removal and Installation Tools Ball Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Ball Joint Removal and Installation Tools 99-061 July 27, 1999 Applies To: 1994-99 Accord - ALL 1992-99 Prelude - ALL 1995-98 Odyssey - ALL Ball Joint Removal and Installation Tools The special tools required to remove and install lower ball joints on certain Honda vehicles are now available from American Honda through normal parts ordering procedures. Refer to Service Bulletin 99-039, Safety Recall: Lower Ball Joints, for lower ball joint removal and installation instructions. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 5026 9. Install the disc spring. NOTE: Install the disc spring in the direction shown. 10. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a minimum of 30 minutes. 11. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate with flat side toward the disc. NOTE: Before installing the plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch drum is free of dirt or other foreign matter. 12. Install the snap ring. Page 5582 7. Press a new wheel bearing into the hub using the special tools and a press as shown. 8. Install the hub unit on the brake disc and tighten the flange bolts. NOTE: Before installing the hub unit, clean the mating surfaces of the hub unit and brake disc. Page 4811 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Top Of Transmission Page 6144 Caliper Removal ^ Hold the caliper pins with a thin, open-end wrench, and remove the two caliper bolts and the caliper from the bracket. CAUTION: Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to prevent dust and dirt from entering inside. Support the caliper with a piece of wire so that it does not hang from the brake hose. Pad Removal ^ Remove the pad shim and brake pads. INSPECTION ^ Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. Specs Standard 8.5 - 9.5 mm (0.33 - 0.37 in) Service Limit 1.6 mm (0.06 in) Caliper Bolts 25 Nm (2.5kg m, 18lb ft) Page 6830 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2953 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9557 Photo 106 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 7579 Page 2051 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8837 Door Lock Actuator Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Door Lock Actuator Photo 60 Driver's Door (Right Front Similar) Photo 61 System Views Illustrated Index Page 5927 Page 4670 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6849 14. Disconnect the two lines from the valve body unit on the steering gearbox. CAUTION: After disconnecting the lines, plug or seal the lines with a piece of tape or equivalent to prevent foreign materials from entering the valve body unit. NOTE: ^ Place the lines disconnected in the previous step at the rear side of the gearbox so that they do not hinder in the gearbox removal. ^ Do not loosen the cylinder lines A and B between the valve body unit and cylinder. 15. Remove the stiffener plate first, then remove the right mounting brackets. 16. Pull the steering gearbox all the way down to clear the pinion shaft from the bulkhead. 17. Move the steering gearbox to the right so the left rack end clears the rear beam. 18. Hold the steering gearbox and slide the rack all the way to the left, then place the left rack end below the rear beam. 19. Move the steering gearbox to the left, and tilt the left side down to remove it from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the two power steering lines and cylinder lines when removing the gearbox. Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the feed line and cylinder lines when installing the gearbox. 1. Before installing the gearbox, slide the rack all the way to right. Page 8758 Page 1361 Page 6645 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Page 815 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2325 Page 3388 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Locations Specifications Radius Rod: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Locking Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Flange Bolts .......................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.) Page 9159 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, perform the input test for the daytime running lights control unit. Page 8965 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Key-in Reminder System - Ignition Key Switch Test When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper in the integrated control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch. With ground at the "BLU/WHT" and "A1" terminals, the beeper sounds. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 5 and No. 8. ^ There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. ^ There should be no continuity with the key removed. Photo 64 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 64 Behind Gauge Assembly Page 5887 Page 7902 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8826 Page 1985 6. Install the camshaft oil seal using the special tools as shown. 7. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. ^ Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 6 mm bolts are (11), (12), (13),(14) 8. Install the back cover. Page 3789 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Safety Indicator - Troubleshooting NOTE: ^ The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. ^ Make sure that the ceiling light bulb and the trunk (tailgate) indicator light bulb are not blown. Page 3161 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Separating the Tire From the Wheel Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Page 9251 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Removal Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal WARNING: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect positive cable. 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel lower cover. 3. Disconnect the connector between the airbag and cable reel. NOTE: Some SRS system connectors have a spring loaded lock. To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve toward the stop. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half itself. Page 3361 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9589 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6855 6. Hold the steering rack with a wrench, and unscrew the rack end with another wrench. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 7. Loosen the locknut and remove the rack guide screw. 8. Remove the spring and rack guide from the gearbox housing. 9. Remove the cylinder lines A and B from the gearbox. 10. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly moving the steering rack back and forth. Page 8332 11. Install the plastic cover and all removed parts. NOTE; ^ Apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. ^ Do not plug the elongated holes. ^ Sedan; To prevent contamination, cover the hole at location A with adhesive tape. 12. Install the door panel. NOTE: ^ Make sure the door harness is not pinched. ^ If necessary, replace any damaged clips. ^ Make sure the connectors are connected properly. 13. Instal) the armrest pocket (sedan/wagon, passenger's) and inner handle. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 14. If applicable, install the regulator handle. 15. Install the mirror mount cover panel. Page 531 Page 9094 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3048 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Photo 57 Door Switch: Locations Photo 57 At Driver's Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 8010 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 2896 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Shift Fork: Customer Interest M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Page 1830 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex Right Rear Of Engine Page 643 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 180 Behind Front Grille Page 8920 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 8953 Page 443 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6706 7. Install the brake hose bracket with the brake hose mounting bolts. CAUTION: Be careful not to twist the hose more than necessary. 8. Install the new spindle nut, then tighten and stake the nut. 9. Install the front wheel with the wheel nuts. NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. 10. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 3556 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5006 Transmission Housing: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Bearings Replacement TRANSMISSION HOUSING BEARINGS REPLACEMENT 1. To remove the mainshaft, countershaft and secondary shaft bearings from the transmission housing, expand each snap ring with snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out. NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's necessary to clean the grooves in the housing. 2. Expand each snap ring with snap ring pliers, then insert the new bearing part-way into it, then release the pliers. Push the bearing down into the transmission until the ring snaps in place around it. NOTE: Install with groove side of the housing facing inside the transmission housing. Page 9286 Page 8566 Technical Service Bulletin # 97-028 Date: 970331 Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair 97-028 Applies To: ALL Models March 31, 1997 Minor Paint Finish Repair The first thing a new vehicle owner sees when he or she takes delivery of a new vehicle is the paint finish. Therefore, making the vehicle look good is very important. However, customer feedback has pointed out that many new vehicles are delivered with scratches and swirl marks. This is especially true with dark colored vehicles. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the paint finish using the tools, supplies, and procedures recommended for the type of damage (scratches, swirl marks, etc.) and for the color of the paint WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None: Information only. RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND SUPPLIES To repair the paint finish, you should use these tools and supplies: Tools and Safety Equipment Mil gauge (film thickness gauge) * Pro Gauge II, or equivalent * ETG (Electronic Thickness Gauge), or equivalent These mil gauges are commercially available. They can be purchased from Pro Motorcar Products at 800-334-2843. - Variable speed electric polisher - Dual action orbital polisher (electric or pneumatic) - Eye protection (face shield or safety goggles) Supplies 9" Foam polishing pads (do not use wool type) - Clean, 100% cotton terry cloth towels or soft flannel cloth - Wet/dry sandpaper (1500 - 2000 grit) - Soft sanding pad - 50/50 Solution of isopropyl alcohol and water While we cannot recommend one manufacturer over another, any of the manufacturers listed here can provide you with quality products through their nationwide distributor network. Contact them for your paint repair supply needs, choose one, and then use the system of only that one manufacturer. If you need to know how to use the products, ask the manufacturer for training. 3M Automotive Trades Division 22100 Telegraph Road P.O. Box 358 Southfield, MI 48037-0358 Phone Number: 800-521-8180 Ext. 6890 Meguiar's 17991 Mitchell South Irvine, CA 92714 Phone Number: 800-347-5700 MOC Products 12306 Montague Street Pacoima, CA 91331 Phone Number: 818-896-2258 Repair Procedure The following procedures may not apply to all conditions or colors. Use the procedure that best suits the condition and color of the vehicle you're Page 8882 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Description Safety Indicator System: Bulbs are used to indicate when the trunk lid or a door is not fully closed, or when a brake light is faulty. The bulbs will remain ON for about two seconds after the ignition switch has been turned ON (II) to show that the system circuit is functioning. Brake Light Bulb Failure Indicator: If all brake light bulbs are OK, the indicator light stays off because the WHT/GRN wire is constantly being grounded by the brake light failure sensor. With the brake light off, the ground is provided through the diode, the failure sensor relay coil, and the bulb filaments. With the brake light on, both relays in the sensor, connected in series, supply ground. If either of the two bulbs is not working, the chain is broken and the WHT/GRN wire is not being grounded. The indicator light comes on. Page 891 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3758 Page 1912 17. Check alignment of pointers after installing the gear case. 18. Apply liquid gasket on oil pump and right side cover mating areas as shown. 19. Install the oil pan gasket and oil pan. NOTE: ^ Use a new oil pan gasket. ^ Install the oil pan no more than five minutes after applying the liquid gasket. 20. Tighten the nuts finger-tight at six points as shown. 21. Tighten all bolts and nuts, starting from nut (1), clockwise in three steps. NOTE: Excessive tightening can cause distortion of oil pan gasket, and oil leakage. Page 2727 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Page 8424 Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1108 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 6983 Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Installation CAUTION: The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. NOTE: - Wipe off the dirt, oil or grease on the threads before tightening the fasteners. - The right and left damper forks are not interchangeable. The left damper fork is marked with "V4L" while the right damper fork is marked with "V4R". - The right and left upper arms are not interchangeable. The left upper arm is marked with "VL" or "VLG" while the right arm is marked with "VR" or "VRG". - The stabilizer bar is symmetrical. Install with the paint mark facing rear of the vehicle. - After installing the suspension arm, check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 5548 Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair DISASSEMBLE 1. Remove the set ring from the inboard joint. 2. To remove the boot band, pry up the locking tabs with a screwdriver and raise the end of the band. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the boot. NOTE: Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise with soft jaws. If the boot band is the welded type, cut it off as shown. 3. Mark each roller and inboard joint to identify the locations of rollers and grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint on the shop towel. NOTE: Be careful not to drop the rollers when separating them from the inboard joint. Page 3997 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9622 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7408 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Overhaul Overhaul 1. Pull out the A/C thermostat sensor from the evaporator fins. 2. Remove the self-tapping screws and clamps from the housings. 3. Carefully separate the housings, then remove the evaporator. 4. If necessary, remove the expansion valve. NOTE: When loosening the expansion valve nuts, use a second wrench to hold the expansion valve or evaporator pipe. Otherwise, they can be damaged. 5. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Make note of following items. ^ Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (ND OIL8) before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. ^ Install the expansion valve capillary tube with the capillary tube in contact with the suction line directly, and wrap it with tape. ^ Reinstall the A/C thermostat sensor to its original location. Page 2879 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 77 Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) Reconnect the 14-P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Page 9110 Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch At Left Rear Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 510 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6340 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 9090 Page 3489 PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) Page 321 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9096 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Specifications Fluid Pump: Specifications CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance: Standard (New) ATF Pump Drive Gear ........................................................................................................................ 0.210 - 0.265 mm (0.0083 - 0.0104 inch.) ATF Pump Driven Gear ...................................................................................................................... 0.035 - 0.063 mm (0.0014 - 0.0025 inch.) ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard (New): .................................................................................................................................................... 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 inch.) Service Limit: ................................................................................. ......................................................................................... 0.07 mm (0.003 inch.) Page 8836 Page 3869 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 360 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Page 4373 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Photo Starter Relay: Locations Photo Below Left Side Of Dash Page 9202 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 828 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2862 Page 4355 Page 6100 Brake Caliper: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. ^ When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. ^ Keep grease off the discs and pads. Airbag Handling and Storage Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbags. it has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 26 Page 6565 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7202 Page 3517 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7901 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Page 2587 Heater Core: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before: - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot; the engine coolant is under pressure and could severely scald you. 2. Open the clamp, then disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm. Page 4700 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7156 Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection A/C Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 9217 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3451 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Driver Airbag Replacement Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Airbag Replacement After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, the airbag assemblies and the SRS unit must be replaced. WARNING: STORE A REMOVED AIRBAG ASSEMBLY WITH THE PAD SURFACE UP. IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. CAUTION: - Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. When repairing, use only new SRS parts. - Carefully inspect the airbag assembly before you install it. Do not install an airbag assembly that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Always disconnect the airbag connector(s) when the harness is disconnected. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag assembly. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors: Airbag Assembly Replacement Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. 4. Remove the airbags: Page 2119 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Photo 80 Engine Control Module: Locations Photo 80 Right Front Of Floor, Under Carpet Page 8111 Page 1030 Page 8755 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4715 Page 1772 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4371 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 575 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4630 Page 5863 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the shift control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 4452 Page 5524 6. Press the intermediate shaft bearing out of the bearing support using the special tools and a press as shown. ASSEMBLE Page 6845 Steering Gear: Adjustments RACK GUIDE ADJUSTMENT TOOL REQUIRED - 07916-SA50001 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm NOTE: Perform rack guide adjustment with the wheels in the straight ahead position. 1. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut with the special tool, then loosen the rack guide screw. 2. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.), then loosen it. 3. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm (35 inch lbs.), then back it off to specified angle. Specified Return Angle: 20 ± 5° 4. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide screw. 5. Check for tight or loose steering through the complete turning travel. 6. Perform following inspections: ^ Steering operation. ^ Power assist with vehicle parked. Page 1858 Balance Shaft: Specifications Balancer Drive Gear Case Bolts 18 ft.lb Balancer Drive Gear Case Nut 18 ft.lb Balancer Belt Drive Pulley Bolt 22 ft.lb Balancer Driven Gear Bolt 18 ft.lb Locations Page 7596 A/C Thermostat: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Recover the refrigerant with a Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. 2. Disconnect the receiver line and the suction line from the evaporator. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting to avoid moisture and dust contamination into the system. 3. Remove the glove box. 4. Remove the glove box frame. Page 4319 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3653 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7921 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 6 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's door master power door lock switch up in the unlock position. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key in the ignition switch and remove it. Repeat this four more times within 10 seconds, then leave the key in the switch. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that all power door locks (except the driver's) cycle to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the system. 5. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. (You can program two transmitters per vehicle.) 6. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 7 Programming the Transmitter Page 945 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7197 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Specifications Countershaft: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Countershaft Lock Nut ............................................................................................................................... 226 Nm (166 ft. lbs.)-0-167 Nm (123 ft. lbs.) Page 979 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Center Rear of Engine Page 4227 Fuel Injector Resistor: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the injector resistor connector. 2. Check for resistance between each of the injector resistor terminals (6, 5, 3 and 2) and the power terminal (1). Resistance should be: 5 - 7 ohms INJECTOR RESISTOR 6P CONNECTOR (C132) Replace the injector resistor if any of the resistances are outside of the specification. A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 4671 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3112 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3326 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 8106 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 2520 Page 4718 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6657 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 2766 Page 3642 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9232 A/T Gear Position Indicator Page 8620 Power Seat Motor: Locations Up-Down Motor Photo 168 Underside Of Driver's Seat Photo 176 Page 1583 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 5742 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Page 9531 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8973 Lamp Out Sensor: Testing and Inspection Brake Light Failure Sensor Test 1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the brake pedal is pressed. ^ If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. ^ If one of the brake lights does not come on, check whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to step 2. ^ If none of the brake lights come on, check the brake light circuit. 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the side box. 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on, when the No. 1 terminal of the 6-P connector is grounded and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire between the safety indicator and the No. 1 terminal of the failure sensor, and whether the safety indicator circuit (printed circuit board) has a problem. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on and stay on, go to step 4. 4. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II) with the No. 2 terminal of the 6-P connector grounded and the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, replace the failure sensor. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP does not stay on, check for an open in the BLK wire between the No. 2 terminal of the failure sensor and ground, and check for a poor ground at G551. Page 7792 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Center Seat Belt CENTER BELT AND REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES 1. Slide the front seat forward fully. 2. Remove these items: - Rear seat-backs - Rear seat cushion 3. Remove these items: - Rear bulkhead cover - Rear side trim panel - High mount brake light - Lock cylinder trim - Center belt cover - Rear shelF 4. Remove the side trim, both sides as necessary. Center Seat Belts - Coupe 5. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B). Page 9750 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. A/C Charging & Testing Valve A/C Pressure Switch Page 2996 Technician Safety Information Tires: Technician Safety Information WARNING: This vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to the SRS component and wiring location view in order to determine whether you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring. when you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring, refer to the SRS service information. failure to follow warnings could result in possible air bag deployment, personal injury, or otherwise unneeded SRS system repairs. Page 4648 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3158 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6852 13. Install the steering joint cover with the clamps and clips. 14. Connect the shift linkage. Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain. 15. Install the three way catalytic converter with the new gaskets and new self-locking nuts, and connect the primary heated oxygen sensor (primary H02S) connector. 16. Thread the right and left tie-rod ends onto the rack an equal number of turns. Page 4365 Page 1719 Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play 0 - 0.05 mm Note: Front and Rear. Page 7463 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Relief Valve Replacement 1. Remove the relief valve and the 0-ring. NOTE: ^ Do not let the compressor oil run out. ^ Make sure there is no foreign matter in the system. 2. Clean the mating surfaces. 3. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (ND 0IL8) before installing it. NOTE: ^ To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. ^ Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. ^ Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; if may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. 4. Install and tighten the relief valve, 5. Charge the system, and test its performance. Page 4986 Accumulator: Service and Repair 1ST/2ND ACCUMULATOR BODY NOTE: 1st/2nd accumulator body is part of valve body, see valve body for more information See: Valve Body/Service and Repair NOTE: - Clean all part thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out ail passages. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check ball; it may magnetize the ball. Page 2488 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7488 A/C Pressure Switch Page 477 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6254 Brake Hose/Line: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. ^ When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. ^ Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 10010 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 13. Install the glass run channel and center channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel on the door as shown. Page 4021 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Torque 13 ft.lb Page 6452 Starter Motor: Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 6821 Page 1039 Page 3348 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9808 Page 8524 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times, This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Move the driver's seat forward, and locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor, underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch on. 3. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit with a pen or pencil. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Check that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front marker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. If you have other transmitters to program, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the programming mode. Page 4902 Mainshaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 331 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2813 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6775 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 6230 Caliper Shield 11. Install the caliper shield. 12. Fill the brake reservoir up, and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 13. Operate the brake pedal several times, then adjust the parking brake. 14 After installation, perform the following checks. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the parking brake lever for operation, and adjust it if necessary. Page 8173 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Page 2115 Photo 106 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 3452 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Locations EGR Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 1934 4. Check the difference between piston pin diameter and connecting rod small end diameter. ^ Piston pin-to Connecting Rod Interference: Standard (New): 0.013-0.032 mm (0.0005-0.0013 inch) Page 4880 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Electrical Diagrams Page 7553 Blower Motor Speed (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3376 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2612 Radiator Fan Control Module: Locations Photo View Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Page 1651 Page 5853 Key Interlock Solenoid Test 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No. 4 and No. 7 terminals. ^ If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. ^ If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Page 3969 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3808 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6157 ^ Install the vibration damper on the disc, and install the protective band around the wheel lug nuts. ^ Mount the lathe to the caliper bracket with Honda Quick-Mount Adapters. The adapters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program; contact Special Tools at 800-346-6327. The advantage of using the adapters is that they don't have to be removed from the lathe once they are installed. Page 9456 Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 7231 Page 10036 Wiper Relay: Locations Photo 26 Beneath Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7535 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3275 This signals the ECM/PCM when there is a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system. Page 9728 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 2903 Page 6429 Alternator: Service and Repair Disassembly and Reassembly/Overhaul Alternator Overhaul NOTE: Do not remove the pulley unless the front bearing needs replacement. To loosen the pulley locknut, use 10 mm and 22 mm wrenches. If necessary, use an impact wrench. Page 5064 Countershaft: Service and Repair OVERHAUL OF COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY NOTE: - Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly. - Inspect the thrust needle bearings and the needle bearings for galling and rough movement. - Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings. - Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector hub, reverse selector and one-way clutch in the direction shown. REPLACEMENT OF COUNTERSHAFT 1ST/3RD GEAR TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0010100 Attachment - Or Equivalent Page 9577 Page 6862 5. Apply vinyl tape to the splines and stepped portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 6. Fit the new O-ring in the groove of the pinion shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring over the shaft and the groove in on the pinion shaft. 7. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft. 8. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the valve seal ring that was installed on the pinion shaft. 9. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring. 10. Move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft. 11. Remove the special tool. 12. Turn the special tool over, and set the smaller diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring. Move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft. 13. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the special tool. Set the new seal rings over the special tool from the smaller diameter end of the tool, and expand the seal rings. Do two rings at a time from each end of the sleeve. NOTE: ^ Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal rings using the special tool (sizing tool). ^ There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black and brown. Do not mix the different types of sleeve seal rings as they are not compatible. 14. Set the special tool in the grooves in the sleeve, and set each ring in each groove securely. Page 1672 Part 2 Of 2 Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Page 7624 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 2967 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Page 9350 Glove Box Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Dash And Console Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4848 A/T Gear Position Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 9617 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6994 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Coil Spring REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear seat (Sedan) or the rear seat cushion and side-bolsters (Wagon) or the rear bulkhead cover and right gusset cover (Coupe). 3. Pull back the front of the quarter trim panel, and remove the two flange nuts. (The illustration shows rear damper for Sedan.) 4. Remove the flange bolt. 5. Lower the rear suspension and remove the rear damper. Page 7660 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or at least for three minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, replace the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags were not deployed, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit. Do not disassemble the SRS unit. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, and disconnection of the 18P connector. Be sure the SRS unit is installed securely to the specified torque. TORQUE: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................... 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, and keep it away from dust. Store the SRS unit in a cool (less than 104° F/40° C) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Page 4036 Page 3149 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8383 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 13. Install the glass run channel and center channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel on the door as shown. Page 1148 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 6270 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Connector Locations Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 6914 18. Tighten the C-frame and press the ball joint into the knuckle. 19. 1997 Accord and all Odyssey only: Reinstall the brake rotor/hub assembly. Torque the flange bolts to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). Reinstall the brake caliper. Torque the mounting bolts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 20. Apply wheel bearing grease to the axle splines. 21. Remove the wooden block, then install the axle into the hub. To avoid damaging the ABS sensor harness, do not let the knuckle hang by its weight. * 22. Distribute the grease inside the ball joint by moving the ball joint stud left-and-right and back-and-forth about ten times. Then rotate the stud in a circle several times. * 23. Install the lower control arm onto the ball joint. 24. Install the ball joint castle nut. Torque the nut to 49-59 N.m (36-43 lb-ft). Install the new cotter pin. 25. Prelude Type SH only: Reinstall the radius rod to the ball joint. Torque the castle nut to 69-78 N.m (51-58 lb-ft). 26. Apply oil to the threads and flange of the new spindle nut. Install the new spindle nut; torque it to 245 N.m (181 lb-ft). 27. Stake the spindle nut. 28. Repeat steps 2 through 27 on the other side. 29. Reinstall the front wheels. Tighten the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 30. Lower the vehicle. 31. Center-punch a completion mark above the fourth character of the engine compartment VIN. Page 9053 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9833 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Remove the steering column covers. Page 6691 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 3124 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 1012 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 4669 Page 8354 Coupe: Check the guide pin for damage, and replace it if necessary. NOTE: Scribe a line around the guide pin to show the original location. 7. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. Page 9113 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 8429 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7413 A/C Thermostat: Testing and Inspection A/C Thermostat - Test Connect battery power to the C terminal and ground the B terminal, and connect a test light between the A and C terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V, 3 W - 18 W test light. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. The light should go off at 36 - 39° F (2 - 4° C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41° F (4 - 5° C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Page 6892 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Carefully inspect the driver's airbag assembly before installing. Do not install an airbag assembly that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag assembly. NOTE: If an intact airbag assembly has been removed from a scrapped vehicle or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed. 1. Before installing the steering wheel, center the cable reel. Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise approximately two turns. The arrow mark on the cable reel label should points straight up. 2. Install the steering wheel with the steering wheel bolt. NOTE: Be sure the steering wheel shaft engages the cable reel and canceling sleeve. CAUTION: Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. 3. Attach the cruise control switches connector to the steering wheel clip. Page 3214 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7814 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7850 The antenna sticks in either the up or down position. 1. Using the antenna nut wrench, remove the antenna nut, spacer, and bushing. Power Antenna Motor Test 2. Clean the antenna mast housing threads, and reinstall the spacer and bushing. 3. Using the antenna nut wrench, tighten the antenna nut to 2.3 N-m (0.23 Kgf.m, 1.7 lbf.ft). If you overtighten the nut, the antenna may stick. If sticking occurs, back the nut off a little, then turn the radio on and off to raise and lower the antenna again. Repeat until the antenna moves freely. Page 2877 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4642 Page 3159 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 3424 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Page 9877 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4219 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2493 Page 7128 7. Press a new wheel bearing into the hub using the special tools and a press as shown. 8. Install the hub unit on the brake disc and tighten the flange bolts. NOTE: Before installing the hub unit, clean the mating surfaces of the hub unit and brake disc. Page 2181 Page 7364 Heater Control Panel: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Switch Test RECIRCULATION CONTROL SWITCH TEST Refer to illustration for terminal identification. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 4497 Page 7653 Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 9790 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Photo 106 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications Alternator Output Alternator Output Alternator Output F22B1 Engine : F22B2 Engine : 12v-90amps 12v-80amps Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: Customer Interest Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Page 2397 Page 9460 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7827 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8460 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Page 8860 Page 7302 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 147 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6853 17. Reconnect the tie-rod ends to the steering knuckles, tighten the castle nut to the specified torque, and install new cotter pins. NOTE: Before connecting the tie-rod ends, wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads. CAUTION: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. 18. Install the front wheels. 19. Fill the system with the recommended power steering fluid, and bleed air from the system. 20. After installation, perform the following checks. a. Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks. b. Adjust the front toe. c. Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by turning the right and left tie-rods, if necessary. NOTE: Turn the right and left tie-rods equally. Page 4025 Page 8997 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 2489 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8279 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams Trailer Lighting Connector (Part 1 Of 2) Electrical Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 4004 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2542 Right Rear Of Engine Page 9782 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 592 Part 2 Of 2 Specifications Mainshaft: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Locknut ....................................................................................................................................................... 226 Nm (166 ft. lbs.)-0-167 Nm (123 ft. lbs.) Page 8878 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Photo 64 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 64 Behind Gauge Assembly Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 6858 20. Insert a 24" long, 3/8" drive extension and the special tool into the gearbox housing from the gearbox side. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside surface of the housing with the tools. 21. Set the steering gearbox housing in a press, then press out the cylinder end seal and backup ring from the gearbox. CAUTION: ^ Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it if necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal. ^ Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove the seal by striking the tool. It will break the backup ring, and the cylinder end seal will remain in the gearbox. 22. Carefully pry the piston seal ring and O-ring off the piston of the rack. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside of seal ring groove and piston edges when removing the seal ring. 23. Before removing the valve housing, apply vinyl tape to splines of the pinion shaft. 24. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/ valve using a press. Removal Distributor: Service and Repair Removal Distributor Removal 1. Disconnect the connector(s) from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts, then remove then distributor from the cylinder head. Page 1520 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 2784 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 926 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 7317 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1375 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9514 Page 6825 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4813 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the lock-up control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 6735 2. Remove the fours bolts that secure the pump cover to the pump housing, and remove the cover. 3. Remove the old 0-ring. Coat a new 0-ring with clean power steering fluid, and install the new 0-ring onto the pump cover. 4. Align the rollers with the holes in the pump cover, and install the cover. Torque the four mounting bolts to 20 N.m (14 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the power steering pump, and adjust the belt tension. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 6. Start the engine, turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock, and check the power steering fluid level. Add fluid if necessary. 7. Make sure the power steering pump does not leak. Page 2774 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3937 Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 7166 Mode Control Motor: Locations Recirculation Control Motor Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Page 1664 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Page 7944 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9779 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7925 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times, This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Move the driver's seat forward, and locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor, underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch on. 3. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit with a pen or pencil. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Check that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front marker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. If you have other transmitters to program, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the programming mode. Photo 71 Cigarette Lighter Relay: Locations Photo 71 Behind Front Console Page 4409 Page 8117 Radio/Stereo: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate (A/T) Torque/Sequence Customer Safety Information Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Safety Information WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information 00-088 July 14, 2010 Applies To: ALL Models Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines (Supersedes 00-088, dated October 6, 2006, to revise the information marked with the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY The requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed.* American Honda does not allow replacement of brake discs under warranty unless the brake disc is beyond its service limit for refinishing. If the brake disc is within its service limit, you must refinish it. Maximum refinishing limits may be found in the Conventional Brakes section of the appropriate service manual. *Refinish brake discs only when they are scored or out of specification for runout or parallelism. See the appropriate service manual for the specifications.* American Honda requires refinishing of the front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe that mounts to the steering knuckle. Use of an on-car, steering knuckle- mounted lathe is critical because it corrects runout of the hub and disc as an assembly. Experience has shown that very small amounts of runout, not felt as brake pulsation initially, will grow and become noticeable as the discs are subjected to heat and wear over time and mileage. Two on-car brake lathes are recommended. The Kwik-Lathe, model number KWY-108000501, is supported with automatic shipments of adapters for new models, when required. The Accu-turn On-car Brake Lathe, model ACCHONOCLPKG, is also recommended. A power driver is required for the 82000 and is highly recommended for all other models. The Kwik-Lathe power driver model number is KWY-108012005; the Accu-turn lathe includes a power driver. Here are some advantages of using power drivers: ^ The disc is rotated at the optimum speed for a smooth and consistent cut. ^ There is no need to climb in and out of the vehicle to start and stop the engine or to shift the transmission. ^ Securing the opposite wheel with a tie-down strap is not required. ^ There is no waiting for the engine to return to idle and no concern about engine speed changes that can adversely affect brake disc cut and finish. ^ The Traction Control System (TCS) is not involved. ^ Consistent cutting speed increases cutting tool life. ORDERING INFORMATION Order brake lathes and power drivers through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To place an order, call or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday thru Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Time. You can also order online through the Interactive Network (iN). Click on Service, Tool and Equipment, and then Online Catalog. Click on Alignment, Wheel, and Brake Equipment, and then On-Car Brake Lathes. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None, this bulletin is for information only. FRONT BRAKE DISCS The following guidelines show the Kwik-Way lathe setup, the Accu-turn lathe setup is similar. Setting Up the Vehicle Put the transmission in Neutral. If you are not using the power drive system, start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature so the idle speed will stabilize to its lowest rpm. Page 884 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 9578 Page 3162 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4446 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8951 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 800 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Page 4964 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the solenoid pin. 2. Remove the self-locking nuts and shift lock solenoid. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 3. Install the new shift lock solenoid in the reverse order of removal, and adjust its position. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove, and tighten the self-locking nuts. NOTE: Use brand-new self-locking nuts. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement NOTE: Test the solenoid after you assembled it. Page 1267 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Page 9124 Page 5895 Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Page 3067 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Transmission Page 3868 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8549 Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, connect power and ground only momentarily. *: Disconnect the connector, and make these tests at the wire terminals. Page 8947 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Safety Indicator - Component Location Index Safety Indicator - Component Location Index CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Page 5777 Page 3858 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2882 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 5952 Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7893 Page 6658 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Page 8112 Page 5216 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8501 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Page 7088 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. Page 2254 7. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. ^ Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 6 mm bolts are (11), (12), (13),(14) 8. Install the back cover. 9. Install the key and the camshaft pulley onto the camshaft, then tighten the retaining bolt to the torque shown. Page 2265 8. Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the compressor attachment rests on top of the retainer for the spring being compressed. Use the front position slot on the lever as shown. NOTE: Put shop towels over the oil passages to prevent the valve keepers from falling into the cylinder head. 9. Using a downward motion on the lever arm, compress the valve spring and remove the keepers from the valve stem. Slowly release pressure on the spring. 10. Remove the valve seals. 11. Install the valve seals. 12. Install the springs, the retainers and the keepers in reverse order of removal. Exhaust Valve Seals: 13. Select the 7/8 in. diameter short compressor attachment and fasten the attachment to the No. 4 hole of the lever arm with the speed pin supplied. 14. Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the compressor attachment rests on top of the retainer for the spring being compressed. Use the front position slot on the lever as shown. NOTE: Put shop towels over the oil passages to prevent the valve keepers from falling into the cylinder head. 15. Using a downward motion on the lever arm, compress the valve spring and remove the keepers from the valve stem. Slowly release pressure on the spring. Page 3488 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Page 5904 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3001 Page 6155 Finishing the Job Remove the vibration damper and the protective band (if used). Use a micrometer to measure the thickness of the brake disc. Make sure the thickness is within the service manual specifications. Clean the brake disc with soapy water or brake cleaner, then wipe it dry. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust or chips, but do not use compressed air. Unplug the tool bed feed motor from the drive motor assembly, and remove the mounting yoke from the brake disc. Remove the speed mount from the steering knuckle. Apply a small amount of Molykote 77 grease to the brake pad shims. Reinstall the caliper assembly. (If you did not use the power drive system, use the brake pad spreader to push the pistons back into the caliper.) Torque the nuts and bolts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Refinish the other front brake disc using the same guidelines. Check the brake fluid level, then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake pedal is firm and does not pulsate. Lightly apply the brakes about 20 times during the test-drive to seat the brake pads. REAR BRAKE DISCS It is possible to use an on-car lathe on some models if the rear caliper mounts are low enough to clear the vehicle body. A power driver is needed for front drive models. Refinish rear brake discs on bench-mounted equipment if necessary. Follow the same guidelines you used for refinishing front brake discs, noting these differences: ^ Mount the brake lathe to the rear knuckle with the Honda 2-Piece Adapter (P/N KWY-1 08102504). You can order the 2-piece adapter through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Disclaimer Page 8293 Page 111 Fail Safe Relay: Description and Operation FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended by turning off the two fail-safe relays. This disconnects the ground circuits of all the solenoid valves to prevent ABS operation.Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one. RELAY The fail-safe relay's terminal side contact is normally open. When there is continuity at the relay coil, the fail-safe relay is closed, thereby connecting the ground circuit to the solenoid valve. Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6566 Fuse: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 8533 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Rear Door Lock Actuator Rear Of Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Page 10007 6. Move the rear channel, and carefully pull the glass up. 7. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot as shown. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5368 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1596 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 3928 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5205 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4226 Fuel Injector Resistor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The injector resistor lowers the current supplied to the fuel injectors to prevent damage to the fuel injector coils. This allows a faster response time of the fuel injectors. Page 7811 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4483 Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 1449 Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (With A/C) Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension: 441-588 N (45-60 kgf, 99- 132 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt, (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the tension should be 932 - 1123 N (95 - 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Without Air Conditioning Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (Without A/C) Deflection Method: Page 8341 11. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 12. Install the front and center channels, and the glass run channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel into the front and center channels, and on the door as shown. Page 1859 Page 2552 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT sending unit. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 2. With the engine cold, use an ohmmeter to measure resistance between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). 3. Check the temperature of the coolant. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 4. Run the engine, and measure the change in resistance with the engine at operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 5. If the obtained readings are substantially different from the specifications above, replace the sending unit. Page 3806 Page 9744 Page 1130 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Diagram Information and Instructions Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5041 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 357 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch A Page 2698 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8956 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5937 Part 2 Of 2 Page 151 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Page 5105 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 8040 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 396 Removal Distributor: Service and Repair Removal Distributor Removal 1. Disconnect the connector(s) from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts, then remove then distributor from the cylinder head. Page 999 Page 7742 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Photo 59 Power Door Lock Control Module: Locations Photo 59 Front Of Driver's Door Page 885 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7232 Page 9521 Page 2959 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1369 Page 4477 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4622 Distributor: Service and Repair Installation Distributor Installation Distributor Installation NOTE: ^ Before you install the distributor, bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lugs on the end of the distributor and their mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts. 4. Connect the connector(s) to the distributor. 5. Connect the ignition wires as shown. Page 9228 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6517 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 3137 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 1300 to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Page 6513 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 3267 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: - Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). "UP" mark on the camshaft pulley should be at top, and TDC grooves on the camshaft pulley should align with the cylinder head surface. 3. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. - Intake: 0.26 mm (0.010 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) - Exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Page 2278 Balance Shaft: Specifications Balancer Drive Gear Case Bolts 18 ft.lb Balancer Drive Gear Case Nut 18 ft.lb Balancer Belt Drive Pulley Bolt 22 ft.lb Balancer Driven Gear Bolt 18 ft.lb Page 9231 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2065 Engine Mount Control Unit: Electrical Diagrams LEGEND BATTERY: 100 A No. 4*: Engine Control Unit (ECU)/Engine Air Temperature (EAT) ECU (Powertrain Control Module [PCM]) Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 7552 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Speed (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER FIRING ORDER 1-3-4-2 Page 2614 Radiator Fan Control Module: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Control Module Input Test NOTE: Perform the following tests with the radiator fan control module 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II) and the A/C switch OFF. If you find the cause of a problem, correct it before you continue. Page 279 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7578 Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 91 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 6954 Page 4001 Page 6665 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 9558 Page 2788 PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) Specifications Air Bag: Specifications Airbag Assembly Airbag Assembly Drivers Side Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Passengers Side Lower Mounting Nut(s) 9.8 Nm Page 353 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Page 9346 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Page 6248 ABS Component Locations Page 5113 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair FLUID CHANGE 1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the car. Park the vehicle on level ground, turn the engine off, and then remove the drain plug. 2. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer, then refill the transmission with the recommended fluid to the upper mark on the dipstick. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.4 l (2.5 US qt.) at changing - 6.0 l (6.3 US qt.) at overhaul NOTE: Always use Genuine Honda Premium Formula Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shim quality. Page 1582 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Page 1305 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 2506 Fans Page 1927 Fig.3 Main Bearing Cap Bolt Loosening Sequence 9. Remove the bolts and the bearing cap bridge, then remove the bearing caps. CAUTION: To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 10. Turn the crankshaft so No. 2 and 3 crankpins are at the top. 11. Remove the rod caps/bearings and main caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 12. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage the journals. 13. Remove the bolts and the retainer, then remove the front balancer shaft and the rear balancer shaft. Page 7309 Page 8458 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 2067 Above idle, passage 1 is closed, and liquid flows only through passage 2. Dampening increases, and vibration above idle is reduced. Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Page 9069 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 3357 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Specifications Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Specifications Torque 7.2 ft.lb Specifications Mainshaft: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit MAINSHAFT End Play 0.10 - 0.16 mm Adjust Diameter of ball bearing contact area 27.977 - 27.990 mm 27.94 mm Diameter of needle bearing contact area 37.984 - 38.000 mm 37.93 mm Diameter of ball bearing contact area 27.987 - 28.000 mm 27.94 mm Runout 0.02 mm 0.05 mm Note: Maximum. MAINSHAFT 3RD AND 4TH GEARS Inside Diameter 43.009 mm 43.025 mm End Play 0.06 - 0.21 mm 0.30 mm Thickness (3rd Gear) 32.42 - 32.47 mm 32.3 mm Thickness (4th Gear) 30.92 - 30.97 mm 30.8 mm MAINSHAFT 5TH GEAR Inside Diameter 43.009 mm 43.025 mm End Play 0.06 - 0.21 mm 0.30 mm Thickness 30.92 - 30.97 mm 30.8 mm Page 419 PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12V Page 8737 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts . NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 4. Disconnect the 20-P connector between the combination switch harness and main wire harness. Page 6278 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Flushing CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this article is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). Fluid replacement procedures for the rest of the brake system are incorporated into the brake bleeding procedures for the basic brake hydraulic system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 1. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 2. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 3. Use the steps below to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: Approximately 35 - 45 ml (1 1/6 - 1 1/2 fl.oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. Modulator Unit Location A) Attach a wrench to the maintenance bleeder. B) Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. C) While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. D) Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. E) Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. F) Tighten the maintenance bleeder. 4. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation 98-018 July 22, 2003 Applies To: ALL Models Driveshaft Boot Band Tool (Supersedes 98-018, Boot Band Tool, dated April 14, 1998) Updated information is shown by asterisks. The replacement boot bands for the driveshaft CV joint boots have changed. The replacement bands are a double loop type that require a special tool for proper installation. * TOOL INFORMATION Boot Band Tool: T/N KD-3191 This tool is already at your dealership. To order additional tools, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old boot band(s). Take care not to damage the boot. 2. Remove and inspect the boot. Replace the boot if it is worn or damaged. 3. Install the boot, and fill it with the specified amount and type of grease. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual for the grease amount and type. 4. Adjust the driveshaft to the proper length. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 5. Install the replacement boot band onto the large end of the boot with the end of the band facing toward the front of the vehicle. 6. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, and hold the boot band in place. Page 2911 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5052 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3148 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2229 13. Remove the oil pump housing bolt to the left and below the front balancer shaft. 14. Install the oil seal retainer from the kit on the pump housing with the bolt you just removed. Torque the bolt to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 15. Reinstall the lower cover bolts, making sure the rubber seal seats properly in the cover. Torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the crankshaft pulley. Use the special tools and a torque wrench to torque the pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 lb-ft). Make sure you use a torque wrench; do not use an impact wrench. 17. Reinstall the splash shield mounting bolts. Torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 18. Reinstall the left front wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 19. Reinstall the dipstick tube with the new O-ring from the kit. Torque the bolt to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Reinstall the dipstick. 20. DOHC Prelude only: Reinstall the power steering reservoir and the power steering pump. 21. Reinstall the alternator belt and the power steering pump belt. 22. Tighten the adjusting bolts for the alternator and the power steering pump 20 turns, then torque the mounting hardware as specified in the appropriate service manual. Use belt tension gauge T/N 07JGG-001010A or TGG-001000A to check for proper belt tension. Page 2121 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7897 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Page 3694 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 8962 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 6864 20. Press the new roller bearing into the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tools as shown. NOTE: Place the roller bearing on the valve housing with the stamped letter facing up towards the valve side. 21. Apply vinyl tape to the pinion shaft, then coat the vinyl tape with power steering fluid. 22. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the valve seal rings. 23. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft. 24. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing using a hydraulic press as shown. NOTE: Check that the pinion shaft/sleeve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. Page 152 Service and Repair Security Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Indicator Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch out of the front console panel. 2. Disconnect the 5-P connector from the switch. Page 2952 Page 940 Page 3936 Page 3084 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9517 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4137 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Page 8805 Clock: Service and Repair 1. Remove the rear console. 2. Remove the front console panel. 3. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the clock. Clock - Removal 4. Remove the two screws. Page 2949 Page 2108 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 263 Page 9105 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Page 2941 Page 580 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8829 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2988 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Locations Page 6179 9. Install the brake hose bracket with the brake hose mounting bolts. 10. Install the new spindle nut, then tighten and stake the nut. 11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. 12. Install the front wheel with the wheel nuts and torque to specification. 13. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment as necessary. Page 9039 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5235 1. Install the oil seal in the transmission housing, using the special tools as shown. 2. Drive the oil seal into the torque converter housing, using the special tools as shown. Page 5776 Page 2794 Page 3369 Data Link Connector: Connector Locations Front Console Page 8438 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 818 Page 5391 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 243 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 1835 Locations Distributor: Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 3725 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 939 Page 9295 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 1306 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 7545 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3513 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 411 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 950 Page 6819 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9582 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8871 Component Locations Condenser Fan: Component Locations Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 5839 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 6038 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity (approx) ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 150 ml (5.0 fl.oz) Page 9256 Page 427 Page 1684 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. Page 6653 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Page 3809 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3605 Page 5351 TOOL DESCRIPTION CLEANING PROCEDURE The cleaning procedure involves hot fluid under high pressure. Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, gloves, and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow all instructions in this bulletin. 1. Plug the ATF cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light cord; you would damage the unit. 2. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) Page 5891 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 557 SRS Unit Replacement 8. Connect the SRS main harness 18P connector to the SRS unit, then push it into position until it clicks. 9. Put the carpet back in place. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector to the SRS main harness, then reinstall the glove box. 12. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 13. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 14. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Page 4313 Page 6212 Caliper Piston Removal ^ If necessary, apply compressed air to the caliper fluid inlet to get the piston out. Place a shop rag or wooden block as shown to cushion the piston when it is expelled Use low pressure air in short spurts. ^ Remove the piston from the caliper, and check the piston for scoring on surface. Caliper Seal & Boot Orientation ^ Remove the piston boot and piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. Installation Page 8886 Indicator Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 22-P (C6O9) connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the printed circuit board A must be faulty; replace it. Page 5418 Valve Body: Testing and Inspection Secondary Valve Body Part 1 Of 2 Page 5907 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4762 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Relay Box: Locations Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Locations Windshield Washer Motor: Locations At Windshield Washer Reservoir Page 6992 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. 6. Loosely install the front damper on the frame with the aligning tab facing inside, then loosely install the two flange nuts. Page 2605 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the radiator cap, wet its seal with engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester. 2. Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (14-18 psi). 3. Check for a drop in pressure. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. Page 7233 Page 8766 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2085 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection 1. Check engine oil with the engine off and the car parked on level ground. 2. Make certain that the oil level indicated on the dipstick is between the upper and lower marks. 3. If the level has dropped close to the lower mark, add oil until it reaches the upper mark. CAUTION: Insert the dipstick carefully to avoid bending it. Page 8109 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7910 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Page 301 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 1683 Tire Mounting Rim bead seats should be cleaned with a wire brush or coarse steel wool to remove lubricants, and light rust. Before mounting a tire, the bead area should be well lubricated with an approved tire lubricant. After mounting, inflate the tire to 196 kPa (28 psi) so that beads are completely seated. Inflate the air to specified pressure and install valve cap to the stem. WARNING: Never stand over tire when inflating. bead may break when bead snaps over rim's safety hump and cause serious personal injury. never exceed 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure when inflating. if 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure will not seat beads, deflate, re-lubricate and re-inflate. over inflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Tire Repair There are many different materials on the market used to repair tires. Manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. These instructions can be obtained from the tire manufacturer if they are not included with the repair kit. Wheel Inspection Damaged wheels and wheels with excessive run-out must be replaced. Wheel run out at rim (Base on hub Bore): General Balance Procedure Page 9464 Headlamp Switch: Electrical Diagrams Headlight Switch (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2235 6. Hold the installer shaft stationary with an 8 mm wrench, then turn the 19 mm nut clockwise until the seal installer bottoms out on the oil pump housing. 7. Clean the excess grease oft the balancer shaft. 8. Inspect the oil seal installation; make sure the oil seal lip is not damaged or distorted. Disclaimer Page 929 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R ABS Pump Motor Relay Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Locations ABS Pump Motor Relay Under-hood Anti-Lock Brake System Fuse/Relay Box Page 8922 Headlamp Reminder Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7347 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair NOTE: Loosen the battery set bolt, and move the battery set plate before removing the ACL housing cover. Page 445 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9923 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Power window relay Page 1089 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 1 through the YEL wire to the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts or more to the ORN wire. The VSS intermittently grounds the ORN wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Page 6851 9. Connect the fluid lines to the valve body unit. NOTE: After connecting the fluid lines, make sure that there is no interference between the lines and other parts. 10. Install the steering joint, and reconnect the steering shaft and pinion shaft. NOTE: Make sure the steering joint is connected as follows: a. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the steering shaft (line up the bolt hole with the flat on the shaft), and loosely install the upper joint bolt. b. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole with the groove around the shaft), and loosely install the lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. c. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is fully seated. Then tighten the upper and lower joint bolts. 11. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise approximately two turns. The arrow mark on the label should points straight up. 12. Reinstall the steering wheel. Page 4553 Page 9844 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5793 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2504 Fans (With A/C) (Part 2 Of 2) Specifications Shift Cable: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bracket Bolts ....................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 9.8 Nm (86.4 inch lbs.) Cable Cover ........................................................ .................................................................................................................................. 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Lock Bolt ...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Cable Guide .................................................. ................................................................................................................................... 12 Nm (104 inch lbs.) Grommet Bolts ..................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 12 Nm (104 inch lbs.) Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 4843 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4991 Torque Converter Housing: Service and Repair Mainshaft Bearing/Oil Seal Replacement TOOL REQUIRED - 07749-0010000 Handle Driver - 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment - 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm - 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62x68 mm 1. Drive out or pull up the mainshaft bearing and oil seal using the special tools as shown. Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations On Top Of Transmission - Photo 44 Page 7354 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3070 Page 3857 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 2260 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Installation, Engine Not Removed NOTE: ^ The crankshaft and front balancer shaft oil seal housing surface should be dry. ^ Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft, the balancer shaft and to the lips of the seals. 1. Using the special tool, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 2. Using the special tool, drive in the front balancer shaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the balancer shaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. Specifications Wheel Sensor: Specifications Front Wire to Chassis bolts 7 ft.lb Wire to Knuckle bolts 7 ft.lb Sensor to Knuckle bolts 16 ft.lb Pulser/Sensor Air Gap 0.02 - 0.04 in Rear Sensor to Knuckle bolts 16 ft.lb Wire to all other components 7 ft.lb Pulser/Sensor Air Gap 0.02 - 0.04 in Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2500 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9250 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3044 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6372 Pressure Switch: Description and Operation ABS Pressure Switch PURPOSE The pressure switch monitors the pressure accumulation in the accumulator. When the pressure in the accumulator rises, the Bourdon tube in the pressure switch deforms outward, which in turn activates the microswitch by the force of the spring attached to the sensing lever. FUNCTION When the pressure in the accumulator drops due to Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) operation, the Bourdon tube moves in the opposite direction, and the micro-switch is eventually turned off. The ABS control unit detects the fluid pressure in the accumulator by the ON/OFF signals from the pressure switch. Page 1818 ^ Repeat for all rockers. - If over limit, replace rocker shaft and all overtolerance rocker arms. NOTE: If any intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary). Manual Inspection NOTE: When reassembling the primary rocker arm, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. 1. Inspect the rocker arm piston. Push it manually. ^ If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: ^ Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. ^ Bundle the rocker arms with a rubber band to keep them together as a set. ^ Set the timing plate and return spring as shown below. VTEC Rocker Arms Inspection VTEC ROCKER ARMS Manual Inspection 1. Set the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). 2. Remove the cylinder head cover. 3. Push the intake mid rocker arm on the No. 1 cylinder manually. Page 3895 Service Precautions Parking Brake Cable: Service Precautions CAUTION: The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure. Page 7303 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2728 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 5210 Page 9967 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test Passenger's Window Switch Test 1. Remove the passenger's window switch. Passenger's Window Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 5431 Part 1 Of 2 Page 6243 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Brake Fluid Level Switch Test 1. Remove the reservoir cap. Check that the float moves up and down freely; if it doesn't, replace the reservoir cap assembly. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 4647 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5750 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Page 2198 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5058 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in Fuel and Emissions. Page 5215 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3752 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1301 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 6173 5. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts, and hang the caliper to one side. CAUTION:To prevent accidental damage to the caliper or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 6. On ABS equipped vehicles, remove the wheel sensor wire bracket, then remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle but do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. NOTE:Use ball joint removers to separate the ball joints from the suspension or tie-rod end. 7. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod end ball joint castle nut and remove the nut. 8. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 9. Install a 10mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. Page 3922 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Transmission Page 4202 Fuel Injector Resistor: Locations Left Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 3008 Page 4601 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4970 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Front Of Transmission Page 6630 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER FIRING ORDER 1-3-4-2 Page 2400 Page 2014 4. Remove the valve seal. Page 8958 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6122 Caliper Location 8. Install the caliper on the caliper bracket, and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. 9. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. Specs: Caliper Bracket Mounting Bolts 38 Nm (17 lb.ft.) Caliper Mounting Bolts 23 Nm (17 lb.ft.) Banjo Bolts 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) Brake Cable Removal & Installation 10. Insert the cable through the arm, and connect the cable to the lever with the clevis pin and lock pin. Install the cable clip securely. Page 9825 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9826 Trunk Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Ceiling, Door Courtesy, Spot And Cargo Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4511 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 316 Page 9126 Page 9811 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6089 Brake Lamp Switch Adjustment ^ Screw in the brake switch until its plunger is fully depressed (threaded end touching the pad on the pedal arm). Then back off the switch 1/4 turn to make 0.3 mm (0.01 in) of clearance between the threaded end and pad. Tighten the locknut firmly. Connect the brake switch connector. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. ^ Check the brake pedal free play as described below. PEDAL FREE PLAY ^ With the engine off, inspect the play on the pedal pad by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 1-5 mm (1/16-13/64 in) ^ If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake switch. CAUTION: If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. Page 1542 4. Fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Page 3835 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Center Rear of Engine Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test Key Interlock Solenoid Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 8030 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9689 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit (Part 1 Of 2) Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Motor Replacement 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Remove the washer filler neck. 3. Disconnect the hose and the 2-P connector from the washer motor. 4. Remove the washer reservoir by removing the mounting bolts. 5. Remove the washer motor from the washer reservoir. 6. Remove the washer nozzles and washer hose. NOTE: ^ Take care not to pinch the hoses during reinstallation. ^ Install the grommets firmly. ^ After installation, adjust the aim of the washer nozzles. Page 191 Page 5828 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Specifications Countershaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 32 General Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4471 Page 7794 Retractor Bolt - Coupe 8. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. Page 2253 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. ^ Lubricate cam lobes after reassembly. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up. (No. 1 piston Top Dead Center (TDC)). 4. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 or No. 6 camshaft holders. ^ Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. ^ Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. 6. Install the camshaft oil seal using the special tools as shown. Page 9506 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit (Part 1 Of 2) Page 217 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 467 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8206 Keyless Entry Module: Programming and Relearning Keyless Transmitter Codes Input Procedure Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Page 9089 Page 8500 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Page 6279 Fluid Level Check 5. Repeat steps A through F twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 6. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. 7. After replacement, start the engine and make sure that the ABS indicator light goes off. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Fluid Capacity (approx) 150 ml (5.0 fl.oz) Page 8972 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 116 Right Side Of Cargo Area (Left Similar) Page 4478 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 464 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2613 Radiator Fan Control Module: Diagrams Radiator Fan Control Module Terminals Radiator Fan Control Module Terminals NOTE: Different wires with same color have been given a number suffix to distinguish them (for example YEL 1 and YEL 2 are not the same). Page 7468 Hose/Line HVAC: Capacity Specifications A/C Suction Hose/Line REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY Add After Replacement ....................................................................................................................... .............................................. 10 ml (1/3 fl-oz) A/C Discharge Hose/Line REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY Add After Replacement ....................................................................................................................... .............................................. 10 ml (1/3 fl-oz) Page 3504 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Testing and Inspection Ventilation Switch: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 1362 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3537 Page 579 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 8036 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1681 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Tire Rotation Page 8718 Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 10. Remove the two screws and set/resume switch. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 11. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. ^ If there is continuity and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. Page 4524 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4687 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Photo 82 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Locations Body Control Module: Locations Left Kick Panel Page 8768 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Ring to Groove Clearance Top 0.035 - 0.060 mm 0.13 mm Second 0.030 - 0.055 mm 0.13 mm Ring End Gap Top 0.20 - 0.35 mm 0.60 mm Second 0.40 - 0.55 mm 0.70 mm Oil 0.20 - 0.70 mm 0.80 mm Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the clutch switch. Clutch Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Page 7789 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt Buckle CENTER BELT AND REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES 1. Slide the front seat forward fully. 2. Remove these items: - Rear seat-backs - Rear seat cushion 3. Remove these items: - Rear bulkhead cover - Rear side trim panel - High mount brake light - Lock cylinder trim - Center belt cover - Rear shelF 4. Remove the side trim, both sides as necessary. Center Seat Belts - Coupe 5. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B). Page 4281 Page 2163 Page 1283 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Hydraulic Assembly Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Hydraulic Assembly Purpose ABS Modulator Unit It adjusts the hydraulic pressure applied to each caliper on the basis of the signals received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit. The modulator unit consists of the following sub-units. - ABS Pump And Motor: Supplies high-pressure brake fluid to control the ABS operation. - Accumulator: Stores high-pressure brake fluid in it. - Pressure Switch: Detects the pressure in the accumulator and transmits signals to the ABS control unit. - Solenoid Valves: Switches the ABS high-pressure passage according to the signals from the ABS control unit. - Pistons And Related Parts: Receives the high-pressure brake fluid, and controls pressure to the calipers accordingly. Function Piston Cut/Proportioning Valve REAR MODULATORS SERVE AS PROPORTIONING VALVE - The modulators for the rear brakes serve as proportioning control valves to prevent the rear wheels from locking if the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) malfunctions or when the ABS is not activated. - When this function is not provided, the hydraulic pressure from the master cylinder and the hydraulic pressure to the rear brake system are equal. - If the fluid pressure is transmitted to the rear brakes at the same rate as the front brakes, the rear wheels will lock first because the rear axle load becomes lighter when the brakes are applied. - To prevent the rear wheels from locking, the proportioning control valve function changes the distribution rate of the fluid pressure to the rear wheels when the pressure in the rear brake system exceeds the given value of the fluid pressure from the master cylinder. - The fluid pressure point where the distribution rate changes is called the turning point. Page 4272 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 8240 Page 398 Page 9519 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Specifications Piston: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Skirt O.D. No letter 84.980 - 84.990 mm 84.970 mm Note: Measurement is taken at 21 mm (0.8 in) from bottom of piston skirt. Letter B 84.970 - 84.980 mm 84.960 mm Ring Groove Width Top 1.220 - 1.230 mm 1.25 mm Second 1.220 - 1.230 mm 1.25 mm Oil 2.805 - 2.825 mm 2.85 mm Piston to Bore Clearance 0.020 - 0.040 mm 0.05 mm Page 5342 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 9876 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9507 Integrated Control Unit (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5153 Page 2474 Radiator Fan Control Module: Diagrams Radiator Fan Control Module Terminals Radiator Fan Control Module Terminals NOTE: Different wires with same color have been given a number suffix to distinguish them (for example YEL 1 and YEL 2 are not the same). Page 5758 Page 9118 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 9690 Integrated Control Unit (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9489 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3178 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the 12 mm sealing nut from the fuel rail. Attach the fuel pressure adapter nut, 12 mm (90201 - P0A - 003) and the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch on, wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kgf/sq.cm, 38 - 48 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 210 - 250 kPa (2.1 - 2.8 kgf/sq.cm, 30 - 37 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Page 5011 Page 3931 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6971 7. Install the brake hose bracket with the brake hose mounting bolts. CAUTION: Be careful not to twist the hose more than necessary. 8. Install the new spindle nut, then tighten and stake the nut. 9. Install the front wheel with the wheel nuts. NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. 10. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 5617 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7356 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Removal Page 1509 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 4432 Page 5165 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 7990 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4401 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. - After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable, the throttle cable and the A/T throttle control cable. See: Throttle Cable/Linkage - The TP sensor is not removable. REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY Page 415 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5893 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Countershaft Bearing Replacement Torque Converter Housing: Service and Repair Countershaft Bearing Replacement TOOL REQUIRED - 07736-A01000B Adjustable Bearing Puller - 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller - 07749-0010000 Handle Driver - 07746-0010500 Driver Attachment, 62x68 mm - Or Equivalent 1. Remove the countershaft bearing using the special tool as shown. 2. Install the ATF guide plate. 3. Install the new bearing into the housing using the special tools as shown. Page 7988 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 362 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 9664 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Horn Relay ^ Horn relay Page 4978 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Top Of Transmission Page 4131 EGR Valve: Locations Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 3602 Page 7049 3. Remove the four flange bolts, then separate the hub unit from the brake disc. 4. Separate the wheel bearing from the front hub using the special tools and a press as shown. CAUTION: Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 5. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the hub using the special tools and a commercially-available bearing separator as shown. 6. Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. NOTE: Wash the steering knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Page 5222 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Testing and Inspection PCM Terminal Locations PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 1471 The following explains the procedure for tightening filters using these numbers. 1) Make a mark on the cylinder block under the number that shows at the bottom of the filter when the rubber seal is seated. 2) Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven numbers from the marked point. For example, if a mark is made under the number 2 when the rubber seal is seated, the filter should be tightened until the number 1 comes up to the marked point. 5. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. CAUTION: Installation using other than the above procedure could result in serious engine damage due to oil leakage. Page 8174 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6698 Page 3131 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 8394 8. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. 9. Remove the glass run channel. Page 772 A/C Thermostat: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Recover the refrigerant with a Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. 2. Disconnect the receiver line and the suction line from the evaporator. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting to avoid moisture and dust contamination into the system. 3. Remove the glove box. 4. Remove the glove box frame. Page 8444 Console: Electrical Diagrams Dash And Console Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Testing and Inspection Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Light Controller Input Test Controller Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash lights brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard, then disconnect the 3-P connector from the controller. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Specifications Balance Shaft Pulley: Specifications Mount Bolt ........................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Page 1447 A/C Compressor Belt Adjustment Tension Gauge Method 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the A/C compressor belt as shown below, and measure the tension of the belt. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: 440-590 N (45-60 kgf, 99- 132 lbf) New Belt: 930 - 1130 N (95 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) Power Steering Pump Belt Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kgf, 88 - 121 lbf) New Belt: 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kgf, 165 - 198 lbf) NOTE: ^ If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. ^ Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the belt tension gauge. ^ "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. ^ "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut of the alternator. 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension, then retighten the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the tension of the A/C compressor belt. Page 5513 Axle Shaft: Diagrams Page 9797 Ceiling, Door Courtesy, Spot And Cargo Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7390 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Photo 46 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 46 Behind Front Grille Page 5687 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 9190 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator - Component Location Index Page 3655 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4041 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1779 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3079 Page 888 Page 6118 Cam Installation 2. Coat a new cam boot with rubber grease and install it in the caliper body. 3. Apply rubber grease to the pin contacting area of the cam, and install the cam and lever assembly into the caliper body. 4. Install the return spring. CAUTION: When the cam and lever were separated, be sure to assemble them before installing the cam in the caliper body. - Install the lever and spring washer, apply locking agent to the threads, and tighten the parking nut while holding the lever with a vise. - Avoid damaging the cam boot since it must be installed before the cam. - When installing the cam, do not allow the cam boot lips to turn outside in. 5. Install the pin in the cam. 6. Install a new O-ring on the sleeve piston. Sleeve Piston Installation 7. Install the sleeve piston so the hole in the bottom of the piston is aligned with the pin in the cam, and two pins on the piston are aligned with the holes in the caliper. 8. Coat a new cup with rubber grease and install it with its groove facing the bearing A side of the adjusting bolt. Page 5903 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2835 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3331 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Page 8865 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6813 Page 6579 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER FIRING ORDER 1-3-4-2 Page 471 Page 7193 Customer Safety Information Brake Caliper: Customer Safety Information WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 3054 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 5398 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 751 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 178 Page 2308 14. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 15. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn, and verify that the timing balancer belt adjuster moves freely. 16. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 17. Align the rear balancer shaft pulley by using a 6 x 100 mm bolt or equivalent as an tool. ^ Scribe a line 74 mm (2.9 inch) from the end of the bolt. Insert the bolt into the maintenance hole to the scribed line. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 9297 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair 1. Open the tailgate. High Mount Brake Light Replacement 2. Release the high mount brake light cover clips by pushing in on the center pin, then remove the clips. 3. Remove the high mount brake light cover. 4. Remove the socket from the light housing. High Mount Brake Light Replacement 5. Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it 45° counterclockwise. Page 363 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Page 4009 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7388 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Page 3654 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7820 Page 8948 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7374 Page 1807 Camshaft: Service and Repair REMOVAL Page 6059 Proper Angle 2. Before installing the modulator unit on the vehicle, be sure to bleed the air from the suction port in the modulator unit by leaning the modulator unit to one side slowly (about 45 degrees) as shown. Brake Line Placement 3. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Check the letters stamped on the modulator body, and connect the brake lines properly. Tighten the flare nuts. Specs: Flare nuts 19 Nm (14 lb.ft.) 4. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Check that: ABS indicator light is off. - Brake fluid is not leaking from the brake line joints. 5. Stop the engine. Page 7018 7. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 8. Loosely install the flange bolt into the damper fork. 9. Loosely install a new self-locking nut with the flange bolt. 10. Raise the steering knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 11. Tighten the flange bolt. 12. Tighten the self-locking nut. 13. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the front damper to the specified torque. 14. Install the brake hose mounts with the brake hose mounting bolts. 15. Install the front wheel. Rear Shock REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear seat (Sedan) or the rear seat cushion and side-bolsters (Wagon) or the rear bulkhead cover and right gusset cover (Coupe). 3. Pull back the front of the quarter trim panel, and remove the two flange nuts. (The illustration shows rear damper for Sedan.) Page 6161 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Disc Runout Max. Refinish Limit 0.31 in Refinish new disc if runout is greater than 0.004 in Disc Thickness and Parallelism Brake Disc Thickness 0.39 - 0.40 in Refinishing Limit 0.31 in Brake Disc Parallelism 0.31 in This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. Page 5568 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Fuel Pump Relay: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 4422 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Safety Indicator - Troubleshooting NOTE: ^ The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. ^ Make sure that the ceiling light bulb and the trunk (tailgate) indicator light bulb are not blown. Page 3152 Page 8988 Page 6958 Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Installation CAUTION: Any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings should be with the vehicle on the ground. Page 3012 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 205 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1891 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Testing and Inspection CLEARANCE 1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the main caps and bearing halves. 2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal. NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt the main cap down to check clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and flywheel will flatten the plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank with a jack under the counterweights, and check only one bearing at a time. 4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts to 74 Nm (54 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the cap and bearings again, and measure the widest part of the plastigage. ^ Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: No. 2 ^ Standard (New): 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.050 mm (0.0020 inch) - No.3 ^ Standard (New): 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.055 mm (0.0022 inch) - No.1 and 4 ^ Standard (New): 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.050 mm (0.0020 inch) - No.5 ^ Standard (New): 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.040 mm (0.0016 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, (remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code (select the color as shown), and recheck the clearance. CAUTION: Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check again. NOTE: If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. Page 834 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 9817 Page 6088 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments PEDAL HEIGHT ^ Disconnect the brake switch connector, loosen the brake switch locknut, and back off the brake switch until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. ^ Turn up the floor mat. At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height from the left side center of the pedal pad. Pushrod Locknut Adjustment ^ Loosen the pushrod locknut, and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. NOTE: Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod depressed. Page 7813 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6564 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up Torque Converter Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up 97-025 March 24, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - All with A/T (except HX) 1996-97 Accord - All with A/T (except V6) Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up SYMPTOM The torque converter doesn't lock up in cold weather. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty thermostat keeps the engine from reaching normal operating temperature in cold weather. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the thermostat. PARTS INFORMATION Thermostat and Gasket Kit: P/N 19301-P08-316, H/C 4286167 Honda Antifreeze/Coolant: P/N CU08730, H/C 1066588 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 114150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 19301-F10-307 H/C 4344792 Defect code: 030 Contention code: D02 Template ID: 97-025A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 655 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 6-Way Power Adjustable 1. Remove the adjuster cover. Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 6-P connectors from the power seat switch, then remove the switch from the adjuster cover by removing its two mounting screws. Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 7759 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Page 9290 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4111 Page 896 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAF-SD40700 Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010400 Attachment 52 x 55 mm - 07965-6920201 Hub Dis/Assembly Base REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the steering knuckle from the hub unit. Refer to Steering and Suspension. 2. Remove the splash guard from the steering knuckle. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the splash guard for hub unit or wheel bearing replacement. Page 9823 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2167 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8061 5. Insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1-1/2" from the right side of the opening. 6. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 7. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed tray. 3. If a tray is stuck in the player, reinstall the cover and replace the changer. If all the trays are in the magazine, insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 4. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 5. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Page 4659 Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER FIRING ORDER 1-3-4-2 Page 6117 14. Remove the parking lever and cam as an assembly from the caliper body. Cam Boot Location 15. Remove the cam boot. Assembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: Coat piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. 1. Pack all cavities of the needle bearing with rubber grease. Page 7262 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Inspection - Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set. - Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag. Clutch Inspection - Measure the clearance between the pulley and the pressure plate all the way around. If the clearance is not within specified limits, the pressure plate must be removed and shims added or removed as required, following the procedure. Clearance: 0.5 ± 0.15 mm (0.020 ± 0.006 in) NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5 mm. Clutch Inspection - Check resistance of the field coil. Field Coil Resistance: 3.6 ± 0.2 ohms at 68° F (20° C) If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Page 1083 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4465 A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Specifications Catalyst Shield: Specifications Torque 87 in.lb Service and Repair ATF Cooler Hose: Service and Repair 1. Connect the ATF cooler hoses to the joint pipes and ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips as shown. 2. Install the clamp on the yellow mark on the ATF cooler hose, then clamp the other hose as shown. Page 3727 Page 4218 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3487 Engine Control Module: Connector Views PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 2874 Page 4538 Throttle Body: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The throttle body is a single-barrel side-draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, and the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Canister port are located on the top of the throttle body. Page 4263 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke during the test. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Connect the fuel pressure adapter nut, 12 mm and the special tool to the fuel rail. 2. Start the engine. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kgf/sq.cm, 38 - 46 psi) (with the fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose disconnected and pinched) 3. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. 4. Check that the fuel pressure rises when the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator is disconnected again. If the fuel pressure did not rise, replace the fuel pressure regulator. Page 9216 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7281 Page 3516 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7857 Alarm Horn: Locations Siren Behind Front Bumper Page 8049 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Page 7250 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8359 Coupe: Note: Make sure the lower center glass run channel is fitted into the center channel. 13. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 14. Install the glass. 15. Coupe: Install the center channel guide and channel guide cover. NOTE: Make sure the guide pin is installed in the center channel guide properly. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Page 5627 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Page 25 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4679 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Replacement 1. With the ignition switch OFF, remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap and distributor ignition (DI) rotor. 2. Disconnect the BLK/YEL and WHT/BLK wires from the coil. Ignition Coil Replacement 3. Remove the two bolts, and slide the ignition coil out of the distributor ignition (DI) housing. Page 1432 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Installation NOTE: ^ Install the timing belt and timing balancer belt in the reverse order of removal. ^ Only key points are described here. ^ When installing only the timing balancer belt, go to step 13. ^ Clean the upper and lower covers before installation. 1. Remove the timing balancer belt drive pulley. 2. Set the timing belt drive pulley so that the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC). Align the dimple on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the V pointer on the oil pump. 3. Set the camshaft pulley so that the No. 1 piston is at TDC. ^ Align the TDC mark on the camshaft pulley with the back cover upper surface. Page 4285 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9044 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4663 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7435 Page 1484 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair 1. Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. 2. Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. CAUTION: Check all clamps for deterioration and deformation; replace with new ones if necessary. Page 7077 Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Radial Tire Lead/Pull "Lead/Pull" is vehicle deviation from a straight path, on a level road with no pressure on the steering wheel. Lead is usually caused by: 1. Poorly manufactured radial tires. 2. Uneven brake adjustment. 3. Wheel alignment. The way in which a tire is built can produce lead in a car. An example of this is placement of the belt. Off-center belts on radial tires can cause the tire to develop a side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. The "Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction" chart should be used to make sure that front wheel alignment is not mistaken for tire lead. Rear tires will not cause lead/pull. Radial Tire Waddle Page 3669 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 4716 Page 7584 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2749 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Page 4366 Page 2064 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1462 Servo Body The transmission strainer (filter) is located on the valve body inside the torque converter housing. NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. - Blow out all passages. - When removing the valve body, replace the following: - 0-rings - Lock washer 1. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts). 2. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts). Page 3385 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3396 Page 8944 Page 946 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 192 Page 4723 Page 5623 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Locations Purge Flow Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 2703 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7340 Page 1414 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Carefully pry the hazard warning switch out of the front console panel. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Diagram Information and Instructions Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7326 Condenser Fan Diode: Testing and Inspection NOTE: The diode is designed to pass current in one direction while blocking it in the opposite direction. Use an analog ohmmeter or a digital ohmmeter equipped with a diode tester. Check for current flow in both directions between the A and B terminals; there should be current flow in only one direction. Page 329 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1009 Page 2095 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Tighten Pan In Steps Shown in image: Tighten the nuts Finger tight at six points as shown. Tighten all bolts and nuts, starting from nut (1), clockwise in three steps to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system it's a part of, please refer to Cylinder Block Assembly / Service and Repair / Assembly. Page 378 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Page 4172 Page 6025 Description, Signal & Terminal Name Page 3576 Page 4480 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6156 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Disc Refinishing Procedure Bulletin No. 86-020 Issue Date May 27, 1997 Model ALL Applicable To ALL Except 2WD Passport File Under BRAKES Brake Disc Refinishing (Supersedes 86-020, dated October 3, 1986) [NEW] * Brake disc replacement under warranty is not allowed unless the disc is beyond its maximum refinishing limit. If a disc is within its limit, it must be refinished. For front and rear brake disc maximum refinishing limit specifications, refer to section 19 of the appropriate service manual (section 5A2 for Passports). Front Brake Discs Whenever a front brake disc is replaced, it must be refinished on the car. Refinishing new front discs is included in the flat-rate time for disc replacement. To avoid brake vibration, always refinish front brake discs on the car with the Kwik-Way or Snap-on brake lathe. Purchasing information for these lathes is in Service Bulletin 87-034, Front Brake Disc Refinishing Equipment, filed in the Special Tools section. Follow these tips to get the best results from your on-car brake lathe. (For detailed instructions, refer to the lathe's operating manual.) ^ Before refinishing, warm the engine to normal operating temperature. ^ On 2WD vehicles, lift both front wheels off the ground. On 4WD vehicles, lift all four wheels off the ground. ^ On 4WD Passports, make sure that the hub nut is properly adjusted (with no end play) and the transmission is in 4H. ^ On Preludes with ATTS (Active Torque Transfer System), let both front wheels turn freely On other vehicles, use a tie-down strap to secure the disc opposite to the one being refinished. Page 3476 Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Mounting Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 12 Nm (107 in. lbs.) Page 7793 Center Seat Belts - Coupe 6. Remove the retractor mounting screw (A) and the retractor bolt (B). Remove the center belt (C) and retractor (D). Center Seat Belts - Coupe 7. Remove the protector (A). Center Anchor Bolt - Coupe Page 8031 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3613 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4883 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in Fuel and Emissions. Photo 82 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 9214 Page 8448 4. Remove the rear console. NOTE: Lift up the parking brake lever. - Detach the hooks by lifting the front of the rear console and sliding it rearward. 5. Remove the ashtray and screws. Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 3037 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8025 Page 72 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Locations Body Control Module: Locations Left Kick Panel Page 7704 Page 554 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag, and front passenger's airbag. OPERATION The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the back-up power circuit will keep voltage at a constant level. SRS Operation FOR THE SRS TO OPERATE 1. The impact sensor and safing sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send signals to the airbag inflators. 3. The inflators must ignite and deploy the airbags. Page 4450 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1142 Page 3474 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5111 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... Honda ATF Only Page 7671 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 1448 Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator With Air Conditioning Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (With A/C) Deflection Method: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection: 8 - 10.5 mm (0.32 - 0.41 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 5 - 7 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the belt deflection. Page 3953 Page 4835 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4751 Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 941 Page 2155 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Mechanical Specifications Fuel Pressure Regulator: Mechanical Specifications Regulator Operating Pressure and Torque Regulator Operating Pressure and Torque Operating Pressure 260 - 310 kPa Note: Pressure with regulator vacuum hose disconnected. Torque 9 ft.lb Page 4080 Page 5407 3rd Accumulator Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.9 mm (0.114 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 17.5 mm (0.689 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 99.6 mm (3.921 inch) 1st Accumulator Spring B Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.8 mm (0.071 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.3 mm (0.248 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 70.5 mm (2.776 inch) 1st Accumulator Spring A Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.3 mm (0.091 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 16.3 mm (0.642 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ............................ 109.6 mm (4.315 inch) 2nd Accumulator Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 3.5 mm (0.138 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 22.0 mm (0.866 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 93.5 mm (3.681 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Regulator ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Main ..................................................................... ................................................................................................................................. 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Throttle ......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Servo Body ................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Servo Detent Base ....................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 7580 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 524 Page 9776 Page 4197 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Page 2154 Page 7493 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Page 4380 Master Switch Input Test Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test Page 7896 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Page 9868 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Master Switch Input Test Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test Page 8077 ^ Handle a CD by its edges; never touch the flat surfaces. Contamination from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip pens, and labels can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ^ When cleaning a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside. Do not wipe the disc in a circular motion. ^ A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. ^ Various accessories are available to protect CDs and improve the sound quality of CDs. These accessories increase the thickness or diameter of the discs, and should not be used in CD changers. Disclaimer Page 7242 Page 6886 depends upon the final disposition of the particular vehicle, as noted in "Deployment Outside Vehicle" and "Deployment Inside Vehicle". WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THE BAG OPENING IS POINTED AWAY FROM YOU. IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. NEVER CARRY THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY BY THE WIRES OR CONNECTOR ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE MODULE. Handling/Installation/Diagnosis 1. Air bag assembly should not be subjected to temperatures above 65° C (150° F). 2. Air bag assembly, and SDM should not be used if they have been dropped from a height of 100 centimeters (3.28 feet) or more. 3. When a SDM is replaced, it must be oriented with the arrow on the SDM pointing toward the front of the vehicle. It is very important for the SDM to be located flat on the mounting surface, parallel to the vehicle datum line. It is important that the SDM mounting surface is free of any dirt or other foreign material. 4. Do not apply power to the SRS unless all components are connected or a diagnostic chart requests it, as this will set a diagnostic trouble code. 5. The "SRS Diagnostic System Check" must be the starting point of any SRS diagnostics. The "SRS Diagnostic System Check" will verify proper "AIR BAG" warning lamp operation and will lead you to the correct chart to diagnose any SRS malfunctions. Bypassing these procedures may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis, and incorrect parts replacements. Page 1065 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Torque 13 ft.lb Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 7993 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 383 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Page 3256 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 3938 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4067 Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Evaporative Emission Purge Control Solenoid Valve Photo 22 Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Photo 161 Page 5042 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7462 Nippondenso Compressor Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch A Page 8842 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7412 A/C Thermostat: Description and Operation A/C Thermostat The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns OFF the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3°C (37°F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. The blower motor will keep running when the sensor turns OFF the compressor. Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch ............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Page 8284 VSS Test Page 4030 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3566 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 272 Locations ABS Component Locations Page 2960 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Page 8612 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof Open/Close Relay ^ Moonroof open relay ^ Moonroof close relay Page 8441 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3871 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4482 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Impact Sensor: Locations SRS Operation The impact sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Page 7812 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Service and Repair Page 810 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4508 Page 1570 Front Brake Bleeder Valve Rear Drum Brake Bleeder Valve Rear Disc Brake Bleeder Valve 3. Connect a hose to the brake bleed screw at the right rear wheel and place the open end in a container to collect the expelled fluid. 4 Loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. When the brake pedal reaches the end of it's stroke, hold the pedal down and tighten the bleed screw. Specs Front bleed screw 9 Nm (6.5 lb.ft.) Rear bleed screw 7 Nm (5 lb.ft.) Page 2811 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6216 Caliper Bolts Location ^ Remove the two caliper bolts and caliper body from the bracket. Pins & Pin Boot Placement ^ Remove the pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. INSTALLATION Pad Spring Location 1. Install the pad spring on the caliper. Page 589 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2160 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5921 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6803 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1444 Drive Belt: Specifications Power Steering POWER STEERING PUMP BELT DEFLECTION [1] Used Belt ............................................................................................................................................. ....................... 13.0 - 16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 in) New Belt ..................................................................... ................................................................................................ 11.0 - 12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 in) POWER STEERING PUMP BELT TENSION Used Belt ............................................................................................................................................. .............................. 390 - 540 N (88 - 121 lbf) New Belt ...................................................................... ..................................................................................................... 740 - 880 N (165 - 198 lbf) [1] With a force of 98 N (22 lbf) applied, and measured between the A/C compressor and the crankshaft pulley. Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle .................................................................................................................................................. ................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) Minimum At 3,000 rpm ........................................................... .............................................................................................................. 340 kPa (50 psi) Minimum Page 7914 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Page 9620 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2049 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3850 Under Center Of Vehicle Page 6766 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 7532 Page 3740 PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12V Page 9374 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5699 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3720 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8979 Page 328 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Actuator/Cable Replacement Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair Actuator/Cable Replacement 1. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the actuator. Actuator Cable Replacement 2. Remove the two mounting bolts and the actuator with the bracket. 3. Remove the EVAP purge control solenoid valve from the actuator bracket. 4. Remove the vacuum hose. 5. Remove the three nuts. Actuator Cable Replacement 6. Disconnect the actuator cable from the actuator rod by releasing the clip from the rod with a screwdriver as shown. Page 5649 Countershaft: Service and Repair MAINSHAFT, COUNTERSHAFT REMOVAL 1. Remove transaxle from car. See: Service and Repair 2. Remove transmission housing. See: Transmission Housing/Service and Repair 3. Remove reverse idler gear shaft. See: Reverse Gear Shaft 4. Remove the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies with the shin forks from the clutch housing. NOTE: Tape the mainshaft splines before removing the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies. NOTE: Before assembling, clean all parts in solvent, dry them with compressed air, then coat them with clean oil.. COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY CLEARANCE INSPECTION Page 9758 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 5923 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8932 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 942 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1960 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 3003 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations Page 8376 ^ Outer handle 2. Disconnect the connector, inner handle rod and lock rod. 3. Remove the latch through the hole in the door 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: ^ Make sure the inner handle rod, lock rod and connector are connected properly. ^ Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Page 2114 Page 2946 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2768 Page 4152 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Photo 57 Door Switch: Locations Photo 57 At Driver's Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 3521 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. - After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable, the throttle cable and the A/T throttle control cable. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Throttle Cable/Linkage - The TP sensor is not removable. REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY Page 2584 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8005 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams Safety Indicator - Circuit Diagram Front Wheel Sensor: Locations Front Behind Left Front Wheel (Right Similar) Page 8987 Page 6786 Specifications Throttle Body: Specifications Torque 16 ft.lb Page 4874 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5379 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4388 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 506 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1563 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Polyalkleneglycol (PAG) Denso ND OIL 8 Page 8303 Page 4690 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8867 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8598 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 1843 Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications Steering Gear Specifications Steering Gear Specifications Gear Ratio 16.3 : 1 Note: Overall Ratio Number of Turns Lock to Lock 3.1 Adjustment Angle 20 +/- 5 deg Note: Angle of rack-guide-screw loosened from locked position. Page 629 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 180 Behind Front Grille Page 244 Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Dimmer Relay ^ Dimmer relay Page 5126 Fluid Pump: Testing and Inspection 1. Install the ATF pump gears and ATF pump driven gear shaft in the main valve body. NOTE: Lubricate all parts with ATF during inspecting. - Install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side facing up as shown. 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive and driven gears. ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance Standard (New): - ATF Pump Drive Gear 0.210 - 0.265 mm (0.0083 - 0.0104 inch.) - ATF Pump Driven Gear 0.035 - 0.063 mm (0.0014 - 0.0025 inch.) Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 671 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Pin Switch Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 2865 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9710 Page 9555 Page 4278 Page 1965 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: - Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). "UP" mark on the camshaft pulley should be at top, and TDC grooves on the camshaft pulley should align with the cylinder head surface. 3. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. - Intake: 0.26 mm (0.010 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) - Exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Page 8039 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6567 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 9909 Rear Defogger Switch: Service and Repair CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rear window defogger switch or the instrument panel when prying the switch out. 1. Carefully pry the switch out of the instrument panel. Switch Replacement 2. Disconnect the 6-P connector from the switch. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 811 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4040 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3684 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Page 4189 Fillpipe Restrictor: Testing and Inspection Remove the fuel filler cap and check the fillpipe restrictor for tampering. On models with more that one fuel tank, check each tank filler tube. Page 8820 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Page 8496 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Page 9178 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT sending unit. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 2. With the engine cold, use an ohmmeter to measure resistance between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). 3. Check the temperature of the coolant. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 4. Run the engine, and measure the change in resistance with the engine at operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 5. If the obtained readings are substantially different from the specifications above, replace the sending unit. Page 7331 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Photo 9 Left Front Of Engine Compartment Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 8274 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9331 Page 522 Page 9166 VSS Test Page 4445 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7575 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9965 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the driver's door panel. Master Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures No. 1, 2, 3 and 7. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Master Switch Test Front Passenger's Switch: Page 1202 Countershaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 1620 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Seats - Manual Seats Hard to Adjust Technical Service Bulletin # 97-016 Date: 970428 Seats - Manual Seats Hard to Adjust 97-016 April 28, 1997 Applies To: 1994-97 Accord - ALL Manually Adjustable Seats Hard to Release SYMPTOM The seat track release lever on a manually adjustable driver's or passenger's seat is hard to operate. PROBABLE CAUSE The inner seat track is not in alignment with the outer seat track. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the seat tracks first. If the symptom does not improve, then realign the inner seat track to the outer seat track with shims. PARTS INFORMATION Washer-bolt, 10 x 25 mm: P/N 93405-10025-08, H/C 2811651 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 81270-SV1-A02 H/C 4363370 Defect code: 030 Contention code: B99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Adjusting the Seat Tracks 1. Remove the three seat track end covers, then loosen the four seat track mounting bolts. 2. Move the seat to the rearmost position on both track rails. Page 9502 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6745 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection PRESSURE CHECK TOOL REQUIRED - 07QAK-P0A0120 P/S Joint Adapter (Hose) - 07406-0010001 P/S Pressure Gauge NOTE: Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. First check the power steering fluid level and pump belt tension. CAUTION: Disconnect the high-pressure hose with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts. 1. Disconnect the outlet line from the pump outlet fitting, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet. 2. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hosed to the power steering pressure gauge, then connect the feed line (outlet hose) to the adaptor. 3. Install the power steering pressure gauge to the P/S joint adaptor (pump). 4. Open the shut-off valve fully. 5. Open the pressure control valve fully. 6. Start the engine and let it idle. 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature. 8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read less than 1500 kPa (213 psi). If it reads high, check the feed line (outlet hose) or valve body unit. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6609 Relay Box: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 1386 Distributor: Service and Repair Installation Distributor Installation Distributor Installation NOTE: ^ Before you install the distributor, bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lugs on the end of the distributor and their mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts. 4. Connect the connector(s) to the distributor. 5. Connect the ignition wires as shown. M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Synchronizer Ring: Customer Interest M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Page 1007 Page 9613 Page 6869 b. Install the valve body unit on the gearbox, and tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. c. Measure the clearance between the gearbox and valve body unit using a feeler gauge as shown. NOTE: Measure the clearance at the point midway between the two mounting bolts. d. Determine the required thickness of the 32 mm shims by subtracting the clearance obtained in step c. from the total thickness of the four shims. (Total thickness of the 4 shims) - (Clearance) = Required thickness of the shims NOTE: Select the shims so that the total thickness is close to, but less than the required thickness. Example: Measurement is 0.28 mm (0.011 inch): 0.70 - 0.28 = 0.42 mm (0.028 - 0.011 = 0.017 inch). The selected shims should be 0.25 mm (0.010 inch) and 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) in thickness. If the required shim thickness is.10 mm or less, no shims are necessary. 49. Set the selected 32 mm shims on the bearing surface of the gearbox housing. 50. Coat the new O-ring with grease, and carefully fit it on the valve housing. 51. Apply grease to the needle bearing in the gearbox housing. 52. Install the valve body unit on the gearbox housing by engaging the gears. Page 9281 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 156 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 154 Page 960 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 3018 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4546 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair 1. Open the throttle valve fully, then install the throttle cable in the throttle linkage, and install the cable housing in the cable bracket. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (transmission in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Adjust the cruise control cable. 4. Hold the throttle link to the throttle lever; there should be no clearance. 5. Hold the cable sheath, removing all slack from the cable. 6. Turn the adjusting nut until it is 3 mm (0.12 in.) away from the cable bracket. 7. Tighten the locknut. The cable deflection should now be 10 - 12 mm (0.39 - 0.47 in.). If not, refer to System Diagnosis. See: Testing and Inspection 8. Adjust the A/T throttle control cable. Page 4876 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2363 Page 2025 A/C Compressor Belt Adjustment Tension Gauge Method 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the A/C compressor belt as shown below, and measure the tension of the belt. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: 440-590 N (45-60 kgf, 99- 132 lbf) New Belt: 930 - 1130 N (95 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) Power Steering Pump Belt Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kgf, 88 - 121 lbf) New Belt: 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kgf, 165 - 198 lbf) NOTE: ^ If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. ^ Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the belt tension gauge. ^ "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. ^ "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut of the alternator. 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension, then retighten the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the tension of the A/C compressor belt. Page 9187 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5366 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2934 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Page 7787 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolster, both sides 2. Remove these items: - Rear door trim - Rear pillar trim, both sides - Rear bulkhead cover - Center belt cover - High mount brake light - Lock cylinder trim - Rear shelf 3. Remove the center anchor bolt of the center belt. 4. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A), the retractor mounting ET screw (B), the retractor bolt (C), and remove the rear seat belt (D) and retractor (E). Rear Seat Belts - Sedan Lower Anchor Bolt - Sedan Page 4565 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Testing and Inspection Balance Shaft Belt: Testing and Inspection NOTE: ^ The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. ^ After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the upper cover. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 6. Remove the lower cover. 7. Install the crankshaft pulley. 8. Inspect the timing balancer belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: ^ Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. ^ Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 9. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Page 9051 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3805 Page 7570 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4254 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2339 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 9523 Page 6577 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 1678 Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Page 7991 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 9438 Headlamp Relay: Locations Photo Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch A Page 7369 AIR MIX CONTROL CABLE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the self-tapping screw and clamp. 2. Lift the end of the temperature control lever up, then remove the air mix control cable. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items: Be sure the end of the cable housing is against the stop before tightening the cable clamp. - After assembly, check that the temperature control lever slides smoothly through the full stroke from right to left. Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Correct Fluid/Capacity Correct Fluid/Capacity Type Honda Power Steering Fluid Note: Another brand of power steering fluid may be used as a replacement. DO NOT use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). System Capacity 0.90 qt (US) Reservoir Capacity 0.42 qt (US) Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 325 Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Page 201 M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Synchronizer Hub: Customer Interest M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Page 745 A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Page 7817 Page 564 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Starter Cut Relay ^ Starter cut relay Specifications Clutch Pedal Assembly: Specifications Pedal Height 184 mm Note: To floor. Pedal Stroke 142.5 - 152.5 mm Free Play 9 - 15 mm Disengagement Height 74 mm 40 mm Note: To the floor. (min.) Note: To the carpet. Page 3749 Page 722 Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 5. Check for continuity between the terminals of the 20-P connector in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. ^ If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the steering column covers. 7. Disconnect the combination switch harness 4-P connector from the cable reel. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 8. Check for continuity between the terminals as shown: ^ If there is no continuity, replace the combination switch harness. ^ If there is continuity, go to step 9. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 9. Carefully remove the set/resume switch cover by prying between the cover and the switch in the sequence shown. Page 3372 Locations Illustrated Index Page 2689 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3618 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Left Kick Panel Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Photo 82 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 2152 Specifications Ignition Coil: Specifications Primary Winding 0.45 - 0.55 ohms Note: Resistance at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Secondary Winding 16.8 K ohms Note: Resistance at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Page 7975 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Handset Volume And/or Mute Button(s) Are Inoperative) Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine Page 3304 Page 4834 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Specifications Final Driven Gear: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 101 Nm (74.5 ft. lbs.) Page 1640 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Stays ON Page 9467 Headlight Switch (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7909 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Page 2335 Specifications Expansion Valve: Specifications TORQUE Expansion valve to evaporator core ................................................................................................................................................... 24 Nm (17 lb ft) Expansion valve to receiver line ........................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm (12 lb ft) Page 3494 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel tank pressure sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Page 3514 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3473 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4078 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7073 Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Page 2726 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Page 7708 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 1420 4. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 5. Tighten the locknut and check clearance again. Repeat adjustment if necessary. No. 3 Piston At Top Dead Center 6. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (Camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. Page 2161 Page 9204 A/T Gear Position Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 3897 Page 8170 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7957 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2305 10. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing belt and timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. NOTE: When removing the timing balancer belt only: ^ Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. ^ Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing belt. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4684 Page 7384 Page 8789 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7196 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4449 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1327 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Page 2913 7. Reconnect the ECM/PCM 32-P connector. 8. Disconnect the 22-P connector from the gauge assembly, and check for continuity on the BLU wire between the ICM and tachometer. There should be continuity. 9. Check for continuity on the BLU wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. 10. If all the tests are normal, reconnect the 22-P connector to the gauge, and replace the ICM. * F22B1 ENGINE Page 6667 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Installation Tool Balance Shaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Installation Tool 99-037 May 25, 1999 Applies To: 1990-99 Accord - ALL with L4 engine 1992-99 Prelude - ALL 1995-98 Odyssey - ALL Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Installation Tool A special tool is required to properly install the front balancer shaft oil seal on the vehicles listed above. The balancer shaft oil seal installation procedure in the service manual does not install the balancer shaft oil seal to the proper depth. Improper oil seal installation depth may cause premature oil seal failure. The procedure in the service manual should not be used. Cross out the balancer shaft oil seal installation procedure in the service manuals, and refer to this service bulletin. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Seal Installer: T/N O7XAF-PT00100, H/C 6186050 (Shipped to all current dealers on May 25, 1999) Installer shaft: T/N O7NAF-PT0020A, H/C 3996139 (Existing special tool) Additional seal installers are available from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. PROCEDURE 1. Clean the balancer shaft and the balancer shaft oil seal housing with contact cleaner. 2. Dry the balancer shaft and the balancer shaft oil seal housing. 3. Apply a light coat of grease to the balancer shaft and to the lip of the new seal. Do not lubricate or apply sealant to the outside of the seal. 4. Slide the new seal on the balancer shaft. 5. Place the seal installer on the balancer shaft, then thread the installer shaft into the balancer shaft. Page 8306 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2575 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9515 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8276 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5751 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Torque Converter Housing/Valve Body Removal Valve Body: Service and Repair Torque Converter Housing/Valve Body Removal NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. - Blow out all passages. - When removing the valve body, replace the O-rings. 1. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts). 2. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts). 3. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the servo body and main valve body. 4. Remove the 4th accumulator cover (three bolts). NOTE: The 4th accumulator cover is spring loaded. To prevent stripping the threads in the servo body, press down on the accumulator cover while unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern. 5. Remove the seven bolts securing the servo body, then remove the servo body and separator plate. 6. Remove the secondary valve body and separator plate. Page 9549 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8263 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5137 Page 41 Integrated Control Unit Power Window Key-off Timer System Power Window Key-Off Timer System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Entry Light Timer System Entry Light Timer System Page 6873 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Disassembly 1. Remove steering gear. 2. Wash gearbox off with solvent and brush. Do not dip seals and O-rings in solvent. 3. Remove air hose and clips, then the tie-rod end locknut. 4. Remove boot bands and tube clamps, then pull boots away from ends of gearbox. Fig. 13 Exploded View Of Power Steering Gear 5. Unbend lock washer, then hold steering rack, Fig. 13, with wrench and unscrew rack end with wrench. 6. Loosen locknut and remove rack guide screw. 7. Remove spring and rack guide from gear housing, then the cylinder pipes A and B from gearbox. 8. Drain fluid from cylinder fittings by slowly moving steering rack back and forth. 9. Remove two flange bolts, then the valve body unit from gearbox. 10. Drill 0.12 inch diameter hole approximately 0.12 inch in depth into staked point on cylinder. Do not allow metal shavings to enter cylinder housing. After removing cylinder end, remove any burrs at staked point. 11. Install suitable puller yoke on steering gearbox, then clamp yoke in vise and loosen and remove cylinder end. 12. Set gearbox in press so gear housing points upward, then assemble 12 x 1.25 mm flange nut onto 12 x 170 mm grade 170 flange bolts. Wrap flange portion of bolt with vinyl tape to protect cylinder. Page 1122 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7367 Heater Control Panel: Service and Repair Heater Control Panel Removal and Installation Heater Control Panel - Replacement 1. Disconnect the air mix control cable from the heater unit. 2. Remove the stereo radio/cassette player and the glove box. 3. Remove the cruise control main/moonroof, dash lights brightness controller and rear window defogger switches. Heater Control Panel - Replacement 4. Remove the six self-tapping screws, then pull out the instrument/heater control panels. Disconnect the connectors from the heater control panel, then remove the instrument/heater control panels. Page 1075 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7652 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 2415 Distributor: Service and Repair Installation Distributor Installation Distributor Installation NOTE: ^ Before you install the distributor, bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lugs on the end of the distributor and their mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts. 4. Connect the connector(s) to the distributor. 5. Connect the ignition wires as shown. Page 5720 7. Check the thrust clearance in the manner described below. NOTE: Measurement should be made at normal room temperature. a. Install the 78 mm shim selected and oil guide plate in the transmission housing. b. Install the spring washer and washer on the ball bearing. NOTE: Clean the spring washer, washer and thrust shim thoroughly before installation. - Install the spring washer, washer and thrust shim properly. c. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing. d. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft and onto the clutch housing. e. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with several 8 mm and 10 mm bolts. NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent between the housings. f. Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer. g. Slide the mainshaft base over the mainshaft. Page 882 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations ABS Control Unit ABS Control Unit: Locations ABS Control Unit Right Kick Panel Page 7711 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8309 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4000 Page 4797 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the solenoid pin. 2. Remove the self-locking nuts and shift lock solenoid. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 3. Install the new shift lock solenoid in the reverse order of removal, and adjust its position. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove, and tighten the self-locking nuts. NOTE: Use brand-new self-locking nuts. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement NOTE: Test the solenoid after you assembled it. Page 8934 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 6486 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 2422 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque 13 ft lb (18 Nm) Page 8033 Page 9698 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Page 9605 Electrical Specifications Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 290 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Page 7046 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection BEARING END PLAY 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch). 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Page 8752 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test Key Interlock Solenoid Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Main Control ABS Control Unit: Description and Operation Main Control ABS Control Unit Function PURPOSE The Anti-Lock Brake Sysytem (ABS) control unit consists of a main function, which controls the operation of the anti-lock brake system, and sub-function, which controls the pump motor and self-diagnosis". FUNCTION For safety, the main function consists of two systems, and the ABScontrol unit activates the solenoid valve only when the outputs of the two systems agree with each other. Main The main function section of the ABS control unit performs calculations on the basis of the signals from each wheel sensor, and controls the operation of the anti-lock brake system by activating the solenoid valves in the modulator unit for each front brake and for the two rear brakes. The ABS has individual control of the front wheels and common control ("Select Low") for the rear wheels. "Select Low" means that the rear wheel that would lock first (the one with the lowest resistance to lock-up) determines the ABS activation for both rear wheels. Sub The sub-function section has the fail-safe function that monitors the system operation by inputting the brake switch, parking brake switch and pressure switch signals, and stops the anti-lock brake system when it detects an abnormality in the system. It also has a self-diagnosis function and controls the pump motor. Page 6948 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Ball Joint TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAG-SD40700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide - 07HAF-SF10110 Ball Joint remover/Installer - 07HAF-SF10130 Ball Joint Remover Base - 07HAF-SF10120 Ball Joint Installer Base REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the steering knuckle, then remove the hub unit from the steering knuckle. 2. Remove the boot by prying the set ring off. 3. Check the boot for deterioration and damage, and replace it if necessary. 4. Install the special tools on the ball joint, and tighten the castle nut. 5. Position the special tools over the ball joint as shown, then set the assembly in a vise. Press the ball joint out of the steering knuckle. 6. Place the ball joint in position by hand. 7. Install the special tools over the ball joint as shown, then press the ball joint in. 8. Install the ball joint boot and set ring using the special tool. 9. Install the hub unit onto the steering knuckle. 10. Install the steering knuckle. 11. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 7421 5. Disconnect the connector from the A/C thermostat. Remove the four self-tapping screws, two mounting nuts and the mounting bolt. Disconnect the drain hose, then remove the evaporator. 6. Pull out the A/C thermostat sensor from the evaporator fins. 7. Remove the self-tapping screws and clamps from the housings. 8. Carefully separate the housings, then remove the evaporator. 9. Remove the expansion valve. Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3329 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R Page 8260 Driver's Door Lock Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Locks: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Lock Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 3072 Page 2577 Page 7544 Page 2980 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Center Rear of Engine Page 9218 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6672 Alignment: Specifications Front Rear Camber 0 +/- 1.0 deg -0.25 +/- 0.30 deg Caster 3.00 +/- 1.0 deg --Toe 0 +/- 2 mm 2 +/- 2 mm Note: Toe In Page 7663 SRS Unit Replacement 4. Pull down the carpeting from both sides of the heater ducts. SRS Unit Replacement 5. Disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector from the SRS unit. NOTE: For disconnecting the spring-loaded lock type connector. 6. Remove the four Torx bolts from the SRS unit, then pull out the SRS unit from the passenger's side. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. - When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement, be careful to turn them in so that their beads rest squarely on the brackets. SRS Unit Replacement 7. Stick the SRS unit cover onto the upper surface of the new SRS unit, and install the new SRS unit. Page 2228 8. Remove the dipstick and the dipstick tube. Make sure you cover the hole to keep debris out of the oil pan. 9. Raise the vehicle, and remove the left front wheel. 10. Remove the mounting bolts from the driver's side half of the splash shield. Pull back the splash shield, and secure it so you can access the crankshaft pulley. 11. Use the special tools and a wrench to remove the crankshaft pulley bolt, then remove the pulley. 12. Remove the three mounting bolts from the lower cover. Pry the bottom of the cover away from the block about an inch, and use a socket or similar tool to hold it there. Page 3061 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 204 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4271 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Pressure Pressure With Regulator Vacuume Hose Disconnected 38-48 Psi Page 4256 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4758 Page 7884 Control Unit Input Test 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Disconnect the 18-P and 12-P connectors from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace it. Page 3721 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9547 Page 3620 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5315 3. If the throttle control lever is not synchronized with the throttle linkage, adjust the throttle control cable. 4. Check that there is play in the throttle control lever while depressing the accelerator pedal to the fully-throttle position. 5. Remove the cable end of the throttle control cable from the throttle control lever. Removal/Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Removal/Replacement CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before: - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot; the engine coolant is under pressure and could severely scald you. 2. Open the clamp, then disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm. Page 3941 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8185 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Specifications Balance Shaft Gear: Specifications Driven Gear Bolt .................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Gear Case Mounting Bolts .................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Page 1661 Tires: Description and Operation GENERAL DESCRIPTION Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the originals in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All model are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear. TREAD WEAR INDICATORS The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators (1) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended. Page 237 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Page 3762 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7699 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9678 Page 7912 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Page 8645 3. Check under the seat to confirm that both seat track latches are engaged. If one of the seat track latches does not engage, sit in the seat and slide back and forth until the latches engage in the rearmost position. 4. Torque the two seat track front mounting bolts to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 5. Pull up on the seat track release lever, and move the seat all the way forward; do not use the walk-in lever or the recline lever. Torque the two seat track rear mounting bolts to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 6. Check the seat for proper operation: ^ If the seat operates properly (slides smoothly and releases easily), reinstall the seat track end covers; the repair is complete. ^ If one of the seat track latches still does not engage, continue to Shimming the Inner Seat Track Shimming the Inner Seat Track 1. Move the seat to the rearmost position. 2. Check under the seat to confirm that both seat track latches are engaged. If the seat track latches do not engage, sit in the seat and slide back and forth until the latches engage in the rearmost position. NOTE: Do not move the seat from this position or use the walk-in or recline levers until this procedure is completed. 3. Remove the front mounting bolt from the inner seat track. Loosen the other three seat track mounting bolts several turns. 4. Move the seat back and forth and side to side until you see a gap between the front of the inner seat track and its mounting boss. Page 2900 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 6550 Electronic Noise Suppressor: Locations Photo 123 Below Left Side Of Rear Seatback Page 3763 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9680 Page 3614 Removal Distributor: Service and Repair Removal Distributor Removal 1. Disconnect the connector(s) from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts, then remove then distributor from the cylinder head. Page 6671 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Page 755 Page 9584 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 435 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Page 7977 In-Dash Cellular Phone Page 7550 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8189 General Module: Testing and Inspection Integrated Control Unit - Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Integrated Control Unit - Input Test 1. Remove the driver's side kick panel, then disconnect the 16-P connector from the integrated control unit. 2. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Integrated Control Unit Page 9867 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Slide Motor Power Seat Motor: Locations Slide Motor Photo 169 Underside Of Driver's Seat Photo 176 Page 3490 PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12V Page 2830 Page 5868 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 8261 Page 9550 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3892 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2332 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3583 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Stays ON Page 9755 Headlight Switch (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6614 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9376 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Photo 46 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 46 Behind Front Grille Page 1043 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7674 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Steering-Related Precautions STEERING WHEEL AND CABLE REEL ALIGNMENT Center the cable reel whenever the following is performed. (Refer to centering the cable reel.) Misalignment of the cable reel (the cable reel is not centered) could cause an open in the cable reel, making the SRS system and the horns inoperative. Installation of the steering wheel - Installation of the cable reel - Installation of the steering column - Other steering-related adjustment or installation Do not disassemble the cable reel. Do not apply grease on the cable reel. If the cable reel shows any signs of damage for example, it does not rotate smoothly, replace the cable reel with a new one. Page 6969 22. Use the ball joint remover as shown on step 10 to separate the upper ball joint and steering knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 23. Pull the steering knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the steering knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end using a plastic hammer, then remove the steering knuckle. Page 7697 Page 4255 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9428 Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Dimmer Relay ^ Dimmer relay Page 5743 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Page 2188 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4424 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6496 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 986 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 1679 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Page 2359 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the 12 mm sealing nut from the fuel rail. Attach the fuel pressure adapter nut, 12 mm (90201 - P0A - 003) and the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch on, wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kgf/sq.cm, 38 - 48 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 210 - 250 kPa (2.1 - 2.8 kgf/sq.cm, 30 - 37 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Page 8176 Page 7115 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Page 8674 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 6-Way Power Adjustable 1. Remove the adjuster cover. Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 6-P connectors from the power seat switch, then remove the switch from the adjuster cover by removing its two mounting screws. Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 9373 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Fuel Rail: Specifications Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 8591 Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) Reconnect the 14-P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Page 2850 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 4249 Page 2729 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Page 6926 Ball Joint Kit, Prelude: P/N 04510-5L5-000, H/C 6194039 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Heavy-Duty Hub Puller: Snap-on P/N CJ-129 Old Forge P/N 2518 NOTE: Heavy-duty hub pullers can be purchased through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at (888) 424-6857. Ball Joint Remover/Installer Tool Set: The individual tools do not have tool numbers; each tool is stamped with a letter for reference. System Bleed Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair System Bleed If the brake fluid is completely drained from the ABS reservoir (air enters the modulator unit) at any time, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. NOTE: This procedure is for bleeding the modulator unit only. It is recommended the complete system be bled whenever any hydraulic connection is opened. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair USING HONDA PGM TESTER The ABS can be bled using the Honda PGM Tester and the ABS Diagnostic Kit to run the ABS pump. Connect the tester and module A (refer to PGM users guide), then follow the tester's prompts. MANUAL BLEEDING 1. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 2. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container. 3. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor. NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 4. Tighten the bleeder when clean fluid starts to flow out, or if fluid level in the reservoir falls below the minimum level marked on the side. NOTE: Take care not to deplete the brake fluid in the reservoir. Refill as necessary. 5. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Page 6140 Caliper Bolt Installation - Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure that the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. - Pivot the caliper down into position, then install caliper bolt (pin A) and tighten it. Specs: Caliper Bolt 74 Nm (54 lb.ft.). WARNING: Be careful not damage the pin boot when pivoting the caliper down. - Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then road-test. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. - After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Page 5158 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5732 Reverse Gear Shaft: Service and Repair 1. Remove the reverse shim fork. 2. Remove the reverse idler gear shaft and the reverse idler gear. Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 8143 - If there is distortion coming from all four speakers, disregard this bulletin and follow normal troubleshooting procedures. 3. With the audio unit on and distortion coming from the front speaker(s), lightly press the speaker cone with your fingers. To prevent damage to the speaker, do not restrict movement of the cone for more than a few seconds. 4. If the noise subsides or is eliminated, replace the speaker(s). If the noise does not change, disregard this bulletin and follow normal troubleshooting procedures. 5. Reinstall the door panel(s) or the front speaker cover(s), and confirm the distortion is gone. Page 5625 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6032 Fail Safe Relay: Description and Operation FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended by turning off the two fail-safe relays. This disconnects the ground circuits of all the solenoid valves to prevent ABS operation.Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one. RELAY The fail-safe relay's terminal side contact is normally open. When there is continuity at the relay coil, the fail-safe relay is closed, thereby connecting the ground circuit to the solenoid valve. Page 9997 Coupe: Check the guide pin for damage, and replace it if necessary. NOTE: Scribe a line around the guide pin to show the original location. 7. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. Page 8750 Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Halogen headlights can become very hot in use; do not touch them or the attaching hardware immediately after they have been turned OFF. ^ Do not try to replace or clean the headlights with the lights ON. ^ Do not touch the glass of the halogen bulbs. 1. Disconnect the 2-P connector(s) from the headlight. 2. Turn the bulb holder(s) counterclockwise and remove the bulb(s). Page 5753 Page 1523 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... Honda ATF Only Page 5901 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3431 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Page 6829 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9646 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Page 2199 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Specifications Front Steering Knuckle: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lower Arm Nut ..................................................................................................................................... ............................... 49-59 Nm (36-43 ft. lbs.) Tie-Rod End Nut .......................................................... ........................................................................................................ 39-47 Nm (29-35 ft. lbs.) Upper Arm ...................................................................................................................................................... ..................... 39-47 Nm (29-35 ft. lbs.) Wheel Spindle Nut ................................................................. ..................................................................................................... 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.) Page 1066 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Transmission Page 177 Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 429 Page 8506 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Page 8828 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Specifications Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Specifications Cable Reel Cable Reel Air Bag Torx Bolts 9.8 Nm Steering Wheel Bolt 38 Nm Page 2448 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: - Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). "UP" mark on the camshaft pulley should be at top, and TDC grooves on the camshaft pulley should align with the cylinder head surface. 3. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. - Intake: 0.26 mm (0.010 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) - Exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Page 4661 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Balance Shaft Bearing: Specifications Inner Diameter: No. 1 Front Journal: Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................... 42.800-42.820 mm (1.6850-1.6858 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................... .................................................................................................... 42.83 mm (1.686 inch) No. 1 Rear Journal: Standard (New) ............................................................................................................................................ 21.00-21.013 mm (0.8268-0.8273 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................... .................................................................................................. 21.02 mm (0.828 inch) No. 2 Front And Rear Journals: Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................... 38.800-38.820 mm (1.5276-1.5283 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................... .................................................................................................... 38.83 mm (1.529 inch) No. 3 Front And Rear Journals: Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................... 34.800-34.820 mm (1.3701-1.3709 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................... .................................................................................................... 34.83 mm (1.371 inch) Page 6341 Relay Identification Page 67 Keyless Entry Module: Programming and Relearning Keyless Transmitter Codes Input Procedure Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Locations A/C Thermostat: Locations Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Page 3640 Page 6778 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Without filter ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 4.0 liters (4.2 quarts) Page 305 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 3753 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5070 Countershaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 6469 Electronic Noise Suppressor: Locations Photo 123 Below Left Side Of Rear Seatback Page 1608 Fuse Block: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 4214 Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair WARNING: - After the engine has been run, the exhaust pipe will be hot; be careful when working around the exhaust pipe. - Be careful when loosening the drain bolt while the engine is hot. Burns can result because the oil temperature is very high. 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads and rubber seal on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. - Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. - Tightening torque: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - Eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed on the surface of the filter. Page 8447 2. Remove the access lid and screws. 3. Remove the beverage holder and screw. Page 5796 Part 2 Of 2 Page 6604 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 4323 Page 5497 2. Drive the bearing outer race and thrust shim out of the transmission housing, or remove the bearing outer race and 75 mm shim from the clutch housing by heating the clutch housing to about 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun. CAUTION: Do not reuse the thrust shim if the outer race was driven out. NOTE: Do not heat the clutch housing in excess of 212°F (100°C). Page 2271 Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Lower Center Of Rear Engine Page 7447 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6885 Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Undeployed Air Bag During the course of a vehicle's useful life, certain situations may arise which will necessitate the disposal of a live (undeployed) air bag assembly. This information covers proper procedures for disposing of a live air bag assembly. Before a live air bag assembly can be disposed of, it must be deployed. A live air bag assembly must not be disposed of through normal refuse channels. Special care is necessary when handling and storing a live (undeployed) air bag assembly. The rapid gas generation produced during deployment of the air bag could cause the air bag assembly, or an object in front of the air bag assembly, to be thrown through the air in the unlikely event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DISPOSAL PROCEDURES CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. AN UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF THROUGH NORMAL REFUSE CHANNELS. THE UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY CONTAINS SUBSTANCES THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE ILLNESS OR PERSONAL INJURY IF THE SEALED CONTAINER IS DAMAGED DURING DISPOSAL. DISPOSAL IN ANY MANNER INCONSISTENT WITH PROPER PROCEDURES MAY BE A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL, STATE, AND / OR LOCAL LAW. In situations which require deployment of a live air bag assembly, deployment may be accomplished inside or outside the vehicle. The method employed Page 6054 Brake Line Placement 3. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Check the letters stamped on the modulator body, and connect the brake lines properly. Tighten the flare nuts. Specs: Flare nuts 19 Nm (14 lb.ft.) 4. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Check that: ABS indicator light is off. - Brake fluid is not leaking from the brake line joints. 5. Stop the engine. 6. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh fluid until the reservoir is refilled to the MAX (upper) level. 7. Perform brake bleeding procedures. See: System Bleed 8. Perform ABS sunctional checks using the ALB checker. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Page 9794 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2230 NOTE: An over-tensioned belt will cause crankshaft failure, usually within a few thousand miles. Make sure the belt tension is correct before releasing the vehicle to your customer. 23. Reinstall the upper or middle cover. Torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 24. Reinstall the cylinder head cover. Torque the mounting hardware sequentially in two or three steps as specified in the appropriate service manual. 25. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 26. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 27. Center-punch a completion mark above the last character of the engine compartment VIN. Page 7171 Recirculation Control Motor (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8873 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 289 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9567 License, Parking, Side Marker Lights And Taillights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3483 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4273 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the 12 mm sealing nut from the fuel rail. Attach the fuel pressure adapter nut, 12 mm (90201 - P0A - 003) and the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch on, wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kgf/sq.cm, 38 - 48 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 210 - 250 kPa (2.1 - 2.8 kgf/sq.cm, 30 - 37 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Page 4391 Page 4325 Page 7654 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 914 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 116 Right Side Of Cargo Area (Left Similar) Page 9264 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Brake Lights And High Mount Brake Light - Circuit Diagram Page 3970 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1771 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5156 Page 1905 Fig.3 Main Bearing Cap Bolt Loosening Sequence 9. Remove the bolts and the bearing cap bridge, then remove the bearing caps. CAUTION: To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 10. Turn the crankshaft so No. 2 and 3 crankpins are at the top. 11. Remove the rod caps/bearings and main caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 12. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage the journals. 13. Remove the bolts and the retainer, then remove the front balancer shaft and the rear balancer shaft. Photo View Oxygen Sensor: Locations Photo View Photo 12 Front Of Engine Photo 132 Testing and Inspection Cargo Lamp: Testing and Inspection Cargo Area Light Test 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing. Cargo Area Light Test 4. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the housing. Cargo Area Light Test 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 9303 Page 480 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 3569 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4763 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4556 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4428 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8442 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7710 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7043 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 7900 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Page 8449 6. Detach the clips by lifting the console panel, and disconnect the connectors. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the shift lever and A/T gear position indicator panel. - Remove the shift lever knob (M/T). 7. Remove the bolts, then remove the stereo radio/ cassette and pocket by pulling it out. Disconnect the connector and antenna lead. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before: disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio Page 7183 Air Door Cable: Service and Repair AIR MIX CONTROL CABLE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the self-tapping screw and clamp. 2. Lift the end of the temperature control lever up, then remove the air mix control cable. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items: Be sure the end of the cable housing is against the stop before tightening the cable clamp. - After assembly, check that the temperature control lever slides smoothly through the full stroke from right to left. Page 3898 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6057 Modulator Unit Location 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Removal and Installation WARNING: - The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. CAUTION: - When removing the modulator unit or after removing it, be careful not to turn it upside down or lean it excessively. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. REMOVAL Page 6620 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 7974 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Handset Speaker Is Inoperative) (No Audio) Page 2810 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8188 Integrated Control Unit - Circuit Diagram Page 7476 Page 9987 8. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. 9. Remove the glass run channel. Page 3571 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1490 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid type DOT 3 or 4 Page 678 Wheel Sensor: Locations Rear Behind Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar) Page 5161 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6699 Front Steering Knuckle: Service Precautions CAUTION: - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. Page 3468 Page 7006 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Remove the spring compressor, then disassemble the front damper as shown. INSPECTION 1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. Page 3074 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5763 3. Remove the reverse lock cam. 4. Remove the oil seal. 5. Bend the tab of the lock washer, then remove the bolt. 6. Remove the interlock bolt. NOTE: Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718 - 0001) to the threads before reassembly. Page 6083 from the reservoir (air enters in the modulator unit) during brake fluid replacement, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. 11. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 12. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container (see the previous page). 13. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 14. Tighten the bleeder when the fluid starts to flow out of the bleeder. 15. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Page 3760 Page 854 Page 5035 Page 9533 Key Cylinder Lamp: Description and Operation Entry Light Timer System Voltage is applied at all times to the ignition key light in the steering lock assembly and to the integrated control unit through fuse 30 and to the integrated control unit through fuse 37. When you open the driver's door, the integrated control unit provides a ground for the ignition key light. The light then goes ON and stays ON for 10 seconds after the door is closed. Page 8029 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9623 Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams License, Parking, Side Marker Lights And Taillights (Part 1 Of 2) Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Page 9851 Page 7703 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4675 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. MIL Does Not Come ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Does Not Come ON NOTE: If this symptom is intermittent, check for a loose fuse No. 1 (BACK UP LIGHTS, METER LIGHTS, 10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box, a poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A18, or an intermittent open in the LT GRN/RED wire between the ECM/PCM (A181 and the gauge assembly. Page 3651 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5363 Page 8787 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9233 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes ON. If you select R, for example, ground will be applied to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come ON. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the Powertrain or Transmission Control Module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 indicator light blink. Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. ABS Fail-Safe Relay Fail Safe Relay: Locations ABS Fail-Safe Relay Front Behind Right Side Of Dash Rear Page 3562 Page 5298 Shifter A/T: Testing and Inspection Parking Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console. 2. Remove the front console panel. 3. Remove the stereo radio/cassette player. 4. Remove the front console. 5. Disconnect the parking pin switch 2-P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 7647 5. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A) to the airbag. Place the deployment tool at least thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 6. Connect a 12 Volt battery to the tool. - If the green light on the tool comes on, the airbag igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is ready to be deployed. 7. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the airbags deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - During deployment the airbag can become hot enough to burn you. Wait thirty minutes after deployment before touching the airbag. 8. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely. Passenger's Air Bag Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: DEPLOYING AIRBAGS IN THE VEHICLE If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. Page 1330 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the 12 mm sealing nut from the fuel rail. Attach the fuel pressure adapter nut, 12 mm (90201 - P0A - 003) and the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch on, wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kgf/sq.cm, 38 - 48 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 210 - 250 kPa (2.1 - 2.8 kgf/sq.cm, 30 - 37 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Left Side Of Dash Page 8751 Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Seat Belt: Customer Interest Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Bulletin No. 93-033 Issue Date JUNE 3, 1996 Model: 1992 and Later [NEW] Applicable To: ALL except PASSPORT [NEW] File Under: BODY Broken Seat Belt Tongue Stopper Button (Supersedes 93-033, dated October 22, 1993) PROBLEM The seat belt tongue stopper button is broken, allowing the tongue to slide down to the floor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new seat belt tongue stopper button listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 1. Slide the seat belt tongue up the seat belt past the tongue stopper button hole. Temporarily secure the seat belt tongue to the belt fabric with masking tape. 2. Insert the male section of the button through the hole in the belt fabric. Align and install the female section of the stopper to the male section. 3. Preset the closed gap on a pair of vise-grip pliers to 4.5 mm. Page 7210 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations Windshield Washer Hose: Locations Rear Washer Hose Routing Rear Washer Hose Routing 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Remove the washer filler neck. 3. Disconnect the hose and the 2-P connector from the washer motor. 4. Remove the washer reservoir by removing the mounting bolts. 5. Remove the washer motor from the washer reservoir. 6. Remove the washer nozzles and washer hose. NOTE: ^ Take care not to pinch the hoses during reinstallation. ^ Install the grommets firmly. ^ After installation, adjust the aim of the washer nozzles. Page 9372 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 2473 Radiator Fan Control Module: Locations Photo View Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Page 402 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4364 Page 3356 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 179 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Condenser Fan Relay ^ A/C compressor clutch relay Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Left Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 2403 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3288 Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Testing and Inspection NOTE: The fast idle thermo valve is factory adjusted; it should not be disassembled. 1. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body. 2. Start the engine. 3. Put your finger over the lower port in throttle body, and make sure that there is air flow with the engine cold (engine coolant temperature below 86 °F, 30°C). If there is no air flow, replace the fast idle thermo valve and retest. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Check that valve is completely closed. If the valve is leaking, the idle speed will drop when you cover the lower port. Check engine coolant level and for air in the engine cooling system. If the cooling system is OK, replace the fast idle thermo valve and recheck. Page 401 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8430 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6322 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service Precautions CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications DIMENSIONS Rod Bearing-To-Oil Clearance: Standard (New) ...................................................................................................................................................... 0.021-0.049 (0.0008-0.0019 inch) Service Limit .................................................................................. ....................................................................................... 0.060 mm (0.0024 inch) Page 2194 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8320 7. If necessary, remove the lock cylinder, cylinder protector and cap. Release the retainer clip from the outer handle with pliers as shown. 8. Remove the lock cylinder, cylinder protector and cap from the outer handle. 9. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Page 3667 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 1320 6. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. NOTE: Reposition the tie-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced. Turning Angle NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. Turning angle: - Inward wheel: (39°00' ± 2°) +37° to +42°. - Outward wheel: 30°00' (reference) 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: - Front: (0°00' ± 1°) -1° to +1° - Rear: (-0°25' ± 30') -0.92° to +0.09° 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Toe-In NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release parking brake. NOTE: Measure difference in toe measurements with the wheels pointed straight ahead. - If the parking brake is engaged, you may get an incorrect reading. Rear toe-in: (2 ± 2 mm / 0.06 ± 0.06 inch) -0.06 to +0.06 inch. Page 2820 Page 4754 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9796 Spot Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Ceiling, Door Courtesy, Spot And Cargo Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9025 Odometer: Testing and Inspection Speedometer/Trip Meter/Odometer - Troubleshooting NOTE: The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. VSS Input Test (At Harness Side Of 3-P Connector) VSS Test Page 4494 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 9580 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6102 Brake Caliper: Application and ID Rear Caliper Identification Caliper I.D. There are two types of rear calipers: The caliper types can be identified by "NISSIN" or "AKEBONO" logo stamped on the caliper body. Check the type of caliper before servicing. Page 7808 Photo 102 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Photo 102 Below Left Center Of Dash Page 4393 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity (approx) 5.0 oz (US) Page 7386 Page 1624 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Component Tests and General Diagnostics Keyless Entry Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Unit Input Test Page 5219 Part 2 Of 2 Page 7636 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 7960 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9854 Turn Signal Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9249 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Testing and Inspection Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Light Controller Input Test Controller Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash lights brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard, then disconnect the 3-P connector from the controller. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Page 3515 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7920 This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form,* (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.), to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90801-5745 If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (800)852-4690, or Fax them at (310) 898-1029 (weekdays, from 8:30 A.M. thru 4:00 PM., PST). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your Dealership C.O.D. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. *On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. Procedure 5 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering wheel cover flashes when the system is in the programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. The parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. The parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter Locations Page 3269 No. 4 Piston At Top Dead Center 7. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. No. 2 Piston At Top Dead Center 8. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Front Front Brake Caliper Page 8250 Trailer Lighting Connector (Part 2 Of 2) Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Flow Control Valve Seat ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. 13 Nm (9 ft. lbs.) Inlet Joint Bolt ....................................................... ............................................................................................................................ 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Control Valve Cover Bolts ................................................................................................................... ............................................. 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Pulley Nut ............................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Pump Cover Flange Bolt ..................................................................................................................... ................................................. 20 Nm (14 ft. lbs.) Outlet Line Bolts ................................................... ............................................................................................................................ 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Pump Mounting Bolt ............................................................................................................................ ................................................ 24 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Page 9282 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7862 C540 (18-GRY) Page 1510 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 6812 Page 3089 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4451 Page 1790 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. - If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Page 6755 6. Remove the side plate and preload spring. NOTE: Replace the pump as an assembly if the side plate must be replaced. 7. Remove the O-rings from the side plate. 8. Remove the circlip, then remove the drive shaft assembly from the pump housing using a plastic hammer. 9. Remove the seal spacer and oil seal. Page 4341 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 4954 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the lock-up control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 2601 Radiator: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant. 2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses. 3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors. 4. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator. 5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from radiator. INSTALL ^ Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal: NOTE: ^ Set the upper and lower cushions securely. ^ Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air. Page 526 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4514 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4029 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 721 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts . NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 4. Disconnect the 20-P connector between the combination switch harness and main wire harness. Page 1833 Page 3449 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Testing and Inspection Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Switch Test 4. Disconnect the 20-P connector between the combination switch harness and main wire harness. Page 5314 Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection NOTE: Before inspecting the throttle control cable, make sure that: - Throttle cable free play is correct. - Idle speed is correct. - You warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 1. Check that the throttle control cable is routed correctly and held in place by the three clamps. 2. Check that the throttle control lever is synchronized with the throttle linkage, while depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal. Page 4206 Page 390 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Page 36 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5909 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Shift Fork: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Page 9866 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Relay Left Kick Panel - Photo 93 Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications DIMENSIONS Main Bearing-To-Journal Clearance: No. 1 And 4: Standard (New): 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 inch) Service Limit: 0.050 mm (0.0020 inch) No. 2: Standard (New): 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 inch) Service Limit: 0.050 mm(0.0020 inch) No. 3: Standard (New): 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 inch) Service Limit: 0.055 mm (0.0022 inch) No. 5: Standard (New): 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 inch) Service Limit: 0.040 mm (0.0024 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Fig.3 Main Bearing Cap Bolt Loosening Sequence Main Bolt Torque Sequence Main Bearing Cap Bolts In Sequence To 74 Nm (54 ft. lbs.) Page 2146 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair NOTE: Use new O-rings and gaskets when reassembling. CAUTION: ^ Check for folds or scratches on the surface of the gasket. ^ Replace with a new gasket if damaged. Page 7097 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 4918 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 9520 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3055 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Door Switch Test Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Test Door Switch Test 1. Remove the cover and the screw, then pull the switch out. 2. Disconnect the 1-P connector, and remove the switch. Door Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 9524 Page 2100 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Engine Low Oil Pressure Indicator System - Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire from the engine oil pressure switch. 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). ^ There should be continuity with the engine stopped. ^ There should be no continuity when the engine runs. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure and, if necessary, inspect the oil pump. Page 1700 Wheels: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Aluminum Wheel (Axial) 0 - 0.7 mm 2.0 mm Aluminum Wheel (Radial) 0 - 0.7 mm 1.5 mm Steel Wheel (Axial) 0 - 1.0 mm 2.0 mm Steel Wheel (Radial) 0 - 1.0 mm 1.5 mm Page 7245 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9636 Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 14-P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Page 76 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Without Keyless Entry Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14-P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) Disconnect the 14-P connector from the power door lock control unit. Page 3500 Page 9585 Page 393 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 2691 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5390 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 8550 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Without Keyless Entry Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14-P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) Disconnect the 14-P connector from the power door lock control unit. Page 9083 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Photo 57 Door Switch: Locations Photo 57 At Driver's Door Striker (Right Similar) Component Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Photo 9 Page 966 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications GAP GAP Spark Plug Air Gap 0.039-0.043 (in.) Page 2113 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8349 Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window motor; the right rear window motor is similar. Passenger's Window Motor Test 3. Check window motor operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: When the motor slops running, disconnect one lead immediately. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Locations ABS Component Locations Page 2492 Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations At Battery - Photo 6 Page 9791 Spot Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Locations Pressure Switch: Locations Connector, Control Unit And Relay Locations Page 430 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8825 Page 384 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 1773 Page 8182 General Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Photo 46 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 46 Behind Front Grille Page 4141 Fillpipe Restrictor: Testing and Inspection Remove the fuel filler cap and check the fillpipe restrictor for tampering. On models with more that one fuel tank, check each tank filler tube. Page 6859 25. Check the inner wall of the valve housing where the seal ring slides with your finger. If there is a step in the wall, the valve housing is worn. Replace the valve housing. NOTE: ^ There may be the sliding marks from the seal ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the valve housing only if the wall is stepped. ^ When the valve housing is replaced, install new 32 mm shim(s) on the bearing surface of the housing to adjust the thickness. 26. Check for wear, burrs and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the sleeve. NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve must be replaced, replace both parts as a set. 27. Remove the circlip and pinion shaft sleeve from the pinion shaft. 28. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Specifications Transmission Housing: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS 10 X 1.25 mm Bolts ............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Side Cover ........................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Specifications Trailing Arm: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Arm Bracket Bolts ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Arm Self Locking Nuts .......................................... ............................................................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Page 3126 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3849 Underside Center Of Vehicle Secondary HO2S Testing and Inspection Rear Defogger Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the rear window defogger switch from the instrument panel. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 2059 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 9652 Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Dimmer Relay ^ Dimmer relay Page 7745 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Specifications Engine Accessory Bracket: Specifications COMPRESSOR TO COMPRESSOR BRACKET Torque (8 X 1.25 mm bolts) .............................................................................................................................................................. 22 Nm (16 lb ft) COMPRESSOR BRACKET TO CYLINDER BLOCK Torque (10 X 1.25 mm bolts) ............................................................................................................................................................ 48 Nm (36 lb ft) Page 4412 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5373 Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Testing and Inspection Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 3909 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 4635 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6767 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 4043 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7664 SRS Unit Replacement 8. Connect the SRS main harness 18P connector to the SRS unit, then push it into position until it clicks. 9. Put the carpet back in place. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector to the SRS main harness, then reinstall the glove box. 12. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 13. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 14. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Page 3730 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1626 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 3164 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 3071 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Page 771 A/C Thermostat: Testing and Inspection A/C Thermostat - Test Connect battery power to the C terminal and ground the B terminal, and connect a test light between the A and C terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V, 3 W - 18 W test light. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. The light should go off at 36 - 39° F (2 - 4° C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41° F (4 - 5° C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Page 6225 Cam Installation 2. Coat a new cam boot with rubber grease and install it in the caliper body. 3. Apply rubber grease to the pin contacting area of the cam, and install the cam and lever assembly into the caliper body. 4. Install the return spring. CAUTION: When the cam and lever were separated, be sure to assemble them before installing the cam in the caliper body. - Install the lever and spring washer, apply locking agent to the threads, and tighten the parking nut while holding the lever with a vise. - Avoid damaging the cam boot since it must be installed before the cam. - When installing the cam, do not allow the cam boot lips to turn outside in. 5. Install the pin in the cam. 6. Install a new O-ring on the sleeve piston. Sleeve Piston Installation 7. Install the sleeve piston so the hole in the bottom of the piston is aligned with the pin in the cam, and two pins on the piston are aligned with the holes in the caliper. 8. Coat a new cup with rubber grease and install it with its groove facing the bearing A side of the adjusting bolt. Page 9688 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8816 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 2782 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4551 Page 5538 4. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 5. *Remove the outboard joint using the threaded adapter (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide hammer.* 6. Remove and discard the "C" clip from the driveshaft. Clean and inspect the driveshaft splines and ring groove for burrs or other defects. 7. Install the new outboard joint boot provided in the kit. Slide it slowly onto the driveshaft to avoid damaging the boot. 8. Install the new "C" clip onto the ring groove of the driveshaft. 9. Insert the driveshaft in the new outboard joint. Make sure the "C" clip is centered on the shaft and is resting against the chamfered edge of the inner race. 10. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Page 2752 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 6106 Caliper Pin, Boot Replacement - Install the pin boots into the groove in the caliper bracket properly. - Install the brake pads in their original positions. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the pin boots when installing the caliper. - Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads, and install the caliper. - Coat the caliper bolts (pin A and pin B) with seal grease and insert them into the caliper. - Tighten the caliper bolts (pin A and B) 74 Nm (54 lb.ft.). Caliper Bolt Replacement - Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) . - Fill the brake reservoir and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair - After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and Page 7541 Page 4247 Page 8515 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This Service Bulletin is for information only. TRANSMITTER QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Procedure 1 Page 4217 Page 9389 Dome Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Circuit Diagrams Page 75 Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, connect power and ground only momentarily. *: Disconnect the connector, and make these tests at the wire terminals. Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Power Steering Pump - Fluid Leak Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Power Steering Pump - Fluid Leak 98-023 March 9, 1998 Applies T0: 1994 - 97 Accord - ALL 1992 - 95 Civic - ALL 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL Leak From the Power Steering Pump SYMPTOM Fluid is leaking from the power steering pump between the pump housing and the cover. PROBABLE CAUSE The 0-ring between the pump housing and the cover is leaking. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the 0-ring between the pump housing and the cover. PARTS INFORMATION 0-ring (68.5 x 1.9 mm): P/N 91349-PY3-000, H/C 3676871 Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid: P/N 08206-9002, H/C 3747284 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 512711 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 91349-PY3-000 H/C 3676871 Defect code: 060 Contention code: B06 Template ID: 98-023A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power steering pump. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate Service Manual. Page 1116 Page 6274 Turning Point TURNING POINT The cut valve seat in the rear brake system has a shoulder between sections A, and B. Section A, where pressure from the master cylinder is applied, has a smaller diameter than section B, where pressure from the rear brake caliper is applied. This design provides the proportioning control valve function as follows. Master Cylinder Pressure Below When the fluid pressure from the master cylinder is below the turning point, the cut valve seat is pushed by the spring force and the cut valve is open. Therefore, the fluid pressure from the master cylinder is transmitted to the rear brake caliper side. Under these conditions, fluid pressure from the master cylinder is equal to the pressure to the rear brake caliper, but because of the diameter difference between sections A and B, the force on the cut valve overcomes the spring force, moving the cut valve seat toward the cut valve slowly. Master Cylinder Pressure Exceeds When the fluid from the master cylinder exceeds the turning point, the fluid pressure from the master cylinder rises, while the pressure to the rear brake caliper remains at the turning point value. As a result, the cut valve seat moves away from the cut valve and the cut valve opens. The passage between the master cylinder and caliper opens momentarily, but it is blocked again because the fluid pressure to the brake caliper rises, and the cut valve seat moves to close the cut valve. As described above, when the pressure in the master cylinder is above the turning point, the cut valve seat reduces the pressure in the rear brake caliper to the prescribed amount by repeating this process. Rear Brake Caliper Reaches When the fluid pressure to the rear brake caliper reaches the turning point, the cut valve is closed by the cut valve seat, blocking the fluid passage between the master cylinder side and rear wheel cylinder side. Page 4481 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3212 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7903 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Page 9742 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2159 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7851 Antenna Motor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the left quarter trim panel. Power Antenna Motor Replacement 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector and antenna lead from the motor, then remove the antenna nut and motor bracket nut. NOTE: If the antenna nut has an O-ring, check the O-ring for damage. If necessary, replace it to prevent a leak. 3. Remove the motor and antenna as an assembly. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: First tighten the antenna nut, then tighten the motor bracket nut. Electrical Specifications Starter Motor: Electrical Specifications Mitsuba Output Rating 1.6 kW NipponDenso Output Rating 1.4 kW Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 1884 Connecting Rod: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Small End Bore Diameter 21.968 - 21.981 mm --Large End Bore Diameter (Nominal) 51.0 mm --End Play Installed on Crankshaft 015 - 0.30 mm 0.40 mm Specifications Coolant Reservoir: Specifications Reservoir ............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 0.6 l (0.6 qts.) Body - Chrome/Stainless Trim Staining Information Exterior Moulding / Trim: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Chrome/Stainless Trim Staining Information Getting Rid of Stains on Chrome or Stainless Steel Unsightly stains on chrome or stainless steel trim around the door glass no longer means trim replacement. A good-quality chrome or aluminum polish, some careful masking to protect rubber molding and painted surfaces, and a little bit of elbow grease, can work wonders to get back that showroom shine. A couple of good brands to try are Mothers PowerMetal(TM), or Meguiars All Metal Polish or NXT Generation(TM) All Metal Polish. Page 1155 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7434 Page 958 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4766 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9291 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5166 Connector Pin Color And Function Chart CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly, and disconnect all connectors from it. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 22-P (C6O9) and 16-P (C6O7) connectors. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board A. Page 574 Page 7715 SRS Indicator Light Wire Connections Page 2561 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Fuel Pump Relay: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 8499 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Page 3568 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7375 Photo Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations Photo Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Specifications Valve: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Intake Valve Valve Stem Diameter 5.485 - 5.495 mm 5.455 mm Stem to Guide Clearance 0.020 - 0.045 mm 0.08 mm Valve Head Diameter 33.90 - 34.10 mm --Valve Margin Thickness 0.85 - 1.15 mm 0.65 mm Overall Length 114.85 - 115.15 mm --- Exhaust Valve Valve Stem Diameter 5.450 - 5.460 mm 5.420 mm Stem to Guide Clearance 0.055 - 0.080 mm 0.12 mm Valve Head Diameter 28.90 - 29.10 mm --Valve Margin Thickness 1.05 - 1.35 mm 0.95 mm Overall Length 112.85 - 113.15 mm --- Page 5690 Synchronizer Hub: Service and Repair SYNCHRO SLEEVE, SYNCHRO HUB INSPECTION 1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate wear. 2. Install each synchro hub in its mating synchro sleeve, and check for freedom of movement. NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set. SYNCHRO SLEEVE, SYNCHRO HUB INSTALLATION When assembling the synchro sleeve and synchro hub, be sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of deeper grooves in the synchro hub. CAUTION: Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the synchro hub slots because it will damage the spring ring. All Handset Functions Are Inoperative In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (All Handset Functions Are Inoperative) Page 7536 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 5372 Page 2704 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3606 Page 3925 Page 7965 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Hands-Free Microphone Is Inoperative) Page 4413 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7586 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 269 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Removal Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: ^ Replace the timing belt and timing balancer belt at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) according to the maintenance schedule (normal conditions/severe conditions). If the vehicle regularly is driven in one or more of the following conditions, replace the timing belt and timing balance belt at 60,000 miles 100,000 km. ^ In very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C). ^ In very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C). ^ Turn the crankshaft pulley so the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC) before removing the belt. ^ Inspect the water pump. Refer to Cooling System. ^ The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the wheelwell splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the Power Steering (P/S) pump belt. Page 8609 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 2834 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9038 Page 3225 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5159 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3091 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Replacement 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). 2. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the VSS. NOTE: The VSS drive link is a very small part; be careful not to lose it. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Electrical Specifications Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 3332 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Page 1374 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3296 Page 5960 Mainshaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 2021 Drive Belt: Specifications A/C BELT DEFLECTION [1] Used Belt: 8.0 - 10.5 mm (0.31 - 0.41 in) New Belt: 5.0 - 7.0 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) BELT TENSION [2] Used Belt: 440 - 590 N (45 - 60 kgf, 99 - 132 lbf) New Belt: 930 - 1130 N (95 - 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) [1] As measured between pulleys with 10 Kg (22 lbs) of force. "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. [2] Using tension gauge. Page 9153 Lamp Out Sensor: Testing and Inspection Brake Light Failure Sensor Test 1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the brake pedal is pressed. ^ If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. ^ If one of the brake lights does not come on, check whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to step 2. ^ If none of the brake lights come on, check the brake light circuit. 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the side box. 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on, when the No. 1 terminal of the 6-P connector is grounded and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire between the safety indicator and the No. 1 terminal of the failure sensor, and whether the safety indicator circuit (printed circuit board) has a problem. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on and stay on, go to step 4. 4. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II) with the No. 2 terminal of the 6-P connector grounded and the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, replace the failure sensor. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP does not stay on, check for an open in the BLK wire between the No. 2 terminal of the failure sensor and ground, and check for a poor ground at G551. Page 3557 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4242 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Front Seat Belt Buckle Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt Buckle 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the following part from the front seat: Manual Seat Manual Height Adjustable Seat - Manual seat: center cover - Manual height adjustable seat: center cover Power Height Adjustable Seat Page 1146 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4453 Specifications Accumulator: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Body Cover .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 1st/2nd Body ........................................................ ................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 4th Cover ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Mode Control Motor: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Mode Control Motor (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4074 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4994 Torque Converter Housing: Service and Repair Torque Converter Housing/Valve Body Removal NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. - Blow out all passages. - When removing the valve body, replace the O-rings. 1. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts). 2. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts). 3. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the servo body and main valve body. 4. Remove the 4th accumulator cover (three bolts). NOTE: The 4th accumulator cover is spring loaded. To prevent stripping the threads in the servo body, press down on the accumulator cover while unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern. 5. Remove the seven bolts securing the servo body, then remove the servo body and separator plate. 6. Remove the secondary valve body and separator plate. Page 6256 Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced. Component Location - Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference and twisting. - Check the brake lines for damage, rusting or leakage. Also check for bent brake lines. - Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the master cylinder and Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) modulator unit for damage and leakage. Page 2395 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 288 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Relay Left Kick Panel - Photo 93 Page 3811 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4980 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the lock-up control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 9991 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 19. Install the door panel. Page 9703 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect the backup light switch connectors. 2. Remove the backup light switch. 3. Install the new washer and backup light switch. 4. Connect the backup light switch connectors. Page 2859 Page 8802 Clock - Terminals Page 6776 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 3120 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7731 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag, and front passenger's airbag. OPERATION The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the back-up power circuit will keep voltage at a constant level. SRS Operation FOR THE SRS TO OPERATE 1. The impact sensor and safing sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send signals to the airbag inflators. 3. The inflators must ignite and deploy the airbags. Page 7177 Mode Control Motor: Service and Repair Mode Control Motor 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor. Mode Control Motor - Replacement 2. Remove the three self-tapping screws, mode control motor and the flange collar. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal, and after installation, make sure the mode control motor runs smoothly. Page 7381 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 903 Diagram Information and Instructions Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9042 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2191 Page 9883 Page 7503 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Polyalkleneglycol (PAG) Denso ND OIL 8 Page 4624 Distributor: Service and Repair Reassembly Distributor Reassembly 1. When reassembling distributor, install the distributor ignition (DI) rotor so that it faces in the direction shown (toward the No. 1 cylinder). 2. Align the index mark on the distributor ignition housing whit the index mark on the end of the shaft. Page 5055 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Electrical Diagrams Page 3482 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7027 Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Installation CAUTION: Any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings should be with the vehicle on the ground. NOTE: - Wipe off the oil, dirt or grease on the threads before tightening the fasteners. - Make sure the toe adjuster cams on lower arm A are installed in the same direction. - The right and left lower arm A are symmetrical. Install so the paint mark of "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) R UP (Arrow pointing upward)" and "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) L UP (Arrow pointing upward)" point to the front. - "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) L UP (Arrow pointing upward)" is stamped on the lent lower arm B and "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) R UP (Arrow pointing upward)" on the right lower arm B. - The left upper arm is stamped with "AL" while the right upper arm is stamped with "AR". - After installing the suspension arm, check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 6284 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair System Bleed If the brake fluid is completely drained from the ABS reservoir (air enters the modulator unit) at any time, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. NOTE: This procedure is for bleeding the modulator unit only. It is recommended the complete system be bled whenever any hydraulic connection is opened. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair USING HONDA PGM TESTER The ABS can be bled using the Honda PGM Tester and the ABS Diagnostic Kit to run the ABS pump. Connect the tester and module A (refer to PGM users guide), then follow the tester's prompts. MANUAL BLEEDING 1. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 2. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container. 3. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor. NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 4. Tighten the bleeder when clean fluid starts to flow out, or if fluid level in the reservoir falls below the minimum level marked on the side. NOTE: Take care not to deplete the brake fluid in the reservoir. Refill as necessary. 5. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Flushing CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this article is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). Fluid replacement procedures for the rest of the brake system are incorporated into the brake bleeding procedures for the basic brake hydraulic system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 1. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 2. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 3. Use the steps below to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: Approximately 35 - 45 ml (1 1/6 - 1 1/2 fl.oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. Modulator Unit Location A) Attach a wrench to the maintenance bleeder. Page 7971 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Hands-Free Speaker Is Inoperative) Page 494 Page 7822 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7915 Technical Service Bulletin # 96-046 Date: 961021 Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Bulletin No. 96-046 Issue Date OCT 21, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To Refer to the list below File Under ACCESSORIES Keyless Remote Transmitter Information This Service Bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering*, and transmitter batteries. A transmitter quick reference guide is included. Use this index to find the information for the vehicle you are working on. Vehicle: Procedure Number: Civic 1992-93 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 8 del Sol 1993 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 7 Accord 1990-93 (except Wagon) 2 1991-93 EX Wagon 3 1991-93 LX Wagon 4 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1994-97 EX Wagon 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Prelude 1988-91 1 1992-93 (with optional security system) 2 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Odyssey 1995 (with optional security system) 5 1995-97 EX 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Passport 1994-95 (with optional security system, not applicable to 1995.5 model) 9 1996-97 (with optional security system) 10 *Transmitter prices are subject to change without notice. PARTS INFORMATION Transmitter ordering information and battery part numbers are in each transmitter section. Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage 2.4 V at 5 in hg 1.9 V at 10 in hg 1.5 V at 15 in hg 1.0 V at 20 in hg 0.5 V at 25 in hg Page 887 Page 5385 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6649 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns Constant Velocity Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns 91-029 January 26, 1999 Applies To: ALL 1988 and later Models* Clicking Noise While Turning (Supersedes 91-029, dated April 17, 1992) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A clicking noise is heard while making right or left turns at 10 mph or less. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn outboard driveshaft joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the noisy outboard driveshaft joint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Failed part: Use the replacement Part Number Skill level: Repair Technician PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS DIAGNOSIS (Driving method) 1. Drive the car in a circle in an open parking lot at approximately 10 mph with the brakes slightly applied. Page 268 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. With Keyless Entry Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection With Keyless Entry Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Leave the harness connected and make the test shown by probing the back of the connectors. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Diagram Information and Instructions Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9082 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8180 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1112 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 1642 NOTE: - When there is no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) stored, the MIL will stay on if the SCS service connector is connected and the ignition switch is on. - If this symptom is intermittent, check for: A loose ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - A loose No. 2 FUEL PUMP fuse (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C7) and the service check connector - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D4) and the MAP sensor - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D10), the TP sensor, EGR valve lift sensor and/or Fuel tank pressure sensor (Sedan KL (LX with ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe) - PGM-FI main relay. - See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Page 3294 Specifications Clutch Slave Cylinder: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Clutch Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 15.0 Nm (11.0 ft. lbs.) Bleeder Screw ...................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (86.4 inch lbs.) Mounting Screw ........................................................................................................................... ................................................... 22.0 Nm (16.0 ft. lbs.) Page 8120 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7572 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2576 Page 573 Page 2252 NOTE: Refer to the illustrations for removal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ^ Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with valves when torquing rocker assembly bolts. ^ Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. ^ To prevent rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. Page 9046 Page 5381 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 4851 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. Page 2343 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations Page 2582 Heater Core: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4676 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9131 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9225 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Photo Starter Relay: Locations Photo Below Left Side Of Dash Page 6785 Page 900 Headlight Switch (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6419 Alternator: Mechanical Specifications Alternator Rotor and Brush Specifications Alternator Rotor and Brush Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Slip Ring Diameter 14.4 mm 14.0 mm Brush Length 10.5 mm 1.5 mm Brush Spring Tension 2.9 - 3.5 N --- Mounting Bolt (Pivot) 10 X 1.25 Mm 44 Nm Mounting Nut 8 x 1.25 mm 22 Nm Page 590 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5213 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 537 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8597 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Open Photo 89 Above Left Kick Panel Page 9041 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4418 Page 9055 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Description and Operation A/C Signal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when there is a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system. Page 6258 Brake Component Mounting Location 5. Install the brake hose on the knuckle and damper first, then connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt and new sealing washers. 6. Install a new brake hose clip on the brake hose. Brake Hose Bracket 7. Connect the brake line to the brake hose. 8. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 9. Perform the following checks. ^ Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary. ^ Check the brake hoses for interference or twisting. Page 4118 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9546 Page 2061 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3349 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4414 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8707 Cruise Control Servo: Testing and Inspection Actuator Solenoid Test Actuator Solenoid Test 1. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the actuator. Actuator Solenoid Test 2. Check for resistance between the terminals according to the table. Actuator Solenoid Test NOTE: Resistance will vary slightly with temperature; specified resistance is at 7O° F (2O° C). Power Relay Test Radiator Fan Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Radiator fan relay Page 7213 Blower Motor (Part 3 Of 3) Page 6192 NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. 10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. When the brake fluid is completely drained from the reservoir (air enters in the modulator unit) during brake fluid replacement, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. 11. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 12. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container (see the previous page). 13. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 14. Tighten the bleeder when the fluid starts to flow out of the bleeder. 15. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. With Anti-Lock Brakes (Using ALB Checker) CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. 1. Place the vehicle on level ground with the wheels blocked. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL for manual transmission models, and in PARK position for automatic transmission models. Release the parking brake. ALB Checker Installation 2. Disconnect the ABS inspection connector (6P) from the cross-member under the passenger's seat and connect the ABS inspection connector (6P) to the ALB checker. Filling The Reservoir With Brake Fluid 3. Fill the modulator reservoir to the MAX level line and install the reservoir cap. 4. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few minutes, then stop it. Check the fluid level in the modulator reservoir and refill to the MAX level line if necessary. Page 3965 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2854 Fuel Pump Relay: Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 6477 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 4358 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3887 Page 4350 Fuel Tank Unit: Locations Photo 129 Right Front Of Trunk Page 4386 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3751 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7380 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7051 9. If necessary, Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. NOTE: Align the projection in the splash guard with the hole on the steering knuckle. 10. Install the steering knuckle on the hub unit and tighten the flange bolts. Refer to Steering and Suspension. Page 5707 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 6053 Fluid Level Indicator 1. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level. Proper Angle 2. Before installing the modulator unit on the vehicle, be sure to bleed the air from the suction port in the modulator unit by leaning the modulator unit to one side slowly (about 45 degrees) as shown. Page 8311 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9683 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9986 6. Move the rear channel, and carefully pull the glass up. 7. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot as shown. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Electrical Specifications Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 5378 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4283 Electrical Specifications Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Electrical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 6079 Bleeding The Brakes With The Special Tool 5. Bleed high-pressure fluid from the maintenance bleeder with the special tool. 6. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few minutes, then stop it. Check the fluid level in the modulator reservoir and refill to the MAX level line if necessary. 7. Turn the Mode Selector switch of the checker to 2. 8. While depressing the brake pedal firmly, push the "Start Test" switch to operate the modulator. There should be kickback on the brake pedal. If not, repeat steps 5 to 8. NOTE: Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly when operating the checker. 9. Turn the Mode Selector to 3, 4, and 5. Perform step 8 for each of the test mode positions. 10. Refill the modulator reservoir to the MAX level line and install the reservoir cap. WARNING: Disconnect the ALB Checker before driving the car. A collision can result from a reduction or complete loss of braking ability, causing severe personal injury or death. Without Anti-Lock Brakes CAUTION: - Use only clean Honda Genuine DOT 3 Heavy Duty brake fluid or an equivalent DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add clean new fluid from a sealed container as required. Reservoir MAX Level 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. Page 3687 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Page 2069 Page 7778 Seat Belt: Specifications Seat Belt Replacement Seat Belt Replacement Front Seat Belts Seat Belt Guide Bolts 9.8 Nm Upper Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Retractor Bolt 32 Nm Retractor Mounting Bolt/Screw 4.0 Nm Lower Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Seat Belt Buckle Center Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Rear Seat Belts Center Anchor Bolts 32 Nm Retractor Bolt 32 Nm Retractor Mounting Bolt/Screw 4.0 Nm Seat Belt Buckle Center Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Page 5040 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Locations Engine Mount Control Solenoid: Locations Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 9054 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6384 Wheel Sensor: Locations Rear Behind Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar) Locations Distributor: Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 7760 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Page 1961 Valve Clearance: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. Page 85 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof Open/Close Relay ^ Moonroof open relay ^ Moonroof close relay Page 5712 Synchronizer Ring: Testing and Inspection SYNCHRO RING, GEAR INSPECTION 1. Inspect the synchro ring and gear. A: Inspect the inside of the synchro ring for wear. B: Inspect the synchro sleeve teeth and matching teeth on the synchro ring for wear (rounded off). C: Inspect the synchro sleeve teeth and matching teeth on the gear for wear (rounded off). D: Inspect the gear hub thrust surface for wear. E: Inspect the cone surface for wear and roughness. F: Inspect the teeth on all gears for uneven wear, scoring, galling, and cracks. 2. Coat the cone surface of the gear with oil, and place the synchro ring on the matching gear. Rotate the ring, making sure that it does not slip. Measure the clearance between the synchro ring and gear all the way around. Page 5049 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 821 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2445 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 Page 7709 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch A Page 5615 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6031 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 5322 Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1145 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Description and Operation Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Speedometer and Odometer The odometer and speedometer drive circuits receive pulses from the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates. The frequency and duration of these input pulses are measured and displayed by the speedometer, odometer, and tripmeter. Page 4660 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 161 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 323 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1921 Page 1023 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 9887 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4028 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 303 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4326 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2948 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8007 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Description Safety Indicator System: Bulbs are used to indicate when the trunk lid or a door is not fully closed, or when a brake light is faulty. The bulbs will remain ON for about two seconds after the ignition switch has been turned ON (II) to show that the system circuit is functioning. Brake Light Bulb Failure Indicator: If all brake light bulbs are OK, the indicator light stays off because the WHT/GRN wire is constantly being grounded by the brake light failure sensor. With the brake light off, the ground is provided through the diode, the failure sensor relay coil, and the bulb filaments. With the brake light on, both relays in the sensor, connected in series, supply ground. If either of the two bulbs is not working, the chain is broken and the WHT/GRN wire is not being grounded. The indicator light comes on. Page 823 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3383 Page 354 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 3943 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 127 Page 504 Page 9957 Power Window Relay: Locations Photographs Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 2165 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7321 Condenser Fan: Testing and Inspection Fan Diagnosis Flowchart Condenser Fan (Part 1 Of 2) Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 6790 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2145 Page 9879 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6685 a. If adjustment is required, go to step 2. b. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. 2. Hold the adjusting bolt on the rear lower arm B and loosen the self-locking nut. 3. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until toe is correct. 4. Install the self-locking nut and tighten while holding the adjusting bolt. Page 2299 Page 2192 Page 143 Page 5063 Countershaft: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly. - Inspect the thrust needle bearings and the needle bearings for galling and rough movement. - Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings. - Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector hub, reverse selector and one-way clutch in the direction shown. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 8122 Stereo Radio/Cassette Player Terminals Page 1846 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2244 7. Measure the diameters of the balancer shaft journals. ^ Journal Diameter Standard (New): ^ No. 1 journal: - Front: 42.722-42.734 mm (1.6820-1.6824 inch) - Rear: 20.938-20.950 mm (0.8243-0.8248 inch) ^ No. 2 journals front and rear: 38.712-38.724 mm (1.5241-1.5246 inch) ^ No. 3 journals front and rear: 34.722-34.734 mm (1.3670- 1.3675 inch) - Service Limit: ^ No. 1 journal: Front: 42.71 mm (1.681 inch) - Rear: 20.92 mm (0.824 inch) ^ No. 2 journals front and rear: 38.70 mm (1.524 inch) ^ No. 3 journals front and rear: 34.71 mm (1.367 inch) 8. Remove the crankshaft, the pistons and the other parts from the block, then clean the balancer shaft journal bearings in the block and the oil pump housing with a clean shop towel. 9. Check the surface of the bearings; if there is wear, damage or discoloration, replace the bearings or the oil pump housing. Page 297 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 1613 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 5457 NOTE: Make sure the boot is installed on the slave cylinder. 4. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. a. Attach a hose to the bleeder screw, and suspend the hose in a container of brake fluid. b. Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid at the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the bleeder hose. c. Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when done. d. Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Page 9151 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 9227 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1312 TOE-IN: This illustration shows view from the top of the vehicle. Toe-in is the measured amount the front wheels are turn in. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Battery Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Replacing a Battery? Don't Disconnect the Cables With the Engine Running When replacing a battery, many service techs disconnect the battery cables with the engine running to keep the data alive in volatile memory. This practice worked fine back in the day when vehicles were pretty much a box on wheels, but with so many of today's vehicles sporting a impressive array of cool, high tech hardware, it's not recommended. Here's why: ^ The battery works as a capacitor to prevent sudden swings in voltage. With the battery cables disconnected, the alternator voltage regulator tries to stabilize the system voltage, but it can only do so by turning the alternator on and off. ^ When solenoids or relays are turned on and of{ they produce a very high voltage spike that travels through the 12-volt system. This voltage spike can fry sensitive solid state components or corrupt the data that's stored in volatile memory for such components as the gauge control module, the radio, and the various control units. The best way to keep data alive in volatile memory when replacing a battery is to hook up a Honda Computer Memory Saver to the 16P data link connector (DLC). This portable tool works as a secondary 12-volt source. It saves you the hassle of writing down your customer's audio presets, resetting the clock, or even doing the idle learn procedure. Page 2815 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6487 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 814 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. With Moonroof Dome Lamp: Service and Repair With Moonroof 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the two mounting nuts and the housing. Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 4. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the housing. Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect connectors. Master Switch Replacement 2. Remove the power window master switch from the door panel. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 3321 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 9603 Page 4870 Page 8277 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8321 NOTE: ^ Before installing the cylinder protector and lock cylinder, install the new retainer clip on the outer handle. ^ Make sure the outer handle rod and connector are connected securely. ^ Make sure the wire harness is routed properly. ^ Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 6214 other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: Coat piston, piston seal, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. - Clean the piston and caliper bore with brake fluid, and inspect for wear and damage. Piston Boot & Seal Replacement - Coat a new piston seal with rubber grease and install the seal in the cylinder groove. - Apply seal grease to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and install it in the caliper. Piston Replacement CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the caliper cylinder wall. - Lubricate the caliper cylinder and piston with brake fluid, then install the piston in the cylinder with the dished end facing in. - Apply seal grease to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. Page 8497 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Left Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 6594 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 2686 Page 7730 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or at least for three minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, replace the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags were not deployed, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit. Do not disassemble the SRS unit. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, and disconnection of the 18P connector. Be sure the SRS unit is installed securely to the specified torque. TORQUE: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................... 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, and keep it away from dust. Store the SRS unit in a cool (less than 104° F/40° C) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Page 9757 Headlight Switch (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8538 CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator fails to work properly, replace it. Page 4898 Countershaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 7050 7. Press a new wheel bearing into the hub using the special tools and a press as shown. 8. Install the hub unit on the brake disc and tighten the flange bolts. NOTE: Before installing the hub unit, clean the mating surfaces of the hub unit and brake disc. Page 8339 NOTE: If necessary, remove the glass stopper. 9. Remove the front and center channels. Page 993 Underside Center Of Vehicle Secondary HO2S Page 9606 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4489 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8949 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2781 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3550 Page 943 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2687 Page 6802 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4493 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 2589 Removal Step Three 6. Remove the mounting bolts and mounting nuts in sequence shown, then remove the steering hanger beam. Heater Duct Evaporator Page 8904 Page 6815 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1367 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8589 Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, connect power and ground only momentarily. *: Disconnect the connector, and make these tests at the wire terminals. Page 5980 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 8360 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. Disconnect the power window switch from the door harness, then install the armrest (coupe, drivers) or power window switch on the door panel. 19. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 20. Install the door panel. Page 4688 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 3185 M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Diagnosis by Symptom. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Specifications Wheel Sensor: Specifications Front Wire to Chassis bolts 7 ft.lb Wire to Knuckle bolts 7 ft.lb Sensor to Knuckle bolts 16 ft.lb Pulser/Sensor Air Gap 0.02 - 0.04 in Rear Sensor to Knuckle bolts 16 ft.lb Wire to all other components 7 ft.lb Pulser/Sensor Air Gap 0.02 - 0.04 in Page 7952 Page 9312 Page 3685 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 994 Under Center Of Vehicle Page 9512 Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine Page 227 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection DRL Control Unit (Canada) Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) Page 3219 Page 8801 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8783 Page 8110 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4213 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 451 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 496 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6888 Steering Wheel: Adjustments Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment * Center the cable reel whenever the following is performed. (Refer to centering the cable reel.) Misalignment of the cable reel (the cable reel is not centered) could cause an open in the cable reel, making the SRS system and the horns inoperative. - Installation of the steering wheel - Installation of the cable reel - Installation of the steering column - Other steering-related adjustment or installation * Do not disassemble the cable reel. * Do not apply grease on the cable reel. * If the cable reel shows any signs of damage for example, it does not rotate smoothly, replace the cable reel with a new one. Page 7165 Mode Control Motor: Locations Mode Control Motor Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 198 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7350 Removal and Installation Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal NOTE: Before disconnecting the hoses from the pump, place a suitable container under the vehicle. 1. Remove the belt by loosening the pump adjusting bolt, mounting bolts and nuts. 2. Cover the alternator with several shop towels to protect if from spilled power steering fluid. 3. Disconnect the inlet hose and the outlet line from the pump and plug them. NOTE: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 4. Remove the pump mounting bolt, then remove the pump. NOTE: ^ Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed. ^ Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the pump. Installation 1. Connect the inlet hose and the outlet line. Tighten the pump fittings securely. Page 8579 Control Unit Input Test Page 7508 Page 9098 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9136 Page 8989 Page 8955 Page 9458 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2690 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4664 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9841 Page 4520 Page 4685 Page 6935 None. This service bulletin is for information only. Disclaimer Page 5413 1st/2nd Accumulator Body Page 7074 Localized Tread Wear 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Locations Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Locations Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 2105 Page 6787 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3702 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Locations Illustrated Index Page 6132 Brake Pad: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 8952 Page 594 Page 3795 Page 9087 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Ex-R Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex-R Right Rear Of Engine Page 5240 Page 10080 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Switch Removal CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Switch Removal 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 9686 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Specifications Front Steering Knuckle: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lower Arm Nut ..................................................................................................................................... ............................... 49-59 Nm (36-43 ft. lbs.) Tie-Rod End Nut .......................................................... ........................................................................................................ 39-47 Nm (29-35 ft. lbs.) Upper Arm ...................................................................................................................................................... ..................... 39-47 Nm (29-35 ft. lbs.) Wheel Spindle Nut ................................................................. ..................................................................................................... 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.) Page 3477 Page 7661 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag, and front passenger's airbag. OPERATION The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the back-up power circuit will keep voltage at a constant level. SRS Operation FOR THE SRS TO OPERATE 1. The impact sensor and safing sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send signals to the airbag inflators. 3. The inflators must ignite and deploy the airbags. Page 1206 Mainshaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 30 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4539 Throttle Body: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. It is preset at the factory. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (to the EVAP control canister) from the top of the throttle body; connect a vacuum gauge to the throttle body. 3. Allow the engine to idle, and check that the gauge indicates no vacuum. If there is vacuum, check the throttle cable. 4. Check that vacuum is indicated on the gauge when the throttle is opened slightly from idle. If the gauge indicates no vacuum, check the throttle body port. If the throttle body port is clogged, clean it with carburetor cleaner. 5. Stop the engine, and check that the throttle cable operates smoothly without binding or sticking. If there are any abnormalities in the above steps, check for: Excessive wear or play in the throttle valve shaft. - Sticky or binding throttle lever at the fully closed position. - Clearance between throttle stop screw and throttle lever at the fully closed position. Replace the throttle body if there is excessive play in the throttle valve shaft or if the shaft is binding or sticking. Page 9610 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1359 Page 4466 Fuel Pump Relay: Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 2342 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5107 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 9697 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Locations Distributor: Locations Right Side Of Engine Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 6413 The Honda Computer Memory Saver is indeed a real time saver, but here's a word of caution: Don't let the positive battery cable touch any body ground. It will cause a short that will either blow the fuse in the tool or cause a drop in system voltage resulting in the loss of any data that 5 in volatile memory. The Honda Computer Memory Saver is available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order one, just call and ask for FZRMS4000H. Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6779 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 3345 Specifications Control Arm: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Front Upper Arm Nuts ................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Lower Arm Bolt ........................................................... ................................................................................................................... 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Rear Upper Arm Flange Bolt ........................................................................................................................ .......................................... 38 Nm (28 ft. lbs.) Lower Arm A Self-Locking Nut ..................................................................................................................................................... 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Lower Arm B Flange Bolt .............................................................................................................................................................. 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Lower Arms to Knuckle Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Page 3536 Locations Page 7263 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Compressor Illustrated Index Page 3851 Page 1236 Rear Defogger Switch: Service and Repair CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rear window defogger switch or the instrument panel when prying the switch out. 1. Carefully pry the switch out of the instrument panel. Switch Replacement 2. Disconnect the 6-P connector from the switch. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 407 Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Spindle Nut ................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 245 Nm. (181 lb. ft.) Rear Spindle Nut .............................................. ..................................................................................................................................... 181 Nm. (134 lb. ft.) Page 3987 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex Right Rear Of Engine Door Speaker Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker 1. Remove the door panel. Door Speaker Replacement 2. Remove the three screws, then disconnect the 2-P connector from the speaker. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 3415 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 2702 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 1892 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair SELECTION CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Crankshaft Bore Code Location Numbers or Letters or Bars have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 5 main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Page 6651 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 7577 Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Resistance 25 K ohms Note: Resistance at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Page 965 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 8244 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5248 Mainshaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 3244 2. Check the electrode gap. ^ Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. ^ Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown below: 3. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N-m (1.8 Kgf.m, 13 lb.ft). Page 3176 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Pressure Pressure With Regulator Vacuume Hose Disconnected 38-48 Psi Page 2821 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 672 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, perform the input test for the daytime running lights control unit. Page 2885 Page 194 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4455 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5888 Page 541 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 987 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Page 1033 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9609 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8484 Keyless Entry Module: Programming and Relearning Keyless Transmitter Codes Input Procedure Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Page 5786 Page 9842 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4674 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8945 Page 6908 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Page 4322 Page 1076 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Testing and Inspection Trip Computer: Testing and Inspection Speedometer/Trip Meter/Odometer - Troubleshooting NOTE: The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. VSS Input Test (At Harness Side Of 3-P Connector) VSS Input Test (At Harness Side Of 3-P Connector) NOTE: A short to ground in the ORN wire can be caused by a short in any component connected to it. VSS Test Page 9047 Page 8995 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2906 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8887 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Remove the printed Circuit board from the housing. 3. Remove the bulb. Page 1819 4. Check that the intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary intake rocker arms. 5. Check the intake mid rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. ^ If the intake mid rocker arm does not move, remove the mid, primary and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. ^ If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary, mid, and secondary rocker arms as an assembly. Inspection Using Special Tools CAUTION: ^ Before using the Valve Inspection Tool, make sure that the air pressure gauge on the air compressor indicates over 400 kPa (57 psi). ^ Inspect the valve clearance before rocker arm inspection. ^ Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect the belt. ^ Check the intake primary rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Plug the relief hole with the special tool. Page 7986 Page 5292 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the shift control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the shift control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 3 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 4678 Ignition Coil Test F22B2 engine: 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector and ignition coil wire. 3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is not within specifications. NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil temperature; specifications are at 68° F (20° C) Primary Winding Resistance (Between the A and B terminals): 0.64-0.78 Ohms Secondary Winding Resistance (Between the A and secondary winding terminals): 14.4 - 21.6 K Ohms Ignition Coil Test 4. Check for continuity between the A and C terminals. Replace the coil if there is no continuity. Page 5343 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Top Of Transmission Page 5552 7. Fit the rollers to the spider with their high shoulders facing outward. NOTE: Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the spider by aligning the marks. - Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers from falling off. 8. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease included in the new driveshaft set. Grease quantity: 120 - 130 g (4.2 - 4.6 oz) 9. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft. NOTE: Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks on the inboard joint and the rollers. Page 3434 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Page 4399 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7308 Page 4330 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9454 Page 7280 Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 9447 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3143 Page 3533 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3764 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 6282 Fluid Level Indicator 1. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level. Proper Angle 2. Before installing the modulator unit on the vehicle, be sure to bleed the air from the suction port in the modulator unit by leaning the modulator unit to one side slowly (about 45 degrees) as shown. Diagram Information and Instructions Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2106 Page 7959 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6968 14. Once the tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 15. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 16. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 17. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 18. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 19. Use the ball joint remover, 32 mm, as shown on step 10 to separate the lower ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. Page 8861 Page 4633 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 1427 Timing Belt: Adjustments CAUTION: Always adjust timing belt tension with the engine cold. NOTE: ^ The tensioner is spring-loaded to apply proper tension to the belt automatically after making the following adjustment. ^ Always rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise when viewed from the pulley side. Rotating it clockwise may result in improper adjustment of the belt tension. ^ Inspect the timing balancer belt before adjusting the belt tension. ^ Do not loosen the adjusting nut more than one full turn. ^ The original radio has a coded they protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Set the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). 5. Rotate the crankshaft 5-6 revolutions to set the belt. 6. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. 7. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. 8. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise 3-teeth on the camshaft pulley. 9. Tighten the adjusting nut. 10. After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Page 9093 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3929 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3223 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2214 All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this product update campaign. An example of the customer notification is included in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install an oil seal retainer to keep the oil seal from backing out. PARTS INFORMATION Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Retainer Kit: P/N 06923-P0A-306, H/C 6627707 (Kit contains a retainer and an O-ring.) NOTE: Early production kits also include a set of installation instructions. These instructions are incorrect, do not use them. Use only the procedure in this service bulletin to install the kit. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Accord/Odyssey/SOHC Prelude: Holder Attachment, 50 mm offset: Page 816 Page 6788 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 136 Cruise Control Module: Locations Photographs Left Side Of Dash - Photo 79 Specifications Wheel Sensor: Specifications Front Wire to Chassis bolts 7 ft.lb Wire to Knuckle bolts 7 ft.lb Sensor to Knuckle bolts 16 ft.lb Pulser/Sensor Air Gap 0.02 - 0.04 in Rear Sensor to Knuckle bolts 16 ft.lb Wire to all other components 7 ft.lb Pulser/Sensor Air Gap 0.02 - 0.04 in Page 7819 Page 3086 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9134 Page 9759 Page 3619 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1425 Page 6207 Brake Caliper: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. ^ When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. ^ Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 4163 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 2047 Page 3729 Page 8512 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Page 753 Page 820 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1954 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 9012 NOTE: - When there is no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) stored, the MIL will stay on if the SCS service connector is connected and the ignition switch is on. - If this symptom is intermittent, check for: A loose ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - A loose No. 2 FUEL PUMP fuse (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C7) and the service check connector - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D4) and the MAP sensor - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D10), the TP sensor, EGR valve lift sensor and/or Fuel tank pressure sensor (Sedan KL (LX with ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe) - PGM-FI main relay. - See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Page 7241 Page 4042 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 760 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3529 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6843 Steering Gear: Description and Operation STEERING GEARBOX The rack-and-pinion type steering gearbox has a valve body unit incorporated with the pinion to control the steering fluid pressure. Steering fluid from the pump is regulated by a rotary valve in the valve body unit and is sent through the cylinder line to the power cylinder, where hydraulic pressure is applied. The steering fluid in the other side of the power cylinder returns through the cylinder line and valve body unit to the reservoir. VALVE BODY UNIT Inside the valve body unit is the valve, which is coaxial with the pinion shaft, and controls the steering fluid pressure. The valve housing is connected with the fluid line from the pump, the return line to the reservoir, and the two cylinder lines from the respective power cylinder. The pinion shaft is double - structured with the input shaft connected to the pinion gear, both of which are interconnected with the torsion bar. The pin inserted in the valve and the pinion shaft groove engage; this allows the pinion shaft to rotate together with the valve. Because of this construction, the difference in angle in the circumferential direction between the input shaft and the valve becomes larger according to the torsional strength of the pinion or steering resistance. However, maximum torsion between the shafts is regulated by the engaged splines of the shafts at the pin engagement section to hold the torsion bar within the set value. This allows the steering system to function as an ordinary rack-and-pinion type steering if the steering fluid is not pressurized because of a faulty pump. PRESSURE CONTROL Low Assist At Higher Speeds: Page 2502 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Specifications Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Brake Booster Nuts ............................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 13 Nm (9 lb.ft.) Master Cylinder Nut ......................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Pushrod Adjustment ................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in) Pushrod Locknut .................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm 11 lb.ft.) Star Locknut .................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 22 Nm (16 lb.ft.) Page 9050 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2808 Page 2801 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2190 Page 2580 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2778 Page 8084 1. Stick the label containing only the serial number information on the glove box. 2. Stick the remaining two labels on the Anti-Theft Radio Identification Card and on the vehicle's service records. Page 8623 Underside of Driver's Seat Page 3511 Page 2182 Page 322 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Page 6738 Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Operating Pressure 6,400 - 7,400 kPa Note: Pump pressure with shut-off valve closed. Page 3118 Page 2940 Page 3821 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Photo View Service Check Connector: Locations Photo View Behind Right Side Of Dash Locations Diagnostic Connector: Locations Above Left Kick Panel Page 3703 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Locations Illustrated Index Page 9597 License, Parking, Side Marker Lights And Taillights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1789 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Tests and General Diagnostics 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the Variable Valve Timing and Valve Lift Electronic Control (VTEC) solenoid valve. 2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground. - Resistance: 14-30 Ohms 3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the Variable Valve Timing and VTEC solenoid valve assembly from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter/O-ring for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil. Page 5799 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Testing and Inspection PCM Terminal Locations PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT WARNING: Always wear approved eye protection when using the in-car valve spring compressor. NOTE: Cylinder head removal is not required in this procedure. Tools Required ^ The procedure shown below applies when using the in-car valve spring compressor (Snap-on YA8845 with YA8845-2 A 7/8 inch attachment). 1. Turn the crankshaft so that the No. 1 and the No. 4 pistons are at top dead center (TDC). 2. Remove the cylinder head cover and the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. 3. Remove the fuel injectors and the wire harness. 4. Using the 8 mm bolts supplied with the tool, mount the two uprights to the cylinder head at the end camshaft holders. The uprights fit over the camshaft as shown. 5. Insert the cross shaft through the top hole of the two uprights. Intake Valve Seals: 6. Select the 7/8 inch diameter long compressor attachment and fasten the attachment to the No. 5 hole of the lever arm with the speed pin supplied. 7. Insert an air adaptor into the spark plug hole. Pump air into the cylinder to keep the valve closed while compressing springs and removing the valve keepers. Page 2730 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Page 5157 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes System Bleed Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair System Bleed If the brake fluid is completely drained from the ABS reservoir (air enters the modulator unit) at any time, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. NOTE: This procedure is for bleeding the modulator unit only. It is recommended the complete system be bled whenever any hydraulic connection is opened. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair USING HONDA PGM TESTER The ABS can be bled using the Honda PGM Tester and the ABS Diagnostic Kit to run the ABS pump. Connect the tester and module A (refer to PGM users guide), then follow the tester's prompts. MANUAL BLEEDING 1. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 2. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container. 3. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor. NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 4. Tighten the bleeder when clean fluid starts to flow out, or if fluid level in the reservoir falls below the minimum level marked on the side. NOTE: Take care not to deplete the brake fluid in the reservoir. Refill as necessary. 5. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Page 6824 Page 878 Page 2116 Page 4427 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3675 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Page 6169 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear WARNING: Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. DISC RUNOUT - Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle and support it on safety stands. Remove the rear wheels. - Remove the brake pads. - Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the disc thoroughly and remove all rust. - Use wheel nuts and suitable plain washers to hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount a dial indicator as shown and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.4 in) from the outer edge of the disc. Specs: Max Refinishing Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in). Rear Disc Dial Indicator - If the disc is beyond the service limit, replace the brake disc. NOTE: A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in). DISC THICKNESS AND PARALLELISM Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1087 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2694 Page 9882 Page 9559 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3080 Page 9753 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8830 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9444 Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal and Disassembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. REMOVAL ^ Remove the banjo bolt and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. Caliper Bolt Removal ^ Remove the caliper bolts (pin A and pin B), then remove the caliper from the bracket. Caliper Boot Removal ^ Remove the pin boots from the caliper bracket. DISASSEMBLY WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston. Do not use high air pressure; use an OSHA-approved 30 PSI nozzle. A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Control Panel: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8398 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 19. Install the door panel. Page 2202 Above idle, passage 1 is closed, and liquid flows only through passage 2. Dampening increases, and vibration above idle is reduced. Page 9670 Page 9063 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, perform the input test for the daytime running lights control unit. Page 907 Switch Test 5. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the 20-P connector of the combination switch harness and body ground with the horn switch pressed. ^ If there is continuity, the horn switch is OK. ^ If there is no continuity, go to step 6. 6. Remove the steering column covers. 7. Disconnect the combination switch harness 4-P connector from the cable reel. Switch Test 8. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the 20-P connector and the No. 3 terminal of the 4-P connector. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the combination switch harness. ^ If there is continuity, go to step 9. Switch Test 9. Carefully remove the cruise control set/resume switch cover by prying between the cover and the switch in the sequence shown. Page 6537 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 8113 Page 8275 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Torque 33 ft.lb Page 4329 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2226 T/N 07MAB-PY3010A DOHC Prelude: Holder Attachment, 50 mm offset: T/N 07NAB-001040A ALL: Holder Handle: T/N 07JAB-001020A Belt Tension Gauge: T/N 07JGG-001010A or 07TGG-001000A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: This campaign ends January 1, 2003. After that date, warranty claims for installation of a retainer, or repairs required due to a failed oil seal, will not be accepted. Disclaimer Warranty Claim Filing Instructions - Updated *A. If the technician found that an oil seal retainer had already been installed, file a warranty claim with operation number 111008. B. If the technician installed an oil seal retainer, file a warranty claim with operation number 111108. C. If the technician replaced the oil seal because it was cocked or backed out, file a warranty claim with operation number 111124. This includes replacing the timing belt and balancer belt if they are contaminated with oil. This repair requires DSM approval. Flat Rate Time Accord - 2.5 hours Odyssey - 2.5 hours 1994-96 Prelude - 2.5 hours 1997 Prelude - 2.7 hours D. If the technician replaced the engine because there was significant internal engine damage due to extended driving after a complete loss of oil, file a warranty claim with operation number 111008 as the primary operation and 111099 as the secondary operation. Show actual repair time as the FRT with 111099, and list all parts used. This repair requires DSM approval. NOTE: If a vehicle with engine damage has high mileage, the DSM may authorize the installation of a reconditioned engine from an outside supplier rather than a new engine from Honda. In that case, refer to section 6.4.1, Reimbursement for Non-Honda Parts, in the Service Operations Manual for claim submission and credit guidelines.* Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code, if needed. Write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Power Steering Pump - Fluid Leak Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering Pump - Fluid Leak 98-023 March 9, 1998 Applies T0: 1994 - 97 Accord - ALL 1992 - 95 Civic - ALL 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL Leak From the Power Steering Pump SYMPTOM Fluid is leaking from the power steering pump between the pump housing and the cover. PROBABLE CAUSE The 0-ring between the pump housing and the cover is leaking. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the 0-ring between the pump housing and the cover. PARTS INFORMATION 0-ring (68.5 x 1.9 mm): P/N 91349-PY3-000, H/C 3676871 Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid: P/N 08206-9002, H/C 3747284 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 512711 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 91349-PY3-000 H/C 3676871 Defect code: 060 Contention code: B06 Template ID: 98-023A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power steering pump. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate Service Manual. Page 3454 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Page 1621 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 2462 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant/Anti-freeze Ethylene Glycol Based Coolant Concentration Minimum 50 % Maximum 60 % Page 4724 Page 9875 Page 7539 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5784 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Door Switch Test Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Test Door Switch Test 1. Remove the cover and the screw, then pull the switch out. 2. Disconnect the 1-P connector, and remove the switch. Door Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 2123 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8954 Page 8297 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3612 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 622 Wiper Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Intermittent Wiper Relay ^ Intermittent wiper relay Page 7949 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5419 Part 2 Of 2 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls. Page 763 Heater Fan Switch: Testing and Inspection Heater Fan Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table below. Page 4485 Page 9611 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9185 Page 4911 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 4298 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3842 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 7638 Air Bag: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 578 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2663 Water Pump: Service and Repair NOTE: Use new O-rings when reassembling. 1. Remove the timing belt. Refer to Engine. 2. Remove the camshaft pulley and the back cover. Page 1434 14. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 15. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn, and verify that the timing balancer belt adjuster moves freely. 16. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 17. Align the rear balancer shaft pulley by using a 6 x 100 mm bolt or equivalent as an tool. ^ Scribe a line 74 mm (2.9 inch) from the end of the bolt. Insert the bolt into the maintenance hole to the scribed line. Page 1158 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3359 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Photo 109 Electronic Noise Suppressor: Locations Photo 109 Left Side Of Rear Shelf Page 737 A/C SWITCH REPLACEMENT Refer to illustration for A/C switch replacement. Page 9895 Vanity Lamp: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the two screws from the sunvisor bracket. 2. Disconnect the connector, and remove the sunvisor. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If necessary, pry off the lens, and replace the bulb. Page 6407 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Starter Cut Relay ^ Starter cut relay Page 5679 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 4426 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8385 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 19. Install the door panel. Page 5933 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Sedan/Wagon (Driver's): Remove the power window switch from the door panel. Coupe: Driver's: Remove the armrest from the door panel Passenger's: Remove the power window switch from the door panel. 3. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 4. Coupe: Lower the glass fully, then peel off the channel guide cover. Remove the screws, then remove the center channel guide by pulling it upward. NOTE: When installing the channel guide cover, apply the double-faced adhesive tape to it. 5. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 3542 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4962 Key Interlock Solenoid Test 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No. 4 and No. 7 terminals. ^ If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. ^ If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Page 3227 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Inspection And Test CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the wire. Ignition Wire Inspection And Test 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. Ignition Wire Resistance: 25 K Ohms max. at 68° F (20° C) 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohms, replace the ignition wire. Page 694 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 19 Page 1394 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................ZFR5F-11 Denso .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................KJ16CR-L11 Page 3787 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Page 4439 Page 160 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. A/C Compressor Drive Belt: Adjustments A/C Compressor A/C Compressor Belt Adjustment Deflection Method 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the A/C compressor and the crankshaft pulley. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: 8.0 - 10.5 mm (0.31 - 0.41 in) New Belt: 5.0 - 7.0 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) Power Steering Pump Belt Used Belt: 13.0 - 16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 in) New Belt: 11.0 - 12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 in) NOTE: ^ If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. ^ "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. ^ "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut of the alternator. 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension, then retighten the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the deflection of the A/C compressor belt. Page 5451 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Plug the end of the clutch pipe and reservoir hose with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out. REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 2. Disconnect the clutch pipe and reservoir hose from the clutch master cylinder. 3. Pry out the cotter pin, and pull the pedal pin out of the yoke. Remove the nuts. Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge and Fuel Gauge The ECT gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 1, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the engine coolant temperature sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes, pulling the gauge needle toward the coil with the stronger magnetic field. The fuel gauge works the same way. The resistance of the sending unit for the engine coolant temperature gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high engine temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the ECT gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the fuel gauge varies from about 2-5 ohms at full, to about 110 ohms at empty. When you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), the gauge remains at the last reading until you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or START (III) again. Page 10079 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper Switch Wiper/Washer Switch Test Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7-P and 20-P connectors from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the wiper/washer switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Page 6568 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Electrical Specifications Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 7246 Heater Fan Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9874 Page 4518 Page 7404 A/C Pressure Switch Page 6794 Preliminary Checks Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Checks INSPECTION Before making any adjustments affecting caster, camber or toe-in, the following front end inspection should be made. 1. Inspect the tires for proper inflation pressure. 2. Inspect the front wheel bearings for proper adjustment. 3. inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends. If excessive looseness is noted, correct before adjusting. 4. Inspect the wheel and tires for run-out. 5. Inspect the trim height. If not within specifications, the correction must be made before adjusting caster. 6. Inspect the steering unit for looseness at the frame. 7. Inspect shock absorbers for leaks or any noticeable noise. 8. Inspect the control arms or stabilizer bar attachment for looseness. 9. Inspect the front end alignment using alignment equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 10. Alignment must be performed on a level surface. - Check that the suspension is not modified. - Check the tire size and tire pressure. Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9380 Page 955 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Locations Page 5788 Page 4516 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5318 5. Tighten the locknuts. 6. After tightening the locknuts, inspect the synchronization and throttle control lever movement. NOTE: To tailor the shift/lock-up characteristics to a particular customer's driving expectations, you can adjust the throttle control cable up to 2 mm (0.078 inch.) shorter than the "synchronized" point. Page 1451 Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering NOTE: When using a new belt, first adjust the deflection or tension to the values for the new belt, then readjust the deflection or tension to the values for the used belt after running engine for five minutes. If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the tension gauge. WITH BELT TENSION GAUGE 1. Remove the P/S reservoir from the bracket, and set it a side. 2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt with the gauge face toward the engine, and measure the tension of the belt. 3. Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to avoid hitting the gauge reset lever. Tension: ^ Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (88 - 120 lbs.) ^ New Belt: 740 - 880 N (170 - 200 lbs.) WITHOUT BELT TENSION GAUGE Apply a force of 98 N (22 lbs.) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump and the crankshaft pulleys. Deflection: ^ Used Belt: 13.0 - 16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 inch) ^ New Belt: 11.0 - 12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 inch) Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 7007 2. Push on the front damper as shown. 3. Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. NOTE: The front damper should move smoothly. If it does not (no compression or no extension), the gas is leaking, and the front damper should be replaced. 4. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises or binding during these tests. CAUTION: The spring of the damper springs are different left and right. Be sure to mark the springs R and L before disassembling the front dampers. ASSEMBLE 1. Install the front damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Assemble the front damper in reverse order of disassembly, except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 3. Position the damper mounting base on the front damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. Page 4639 Page 1151 Specifications Radiator Fan Control Module: Specifications Fan Timer "ON" Temperature ......................................................................................................................................................... 217-228°F (103-109°C) Fan Timer "OFF" Temperature [1] ................................................................ ................................................................................................ 7-16°F (4-9°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. Page 6387 Wheel Sensor: Testing and Inspection TESTING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Front Wheel Sensor Rear Wheel Sensor - Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. - Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the pulser all the way around while rotating the hub bearing unit by hand. Specs: Standard Gap 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 in), the probability is a distorted knuckle which should be replaced. Page 4289 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 6866 33. Apply a thin coat of grease to the inside of the special tool, and install it on the steering rack. CAUTION: Make sure the rack teeth do not face the slot in the special tool. 34. Separate the cylinder end seal from the special tool, then remove the tool from the steering rack. 35. Install the new backup ring on the steering rack, then place the cylinder end seal to piston. Page 8784 Page 6306 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair CAUTION: The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure. Parking Brake Cable Remove Cable From Rear Caliper - Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever on the caliper by removing the lock pin and the clevis pin. - Remove the cable from the arm by removing the clip. Page 5510 1992-98 FRONT Page 1971 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Page 8340 10. Coupe: If necessary, remove the lower center glass run channel from the center channel. NOTE: When installing the lower center glass run channel, apply clear sealant to location ® on the center channel. Page 3453 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Page 7389 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7495 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Page 1926 6. Remove the bolt and the balancer driven gear. 7. Remove the oil screen and the oil pump. 8. Remove the baffle plate. Specifications Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Thermoswitch "ON" Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................... 196-203°F (91-95°C) Thermoswitch "OFF" Temperature [1] .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-15°F (3-8°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. Specifications Child Seat Tether Attachment: Specifications Child Restraint Child Restraint Anchor Plate 22 Nm Page 9317 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7637 Air Bag: Service Precautions Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Inserting the probe into the terminal side of the connector, and tampering the connector could cause malfunction of the SRS system or an error in inspection. Use a probe with a tapered tip. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using tools which are not specified standard design could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. Page 1042 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7659 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 6521 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator - Component Location Index Page 5946 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6545 Diode: Locations In-Line Diode B Right Rear Of Roof Page 3425 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Page 8870 Page 8329 8. Remove the bracket and power door lock control unit, and disconnect the connectors. Page 7911 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Page 5376 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 27 Page 8800 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 9540 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 116 Right Side Of Cargo Area (Left Similar) Page 6663 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls Page 9193 Page 9532 Entry Light Timer System Component Locations Radiator Fan Relay: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Photo View Page 404 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Sedan/Wagon (Driver's): Remove the power window switch from the door panel. Coupe: Driver's: Remove the armrest from the door panel Passenger's: Remove the power window switch from the door panel. 3. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 4. Coupe: Lower the glass fully, then peel off the channel guide cover. Remove the screws, then remove the center channel guide by pulling it upward. NOTE: When installing the channel guide cover, apply the double-faced adhesive tape to it. 5. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Specifications Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications Arm to Shaft Clearance Arm to Shaft Clearance Standard (New) Service Limit Arm to Shaft Clearance Intake 0.026 - 0.067 mm 0.08 mm Exhaust 0.018 - 0.054 mm 0.08 mm Page 8923 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6753 9. Unscrew the seat in the top end of the valve, and remove any shims, the relief check ball, relief valve and relief valve spring. 10. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them off, then reassemble and retest the valve (see step 7). If the flow control valve tests OK, reinstall it in the pump. If the flow control valve still leaks air, replace the pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not available separately. NOTE: If necessary, relief pressure is adjusted at the factory by adding shims under the check bail seat. If you found shims in your valve, be sure you reinstall as many as you took out. PUMP ROTOR REMOVAL CAUTION: The pump components are made of aluminum. Be careful not to damage them when servicing. 1. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring. 2. Remove the pump cover and O-ring. Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. PRESSURE PLATE MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE: 25 Nm (2.6 kgf.m, 19 ft. lbs.) Page 6347 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6637 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 6061 Wire Harness Location - Remove the modulator unit cover, and remove the wire harness. Connector Location - Check the numbers stamped on the set plate, and connect each connector of the new wire harness to the set plate of the corresponding number. NOTE: Be sure that each connector is locked securely with the two locking tabs. - Install the modulator unit cover and modulator unit. - Check the ABS function using the ALB checker. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Page 3459 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 5221 Page 4136 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 9890 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9937 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test Passenger's Window Switch Test 1. Remove the passenger's window switch. Passenger's Window Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 8793 Page 8517 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip into place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter, and install it in the new one. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 8319. For each set ordered, send a dealer check for $24.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Alpine Electronics of America 19145 Gramercy Place Torrance, CA 90501 Attention: Al Sula (Parts) Alpine's ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Additional transmitters can be ordered from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If you have questions on how to order the four ROM chip set, call Alpine's Parts Department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Page 3025 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 410 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4342 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector Resistor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4972 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the shift control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 5383 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 2425 2. Check the electrode gap. ^ Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. ^ Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown below: 3. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N-m (1.8 Kgf.m, 13 lb.ft). Front Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Front Wiper Motor 1. Open the hood, and remove the cap nuts and wiper arms. NOTE: Remove the wiper arms carefully without damaging the hood. Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement 2. Remove the hood seal and air scoop by prying out their trim clips. Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement 3. Disconnect the 5-P connector from the windshield wiper motor. 4. Remove the wiper linkage assembly by removing the three mounting bolts. Page 9820 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2401 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9402 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 4243 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7953 Page 9998 8. Remove the glass run channel. Photo 38 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 8998 Low Fuel Indicator Light Page 5550 13. Inspect the outboard joint for faulty movement and wear. If any roughness or excess play is felt, replace the outboard joint. ASSEMBLE NOTE: Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them thoroughly with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent. - Thoroughly pack the inboard joint and both joint boots with the joint grease included in the new driveshaft set. Grease quantity: Inboard Joint 120 - 130 g (4.2 - 4.6 oz) and Outboard Joint 130 -140 g (4.6 - 4.9 oz) Page 8204 Control Unit Input Test Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Page 7962 In-Dash Cellular Phone (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1360 Page 9307 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1875 Connecting Rod Bearing: Testing and Inspection CLEARANCE 1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. 2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place plastigage across the rod journal. 4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the nuts to 46 Nm (34 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure the widest part of the plastigage. ^ Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.021-0.049 mm (0.0008-0.0019 inch) - Service Limit: 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, complete bearing with the same-color code (select the color as shown), and recheck the clearance. CAUTION: Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check clearance again. NOTE: If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. Page 879 Page 3782 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 2388 Page 3242 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................ZFR5F-11 Denso .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................KJ16CR-L11 Page 7009 2. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 3. Loosely install the flange bolt into the damper fork. 4. Loosely install a new self-locking nut with the flange bolt. 5. Raise the steering knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 6. Tighten the flange bolt. 7. Tighten the self-locking nut. 8. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the front damper to the specified torque. 9. Install the brake hose mounts with the brake hose mounting bolts. 10. Install the front wheel. Rear Strut REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear seat (Sedan) or the rear seat cushion and side-bolsters (Wagon) or the rear bulkhead cover and right gusset cover (Coupe). 3. Pull back the front of the quarter trim panel, and remove the two flange nuts. (The illustration shows rear damper for Sedan.) Front Front Wheel Sensor Remove & Install Specifications Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 67 Nm (49 ft. lbs.) Page 9332 Page 4475 Page 7315 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4117 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Power Height Adjustable Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Height Adjustable 1. Remove the adjuster cover. Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 5-P connector from the power seat switch, then remove the switch from the adjuster cover by removing its two mounting screws. Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 1426 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection NOTE: ^ The original radio has a coded them protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before: disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. ^ After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the upper cover. 5. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: ^ Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. ^ Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 6. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Page 8986 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 281 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9888 Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9322 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5150 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5244 Countershaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 4301 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Radio - Distortion From the Front Speakers Technical Service Bulletin # 97-062 Date: 970929 Radio - Distortion From the Front Speakers 97-062 September 29, 1997 Applies To: 1997 Civic - 2-door HX and EX models - 4-door LX and EX models 1997 Accord - 2-and 4-door EX models 1997 Odyssey - EX models Distortion From the Front Speakers SYMPTOM The front speakers sound distorted. PROBABLE CAUSE The speaker voice coil was damaged when it was being manufactured. CORRECTIVE ACTION Confirm the distortion is coming from the front speaker(s), confirm the voice coil(s) is (are) damaged, and replace the damaged speaker(s). PARTS INFORMATION Front Speaker: P/N 391 20-SV4-A01, H/C 4269338 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: If you are submiffing a claim for an additional front speaker using a template ID, the time for the first speaker is included. Failed part: P/N 39120-SV4-A01 H/C 4269338 Defect code: 042 Contention code: F99 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Referring to the appropriate S/M, remove the front door panel (Accord and Odyssey) or the front speaker cover (Civic). Front door panel removal is in section; speaker cover is in 23. 2. Adjust the bass and treble settings on the audio unit to their maximum settings, and listen to different types of music at various volume levels. - If there is distortion coming from the front speaker(s) only, go to step 3. Page 5220 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Electrical Diagrams Page 6390 Rear Wheel Sensor Remove & Install Page 9630 Parking Lamp: Service and Repair Front Parking/Front Side Marker Lights 1. Remove the screw, and separate the front parking front side marker lights from the headlight assembly. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the headlight and the front fender. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connectors from the light. 3. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise, remove it from the light housing, then replace the bulb. Page 2443 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 2508 Radiator Fan: Description and Operation Radiator Fan Voltage is provided at all times to the radiator fan relay and the radiator fan control module. For the module, voltage is also provided in ON (II) or START (III). The module provides power to the radiator fan relay when the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III) and for 2 minutes after the ignition is switched OFF. The radiator fan relay is energized whenever the GRN wire is grounded. The GRN wire can be grounded by the engine coolant temperature switch A, the engine coolant temperature switch, the A/C switch and fan switch, the engine control module (PCM or ECM), or the radiator fan control module. Page 6970 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Installation 1. Install the steering knuckle on the driveshaft outboard joint. 2. Install the steering knuckle on the tie-rod end, upper arm and lower arm, then tighten the castle nuts and install the new cotter pins. CAUTION: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. 3. Install the steering knuckle protector with the 6 mm bolt. 4. Install the wheel sensor with the sensor mounting bolts (for cars with ABS). 5. Install the wheel sensor wire bracket with the two flange bolts (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Be careful when installing the sensors to avoid twisting wires. 6. Install the caliper with the caliper bracket mounting bolts. Page 3899 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3711 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Page 3891 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 10003 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. Disconnect the power window switch from the door harness, then install the armrest (coupe, drivers) or power window switch on the door panel. 19. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 20. Install the door panel. Page 1161 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2015 Valve: Service and Repair Installation NOTE: Exhaust and intake valve seals are NOT interchangeable. ^ When installing valves in cylinder head, coat valve stems with oil before inserting into valve guides, and make sure valves move up and down smoothly. ^ When valves and springs are in place, lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet to ensure proper seating of valve and valve keepers. NOTE: Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Page 9554 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2922 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 5632 Connector Pin Color And Function Chart CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly, and disconnect all connectors from it. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 22-P (C6O9) and 16-P (C6O7) connectors. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board A. Page 7216 Blower Unit - Replacement Without Air Conditioning 3-a. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the heater duct. Blower Unit - Replacement With Air Conditioning 3-b. Remove the evaporator. Page 6377 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Pin Switch Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 3885 Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 5036 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: Customer Interest Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Photo 80 Engine Control Module: Locations Photo 80 Right Front Of Floor, Under Carpet Page 5199 Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 4174 Idle Speed: Adjustments NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: M/T: 550 ± 50 rpm A/T: 550 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the idle adjusting screw. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector to the IAC valve, then remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to reset the ECM/PCM. 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: ABS Pump Motor Relay Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Locations ABS Pump Motor Relay Under-hood Anti-Lock Brake System Fuse/Relay Box Page 758 Heater Fan Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6835 Steering Lock Replacement 6. Lower the steering column assembly. 7. Center punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. CAUTION: Do not damage the switch body when removing the shear boils. Steering Lock Replacement 8. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body. 9. Install the new ignition switch without the key inserted. 10. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts. 11. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns freely. 12. Tighten the shear bolts until the hex heads twist off. Page 3047 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2579 Page 6563 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9525 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2809 Page 6662 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Page 8044 Integrated Control Unit - Circuit Diagram Page 2817 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 346 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 5717 Page 3213 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3870 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5417 Valve Body: Testing and Inspection Regulator Valve Body NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. 1. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly. CAUTION: The regulator spring cap can pop out when the stop bolt is removed. 2. Reassembly is the reverse order of disassembly. NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF. - Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve body, and tighten the stopper bolt. Page 8510 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Page 3435 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Relay Box: Locations Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 6556 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 6741 Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation CONSTRUCTION The pump is a vane-type incorporating a flow control valve (with an integrated relief valve) and is driven by a POLY-V-belt from the crank pulley. The pump features 10 vanes. Each vane performs two intake/discharge operations for every rotation of the rotor. This means that the hydraulic fluid pressure pulse becomes extremely small during discharge. OPERATION The belt-driven pulley rotates the rotor through the drive shaft. As the rotor rotates, the hydraulic pressure is applied to the vane chamber of the rotor and the vanes will rotate while being pushed onto the inner circumference of the cam ring. The inner circumference of the cam ring has an extended portion with respect to the center of the shaft, so the vanes move downward in the axial direction as the rotor rotates. As a result of this roller movement, the internal volume of the vane chamber will change, resulting in fluid intake and discharge. The flow control valve and sub-valve in the pump performs the following steps (1) through (4) to control the flow of fluid, that is to increase the discharge volume when engine speed is low and to decrease it when the engine speed increases. The assistance thrust of the steering gearbox changes in compliance with the change in the discharge volume. Page 4400 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The IAC Valve changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body in response to a current signal from the ECM/PCM in order to maintain the proper idle speed. Page 287 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Light Flasher Relay Below Left Side Of Dash - Photo 146 Electrical Specifications Compressor Clutch: Electrical Specifications Type Dry, single plate, poly-V-belt drive Air Gap 0.5 +/- 0.15 mm Clutch Coil Resistance 3.4 - 3.8 ohms Note: Resistance at 69 degrees F (20 degrees C) Clutch Coil Power Rating 40 W Note: Maximum Page 7955 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1004 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3377 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3384 Page 893 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4384 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3641 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8191 Integrated Control Unit Power Window Key-off Timer System Power Window Key-Off Timer System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Entry Light Timer System Entry Light Timer System Page 6010 Relay Identification Page 3299 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components A/C Compressor Drive Belt: Adjustments A/C Compressor A/C Compressor Belt Adjustment Deflection Method 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the A/C compressor and the crankshaft pulley. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: 8.0 - 10.5 mm (0.31 - 0.41 in) New Belt: 5.0 - 7.0 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) Power Steering Pump Belt Used Belt: 13.0 - 16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 in) New Belt: 11.0 - 12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 in) NOTE: ^ If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. ^ "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. ^ "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut of the alternator. 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension, then retighten the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the deflection of the A/C compressor belt. Page 1419 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: - Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Set No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). "UP" mark on the camshaft pulley should be at top, and TDC grooves on the camshaft pulley should align with the cylinder head surface. 3. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. - Intake: 0.26 mm (0.010 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) - Exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) +/- 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Page 153 Page 1801 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Diagrams Timing Components Page 3829 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel tank pressure sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Page 4761 Page 6887 Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment * Center the cable reel whenever the following is performed. (Refer to centering the cable reel.) Misalignment of the cable reel (the cable reel is not centered) could cause an open in the cable reel, making the SRS system and the horns inoperative. - Installation of the steering wheel - Installation of the cable reel - Installation of the steering column - Other steering-related adjustment or installation * Do not disassemble the cable reel. * Do not apply grease on the cable reel. * If the cable reel shows any signs of damage for example, it does not rotate smoothly, replace the cable reel with a new one. Page 5456 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Plug the end of the clutch pipe with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out. Grease: Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798D 9002). Grease: Brake Assembly Lube or equivalent rubber grease. REPLACEMENT 1. Disconnect the clutch pipe from the slave cylinder. 2. Remove the slave cylinder from the clutch housing. 3. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Page 9378 Page 6022 ABS Control Unit: Description and Operation Diagnosis Function ABS Indicator Light ABNORMALITY DETECTION The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit turns the ABS indicator light on when one or more of the following abnormalities are detected. This is only a partial list. When the operating time of the motor in the power unit exceeds the specified period. - When vehicle running time exceeds 30 seconds without releasing the parking brake. - When absence of speed signals from any of the four wheel sensor is detected. - When the activation time of all solenoids exceeds a given time, or an open circuit is detected in the solenoid system. - When solenoid output is not detected in the simulated ABS operation when the engine is started or the vehicle is driven. BULB CHECK To check the indicator light bulb, the light is activated when the ignition switch is first turned on. The light goes off after the engine is started if there is no abnormality in the system. Fail Safe FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended by turning off the two fail-safe relays. This disconnects the ground circuits of all the solenoid valves to prevent ABS operation.Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one. RELAY The fail-safe relay's terminal side contact is normally open. When there is continuity at the relay coil, the fail-safe relay is closed, thereby connecting the ground circuit to the solenoid valve. Pump Motor Control The ABS control unit monitors the brake fluid pressure in the accumulator by the pressure switch ON/OFF signals. The ABS control unit turns the pump on when the pressure in the accumulator drops, and stops the pump when the pressure rises to the specified value. If the pressure does not reach the specified value after the motor has operated continuously for a specified period, the ABS control unit stops the motor and activates the ABS indicator light. Self-Diagnosis PURPOSE The self-diagnosis function, provided in the sub function of the Anti-Lock Brake Sysytem (ABS) control unit, monitors the main system functions by constantly transmitting the data between the two Central Processing Units (CPU). FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected, the ABS control unit turns the ABS indicator light on and stops the ABS, although the basic brake system continues to operate normally. When the ABS control unit detects an abnormality with the ABS and turns the ABS indicator light on, the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), which shows the problem part or unit, is recorded in the control unit. The DTC can be read by the blinking frequency of the ABS indicator light. Page 9940 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Switch Replacement 1. Remove the inside handle case. 2. Disconnect the connectors. 3. Remove the passenger's window switch from the inside handle case by unscrewing the two mounting screws. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window switch. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window switch; the right rear window switch is symmetrical. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 3621 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9936 Master Switch Test Left Rear Switch: Master Switch Test Right Rear Switch: Page 9192 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Left Kick Panel Page 4863 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1376 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7195 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations ABS Component Locations Page 5723 2. Measure the clearance between 2nd and 3rd gears. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.21 mm (0.002 - 0.008 inch) - Service Limit: 0.30 mm (0.010 inch) 3. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the thickness of 3rd gear. - Standard: 32.42 - 32.47 mm (1.276- 1.278 inch) - Service Limit: 32.30 mm (1.270 inch) NOTE: If the thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service limit, replace 3rd gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one. 4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear and the spacer collar. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.21 mm (0.002 - 0.008 inch) - Service Limit: 0.30 mm (0.010 inch) 5. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure distance (A) on the spacer collar. - Standard: 26.03 - 26.08 mm (1.025 - 1.027 inch) - Service Limit: 26.01 mm (1.024 inch) Belt Deflection Drive Belt: Specifications Belt Tension and Deflection Belt Tension and Deflection When using a new belt, adjust deflection or tension to new values. Run the engine for 5 minutes then turn it off. Readjust deflection or tension to used belt values. Used Belt New Belt Alternator Belt Deflection 10.5 - 12.5 mm 8.0 - 10.0 mm Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Tension 290 -440 N 540 - 740 N Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. A/C Compressor Belt Deflection 8.0 - 10.5 mm 5.0 - 7.0 mm Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Tension 440 - 590 N 930 - 1130 N Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Power Steering Belt Deflection 13.0 - 16.0 mm 11.0 - 12.5 mm Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Tension 390 - 540 N 740 - 880 N Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Page 498 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5420 Valve Body: Testing and Inspection Servo Body NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Replace the servo body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Replace ATF strainer if its inlet opening is clogged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. Page 345 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 1309 Alignment: Service Precautions CAUTION: When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them at the same location from which they were removed. If a fastener needs to be replaced, use the correct part number fastener for that application. If the correct part number fastener is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used. Fasteners that are not reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be called out. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. If the above conditions are not followed, parts or system damage could result. Page 3287 Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION To prevent erratic running when the engine is warming up, it is necessary to raise the idle speed. The fast idle thermo valve is controlled by a thermowax plunger. When the engine is cold, the engine coolant surrounding the thermowax contracts the plunger, allowing additional air to be bypassed into the intake manifold so that the engine idles faster. When the engine reaches operating temperature, the valve closes, reducing the amount of air bypassing into the intake manifold. Page 8343 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. Disconnect the power window switch from the door harness, then install the armrest (coupe, drivers) or power window switch on the door panel. 19. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 20. Install the door panel. Page 2767 Page 5790 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5889 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 2050 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7345 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6839 Page 9813 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9845 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5900 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7394 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Speed (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7339 Page 4768 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 759 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Testing and Inspection Balance Shaft Belt: Testing and Inspection NOTE: ^ The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. ^ After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the upper cover. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 6. Remove the lower cover. 7. Install the crankshaft pulley. 8. Inspect the timing balancer belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: ^ Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. ^ Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 9. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Page 5047 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes A/C Switch & Fan Switch Heater Control Panel: Testing and Inspection A/C Switch & Fan Switch A/C SWITCH TEST Refer to illustration for terminal identification. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 9248 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9349 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3530 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1285 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Mainshaft Speed Sensor Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Side Of Transmission, Beneath Battery Page 8646 5. Tighten the outer seat track's front mounting bolt, then tighten the inner seat track's rear mounting bolt. 6. Use a caliper to measure the distance from the face of the inner seat track to the mounting boss. 7. Subtract 2.5 mm from your measurement to allow for the thickness of the inner seat track. Then select the proper size suspension alignment shim or shims (commercially available from most auto parts stores) to take up the measured gap. Do not exceed 5 mm. NOTE: Suspension alignment shim thickness is normally measured in fractions of an inch. Use this table to select the proper thickness. Calculated clearance Shim thickness 1.5 - 1.9 mm 1/16 in. 2.0 - 2.5 mm 3/32 in. 2.6 - 3.3 mm 1/8 in. 3.4 - 4.2 mm 5/32 in. 4.3 - 5.0 mm 3/16 in. 8. Install the 10 x 25 mm washer-bolt (see PARTS INFORMATION) in the inner seat track front mounting hole. Thread the bolt in only two or three turns. 9. Place the selected shim(s) over the bolt, between the inner seat track and the mounting boss. 10. Torque the four seat track mounting bolts to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Check the seat for proper operation. Make sure it slides smoothly and releases easily. Page 1847 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2748 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Page 1117 Page 5152 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Pedal Height* M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................. 192 mm (7.56in) A/T .............................................................................. ..................................................................................................................... 193 mm (7.60in) Free Play.............................................................................................................................................. ............................................. 1-5 mm (1/16-13/64 in) * With floormat removed. Page 9339 Page 2950 Page 507 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2637 Right Rear Of Engine Page 8434 Page 1288 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 5576 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Page 2957 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2392 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6580 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 7892 Page 4714 Page 1838 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Page 9195 Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications Inside Diameter Standard: 8.657 -8.661 in Service Limit: 8.700 in Page 5595 Flywheel: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel runout using a dial indicator through at least two full turns. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. NOTE: The runout can be measured with the engine installed. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the runout. Standard (New): 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) max. - Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 4. Install the special tool as shown. 5. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps as shown, then remove the flywheel. 6. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the mounting bolts finger-tight. 7. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Page 1841 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9568 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair 1. Remove the two screws from the license plate light assembly. 2. Pull the light out, and disconnect the 2-P connector from it. 3. Take the lens OFF, then replace the bulb. Page 8426 Page 2541 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R Page 3286 Page 7407 3. Remove the glove box. 4. Remove the glove box frame. 5. Disconnect the connector from the A/C thermostat. Remove the four self-tapping screws, two mounting nuts and the mounting bolt. Disconnect the drain hose, then remove the evaporator. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. ^ If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil (ND-OIL8). ^ Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat refrigerant oil before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. ^ Apply sealant to the grommets. ^ Make sure that there is no air leakage. ^ Charge the system, and test its performance. Page 7542 Page 2112 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7159 A/C SWITCH REPLACEMENT Refer to illustration for A/C switch replacement. Page 8520 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 6 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's door master power door lock switch up in the unlock position. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key in the ignition switch and remove it. Repeat this four more times within 10 seconds, then leave the key in the switch. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that all power door locks (except the driver's) cycle to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the system. 5. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. (You can program two transmitters per vehicle.) 6. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 7 Programming the Transmitter Page 8193 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Page 3078 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8192 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Lights-On Reminder System Lights-On Reminder System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Rear Window Defogger Timer Circuit Rear Window Defogger Timer Circuit Page 4246 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 1190 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 3040 Page 1547 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S Page 4075 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Photo Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations Photo Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8980 Page 5412 Servo Body Page 1046 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3381 Page 5650 1. Measure the clearance between 1st gear and the thrust washer. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.23 mm (0.002 - 0.009 inch) - Service Limit: 0.23 mm (0.009 inch) 2. If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the thicknesses of 1st gear and the thrust washer. a. 1ST GEAR - Standard: 32.95 - 33.00 mm (1.297 - 1.299 inch) b. THRUST WASHER - Standard: 1.95 - 1.97 mm (0.077 - 0.078 inch) NOTE: If the thicknesses of 1st gear and the thrust washer are less than the standard, replace them with new ones. - If the thicknesses of 1st gear and the thrust washer are within the standard, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between 2nd gear and 3rd gear. - Standard: 0.10-0.15 mm (0.004 - 0.006 inch) - Service Limit: 0.18 mm (0.007 inch) 4. If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the thicknesses of 2nd gear and the spacer. a. 2ND GEAR - Standard: 28.92 - 28.97 mm (1.139 - 1.141 inch) b. SPACER - Standard: 29.07 29.09 mm (1.1445 - 1.1453 inch) Locations Tachometer Connector: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 474 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4537 Page 3771 Page 298 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 2189 Page 9621 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Diagram Information and Instructions General Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5920 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9878 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5206 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 614 Power Window Relay: Locations Photographs Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 5668 Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection OIL CHECK NOTE: Check the transmission oil with the engine OFF and the vehicle on level ground. 1. Remove the oil filler plug, then check the level and condition of the oil. 2. The oil level must be up to the filler hole. If it is below the hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. 3. If the transmission oil is dirty, remove the drain plug and drain the oil. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission oil to the proper level. NOTE: The drain plug washer should be replaced at every oil change. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. Oil Capacity: a. 1.9 l (2.0 US qt.) at oil change b. 2.0 l (2.1 US qt.) at overhaul NOTE: Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Page 5019 4. After the parts are assembled, hold countershaft 1st gear and turn countershaft 3rd gear in the direction shown to be sure it turns freely. Also make sure the 3rd gear does not turn in the opposite direction. Page 1084 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 358 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 3077 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2760 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Page 6678 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Caster is the tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward from the vertical (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Page 9340 Page 780 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser outlet line where refrigerant is in a high temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and open the circuit. This removes ground, and the compressor will stop running. Page 509 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 318 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3586 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair ECM/PCM (MIL) RESET PROCEDURE WITH HONDA PGM TESTER OR OBDII SCANTOOL ^ Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. ^ NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. WITHOUT HONDA PGM TESTER OR OBDII SCANTOOL Page 7037 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7996 Page 1581 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 282 Integrated Control Unit (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1416 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 Photo 82 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 4397 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications GAP GAP Spark Plug Air Gap 0.039-0.043 (in.) Page 6283 Brake Line Placement 3. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Check the letters stamped on the modulator body, and connect the brake lines properly. Tighten the flare nuts. Specs: Flare nuts 19 Nm (14 lb.ft.) 4. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Check that: ABS indicator light is off. - Brake fluid is not leaking from the brake line joints. 5. Stop the engine. 6. Check whether the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level. If level is low, add fresh fluid until the reservoir is refilled to the MAX (upper) level. 7. Perform brake bleeding procedures. See: System Bleed 8. Perform ABS sunctional checks using the ALB checker. See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Page 2450 No. 4 Piston At Top Dead Center 7. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. No. 2 Piston At Top Dead Center 8. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. General Description Alignment: Description and Operation General Description GENERAL DESCRIPTION "Front End Alignment" refers to the angular relationship between the front wheels, the front suspension attaching parts and the ground. Proper front end alignment must be maintained in order to insure efficient steering, good directional stability and to prevent abnormal tire wear. The most important factors of front end alignment are wheel toe-in, wheel camber and axle caster. CAMBER: Camber is the vertical tilting inward or outward of the front wheels. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle (1). If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. CASTER: This illustration shows view from the side of the vehicle. Caster (1) is the vertical tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Page 228 Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 14-P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Page 3723 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2591 11. Remove the self-tapping screw and core clamp. 12. Pull out the heater core. NOTE: Be careful not to bend the inlet and outlet pipes during heater core removal. 13. Assemble heater unit in the reverse order of disassembly. 14. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items: - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses. Make sure that the clamps are secure. - Loosen the bleed bolt on the engine, and refill the radiator and coolant reservoir with the proper engine coolant mixture. Tighten the bleed bolt when all the trapped air has escaped and engine coolant begins to flow from it. - Connect all cables, and make sure they are properly adjusted. Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 3998 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7481 Evaporator 7. Remove the heater duct or the evaporator. 8. Disconnect the mode control motor connector, then remove the mounting bolt and the heater unit. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items: Apply sealant to the grommets. - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses. Make sure that the clamps are secure. - Loosen the bleed bolt on the engine, and refill the radiator and coolant reservoir with the proper engine coolant mixture. Tighten the bleed bolt when all the trapped air has escaped and engine coolant begins to flow from it. - Connect all cables, and make sure they are properly adjusted. Page 9486 Page 5514 Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair 1. Remove the two screws and the clip, and remove the driver's door panel part of the way. Switch Removal 2. Disconnect the connectors from the driver's door panel. Switch Removal 3. Remove the power window master switch from the driver's door panel. Switch Removal 4. Carefully pry out the switch from the power window master switch. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the power window master switch. Page 7942 Page 489 Page 6578 Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 9980 11. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 12. Install the front and center channels, and the glass run channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel into the front and center channels, and on the door as shown. Diagrams Stereo Radio/Cassette Player Terminals Page 6929 12. 1997 Accord and all Odyssey only: Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts and the caliper. Remove the four flange bolts, then remove the brake rotor/hub assembly. 13. Clean the recessed area around the ball joint with solvent and compressed air, then install the base remover adapter (Tool C or F). 14. Hold the remover installer adapter (Tool A) up to the ball joint, then install the castle nut to hold it in place. Install the remaining special tools on the lower ball joint and the knuckle. To avoid damaging the special tools, verify that they are correct for the vehicle you are working on and are aligned properly. NOTE: On the Prelude Type SH, make sure you are removing the ball joint that connects to the lower control arm. Do not remove the ball joint that connects to the radius rod. 15. Tighten the C-frame and press the lower ball joint out of the knuckle. Ball Joint Installation 16. Position the new ball joint in the knuckle. Do not remove the boot from the ball joint. 17. Install the special tools on the ball joint and the knuckle. Page 8991 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1598 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal Transmission Housing: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: - If the transmission housing or clutch housing are replaced, the bearing preload must be adjusted. - Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the workbench. 1. Remove the shift arm cover assembly. 2. Remove the reverse idler gear shaft bolt. 3. Remove the setting screws, then remove the washers, springs, and steel balls. 4. Remove the backup light switch. 5. Remove the 10 mm bolts and 8 mm bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. 6. Remove the 32 mm sealing bolt. 7. Expand the snap ring on the countershaft ball bearing, and remove it from the groove using a pair of snap ring pliers. Page 1373 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 202 Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR PANEL COVER REPLACEMENT 1. If applicable, remove the regulator handle by pulling the clip out with a wire hook. NOTE: Install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass closed. 2. Remove the inner trim cover. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door panel and other parts. 3. Pry out the cap and remove the screw. Page 6693 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 355 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Description and Operation Brake Signal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is depressed. Page 2571 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2225 All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this product update campaign. An example of the customer notification is included in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install an oil seal retainer to keep the oil seal from backing out. PARTS INFORMATION Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Retainer Kit: P/N 06923-P0A-306, H/C 6627707 (Kit contains a retainer and an O-ring.) NOTE: Early production kits also include a set of installation instructions. These instructions are incorrect, do not use them. Use only the procedure in this service bulletin to install the kit. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Accord/Odyssey/SOHC Prelude: Holder Attachment, 50 mm offset: Torque Converter Oil Seal - Installation Tool Seals and Gaskets: Technical Service Bulletins Torque Converter Oil Seal - Installation Tool 00-022 March 7, 2000 Applies To: ALL Models With L4 or V6 Engine and A/T With 44 mm I.D. Torque Converter Oil Seal Torque Converter Oil Seal Installation Tool The service manual procedure for installing the torque converter oil seal requires you to disassemble the transmission. A new required special tool, which attaches to your existing 40 mm l.D. driver, lets you install this seal without removing the main shaft or disassembling the transmission. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Seal Driver Attachment: T/N O7XAD-001000A (Shipped to all dealers March 2000 as a required special tool) 40 mm I.D. Driver: T/N 07746-0030100 ORDERING INFORMATION Additional seal driver attachments are available from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission (see section 14 of the appropriate service manual). 2. Remove and discard the torque converter oil seal. Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing. 3. Select the appropriate replacement seal. 4. Press the long end of the seal driver attachment into the driver. Press the new seal onto the short end. Do not apply any type of sealer to the seal or Page 1281 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 4461 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4770 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 4396 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9399 Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch At Left Rear Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 2241 6. Hold the installer shaft stationary with an 8 mm wrench, then turn the 19 mm nut clockwise until the seal installer bottoms out on the oil pump housing. 7. Clean the excess grease oft the balancer shaft. 8. Inspect the oil seal installation; make sure the oil seal lip is not damaged or distorted. Disclaimer Page 112 Fail Safe Relay: Testing and Inspection - Remove the fail-safe relays and motor relay. See: Brake Fluid Pump Relay/Locations Relay Identification - Check for continuity between the terminals C and D. There should be continuity. - Check for continuity between the terminals A and B. There should be continuity when the battery is connected between the terminals C and D. There should be no continuity when the battery is disconnected. Page 7714 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5890 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 38 Integrated Control Unit - Circuit Diagram Photo View Oxygen Sensor: Locations Photo View Photo 12 Front Of Engine Photo 132 Page 9816 Page 1069 Page 6871 60. Screw each rack end into the rack while holding the new lock washer so its tabs are in the slots in the end of the rack. 61. Tighten the rack end securely. 62. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on the flange as shown. 63. Apply grease to the rack end joint housing. 64. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves on the rack end. 65. Install the boots in the rack end with the tube clamps. NOTE: Install the boots with the rack in the straight ahead position (right and left tie-rods are equal in length). Page 6832 Interlock System A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1430 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the side engine mount. NOTE: ^ Use a jack to support the engine before the side engine mount is removed. ^ Make sure to place a cushion between the oil pan and the jack. 7. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 8. Remove the cylinder head cover. 9. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel (M/T) Torque/Sequence Page 8749 Page 5337 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then connect the Honda PGM Tester to the 1 6P Data Link Connector (DLC) located under the driver's side of the dashboard next to the kick panel. 2. Turn on the ignition switch, then follow the prompts on the PGM Tester until you reach the Data List. 3. Start the engine. 4. While test-driving, check the engine coolant temperature. If it does not reach 176°F (80°C) within 10 minutes, proceed to the next step. If it does, disregard this bulletin, and follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. NOTE: This procedure only works if the outside temperature is below 30°F. 5. Wait until the engine is cool; then replace the thermostat and gasket (refer to page 10-9 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual). Refill the radiator with a 50/50 mix of genuine Honda antifreeze/coolant and water. 6. Test-drive the vehicle with the PGM Tester to confirm the engine reaches normal operating temperature. When it does, scroll to the A/T Data List and make sure the torque converter lock-up solenoid turns ON. If it does not, follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. Page 4423 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7548 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1781 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6116 Remove Special Tool 9. Hold the plate with your fingers, and turn the shaft counterclockwise. Remove the special tool from the caliper. 10. Remove the adjusting bolt. Caliper Disassembly 11. Remove the spring cover, adjusting spring B, spacer, bearing A and cup from the adjusting bolt. Sleeve Piston Placement 12. Remove the sleeve piston, and remove the pin from the cam in the caliper body. 13. Remove the return spring. CAUTION: Do not loosen the parking nut with the cam installed in the caliper body. If the lever and shaft must be separated, hold the lever in a vise and loosen the parking nut. Page 9966 Master Switch Test Left Rear Switch: Master Switch Test Right Rear Switch: Specifications Countershaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 2045 Locations Page 6991 6. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. INSTALLATION 1. Install the front damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 2. Position the damper mounting base on the front damper unit as shown. 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 4. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. Page 6668 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 3043 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1817 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Inspection Clearance Inspection NOTE: Measure both the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker shaft. 1. Measure diameter of shaft at first rocker location. 2. Zero gauge to shaft diameter. 3. Measure inside diameter of rocker arm, and check for out-of-round condition. ^ Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Standard (New): ^ Intake: 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010-0.0026 inch) ^ Exhaust: 0.018-0.054 mm (0.0007-0.0021 inch) - Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Component Tests and General Diagnostics Keyless Entry Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Unit Input Test Page 5731 Standard: 13.0-13.3 mm (0.51-0.52 inch) Page 4068 Top Left Side Of Engine Door Switch Test Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Test Door Switch Test 1. Remove the cover and the screw, then pull the switch out. 2. Disconnect the 1-P connector, and remove the switch. Door Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 5669 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair NOTE: Check the transmission oil with the engine OFF and the vehicle on level ground. 1. Remove the oil filler plug, then check the level and condition of the oil. 2. The oil level must be up to the filler hole. If it is below the hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. 3. If the transmission oil is dirty, remove the drain plug and drain the oil. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission oil to the proper level. NOTE: The drain plug washer should be replaced at every oil change. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. Oil Capacity 1.9 L (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt) at oil change 2.0 L (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt) at overhaul Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Page 9336 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8395 10. Remove the rear channel. 11. Remove the center channel. Page 5432 Part 2 Of 2 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls. Regulator Page 5163 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9981 Coupe: Note: Make sure the lower center glass run channel is fitted into the center channel. 13. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 14. Install the glass. 15. Coupe: Install the center channel guide and channel guide cover. NOTE: Make sure the guide pin is installed in the center channel guide properly. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Page 5188 Park Gear: Testing and Inspection 1. Set the parking brake lever in the P position. 2. Measure the distance between the parking brake pawl shaft and the parking brake lever roller pin as shown. Standard: 64.5-65.5 mm (2.54-2.58 inch.) 3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and install the appropriate parking brake stop from the table below. 4. After replacing the parking brake stop, make sure the distance is within tolerance. Page 9333 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9013 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair ECM/PCM (MIL) RESET PROCEDURE WITH HONDA PGM TESTER OR OBDII SCANTOOL ^ Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. ^ NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. WITHOUT HONDA PGM TESTER OR OBDII SCANTOOL Page 4944 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Front Of Transmission Page 8762 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator - Component Location Index Page 4231 Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings: Service and Repair DISCONNECTION WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings for dirt, and clean if necessary. 3. Hold the connector with one hand and press down the retainer tabs with the other hand, then pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the pipe or other parts. Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the pipe; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 4. Check the contact area of the pipe for dirt and damage. - If the surface is dirty, clean it. - If the surface is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump or fuel feed pipe. 5. To prevent damage and keep out foreign matter, cover the disconnected connector and pipe end with plastic bags. NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the pipe. - Replace the retainer when replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel feed pipe. - it has been removed from the pipe. - it is damaged. CONNECTION WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. Page 2833 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Adjustments Carrier Bearings: Adjustments TAPERED ROLLER BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, outer race or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing preload must be adjusted. 1. Remove the bearing outer race and thrust shim from the transmission housing by heating the housing to about 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun. CAUTION: Do not heat the housing in excess of 212°F (100°C). - Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer race is to be replaced. - Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing side. NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to the room temperature before adjusting the bearing preload. Windows - Front Door Glass Comes Out of Run Channel Technical Service Bulletin # 97-060 Date: 970922 Windows - Front Door Glass Comes Out of Run Channel 97-060 September 22, 1997 Applies To: 1994-97 Accord 4-door - All Front Door Glass Comes Out of Run Channel SYMPTOM When operating a front window (power or manual), the rear edge of the glass comes out of the B-pillar run channel. PROBABLE CAUSE The window regulator is out of adjustment. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the window regulator, the front channel, and the glass. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 72250-SV4-A11, H/C 4272282 Defect code: 030 Contention code: B01 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Thread Lock 3: P/N 08713-0003, H/C 2963841 Repair Procedure 1. Remove the front door panel. See section 20 of the appropriate Accord S/M. 2. Using a razor blade to cut through the adhesive, carefully peel back the plastic cover (rain protector) enough to expose the regulator, glass, and front channel fasteners. Page 2688 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 2848 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2955 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5612 Page 8114 Page 4753 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2496 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Removal Valve: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: Identify valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket and plastic mallet, lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers before installing the valve spring compressor. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keepers. 3. Install the tool as shown. Page 3005 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9462 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7298 Page 3011 Page 734 Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection A/C Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 7235 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 728 Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Lower Center Of Rear Engine Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 3616 Page 5537 2. Have an assistant stand in the center of the circle and listen for the clicking noise. 3. Drive the car in the opposite direction. The assistant should be able to tell which axle is making the noise. DIAGNOSIS (On-hoist method) 1. Raise the car on a hoist and start the engine. 2. With the transmission in first gear (manual transmission) or D4 (automatic transmission), increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm. 3. Apply the brakes to load the engine speed to 1,500 rpm while maintaining the same throttle position. 4. Turn the wheels slowly to full left and full right positions. Have an assistant listen to determine which axle is making the noise. NOTE: A driveshaft with a light degree of noise may not be detected by this on-hoist method. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driveshaft as described in Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Use diagonal cutters to cut the two boot bands and the outboard joint boot, then remove them from the driveshaft. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the outboard joint. Measure and record distance "A" (from the splined end of the driveshaft to the inner race) as a reference for reassembly. Page 8003 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 7750 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. WARNING: DO NOT USE THE CHILD SEAT ANCHOR PLATE FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE; IT IS DESIGNED EXCLUSIVELY FOR INSTALLATION OF A CHILD SEAT. Page 1725 9. If necessary, Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. NOTE: Align the projection in the splash guard with the hole on the steering knuckle. 10. Install the steering knuckle on the hub unit and tighten the flange bolts. Refer to Steering and Suspension. Page 157 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5519 13. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub using a plastic hammer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the outboard joint into the knuckle. 2. Apply 0.3 - 1.0 g (0.01 - 0.04 oz) of specified grease to the whole splined surface of the left driveshaft (for cars with intermediate shaft). 3. Install the new set ring onto the driveshaft groove. CAUTION: Always use a new set ring whenever the driveshaft is being installed. 4. Insert the inboard end of the driveshaft into the differential or intermediate shaft until the set ring locks in the groove. Page 3859 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9465 Headlight Switch (Part 2 Of 2) Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Controled Idle Speed Man. Trans. 750 RPM Auto Trans. (N) 750 RPM Page 8299 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8492 Page 2701 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4802 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 3019 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and signals the ECM/PCM. In operation, the ECM/PCM receives the signals from the sensor and varies the duration during which fuel is injected. To stabilize the sensor's output, the sensor has an internal heater. The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in exhaust pipe A. Page 8397 14. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 15. Install the rear channel and glass, and fit the glass run channel into the rear channel. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Page 3535 Page 1580 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 3510 Testing and Inspection Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection 1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely. Retractor - Sedan 2. Make sure the seat belt does not lock when the retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 ° from the mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40 ° . Do not attempt to disassemble the retractor. 3. Replace the seat belt with a new one if there is any abnormality. Page 3402 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Why Do Connecting Rods Break? Curious why connecting rods break? Afier all, these are heavy-duty parts specifically designed to endure punishing forces and temperatures. Yet, every once in a while they do bend or break and wind up as cool conversation pieces for a coffee table or desk. Connecting rods break only after they've gotten bent. And they won't get bent unless the engine hydro-locks or the rod bearings fail. When troubleshooting a bent or broken connecting rod, here are some things to consider: ^ The number one culprit for connecting rod breakage is hydro-lock. This happens when liquid (water or fuel) entering the combustion chamber exceeds the chamber's volume. Since liquids don't compress, that extra volume in the chamber causes the rod to bend. You won't really notice anything wrong, until that bent rod finally gives out and breaks. This could happen if you're driving through deep, standing water and someone coming the other way splashes water over your hood. On very rare occasions, a bad ECM/PCM or fuel injector can cause too much fuel to enter a cylinder, causing hydro-lock and resulting in a bent rod. Before this happens, though, there are usually some kind of drive ability problems that crop up and remain afier the engine is fixed. A bent rod might not show any symptoms until it actually breaks. But bent rods leave a wider-than-normal carbon witness line in the cylinder because they're shorter. Typically, a healthy engine has a carbon line that's 6 mm deep. An engine that's suffering from bent rods has a second carbon line that's 9 to 12 mm deep. ^ Connecting rod bearings fail for a number of reasons. To properly determine what actually caused a rod bearing to fail, you've got to take apart all rod bearings and main bearings and compare them side by side. If all or most of the bearings and journals show similar damage (scoring, exposed copper, or heat discoloration) the likely cause is oil starvation, poor maintenance, customer abuse, or running the engine with an aftermarket power booster (nitrous oxide setup, supercharger, turbocharger). If only the bearing or journal for the failed rod looks bad but all the other ones look good (no scoring, no exposed copper or heat discoloration) and the crankshaft journals are smooth with no heat discoloration, then that particular bearing/ clearance would be suspect. Page 9318 Cornering Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8879 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1088 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4487 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4245 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4598 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 543 7. Reconnect the ECM/PCM 32-P connector. 8. Disconnect the 22-P connector from the gauge assembly, and check for continuity on the BLU wire between the ICM and tachometer. There should be continuity. 9. Check for continuity on the BLU wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. 10. If all the tests are normal, reconnect the 22-P connector to the gauge, and replace the ICM. * F22B1 ENGINE Page 4566 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3964 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Removal Page 8503 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Combination Light Switch Replacement Parking Lamp: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Remove the steering column covers. Page 7626 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Page 3625 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and signals the ECM/PCM. In operation, the ECM/PCM receives the signals from the sensor and varies the duration during which fuel is injected. To stabilize the sensor's output, the sensor has an internal heater. The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in exhaust pipe A. Page 6945 None. This service bulletin is for information only. Disclaimer Page 5291 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Front Of Transmission Page 1782 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7172 Mode Control Motor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Fresh Air/Recirculation Actuator 1. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal, and ground the No. 2 and No. 4 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. CAUTION: Never connect the battery in the opposite direction. 2. Disconnect the No. 2 or No. 4 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at FRESH or RECIRCULATE. NOTE: Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 3. If the recirculation control motor does not run in step 1, remove it, and check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement. If the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. Control Motor Test 1. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal, and ground the No. 7 terminal. CAUTION: Never connect the battery in the opposite direction. Mode Control Motor - Test 2. Using a jumper wire, connect the No. 7 terminal individually to the No. 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 terminals in that order. Each time the connection is made, the mode control motor should run smoothly and stop. NOTE: If the mode control motor does not run when jumping the first terminal, jump that terminal again after jumping the other terminals. The mode control motor is normal if it runs when jumping the first terminal again. 3. If the mode control motor does not run in step 2, remove it, and check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement. If the mode control linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor. Page 5718 Mainshaft: Adjustments MAINSHAFT THRUST CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the 78 mm shim and oil guide plate from the transmission housing. 2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub, spacer collar, 5th synchro hub, spacer, and ball bearing on the mainshaft, then install the above assembly in the transmission housing. 3. Install the washer on the mainshaft. 4. Measure distance (B) between the end of the transmission housing and washer. NOTE: Use a straight edge and vernier caliper. - Measure at three locations and average the reading. 5. Measure distance (C) between the end of the clutch housing and bearing inner race. Page 8950 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7244 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7802 Center Seat Belts - Coupe 6. Remove the retractor mounting screw (A) and the retractor bolt (B). Remove the center belt (C) and retractor (D). Center Seat Belts - Coupe 7. Remove the protector (A). Center Anchor Bolt - Coupe Page 4044 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2219 NOTE: An over-tensioned belt will cause crankshaft failure, usually within a few thousand miles. Make sure the belt tension is correct before releasing the vehicle to your customer. 23. Reinstall the upper or middle cover. Torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). 24. Reinstall the cylinder head cover. Torque the mounting hardware sequentially in two or three steps as specified in the appropriate service manual. 25. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 26. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 27. Center-punch a completion mark above the last character of the engine compartment VIN. Page 3992 Page 761 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 330 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1029 Page 8833 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 414 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6910 Ball Joint Kit, Prelude: P/N 04510-5L5-000, H/C 6194039 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Heavy-Duty Hub Puller: Snap-on P/N CJ-129 Old Forge P/N 2518 NOTE: Heavy-duty hub pullers can be purchased through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at (888) 424-6857. Ball Joint Remover/Installer Tool Set: The individual tools do not have tool numbers; each tool is stamped with a letter for reference. Page 62 C540 (18-GRY) Page 193 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5474 3. Install the pressure plate and the mounting bolts finger-tight. 4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern as shown. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 5. Remove the special tools. 6. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height. Page 8905 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Specifications Radiator Fan Control Module: Specifications Fan Timer "ON" Temperature ......................................................................................................................................................... 217-228°F (103-109°C) Fan Timer "OFF" Temperature [1] ................................................................ ................................................................................................ 7-16°F (4-9°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Page 2099 Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Lower Center Of Rear Engine Page 1629 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 1519 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 3034 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Front Seat Belt Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Front seat belt 1. Slide the front seat forward fully. 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. 3. Remove these items. - Front side trim. - Rear side trim. - Center pillar lower trim panel. Front Seat Belt - Sedan 4. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and pull the lower anchor cover (B) back. Page 2797 Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 3994 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. End Play Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection End Play 1. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. 2. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; dial reading should not exceed service limit. ^ Crankshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 inch) - Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) ^ If end play is excessive inspect the thrust washers and thrust surface on the crankshaft. Replace parts as necessary. NOTE: Thrust washer thickness is fixed and must not be changed either by grinding or shimming. Thrust washers are installed with grooved sides facing outward. Page 2757 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: Customer Interest Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Page 8201 C540 (18-GRY) Dimensions Axle Shaft: Specifications Dimensions DIMENSIONS Manual ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 486-491 mm (19.1-19.3 inch) Automatic Left ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................... 845-850 mm (33.3-33.5 inch) Right ........................................................................... ................................................................................................... 486-491 mm (19.1-19.3 inch) Page 894 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7453 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7633 Air Bag: Locations Passenger's Air Bag Assembly Behind Glove Box Page 1010 Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER If equipped with a service reminder flag, the oil and oil filter service interval reminder flags will activate after every 7500 miles of operation. To reset indicators, insert ignition key into slots below indicator flags at lower right corner of instrument cluster. Push key in until reminder window changes from Red to Green. Removal Page 35 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2057 Page 2279 Page 9970 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Switch Replacement 1. Remove the inside handle case. 2. Disconnect the connectors. 3. Remove the passenger's window switch from the inside handle case by unscrewing the two mounting screws. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window switch. Passenger's Window Switch Replacement NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window switch; the right rear window switch is symmetrical. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 1144 Page 9461 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5976 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 3709 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 7207 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1018 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and signals the ECM/PCM. In operation, the ECM/PCM receives the signals from the sensor and varies the duration during which fuel is injected. To stabilize the sensor's output, the sensor has an internal heater. The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in exhaust pipe A. Page 7643 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Airbag Replacement After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, the airbag assemblies and the SRS unit must be replaced. WARNING: STORE A REMOVED AIRBAG ASSEMBLY WITH THE PAD SURFACE UP. IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. CAUTION: - Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. When repairing, use only new SRS parts. - Carefully inspect the airbag assembly before you install it. Do not install an airbag assembly that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Always disconnect the airbag connector(s) when the harness is disconnected. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag assembly. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors: Airbag Assembly Replacement - Remove the glove box. - Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. 4. Remove the airbags: Page 2905 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 3813 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9074 VSS Test Page 1147 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 813 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8907 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7569 Page 3123 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4992 2. Drive in the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in the housing using the special tools as shown. 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing using the special tools as shown. Page 7393 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8875 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8653 3. Check under the seat to confirm that both seat track latches are engaged. If one of the seat track latches does not engage, sit in the seat and slide back and forth until the latches engage in the rearmost position. 4. Torque the two seat track front mounting bolts to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 5. Pull up on the seat track release lever, and move the seat all the way forward; do not use the walk-in lever or the recline lever. Torque the two seat track rear mounting bolts to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 6. Check the seat for proper operation: ^ If the seat operates properly (slides smoothly and releases easily), reinstall the seat track end covers; the repair is complete. ^ If one of the seat track latches still does not engage, continue to Shimming the Inner Seat Track Shimming the Inner Seat Track 1. Move the seat to the rearmost position. 2. Check under the seat to confirm that both seat track latches are engaged. If the seat track latches do not engage, sit in the seat and slide back and forth until the latches engage in the rearmost position. NOTE: Do not move the seat from this position or use the walk-in or recline levers until this procedure is completed. 3. Remove the front mounting bolt from the inner seat track. Loosen the other three seat track mounting bolts several turns. 4. Move the seat back and forth and side to side until you see a gap between the front of the inner seat track and its mounting boss. Page 1774 Page 1710 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 9188 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 42 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Lights-On Reminder System Lights-On Reminder System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Rear Window Defogger Timer Circuit Rear Window Defogger Timer Circuit Both Fans Both Fans Page 3472 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2242 Balance Shaft Seal: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION NOTE: Inspect the balancer shaft before removing the right side cover and the balancer gear case. 1. Push the balancer shaft firmly away from the dial indicator. Zero the dial against the front end of the balancer shaft, then pull the balancer shaft firmly back toward the indicator. ^ Front Balancer Shaft End Play Standard (New): 0.10-0.40 mm (0.004-0.016 inch) ^ If end play is excessive, inspect the retainer and thrust surfaces on the balancer shaft. ^ Rear Balancer Shaft End Play Standard (New): 0.04-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 inch) ^ If end play is excessive, inspect the thrust washer and thrust surfaces on the driven gear and oil pump body. NOTE: The thickness of the retainer (front) and thrust washer (rear) are fixed and must not be changed either by grinding or shimming. 2. Remove the balancer shafts. NOTE: Clean the balancer shafts. 3. Inspect the surface of the balancer shaft journal and balancer bearing. 4. Replace the bearing or balancer shaft if there is wear, damage or discoloration on the surface of the bearing or the balancer shaft journal. When replacing the rear No. 1 bearing be sure to replace the oil pump housing with a new one. NOTE: A mirror-like surface is normal. Page 210 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Speed (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4031 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5724 6. If distance (A) is less than the service limit, replace the spacer collar with a new one. If distance (A) is within the service limit, measure the thickness of 4th gear. Standard: 30.92 - 30.97 mm (1.217 - 1.219 inch) - Service Limit: 30.80 mm (1.210 inch) NOTE: If the thickness of 4th gear is less than the service limit, replace 4th gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 4th gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one. 7. Measure the clearance between the spacer collar and 5th gear. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.21 mm (0.002 - 0.008 inch) - Service Limit: 0.30 mm (0.010 inch) 8. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure distance (B) on the spacer collar. - Standard: 26.03 - 26.08 mm (1.025 - 1.027 inch) - Service Limit: 26.01 mm (1.024 inch) 9. If distance (B) is less than the service limit, replace the spacer collar with a new one. If distance (B) is within the service limit, measure the thickness of 5th gear. Standard: 30.92 - 30.97 mm (1.217 - 1.219 inch) - Service Limit: 30.80 mm (1.210 inch) NOTE: If the thickness of 5th gear is less than the service limit, replace 5th gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 5th gear is within the service limit, replace the 5th synchro hub with a new one. MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLE Page 1298 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Page 6751 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Overhaul Disassemble TOOL REQUIRED - 07725-0030000 Universal Holder - 07GAF-SD40700 Hub Dis/Assembly Base PULLEY REMOVAL 1. Drain the fluid from the pump. 2. Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws, hold the pulley with the special tool, and remove the pulley nut and pulley. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. NOTE: Pulley nut has left-hand threads. FLOW CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL 1. Remove the control valve cover by removing the three flange bolts. 2. Remove the spring, flow control valve and O-rings. Radio - Distortion From the Front Speakers Technical Service Bulletin # 97-062 Date: 970929 Radio - Distortion From the Front Speakers 97-062 September 29, 1997 Applies To: 1997 Civic - 2-door HX and EX models - 4-door LX and EX models 1997 Accord - 2-and 4-door EX models 1997 Odyssey - EX models Distortion From the Front Speakers SYMPTOM The front speakers sound distorted. PROBABLE CAUSE The speaker voice coil was damaged when it was being manufactured. CORRECTIVE ACTION Confirm the distortion is coming from the front speaker(s), confirm the voice coil(s) is (are) damaged, and replace the damaged speaker(s). PARTS INFORMATION Front Speaker: P/N 391 20-SV4-A01, H/C 4269338 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. NOTE: If you are submiffing a claim for an additional front speaker using a template ID, the time for the first speaker is included. Failed part: P/N 39120-SV4-A01 H/C 4269338 Defect code: 042 Contention code: F99 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Referring to the appropriate S/M, remove the front door panel (Accord and Odyssey) or the front speaker cover (Civic). Front door panel removal is in section; speaker cover is in 23. 2. Adjust the bass and treble settings on the audio unit to their maximum settings, and listen to different types of music at various volume levels. - If there is distortion coming from the front speaker(s) only, go to step 3. Page 7967 Cellular Phone: Testing and Inspection Handset Microphone Is Inoperative (No Audio) In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Handset Microphone Is Inoperative) (No Audio) (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6795 Page 8147 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Door 1. Remove the door panel. Tweeter Replacement 2. Remove the three screws, then disconnect the 2-P connector from the speaker. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 4038 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9144 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 9588 Page 7956 Cellular Phone: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 8479 C540 (18-GRY) Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch ............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Page 1011 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3023 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 9658 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Headlight Relay ^ Headlight relay Page 1674 Waddle is side-to-side movement at the front and/or rear of the car. It can be caused by the steel belt not being straight within the tire, or by excessive lateral runout of the tire or wheel. It is most noticeable at low speed, about 8 to 48 km/h (5 to 30 mph). It may also cause rough ride at 80 to 113 km/h (50 to 70 mph). The car can be road tested to see which end of the car has the faulty tire. If the tire causing the waddle is on the rear, the rear end of the car will "waddle". From the driver's seat, it feels as if someone is pushing on the side of the car. If the faulty tire is on the front, the waddle is more easily seen. The front sheet metal appears to be moving back and forth. It feels as if the driver's seat is the pivot point in the car. Another more time-consuming method of determining the faulty tire is substituting tire and wheel assemblies that are known to be good. Follow these steps: 1. Drive the car to determine if the waddle is coming from the front or rear. 2. Install tire and wheel assemblies known to be good (from a similar car) in place of those on the end of the car which is waddling. If the waddle cannot be isolated to front or rear, start with the rear tires. 3. Road test again. If improvement is noted, install the original tire and wheel assemblies one at a time until the faulty tire is found. If no improvement is noted, install tires known to be good in place of all four. Then, install the originals one at a time until the faulty tire is found. Page 6616 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4416 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 754 Page 5007 3. After installing the bearing, verify the following: - The snap ring is seated in the bearing and housing grooves. - The snap ring operates properly. - The ring end gap is correct. Testing and Inspection Trunk/Liftgate Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection 1. Open the trunk lid, then remove the trunk lid inner trim. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the trunk key cylinder switch. 3. Check continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity when the trunk key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK with the key. ^ There should be no continuity when the keylock is released Page 6587 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 78 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 326 Page 1844 Page 2029 Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering NOTE: When using a new belt, first adjust the deflection or tension to the values for the new belt, then readjust the deflection or tension to the values for the used belt after running engine for five minutes. If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the tension gauge. WITH BELT TENSION GAUGE 1. Remove the P/S reservoir from the bracket, and set it a side. 2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt with the gauge face toward the engine, and measure the tension of the belt. 3. Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to avoid hitting the gauge reset lever. Tension: ^ Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (88 - 120 lbs.) ^ New Belt: 740 - 880 N (170 - 200 lbs.) WITHOUT BELT TENSION GAUGE Apply a force of 98 N (22 lbs.) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump and the crankshaft pulleys. Deflection: ^ Used Belt: 13.0 - 16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 inch) ^ New Belt: 11.0 - 12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 inch) Page 5096 REQUIRED MATERIALS Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Outlet Line Pump ................................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Valve Housing ........................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) Valve Housing Cylinder Line ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 17 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Return Line ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) Gearbox Housing Line ......................................................................................................................... ................................................. 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Page 2183 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8172 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1837 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9746 Page 4872 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2350 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. - If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Page 735 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. CONTROL PANEL REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the air mix control cable from the heater unit. 2. Remove the stereo radio/cassette player, and the glove box. Page 2956 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5015 Page 2909 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 1365 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 773 5. Disconnect the connector from the A/C thermostat. Remove the four self-tapping screws, two mounting nuts and the mounting bolt. Disconnect the drain hose, then remove the evaporator. 6. Pull out the A/C thermostat sensor from the evaporator fins. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - Install the A/C thermostat sensor to its original location. Page 2180 Page 5039 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Power Relay Test Radiator Fan Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Radiator fan relay Page 9553 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2763 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 9743 Page 7918 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip into place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter, and install it in the new one. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 8319. For each set ordered, send a dealer check for $24.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Alpine Electronics of America 19145 Gramercy Place Torrance, CA 90501 Attention: Al Sula (Parts) Alpine's ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Additional transmitters can be ordered from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If you have questions on how to order the four ROM chip set, call Alpine's Parts Department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Page 3520 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The IAC Valve changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body in response to a current signal from the ECM/PCM in order to maintain the proper idle speed. Page 8427 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1034 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2773 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3306 Page 6247 Photo Starter Relay: Locations Photo Below Left Side Of Dash Page 9030 Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Lower Center Of Rear Engine Page 5926 Page 8467 Door Locks: Testing and Inspection Front Passenger's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the door panel. Front Passenger's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Front Passenger's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 533 Page 7543 Page 2217 8. Remove the dipstick and the dipstick tube. Make sure you cover the hole to keep debris out of the oil pan. 9. Raise the vehicle, and remove the left front wheel. 10. Remove the mounting bolts from the driver's side half of the splash shield. Pull back the splash shield, and secure it so you can access the crankshaft pulley. 11. Use the special tools and a wrench to remove the crankshaft pulley bolt, then remove the pulley. 12. Remove the three mounting bolts from the lower cover. Pry the bottom of the cover away from the block about an inch, and use a socket or similar tool to hold it there. Page 5527 5. Seat the 38 mm external circlip in the groove of the intermediate shaft. 6. Press the outer seal into the bearing support using the special tools and a press as shown. INSTALLATION 1. Insert the intermediate shaft assembly into the differential. CAUTION: Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to the differential oil seal. Page 7598 - If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 PR7 - A01). - Replace the 0-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat refrigerant oil (Nippondenso: ND-OIL 8, P/N 38899 - PR7 - A01) before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right 0-rings for HFC 134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system, and test its performance. Page 6828 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 583 Door Switch Test Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Test Door Switch Test 1. Remove the cover and the screw, then pull the switch out. 2. Disconnect the 1-P connector, and remove the switch. Door Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 4951 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 2803 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4027 Page 3210 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Locations Page 5908 Connector Pin Color And Function Chart CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly, and disconnect all connectors from it. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 22-P (C6O9) and 16-P (C6O7) connectors. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board A. Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 1270 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 1017 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9229 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6619 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 756 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6112 Brake Cable Removal & Installation ^ Remove the lock pin and clevis pin. Remove the cable clip and disconnect the cable from the arm. ^ Remove the banjo bolt and two sealing washers. Caliper Bolts Location ^ Remove the two caliper bolts and caliper body from the bracket. Pins & Pin Boot Placement ^ Remove the pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. Disassembly Page 1080 Page 5028 14. If the clearance is not within the service limits, select a new clutch end plate from the following table. NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed, but the clearance is still over the standard, replace the clutch discs and clutch plates. Page 530 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2120 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2623 Radiator Fan Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Test Relays - Test There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the B and D terminals, and there should be no continuity when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Radiator fan relay Page 915 Lamp Out Sensor: Testing and Inspection Brake Light Failure Sensor Test 1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the brake pedal is pressed. ^ If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. ^ If one of the brake lights does not come on, check whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to step 2. ^ If none of the brake lights come on, check the brake light circuit. 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the side box. 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on, when the No. 1 terminal of the 6-P connector is grounded and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire between the safety indicator and the No. 1 terminal of the failure sensor, and whether the safety indicator circuit (printed circuit board) has a problem. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on and stay on, go to step 4. 4. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II) with the No. 2 terminal of the 6-P connector grounded and the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, replace the failure sensor. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP does not stay on, check for an open in the BLK wire between the No. 2 terminal of the failure sensor and ground, and check for a poor ground at G551. Page 3600 Underside Center Of Vehicle Secondary HO2S Page 7343 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9448 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3531 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7208 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6115 Brake Spring Compressor 7. Lower the locknuts fully and tighten them securely. NOTE: Keep the locknuts in this position until you reinstall the circlip. Snap Ring Removal & Installation 8. Remove the circlip with snap ring pliers. Page 4634 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 957 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7218 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Overhaul - Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation control doors and linkage move smoothly without binding. - When reattaching the recirculation control motor, make sure its positioning will not allow the recirculation control doors to be pulled too far. Attach the recirculation control motor and all links, then connect power and ground, and watch the movement of the recirculation control doors. Page 3045 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5370 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7999 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2157 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6481 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8519 This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form,* (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.), to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90801-5745 If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (800)852-4690, or Fax them at (310) 898-1029 (weekdays, from 8:30 A.M. thru 4:00 PM., PST). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your Dealership C.O.D. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. *On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. Procedure 5 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering wheel cover flashes when the system is in the programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. The parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. The parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter Page 434 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 1571 Bleeding Sequence 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. NOTE: Check fluid level frequently and refill as necessary to prevent air from being drawn into system. 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. NOTE: To flush and replace fluid, repeat procedure at each wheel until expelled fluid appears clean. Page 7222 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Blower motor relay Page 5371 Page 7353 Heater Control Panel: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1824 6. Install the camshaft oil seal using the special tools as shown. 7. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. ^ Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 6 mm bolts are (11), (12), (13),(14) 8. Install the back cover. Page 5583 9. If necessary, Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. NOTE: Align the projection in the splash guard with the hole on the steering knuckle. 10. Install the steering knuckle on the hub unit and tighten the flange bolts. Refer to Steering and Suspension. Page 3798 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7785 8-Way Power Seat - 8-way power seat: center cover - Power height adjustable seat: Bracket cover 3. On a driver's seat, disconnect and/or detach the seat belt switch connector and clip (A) and harness clips (B). Front Seat Belt - Sedan 4. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the seat belt buckle (B). NOTE: The power height adjustable seat is shown, the manual seat, and the manual height adjustable seat are similar. Front Seat Belt - Sedan 5. On a driver's seat, remove the seat belt switch harness (A): - Without manual seat: Adjust the seat cushion to its maximum height, and remove the harness. - With manual seat: Remove the seat cushion mounting bolts (B) from the inner seat track (C), then pull the inner seat track down away from the Page 1769 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1450 Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection: 10.5 - 12.5 mm (0.41 - 0.49 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 8 - 10 mm (0.32 - 0.39 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the belt deflection. Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (Without A/C) Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension: 294 - 441 N (30 - 45 kgf, 66 - 99 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 540 - 735 N (55 - 75 kgf, 121 - 165 lbf) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Page 7992 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5518 CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 11. Pry the driveshaft assembly with a screwdriver, as shown, to force the set ring at the driveshaft end past the groove. 12. Pull on the inboard joint, and remove the driveshaft from the differential case or bearing support as an assembly. CAUTION: Do not pull on the driveshaft, as the inboard joint may come apart. - Use care when prying out the assembly, and pull it straight to avoid damaging the differential oil seal or the intermediate shaft outer seal. Page 3234 Distributor: Service and Repair Installation Distributor Installation Distributor Installation NOTE: ^ Before you install the distributor, bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lugs on the end of the distributor and their mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts. 4. Connect the connector(s) to the distributor. 5. Connect the ignition wires as shown. Page 4382 Page 6820 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 385 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Page 9469 Page 7648 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. 4. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag (A) and SRS main harness (B). 5. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A) to the airbag. Place the deployment tool at least thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 6. Connect a 12 Volt battery to the tool. - If the green light on the tool comes on, the airbag igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is ready to be deployed. 7. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the airbags deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - During deployment the airbag can become hot enough to burn you. Wait thirty minutes after deployment before touching the airbag. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 1839 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3695 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 2449 4. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 5. Tighten the locknut and check clearance again. Repeat adjustment if necessary. No. 3 Piston At Top Dead Center 6. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (Camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. Page 4554 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage 2.4 V at 5 in hg 1.9 V at 10 in hg 1.5 V at 15 in hg 1.0 V at 20 in hg 0.5 V at 25 in hg Page 450 Page 121 Radiator Fan Control Module: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Control Module Input Test NOTE: Perform the following tests with the radiator fan control module 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II) and the A/C switch OFF. If you find the cause of a problem, correct it before you continue. Page 6603 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 2412 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Top End Inspection 1. Check for rough or pitted distributor ignition (DI) rotor and distributor ignition (DI) cap terminals. 2. Scrape or file off the carbon deposits. Smooth the distributor ignition (DI) rotor terminal with an oil stone or #600 sandpaper if rough. 3. Check the distributor ignition (DI) cap for cracks, wear and damage. If necessary, clean or replace it. Page 6136 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear ^ Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. Specs: Lining Thickness Standard 8.5 - 9.5 mm (0.33 - 0.37 in) Service Limit 1.6 mm (0.06 in) ^ Remove the pad retainers. ^ Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. ^ Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. Page 6050 Fluid Level Check 5. Repeat steps A through F twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 6. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. 7. After replacement, start the engine and make sure that the ABS indicator light goes off. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Fluid Capacity (approx) 150 ml (5.0 fl.oz) Photo Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations Photo Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 5928 Page 5780 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9142 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2750 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Page 4540 Throttle Body: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. - After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable, the throttle cable and the A/T throttle control cable. See: Throttle Cable/Linkage - The TP sensor is not removable. REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY Page 8330 9. Detach the grommets and harness clips, then carefully remove the plastic cover. Page 6082 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Hydraulic Component Bleeding and Fluid Service Modulator Unit Relieving System Pressure/Brake Fluid Replacement/Bleeding CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this section is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder. NOTE: Do not remove the rubber tube and wrench yet. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 7. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: The modulator has a capacity of approximately 150 ml (150 cc, 5 FL-oz). Approximately 40 - 45 ml (40 - 45 cc, 1.3 - 1.5 FL-oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. 9. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. 10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. When the brake fluid is completely drained Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor: Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor The fillpipe restrictor is used to prevent leaded fuel from being added to the fuel tank. The gasoline pump for unleaded fuel has a smaller nozzle. The fillpipe restrictor will only allow the unleaded type nozzle to be inserted into the fuel tank. Page 6003 ABS Pump Motor: Description and Operation ABS Pump Operation NOTE: The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) pump and motor are integral parts of the ABS modulator unit. LOW PRESSURE OPERATION As the motor rotates, it drives the plunger-type ABS Pump and raises the brake fluid pressure to approximately 25 MPa (3,600 psi). The eccentric bearing is attached to the motor shaft end; it contacts the plunger of the pump plunger. The motor shaft's rotational motion is transmitted to the reciprocating motion of the pump plunger. HIGH PRESSURE OPERATION When the plunger is pushed, the brake fluid in the plunger chamber is pressurized and fed to the accumulator, solenoid, and piston, via the check valve. When the pressure in the accumulator exceeds 34 MPa (5,000 psi), the relief valve opens to release the excess brake fluid pressure to the reservoir, thereby protecting the system. Page 3351 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4363 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1887 Photo 38 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Mount Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Reaming Valve Guide: Service and Repair Reaming NOTE: For new valve guides only. 1. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil. 2. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore. 3. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while removing it from the bore. 4. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue. 5. Check clearance with a valve. ^ Verify that the valve slides in the intake and exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure. Page 2979 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Mechanical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 8844 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8729 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Brake Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the switch. Brake Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Page 8381 8. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. 9. Remove the glass run channel. Page 4727 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 581 Page 7456 Removal Step Three 6. Remove the mounting bolts and mounting nuts in sequence shown, then remove the steering hanger beam. Heater Duct Evaporator Page 9629 3. Disconnect the connector from the combination light switch, then remove the two screws and the switch. Page 9031 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Engine Low Oil Pressure Indicator System - Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire from the engine oil pressure switch. 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). ^ There should be continuity with the engine stopped. ^ There should be no continuity when the engine runs. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure and, if necessary, inspect the oil pump. Page 538 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2490 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6080 Front Brake Bleeder Valve Rear Drum Brake Bleeder Valve Rear Disc Brake Bleeder Valve 3. Connect a hose to the brake bleed screw at the right rear wheel and place the open end in a container to collect the expelled fluid. 4 Loosen the bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. When the brake pedal reaches the end of it's stroke, hold the pedal down and tighten the bleed screw. Specs Front bleed screw 9 Nm (6.5 lb.ft.) Rear bleed screw 7 Nm (5 lb.ft.) Page 9252 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Component Locations Radiator Fan Relay: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Photo View Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Core: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9880 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4324 Page 1670 Localized Tread Wear 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Page 5956 Countershaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 6909 All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the front suspension lower ball joints. PARTS INFORMATION Ball Joint Kit, Accord and Odyssey: P/N 04510-S84-000, H/C 6194054 Page 7816 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Power Height Adjustable Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Height Adjustable CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat, interior trim or body. 1. Remove the driver's seat. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the power seat up-down motor. Motor Test 3. Test the motor: CAUTION: When the motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. 4. if the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Service and Repair Camshaft Oil Seal: Service and Repair REMOVAL Page 2261 3. Using the special tool, drive the crankshaft oil seal into the right side cover to the point where the clearance between the bottom of the crankshaft oil seal and right side cover is 0.5-0.8 mm (0.02-0.03 inch). NOTE: Align the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the crankshaft. Page 3765 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9010 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Stays ON Page 250 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Headlight Relay ^ Headlight relay Page 6108 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Akebono Calipers WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. REMOVAL Caliper Shield ^ Remove the caliper shield. Brake Cable Removal & Installation ^ Remove the lock pin and clevis pin. Remove the cable clip and disconnect the cable from the arm. ^ Remove the banjo bolt and two sealing washers. A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 3035 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6475 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Front Wiper Switch Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper Switch Wiper/Washer Switch Test Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7-P and 20-P connectors from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the wiper/washer switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Page 973 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel tank pressure sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Page 9677 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2807 Page 4562 Page 4287 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4370 Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9386 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7898 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Page 7809 Page 7287 Condenser HVAC: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity 25 mL Page 4672 Ignition Coil: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 812 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7924 1. Locate the security system control unit mounted under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst to confirm that you're in the programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at three-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to let you know that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter or between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps, and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 9. Push all the function buttons on each transmitter to make sure they work correctly. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 10 Page 3959 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 6533 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4367 Page 4613 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3678 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Page 5549 4. Mark the rollers and spider to identify the locations of rollers on the spider, then remove the rollers. 5. Remove the circlip. 6. Mark the spider and driveshaft to identify the position of the spider on the shaft. 7. Remove the spider using a commercially-available bearing remover. 8. Remove the stop ring. 9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape to prevent damage to the boots and dynamic damper. 10. Remove the boot band and inboard boot. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the boot. 11. Remove the dynamic damper band and dynamic damper if equipped. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the dynamic damper. 12. Remove the boot bands and outboard boot, then remove the vinyl tape. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the boot. Page 7104 Wheels: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Aluminum Wheel (Axial) 0 - 0.7 mm 2.0 mm Aluminum Wheel (Radial) 0 - 0.7 mm 1.5 mm Steel Wheel (Axial) 0 - 1.0 mm 2.0 mm Steel Wheel (Radial) 0 - 1.0 mm 1.5 mm One-Way Clutch Clutch: Service and Repair One-Way Clutch 1. Separate countershaft 3rd gear from countershaft 1st gear by turning 3rd gear in the direction shown. 2. Remove the one-way clutch by prying it up with the end of a screwdriver. 3. Inspect the parts as follows: Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Installation Tool Balance Shaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Installation Tool 99-037 May 25, 1999 Applies To: 1990-99 Accord - ALL with L4 engine 1992-99 Prelude - ALL 1995-98 Odyssey - ALL Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Installation Tool A special tool is required to properly install the front balancer shaft oil seal on the vehicles listed above. The balancer shaft oil seal installation procedure in the service manual does not install the balancer shaft oil seal to the proper depth. Improper oil seal installation depth may cause premature oil seal failure. The procedure in the service manual should not be used. Cross out the balancer shaft oil seal installation procedure in the service manuals, and refer to this service bulletin. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Seal Installer: T/N O7XAF-PT00100, H/C 6186050 (Shipped to all current dealers on May 25, 1999) Installer shaft: T/N O7NAF-PT0020A, H/C 3996139 (Existing special tool) Additional seal installers are available from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. PROCEDURE 1. Clean the balancer shaft and the balancer shaft oil seal housing with contact cleaner. 2. Dry the balancer shaft and the balancer shaft oil seal housing. 3. Apply a light coat of grease to the balancer shaft and to the lip of the new seal. Do not lubricate or apply sealant to the outside of the seal. 4. Slide the new seal on the balancer shaft. 5. Place the seal installer on the balancer shaft, then thread the installer shaft into the balancer shaft. Page 4315 Page 7651 Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Disarming and Arming Procedures Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Page 8373 10. Install the plastic cover and bracket. NOTE ^ Apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. ^ Do not plug the elongated hole. 11. Install the door panel. NOTE: ^ Make sure the door harness is not pinched. ^ If necessary, replace any damaged clips. ^ Make sure the connectors are connected properly. 12. Install the armrest pocket and inner handle. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 13. Install the inner trim cover. 14. If applicable, install the regulator handle. NOTE: Raise the glass fully 1. Remove: ^ Inner trim cover. ^ Door panel. ^ Plastic cover. Page 5558 7. Measure and mark the band with a felt-tip pen at the specified distance from the clip: ^ If you are installing a new boot, mark the band approximately 10 to 14 mm (0.4 to 0.6 in.) from the clip. ^ If you are reinstalling the original boot, mark the band 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the clip. 8. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the boot band tool and into the slot on the winding mandrel. 9. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, then slowly turn the winding mandrel with a wrench. Tighten the band until the mark you made in step 7 meets the edge of the clip. 10. Raise up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees, then center-punch the clip to hold the band temporarily. Page 7514 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Blower motor relay Page 9011 Page 1899 Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Out-of Round and Taper OUT-OF ROUND TAPER RUNOUT OUT-OF-ROUND ^ Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod and main journal in two places. ^ The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Out-of-Round: ^ Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) max. ^ Service Limit: 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) TAPER ^ Measure taper at the edge of each rod and main journal. ^ The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Taper: ^ Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) max. ^ Service Limit: 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) RUNOUT ^ Measure runout on all main journals to make sure the crank is not bent. ^ The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Page 7338 Page 3355 Photo 57 Door Switch: Locations Photo 57 At Driver's Door Striker (Right Similar) Specifications Countershaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 7922 NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on one of the transmitters. (A non-programmed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times with the transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the same transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 7. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on each transmitter. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle) Check that the power door locks cycle after you push each transmitter button, confirming that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 8 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Page 7448 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Page 2056 Page 664 Page 1291 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Page 6228 Installation WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: Coat piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. Pad Spring Location 1. Install the pad spring on the caliper. Grease Caliper Pin & Boot 2. Apply rubber grease to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. 3. Install the pin boots into the groove in the caliper bracket properly. 4. Insert the pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 5. Install the pin boots into the groove in the pins properly. 6. Install the brake pad retainers and brake pads. 7. Align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad. Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front WARNING: Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. DISC RUNOUT Remove Pads Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle and support on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. Front Brake Assembly - Remove the caliper bolt (pin A), and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. Pad And Shim Location - Remove the pad shims, pad retainers and pads. 1. Inspect the disc surface for damage or cracks. Clean the disc thoroughly and remove all rust. Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications DIMENSIONS Camshaft-To-Holder Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 inch) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) End Play: Standard (New): 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) Runout: 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Lobe Height: Intake: Primary: 37.775 mm (1.4827 inch) Mid: 39.725 mm (1.5640 inch) Secondary: 34.481 mm (1.3575 inch) Exhaust: 38.366 mm (1.5105 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Holder Loosening Sequence Tighten Bolt In Sequence To: 8 mm Bolts To 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) 6 mm Bolts To 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 6 mm Bolts Are (11), (12), (13), (14) Page 6826 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8959 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 556 SRS Unit Replacement 4. Pull down the carpeting from both sides of the heater ducts. SRS Unit Replacement 5. Disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector from the SRS unit. NOTE: For disconnecting the spring-loaded lock type connector. 6. Remove the four Torx bolts from the SRS unit, then pull out the SRS unit from the passenger's side. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. - When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement, be careful to turn them in so that their beads rest squarely on the brackets. SRS Unit Replacement 7. Stick the SRS unit cover onto the upper surface of the new SRS unit, and install the new SRS unit. Page 3570 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle and support on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. REMOVAL Front Brake Assembly - Remove the caliper bolt (pin A), and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. Pad And Shim Location - Remove the pad shims, pad retainers and pads. - Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. - Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. INSTALLATION Page 8504 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Page 397 Page 4286 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Photo 46 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 46 Behind Front Grille Page 9964 Master Switch Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the power window master switch, and only controls driver's door window operations. 1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the 14-P and 1-P connectors from the master switch. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Page 6113 WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Pad Spring Location 1. Remove the pad spring from the caliper body. Using Special Tool 2. Remove the piston by rotating the piston counterclockwise with the special tool, and remove the piston boot. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston. Page 2484 Page 8509 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Page 1944 Piston Ring: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Using a ring expander, remove the old piston rings. 2. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly. CAUTION: Do not used wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut ring grooves deeper with cleaning tools. NOTE: ^ Use a squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with blade to fit piston grooves. ^ Top and 2nd ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 inch) wide, and the oil ring groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 inch) wide. ^ File down blade if necessary. ^ If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. 3. Install new rings in the proper sequence and position. NOTE: Do not use old piston rings. Page 3502 Page 8881 Safety Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 698 Right Rear Of Engine Page 8804 Clock Page 4812 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 8518 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 3 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the HONDANET 2000 system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. Procedure 4 Programming the Transmitter Service and Repair Page 3046 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4532 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 7849 Antenna Motor: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the left quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the motor, and remove the connector from its clamp. 3. Check for power to the motor at the connector terminals: ^ There should be battery voltage between the WHT/BLU (+) and BLK (-) terminals all the time. ^ There should be battery voltage between the YEL/WHT (+) and BLK (-) terminals only with the ignition and radio switched ON. Power Antenna Motor Test 4. Test motor operation: EXTEND: Connect battery power to the "A" and "B" terminals, and ground the "C" terminal. RETRACT: Disconnect power from the "B" terminal. Power Antenna Motor Test 5. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace it. Sticking Antenna: Page 1997 Valve Guide: Service and Repair Replacement 1. As illustrated use a commercially available air-impact valve guide driver attachment modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and a conventional hammer. 2. Select the proper replacement guides and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour. 3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer. CAUTION: ^ Do not use a torch; it may warp the head. ^ Do not get the head hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may loosen the valve seats. ^ To avoid burns, use heavy gloves when handling the heated cylinder head. 4. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1 inch) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. CAUTION: ^ Always wear safety goggles or a face shield when driving valve guides. ^ Hold the air hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Specifications Valve Seat: Specifications Seat Width and Installed Height Seat Width and Installed Height Standard (New) Service Limit INTAKE SEAT Seat Width 1.25 - 1.55 mm 2.00 mm Installed Height 46.75 - 47.55 mm 48.80 mm EXHAUST SEAT Seat Width 1.25 - 1.55 mm 2.00 mm Installed Height 46.68 - 47.48 mm 47.73 mm Page 2931 Right Rear Of Engine Page 4643 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4104 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3803 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1680 Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Balancing Hydraulic Assembly Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Hydraulic Assembly Purpose ABS Modulator Unit It adjusts the hydraulic pressure applied to each caliper on the basis of the signals received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit. The modulator unit consists of the following sub-units. - ABS Pump And Motor: Supplies high-pressure brake fluid to control the ABS operation. - Accumulator: Stores high-pressure brake fluid in it. - Pressure Switch: Detects the pressure in the accumulator and transmits signals to the ABS control unit. - Solenoid Valves: Switches the ABS high-pressure passage according to the signals from the ABS control unit. - Pistons And Related Parts: Receives the high-pressure brake fluid, and controls pressure to the calipers accordingly. Function Piston Cut/Proportioning Valve REAR MODULATORS SERVE AS PROPORTIONING VALVE - The modulators for the rear brakes serve as proportioning control valves to prevent the rear wheels from locking if the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) malfunctions or when the ABS is not activated. - When this function is not provided, the hydraulic pressure from the master cylinder and the hydraulic pressure to the rear brake system are equal. - If the fluid pressure is transmitted to the rear brakes at the same rate as the front brakes, the rear wheels will lock first because the rear axle load becomes lighter when the brakes are applied. - To prevent the rear wheels from locking, the proportioning control valve function changes the distribution rate of the fluid pressure to the rear wheels when the pressure in the rear brake system exceeds the given value of the fluid pressure from the master cylinder. - The fluid pressure point where the distribution rate changes is called the turning point. Page 6055 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair System Bleed If the brake fluid is completely drained from the ABS reservoir (air enters the modulator unit) at any time, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. NOTE: This procedure is for bleeding the modulator unit only. It is recommended the complete system be bled whenever any hydraulic connection is opened. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair USING HONDA PGM TESTER The ABS can be bled using the Honda PGM Tester and the ABS Diagnostic Kit to run the ABS pump. Connect the tester and module A (refer to PGM users guide), then follow the tester's prompts. MANUAL BLEEDING 1. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 2. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container. 3. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor. NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 4. Tighten the bleeder when clean fluid starts to flow out, or if fluid level in the reservoir falls below the minimum level marked on the side. NOTE: Take care not to deplete the brake fluid in the reservoir. Refill as necessary. 5. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Flushing CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this article is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). Fluid replacement procedures for the rest of the brake system are incorporated into the brake bleeding procedures for the basic brake hydraulic system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 1. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 2. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 3. Use the steps below to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: Approximately 35 - 45 ml (1 1/6 - 1 1/2 fl.oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. Modulator Unit Location A) Attach a wrench to the maintenance bleeder. Page 5352 3. Connect the appropriate fittings to the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line going to the external filter). Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 4. Connect a shop air hose to the air purge valve. NOTICE The quick connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 5. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 6. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 7. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler, then connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 8. Connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 9. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. 10. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 11. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 12. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 13. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 14. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. TOOL MAINTENANCE Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: *^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters every 20 hours, based on hour meter reading. For more information on filter replacement, see the January 2008 Honda ServiceNews article, Hour Meter Tells You When to Replace ATF Cooler Cleaner Filters.* ^ Fill the tank so the ATF is 4.5 inches from the top of the filler hole; do not overfill. NOTE: If the fluid level is low, the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on and the tank heater will not work. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Page 4564 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Spot Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8981 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5894 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4521 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2394 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8353 6. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Page 8187 General Module: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit - Circuit Diagram Page 6107 other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: Coat piston, piston seal, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. - Clean the piston and caliper bore with brake fluid, and inspect for wear and damage. Piston Boot & Seal Replacement - Coat a new piston seal with rubber grease and install the seal in the cylinder groove. - Apply seal grease to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and install it in the caliper. Piston Replacement CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the caliper cylinder wall. - Lubricate the caliper cylinder and piston with brake fluid, then install the piston in the cylinder with the dished end facing in. - Apply seal grease to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. Page 5062 Page 3968 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2786 Engine Control Module: Connector Views PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 1379 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Ignition Wire Inspection And Test CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the wire. Ignition Wire Inspection And Test 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. Ignition Wire Resistance: 25 K Ohms max. at 68° F (20° C) 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohms, replace the ignition wire. Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 7452 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6239 Brake Fluid Accumulator: Description and Operation Accumulator Exploded View PURPOSE The high-pressure brake fluid discharged from the pump is fed to the solenoids and pistons, but the passages to the solenoids and pistons are normally closed. Consequently, the high-pressure brake fluid accumulates in the accumulator. FUNCTION The accumulator consists of two chambers separated by a free piston; that is, the fluid chamber where the brake fluid is accumulated, and the chamber filled with high-pressure nitrogen gas to maintain the fluid at a given pressure. When the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) operates, the constant high-pressure brake fluid in the accumulator is supplied to the piston. Page 1602 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 2664 3. Remove the water pump by removing five bolts. NOTE: Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the cylinder block. 4. Install the water pump in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ^ Keep the O-ring in position when installing. ^ Clean the spilled engine coolant. Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS Operation The safing sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Page 9323 Cornering Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Cornering Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1377 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3024 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 9505 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1682 Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Inflation of Tires Tire pressure, in cold condition (after vehicle has set for three hours or more, and driven less than one mile) should be checked monthly or before any extended trip. Tire pressure increases approximately 15% when the tires become hot during driving. Tire pressure specification is shown on the label located on the left door lock pillar. NOTE: Check the tire pressure whenever irregular wear is found. Tire inflation greatly affects tire wear. If the alignment check does not reveal any alignment problems, check the condition of the shock absorbers and wheel/tire balance. Tire Replacement TIRE REPLACEMENT When replacement is necessary, the original metric the size should be used. Most metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. It is recommended that new tires be installed in pairs on the same axle. If necessary to replace only one tire, it should be paired with tire having the most tread, to equalize braking traction. CAUTION: Do not mix different types of tires such as radial, bias and bias-belted tires except in emergencies, because vehicle handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control. Tire Dismounting Remove valve cap on valve step and deflate the tire. Then use a tire changing machine to mount or dismount tires. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instruction. Do not use hand tools or tire lever alone to change tires as they may damage the tire beads or wheel rim. Page 7782 Front Seat Belt - Sedan 5. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A) and lower anchor bolt (B), the retractor mounting ET screw (C), the retractor bolt (D), and remove the front seat belt (E) and retractor (F). 6. Remove the front and rear door trim as necessary. 7. Remove the center pillar upper trim. Front Seat Belt - Sedan 8. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A). Page 468 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8236 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 403 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair When a power steering pump or gear has been installed, or an oil line has been disconnected, the air that has entered the system must be bled out before the vehicle is operated. If air is allowed to remain in the power steering fluid system, noisy and unsatisfactory operation of the system may result. When bleeding the system, and any time fluid is added to the power steering system, be sure to use only automatic transmission fluid labeled "DEXRON-IIE". 1. Fill the pump fluid reservoir to the proper label and let the fluid settle for at least two minutes. 2. Start the engine and let it run for a few seconds. Do not turn the steering wheel. Then turn the engine off. 3. Add fluid if necessary. 4. Repeat the above procedure until the fluid level remains constant after running the engine. 5. Raise the front end of the vehicle so that the front wheels are off the ground. 6. Start the engine. Slowly turn the steering wheel right and left, lightly contacting the wheel stops. 7. Add power steering fluid if necessary. 8. Bring down the vehicle, set the steering wheel at the straight forward position after turning it to its full steer positions 2 or 3 times, and stop the engine. 9. Stop the engine. Check the fluid level and refill as required. 10. If the fluid is extremely foamy, allow the vehicle to stand a few minutes and repeat the above procedure. 11. Inspect: a. Belt for tightness. b. Pulley for looseness or damage. The pulley should not wobble with the engine running. c. Hoses so they are not touching any other parts of the vehicle. d. Fluid level and fill to the proper level. Page 2156 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 1037 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9738 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3471 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Thermoswitch "ON" Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................... 196-203°F (91-95°C) Thermoswitch "OFF" Temperature [1] .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-15°F (3-8°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. Page 5257 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 8183 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2216 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. Remove the middle cover (DOHC Prelude) or the upper cover (all other affected models). 4. Use a flashlight to look inside the lower cover at the front balancer shaft oil seal. Look for an oil seal retainer above it bolted to the oil pump housing. ^ If you see an oil seal retainer, go to step 23. ^ If you do not see an oil seal retainer, go to step 5. ^ *If the seal is cocked or backed out, replace the seal. Replace the timing belt and balancer belt if they are contaminated with oil (refer to section 6 of the appropriate service manual). Then go to step 14. This repair requires DSM approval. ^ *If the oil seal has backed out, causing internal engine damage from extended driving with a complete loss of oil, contact your DSM.* 5. Loosen the mounting hardware for the power steering pump and the alternator. Then loosen the adjusting bolts 20 turns (this is for reference during reassembly). 6. Remove the power steering pump belt and the alternator belt. 7. DOHC Prelude only: Remove the power steering reservoir and the power steering pump, and set them aside. Do not disconnect any power steering fluid lines. Page 9751 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6880 Page 861 Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch At Left Rear Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 3559 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3116 Page 4253 Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9191 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 10074 Wiper Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Intermittent Wiper Relay ^ Intermittent wiper relay Page 4488 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3014 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7576 Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2407 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8230 Page 3766 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 2158 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7450 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8551 Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) Reconnect the 14-P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Page 6655 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 8795 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8680 Tailgate Latch: Locations Tailgate Door Lock Key Cylinder Switch Photo 118 Left Side Of Tailgate Photo 120 Right Side Of Tailgate Photo 124 Left Side Of Cargo Area Page 8267 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5924 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Parking Brake Switch Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch Rear Console Page 5495 more than standard, so you need a thrust shim two sizes thinner (try the 2.11 mm (0.0831 inch) thrust shim, and recheck). 10. After adjusting the tapered roller bearing preload, assemble the transmission and install the transmission housing. Torque to 10 x 1.25 mm: 7 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) 8 x 1.25 mm: 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 11. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to seat the tapered roller bearings. Page 6660 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 6610 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 8507 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Page 5498 3. Install the thrust shim or 75 mm shim and the bearing outer race in the transmission housing and the clutch housing using the special tools as shown. NOTE: Install the bearing outer race squarely. - Check that there is no clearance between the bearing outer race, thrust shim or 75 mm shim, and housing. 4. Install the oil seal. Page 8580 Control Unit Input Test 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Disconnect the 18-P and 12-P connectors from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace it. Page 6041 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Connector Locations Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 9480 Switch Test 5. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the 20-P connector of the combination switch harness and body ground with the horn switch pressed. ^ If there is continuity, the horn switch is OK. ^ If there is no continuity, go to step 6. 6. Remove the steering column covers. 7. Disconnect the combination switch harness 4-P connector from the cable reel. Switch Test 8. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the 20-P connector and the No. 3 terminal of the 4-P connector. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the combination switch harness. ^ If there is continuity, go to step 9. Switch Test 9. Carefully remove the cruise control set/resume switch cover by prying between the cover and the switch in the sequence shown. Page 4222 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6420 Alternator: Locations Left Front Of Engine Page 6221 Piston Seal Removal 3. Remove the piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. 4. Install the special tool between the caliper body and spring cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside of the caliper cylinder during caliper disassembly. Special Tool Proper Use 5. Position the locknuts as shown, then turn the shaft until the plate just contacts the caliper body. NOTE: Do not compress the spring under the spring cover. 6. Turn the shaft clockwise 1/4 - 1/2 turn to compress adjusting spring B in the caliper body. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the inner components, do not turn the shaft more than 1/2 turn. Page 4731 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3754 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm - 07MAC-SL00100 Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts, and hang the caliper to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. Page 1909 10. Insert the balancer shafts into the block, then install the retainer to the front balancer shaft and block. 11. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pump mating surface of the block, then install the oil pump on the cylinder block. ^ Apply grease to the lips of the oil seals. ^ Then, install the oil pump while aligning the inner rotor with the crankshaft. When the pump is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft and the balancer shaft, then check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 12. Install the baffle plate, then install the oil screen. Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 4257 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7199 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2491 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2168 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5054 Part 2 Of 2 Page 9081 Specifications Throttle Cable/Linkage: Specifications Cable Deflection 10 - 12 mm Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Testing and Inspection Speedometer Module: Testing and Inspection Speedometer/Trip Meter/Odometer - Troubleshooting NOTE: The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. VSS Input Test (At Harness Side Of 3-P Connector) VSS Test Page 4691 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6152 Honda 1-Piece Speed Mounts P/N KWY-108006000 (for most models), P/N KWY-108007500 (Odysseys, Pilots, and Ridgelines with two-piston calipers) Attaching the Power Drive System 1. Make sure the drive motor assembly on the power drive system is level with the brake disc. 2. Attach the mounting yoke to the brake disc, and secure it with one of the wheel nuts. Torque the wheel nut to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Page 2789 PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12V Page 3305 Page 2567 Page 2173 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation The low oil pressure indicator light works in two ways: it flashes continuously following a momentary loss of pressure, or it goes ON and stays ON with a complete loss of engine oil pressure. When the engine first starts, before its oil pressure rises above 4.3 psi, voltage is applied to the closed and grounded engine oil pressure switch and the light comes ON to test the bulb. With the engine running, voltage is applied at the WHT/BLU wire of the integrated control unit. With normal engine oil pressure, the engine oil pressure switch is open and the low oil pressure indicator light does not come ON. If the engine oil pressure switch closes momentarily (more than 0.5 second) but then opens again, the YEL/RED wire at the integrated control unit will sense ground through the switch. The integrated control unit will then provide and remove ground for the low oil pressure indicator light through the YEL/RED wire. The light will flash ON and OFF until you turn the ignition switch OFF. The flashing feature will not work until 30 seconds after initial voltage is applied to the WHT/BLU wire of the oil pressure indicator flasher circuit. This delay keeps the low oil pressure indicator light from coming ON during engine warm-up. If engine oil pressure falls below 4.3 psi and does not increase, the engine oil pressure switch will stay closed. The low oil pressure indicator light will then come ON and stay ON. Page 2849 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9084 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6385 ABS Component Locations Page 1114 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1163 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 6893 4. Connect the horn connector. 5. Install the driver's airbag assembly with new TORX bolts. 6. Hold the pawl side connector half, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector half in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve is pushed back by the pawl. NOTE: Do not touch the sleeve. Page 3280 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Mechanical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 7249 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8436 Page 9014 ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. Page 3737 Engine Control Module: Connector Views PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 440 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7036 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 1967 No. 4 Piston At Top Dead Center 7. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. No. 2 Piston At Top Dead Center 8. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Page 7019 4. Remove the flange bolt. 5. Lower the rear suspension and remove the rear damper. 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear damper unit on a spring compressor. Page 10011 14. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 15. Install the rear channel and glass, and fit the glass run channel into the rear channel. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Page 577 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3220 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2245 10. Measure the inner diameters of the balancer shaft journal bearings. ^ Bearing Inner Diameter Standard (New): ^ No.1 journals: Front: 42.800-42.820 mm (1.6850- 1.6858 inch) - Rear: 21.000-21.013 mm (0.8268-0.8273 inch) ^ No. 2 journals front and rear: 38.800-38.820 mm (1.5276- 1.6283 inch) ^ No.3 journals front and rear: 34.800-34.820 mm (1.3701-1.3709 inch) - Service Limit: ^ No.1 journals: Front: 42.83 mm (1.686 inch) - Rear: 21.02 mm (0.828 inch) ^ No. 2 journals front and rear: 38.83 mm (1.529 inch) ^ No. 3 journals front and rear: 34.83 mm (1.371 inch) 11. Calculate the shaft-to-bearings oil clearances. BEARING I.D.-JOURNAL 0.D. = 0IL CLEARANCE Page 5496 Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm I.D. TAPERED ROLLER BEARING REPLACEMENT NOTE: - The tapered roller bearing and bearing outer race should be replaced as a set. - Inspect and adjust the tapered roller bearing preload whenever the tapered roller bearing is replaced. - Check the tapered roller bearings for wear and rough rotation. If the tapered roller bearings are OK, removal is not necessary. 1. Remove the tapered roller bearings using a bearing puller and a bearing separator as shown. 2. Install new tapered roller bearings using the special tool as shown. NOTE: Drive the tapered roller bearings on until they bottom against the differential carrier. BEARING OUTER RACE REPLACEMENT NOTE: - The bearing outer race and tapered roller bearing should be replaced as a set. - Inspect and adjust the tapered roller bearing preload whenever the tapered roller bearing is replaced. 1. Remove the oil seals from the transmission housing and clutch housing. Page 9528 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1761 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex Right Rear Of Engine Page 1977 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal 1. Loosen the adjusting screws, then remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: ^ Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. ^ When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts. Page 7799 8-Way Power Seat - 8-way power seat: center cover - Power height adjustable seat: Bracket cover 3. On a driver's seat, disconnect and/or detach the seat belt switch connector and clip (A) and harness clips (B). Front Seat Belt - Sedan 4. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the seat belt buckle (B). NOTE: The power height adjustable seat is shown, the manual seat, and the manual height adjustable seat are similar. Front Seat Belt - Sedan 5. On a driver's seat, remove the seat belt switch harness (A): - Without manual seat: Adjust the seat cushion to its maximum height, and remove the harness. - With manual seat: Remove the seat cushion mounting bolts (B) from the inner seat track (C), then pull the inner seat track down away from the Page 275 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Page 4316 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Diagram Information and Instructions Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Front Wiper Switch Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper Switch Wiper/Washer Switch Test Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7-P and 20-P connectors from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the wiper/washer switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Page 1008 Page 9334 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9814 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 793 Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch At Left Rear Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 8536 Driver's Door Lock Actuator Test 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 2995 Under Center Of Vehicle Page 949 Locations Resonator Control Solenoid: Locations Right Side Of Engine Compartment Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Localized Tread Wear Page 2349 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Tests and General Diagnostics 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the Variable Valve Timing and Valve Lift Electronic Control (VTEC) solenoid valve. 2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground. - Resistance: 14-30 Ohms 3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the Variable Valve Timing and VTEC solenoid valve assembly from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter/O-ring for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil. Page 9595 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5046 Page 9839 Electrical Specifications Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Electrical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 8304 Page 7068 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Page 6615 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 7919 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 3 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the HONDANET 2000 system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. Procedure 4 Programming the Transmitter Page 444 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Locations Page 5189 Park Gear: Adjustments 1. Set the parking brake lever in the P position. 2. Measure the distance between the parking brake pawl shaft and the parking brake lever roller pin as shown. Standard: 64.5-65.5 mm (2.54-2.58 inch.) 3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and install the appropriate parking brake stop from the table below. 4. After replacing the parking brake stop, make sure the distance is within tolerance. Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheels: Customer Interest Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage 2.4 V at 5 in hg 1.9 V at 10 in hg 1.5 V at 15 in hg 1.0 V at 20 in hg 0.5 V at 25 in hg Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Left Side Of Dash Page 1840 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Electrical Specifications Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Electrical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 7076 Part 2 Of 2 Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Page 9530 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1978 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Inspection Clearance Inspection NOTE: Measure both the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker shaft. 1. Measure diameter of shaft at first rocker location. 2. Zero gauge to shaft diameter. 3. Measure inside diameter of rocker arm, and check for out-of-round condition. ^ Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Standard (New): ^ Intake: 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010-0.0026 inch) ^ Exhaust: 0.018-0.054 mm (0.0007-0.0021 inch) - Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Page 8242 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4394 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7973 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Handset Microphone Is Inoperative) (No Audio) (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7784 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt Buckle 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the following part from the front seat: Manual Seat Manual Height Adjustable Seat - Manual seat: center cover - Manual height adjustable seat: center cover Power Height Adjustable Seat Campaign - Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00-073 Date: 010313 Campaign - Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Replacement 00-073 March 13, 2000 Applies To: SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal (Supersedes 00-073, dated October 6, 2000) BACKGROUND The front balancer shaft oil seal may back out of the oil pump housing over time. If this happens, the oil can be rapidly pumped out of the engine without warning, causing serious engine damage if you continue to drive. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Page 3432 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Page 9604 Specifications Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Specifications Torque 7.2 ft.lb Page 3111 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 5511 1998 Rotor Page 6000 ABS Pump Motor: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Low Pressure ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 25 MPa (3,600 psi) High Pressure .................................................. ....................................................................................................................................... 34 MPa (5,000 psi) Page 2886 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 3733 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Diagram Information and Instructions Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1525 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair FLUID CHANGE 1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the car. Park the vehicle on level ground, turn the engine off, and then remove the drain plug. 2. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer, then refill the transmission with the recommended fluid to the upper mark on the dipstick. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.4 l (2.5 US qt.) at changing - 6.0 l (6.3 US qt.) at overhaul NOTE: Always use Genuine Honda Premium Formula Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shim quality. Page 3933 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Blower Motor Resistor: Locations Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Page 2754 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 3815 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator - Component Location Index Page 4327 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2814 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Ex-R Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex-R Right Rear Of Engine Page 6097 Caliper Exploded View Page 3926 Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Resistance 25 K ohms Note: Resistance at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Page 3297 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8757 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7790 Center Seat Belts - Coupe 6. Remove the retractor mounting screw (A) and the retractor bolt (B). Remove the center belt (C) and retractor (D). Center Seat Belts - Coupe 7. Remove the protector (A). Center Anchor Bolt - Coupe Page 8706 5. With voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective. 6. Disconnect ground from the C terminal. The actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly is defective. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground from the A terminal. The actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly is defective. 8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure to use new O-rings on each solenoid. 9. Disconnect power and ground from the 4-P connector. Disconnect the vent hose from the actuator. Connect a vacuum pump to the actuator vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve is stuck open. Replace the actuator. Page 1929 Piston: Service and Repair Installation NOTE: Before installing the pistons, apply a coat of engine oil to the ring grooves and cylinder bores. 1. If the crankshaft is already installed: ^ Set the crankshaft to Bottom Dead Center (BDC) for each cylinder. ^ Remove the connecting rod caps, and slip short sections of rubber hose over the threaded ends of the connecting rod bolts. ^ Install the ring compressor, check that the bearing is securely in place, then position the piston in the cylinder and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer. ^ Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place. ^ Install the rod caps with bearings, and torque the nuts to 46 Nm (34 ft. lbs.) 2. If the crankshaft is not installed: ^ Remove the rod caps and bearings, install the ring compressor, then position the piston in the cylinder and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer. ^ Position all pistons at top dead center. NOTE: Maintain downward force on the ring compressor to prevent rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. Photo View Oxygen Sensor: Locations Photo View Photo 12 Front Of Engine Photo 132 Page 9279 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7845 Antenna Mast Replacement Installation: 1. Carefully direct the teeth of the antenna mast drive cable as shown, then insert the new drive cable into the antenna housing. 2. Check for engagement of the cable teeth to the drive gear by carefully moving the cable up and down. 3. Clean the antenna mast threads. 4. Turn the radio switch OFF, and let the motor pull the drive cable inside the antenna housing. 5. Install the bushing and spacer. Antenna Mast Replacement 6. Tighten the antenna nut. 2.3 N-m (0.23 Kgf.m 1.7 lbf.ft) NOTE: There are two types of antenna nuts - those with an O-ring (new type) and those without an O-ring (old type) - which require different spacers. To prevent a leak, make sure that there is no antenna collar seal in the antenna collar when using a nut with an O-ring. If necessary, remove the seal. - there is an antenna collar seal in the antenna collar when using a nut without an O-ring. If necessary, install a seal. - the spacer matches the type of antenna nut. 7. Check that the antenna mast extends and retracts fully when the radio switch is turned ON and OFF repeatedly. If you overtighten the nut, the antenna may stick. If sticking occurs, back the nut off a little, then raise and lower the antenna again. Repeat until the antenna moves freely. Page 681 Wheel Sensor: Testing and Inspection TESTING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Front Wheel Sensor Rear Wheel Sensor - Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. - Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the pulser all the way around while rotating the hub bearing unit by hand. Specs: Standard Gap 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 in), the probability is a distorted knuckle which should be replaced. Page 9687 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 101 ABS Control Unit: Description and Operation Diagnosis Function ABS Indicator Light ABNORMALITY DETECTION The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit turns the ABS indicator light on when one or more of the following abnormalities are detected. This is only a partial list. When the operating time of the motor in the power unit exceeds the specified period. - When vehicle running time exceeds 30 seconds without releasing the parking brake. - When absence of speed signals from any of the four wheel sensor is detected. - When the activation time of all solenoids exceeds a given time, or an open circuit is detected in the solenoid system. - When solenoid output is not detected in the simulated ABS operation when the engine is started or the vehicle is driven. BULB CHECK To check the indicator light bulb, the light is activated when the ignition switch is first turned on. The light goes off after the engine is started if there is no abnormality in the system. Fail Safe FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended by turning off the two fail-safe relays. This disconnects the ground circuits of all the solenoid valves to prevent ABS operation.Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one. RELAY The fail-safe relay's terminal side contact is normally open. When there is continuity at the relay coil, the fail-safe relay is closed, thereby connecting the ground circuit to the solenoid valve. Pump Motor Control The ABS control unit monitors the brake fluid pressure in the accumulator by the pressure switch ON/OFF signals. The ABS control unit turns the pump on when the pressure in the accumulator drops, and stops the pump when the pressure rises to the specified value. If the pressure does not reach the specified value after the motor has operated continuously for a specified period, the ABS control unit stops the motor and activates the ABS indicator light. Self-Diagnosis PURPOSE The self-diagnosis function, provided in the sub function of the Anti-Lock Brake Sysytem (ABS) control unit, monitors the main system functions by constantly transmitting the data between the two Central Processing Units (CPU). FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected, the ABS control unit turns the ABS indicator light on and stops the ABS, although the basic brake system continues to operate normally. When the ABS control unit detects an abnormality with the ABS and turns the ABS indicator light on, the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), which shows the problem part or unit, is recorded in the control unit. The DTC can be read by the blinking frequency of the ABS indicator light. Page 5749 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 1222 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 8237 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 873 Page 9457 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8964 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Left Rear Of Engine Compartment MIL Does Not Come ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Does Not Come ON NOTE: If this symptom is intermittent, check for a loose fuse No. 1 (BACK UP LIGHTS, METER LIGHTS, 10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box, a poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A18, or an intermittent open in the LT GRN/RED wire between the ECM/PCM (A181 and the gauge assembly. Page 2620 Diagram Information and Instructions Radio/Stereo: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 836 Lamp Out Sensor: Testing and Inspection Brake Light Failure Sensor Test 1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the brake pedal is pressed. ^ If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. ^ If one of the brake lights does not come on, check whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to step 2. ^ If none of the brake lights come on, check the brake light circuit. 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the side box. 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on, when the No. 1 terminal of the 6-P connector is grounded and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire between the safety indicator and the No. 1 terminal of the failure sensor, and whether the safety indicator circuit (printed circuit board) has a problem. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on and stay on, go to step 4. 4. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II) with the No. 2 terminal of the 6-P connector grounded and the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, replace the failure sensor. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP does not stay on, check for an open in the BLK wire between the No. 2 terminal of the failure sensor and ground, and check for a poor ground at G551. Page 433 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5147 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 2330 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4782 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug gap ^ Plug heat range too high ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element ^ Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires Spark Plug Inspection Page 1599 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9685 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9616 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4697 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Photo 82 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 5365 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9321 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 10053 Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair Washer Motor Replacement 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Disconnect the hose and the 2-P connector from the washer motor. Washer Motor Replacement 3. Remove the washer motor from the washer reservoir. Page 7828 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3417 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 9673 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 808 Page 1850 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 56 Keyless Entry Module: Programming and Relearning Keyless Transmitter Codes Input Procedure Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Page 1191 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 4873 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Diagram Information and Instructions Condenser Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Photo 82 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 2511 Radiator Fan: Testing and Inspection Fan Motor Test Fan Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 2-P connectors from each fan motor. 2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the B terminal, and ground to the A terminal. 3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace it. Mechanical Specifications Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Mechanical Specifications Modulator Bracket Bolts ...................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 21 Nm (15 lb.ft.) Page 1036 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5421 Valve Body: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Body NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - . Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. Page 7732 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before disconnecting any part of the SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - During installation or replacement, do not bump (impact wrench, hammer etc.) the area near the SRS unit. - Do not damage the SRS unit terminals or connectors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit; it has no serviceable parts. - Store the SRS unit in a clean, dry area. - Do not use any SRS unit which has been subjected to water damage or shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. SRS Unit Replacement Driver's Airbag: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. SRS Unit Replacement Front Passenger's Side: Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Locations Page 8298 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3889 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7891 Page 9495 Page 7696 Page 6703 14. Once the tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 15. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 16. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 17. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 18. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 19. Use the ball joint remover, 32 mm, as shown on step 10 to separate the lower ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. Page 2872 Page 3442 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 6478 Fuses - Under-hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Page 9857 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3083 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Fan Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8761 Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 2600 Radiator: Testing and Inspection 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the top of the filler neck. 2. Attach the pressure tester to the radiator and apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (14-18 psi). 3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure. 4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap. NOTE: Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in engine oil. Page 1673 Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Radial Tire Lead/Pull "Lead/Pull" is vehicle deviation from a straight path, on a level road with no pressure on the steering wheel. Lead is usually caused by: 1. Poorly manufactured radial tires. 2. Uneven brake adjustment. 3. Wheel alignment. The way in which a tire is built can produce lead in a car. An example of this is placement of the belt. Off-center belts on radial tires can cause the tire to develop a side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. The "Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction" chart should be used to make sure that front wheel alignment is not mistaken for tire lead. Rear tires will not cause lead/pull. Radial Tire Waddle Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine Page 7295 Page 5468 3. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 4. Install the release fork boot; make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 5. Move the release fork right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing, and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Page 10045 Switch Removal 2. Remove the steering column covers. Switch Removal 3. Disconnect the connector from the wiper/washer switch, then remove the two screws and the switch. Page 6959 NOTE: - Wipe off the oil, dirt or grease on the threads before tightening the fasteners. - Make sure the toe adjuster cams on lower arm A are installed in the same direction. - The right and left lower arm A are symmetrical. Install so the paint mark of "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) R UP (Arrow pointing upward)" and "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) L UP (Arrow pointing upward)" point to the front. - "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) L UP (Arrow pointing upward)" is stamped on the lent lower arm B and "SV4 (Arrow pointing upward) R UP (Arrow pointing upward)" on the right lower arm B. - The left upper arm is stamped with "AL" while the right upper arm is stamped with "AR". - After installing the suspension arm, check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 4232 1. Check the pipe contact area for dirt and damage, and clean if necessary. 2. Insert a new retainer into the connector if the retainer is damaged, or after - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel feed pipe. - removing the retainer from the pipe. 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly, remove the old retainer from the 4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the pipe, and align the retainer locking pawls with the connector grooves. Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the pipe until both retainer pawls lock with a clicking sound. NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the pipe end. Page 3075 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6799 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression [1] Nominal ............................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 1,230 KPa (178 psi) Minimum .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 930 KPa (135 psi) Maximum Variation .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 200 KPa (28 psi) [1] 200 rpm and wide open throttle Page 3646 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4963 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the shift lock solenoid 3-P connector from the main wire harness. NOTE: Do not connect power to the B (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 2. Connect battery power to the A terminal and ground to the 8 terminal momentarily. Check the solenoid. If it does not work, replace it. NOTE: ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (O.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. ^ If it is not, adjust the position of the shift lock solenoid. Page 4796 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the shift lock solenoid 3-P connector from the main wire harness. NOTE: Do not connect power to the B (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 2. Connect battery power to the A terminal and ground to the 8 terminal momentarily. Check the solenoid. If it does not work, replace it. NOTE: ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (O.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. ^ If it is not, adjust the position of the shift lock solenoid. Front Wiper Switch Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper Switch Wiper/Washer Switch Test Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7-P and 20-P connectors from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the wiper/washer switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Page 5434 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Replace the servo body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Replace ATF strainer if its inlet opening is clogged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. Throttle Valve Body Page 6158 ^ Use the aligning bar tool to ensure that the lathe moves square to the center of the brake disc. The disc should turn toward the cutting bits. ^ Use "Kwik-Way" cutting bits (P/N KW109-1092-23, H/C 5418866) and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped "K W." They can be purchased from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures, or by contacting a Kwik-Way distributor. The Kwik-Way P/N is 109-1092-23. ^ Before using the lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure they are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. ^ Do not set the cutting depth on the lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) This is two divisions on the cutting knob. ^ To refinish, the transmission must be in first gear (D3 or D4, if the shift selector doesn't have a first gear position; second gear on Preludes with ATTS), with the engine at idle (not fast idle). If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Rear Brake Discs Refinish rear brake discs off the car with conventional disc refinishing equipment. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION [NEW] None; information only. Page 190 Page 1308 Alignment: Specifications Front Rear Camber 0 +/- 1.0 deg -0.25 +/- 0.30 deg Caster 3.00 +/- 1.0 deg --Toe 0 +/- 2 mm 2 +/- 2 mm Note: Toe In Page 9316 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1942 Piston Ring: Testing and Inspection End Gap 1. Using a piston, push a new ring into the cylinder bore 15-20 mm (0.6-0.8 inch) from the bottom. 2. Measure the piston ring end-gap with a feeler gauge: ^ If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine. ^ If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits. If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder block must be rebored. ^ Piston Ring End-Gap: Top Ring ^ Standard (New): 0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) - Second Ring ^ Standard (New): 0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) - Oil Ring ^ Standard (New): 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 inch) ^ Service Limit: 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Page 4888 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 4646 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Nuts ........................................................................................................................... .................................................... 108 Nm. (80 lb. ft.) Page 9315 Page 9499 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5929 Page 6464 Diode: Locations In-Line Diode B Right Rear Of Roof Page 273 Page 5819 Mainshaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Locations Impact Sensor: Locations SRS Operation The impact sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Page 9675 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Locations Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 1508 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 1718 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Page 660 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Brake Fluid Level Switch Test 1. Remove the reservoir cap. Check that the float moves up and down freely; if it doesn't, replace the reservoir cap assembly. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 7926 Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. One battery per transmitter is needed. Page 3680 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Page 9681 Page 4107 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6281 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Removal and Installation WARNING: - The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. CAUTION: - When removing the modulator unit or after removing it, be careful not to turn it upside down or lean it excessively. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. REMOVAL Modulator Remove & Install - Relieve ABS system pressure. See: Relieving System Pressure - Disconnect the modulator unit 14P connector and pump motor 2P connector. - Remove the wire harness clip from the modulator bracket. - Remove the three 8 mm nuts, and remove the modulator unit from the bracket. INSTALLATION Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Brake Booster Nuts ............................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 13 Nm (9 lb.ft.) Master Cylinder Nut ......................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Pushrod Adjustment ................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in) Pushrod Locknut .................................... .................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Star Locknut ................................................................................................................... ............................................................................ 22 Nm (16 lb.ft.) Page 5967 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 3900 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9856 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8004 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1601 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 7885 Keyless Entry Module: Programming and Relearning Keyless Transmitter Codes Input Procedure Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Page 6757 NOTE: - Clean the disassembled parts with a solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in a solvent. - Always replace the O-rings and rubber seals with new ones before assembly. - Apply recommended power steering fluid to the parts indicated in the assembly procedures. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the power steering system. - Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts are worn or damaged. PUMP ROTOR INSTALLATION 1. Coat the lip of the new oil seal with steering grease. 2. Install the new oil seal in the pump housing by hand, then install the pump seal spacer. NOTE: Insert the oil seal with its grooved side facing in. 3. Install the pump drive shaft assembly with the special tool. 4. Install the 38 mm circlip with its tapered side facing out. 5. Coat the side plate grooves with the recommended power steering fluid, then position the 16.8 x 1.9 mm and 54 x 1.9 mm O-rings on the side plate. Page 7574 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8912 Page 7558 Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection A/C Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 3090 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 1 through the YEL wire to the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts or more to the ORN wire. The VSS intermittently grounds the ORN wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Locations Illustrated Index Page 6529 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 9784 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2501 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Fan Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4952 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Top Of Transmission Page 5164 A/T Gear Position Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 931 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Page 9432 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 576 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Testing and Inspection Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch Test 1. If one of the brake lights does not go on, check the bulb in the taillight or the high mount brake light. 2. If none of the brake lights go on, check the No. 30 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Brake Switch Test 3. If the fuse and bulbs are OK, disconnect the 2-P or 4-P connector from the brake switch. Brake Switch Test 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity, adjust the pedal height, and recheck. ^ If there is still no continuity, replace the switch. ^ If there is continuity, but the brake lights do not go on, check for: - poor ground (G551, G552) - an open in the WHT/YEL or GRN/WHT wire - faulty brake light failure sensor Page 5797 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Electrical Diagrams Page 3066 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Torque 13 ft.lb Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8999 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Service Precautions WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from the work area. Drain fuel only into an approved container. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2700 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4658 Page 8738 Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 5. Check for continuity between the terminals of the 20-P connector in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. ^ If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the steering column covers. 7. Disconnect the combination switch harness 4-P connector from the cable reel. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 8. Check for continuity between the terminals as shown: ^ If there is no continuity, replace the combination switch harness. ^ If there is continuity, go to step 9. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 9. Carefully remove the set/resume switch cover by prying between the cover and the switch in the sequence shown. Specifications Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Upper Self Locking Nut ........................................................................................................................ ................................................ 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Upper Flange Nuts ................................................ ................................................................................................................................ 38 Nm (28 ft. lbs.) Lower Flange Bolt (Rear Only) ............................................................................................................................................................ 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Page 4321 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3801 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9220 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4291 Page 2647 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT sending unit. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 2. With the engine cold, use an ohmmeter to measure resistance between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). 3. Check the temperature of the coolant. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - ECT Sending Unit Test 4. Run the engine, and measure the change in resistance with the engine at operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 5. If the obtained readings are substantially different from the specifications above, replace the sending unit. Page 7436 Page 1387 Distributor Overhaul Page 4077 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3856 Page 5207 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1644 ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. Page 2523 Radiator Fan Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Test Relays - Test There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the B and D terminals, and there should be no continuity when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Radiator fan relay Page 7013 6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Lower the rear suspension, and position the rear damper with the welded nut pointed toward the front of the vehicle. 2. Loosely install the two flange nuts. (The illustration shows rear damper for Sedan.) 3. Loosely install the flange bolt. Page 3802 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1321 a. If adjustment is required, go to step 2. b. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. 2. Hold the adjusting bolt on the rear lower arm B and loosen the self-locking nut. 3. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until toe is correct. 4. Install the self-locking nut and tighten while holding the adjusting bolt. Page 7443 Page 5726 1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B. and C. - Standard: A (Ball bearing surface): 27.987 - 28.000 mm (1.1018- 1.1024 inch) B (Needle bearing surface): 37.984 - 38.000 mm (1.4954- 1.4961 inch) C (Ball bearing surface): 27.977 - 27.990 mm (1.1015- 1.1020 inch) - Service Limit: A: 27.940 mm (1.1000 inch) B: 37.930 mm (1.4933 inch) C: 27.940 mm (1.1000 inch) NOTE: If any part of the mainshaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one. 2. Inspect for runout. - Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 inch) max. - Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) NOTE: Support the mainshaft at both ends as shown. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the mainshaft with a new one. MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY REASSEMBLE 1. Support 2nd gear on steel blocks, then install the 3rd/4th synchro hub using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: After installing, check the operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set. Page 3211 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 6052 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Removal and Installation WARNING: - The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. CAUTION: - When removing the modulator unit or after removing it, be careful not to turn it upside down or lean it excessively. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. REMOVAL Modulator Remove & Install - Relieve ABS system pressure. See: Relieving System Pressure - Disconnect the modulator unit 14P connector and pump motor 2P connector. - Remove the wire harness clip from the modulator bracket. - Remove the three 8 mm nuts, and remove the modulator unit from the bracket. INSTALLATION Page 5148 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 883 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 412 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9566 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams License, Parking, Side Marker Lights And Taillights (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2404 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2487 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6557 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 104 Description, Signal & Terminal Name Page 6425 Alternator: Testing and Inspection Alternator Brush Inspection ALTERNATOR BRUSH INSPECTION Alternator Brush Inspection 1. Remove the end cover, then take out the brush holder by removing its two screws. 2. Measure the length of the brushes with a vernier caliper. Alternator Brush Length: Standard: 10.5 mm (0.41 in) Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in) If the brushes are less than the service limit, replace the alternator brush assembly. RECTIFIER TEST Page 1032 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 9504 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5428 Valve Body: Service and Repair Repair NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their bores. You may use this procedure to free the valves in the valve bodies. 1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for about 30 minutes. 2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve drops out of its bore. CAUTION: It may be necessary to use a small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver. 3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and dry it with compressed air. 4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked #600 paper and insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper as you push it in and out. CAUTION: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't require much polishing to remove any burrs. 5. Remove the #600 paper. Thoroughly wash the entire valve body in solvent, then dry with compressed air. 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It should drop to the bottom of the bore under its own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body. 7. Remove the valve and thoroughly clean it and the valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a lubricant. Page 3745 Page 2463 Coolant: Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT REFILLING AND BLEEDING CAUTION: When pouring engine coolant, be sure to shut the relay box lid and not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the paint. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 1. Set the heater temperature lever or control dial to maximum heat. 2. When the radiator is cool, remove the radiator cap. - Loosen the drain plug, and drain the coolant. 3. Remove the drain bolt from the rear side of the cylinder block to drain the block. 4. Apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 5. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. 6. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank halfway to the MAX mark with water, then up to the MAX mark with antifreeze. 7. Mix the recommended antifreeze with an equal amount of water in a clean container. NOTE: - For best corrosion protection, the coolant concentration must be maintained year-round at 50% minimum. Coolant concentrations less than 50% may not provide sufficient protection against corrosion or freezing. - Coolant concentrations greater than 60% will impair cooling efficiency and are not recommended. CAUTION: - Do not mix different brands of antifreeze/ coolants. - Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products; they may not be compatible with the genuine coolant. - Engine Coolant Refill Capacity: including reservoir (0.6 [0.6 qt.]). M/T: 5.4 (5.7 qt.) - A/T: 5.3 (5.6 qt.) 8. Loosen the air bleed bolt in the thermostat housing, then fill the radiator to the bottom of the filler neck with the coolant mixture. Tighten the bleed bolt as soon as coolant starts to run out in a steady stream without bubbles. 9. With the radiator cap off, start the engine and let it run until warmed up (radiator fan comes on at least twice). Then, if necessary, add more coolant mix to bring the level back up to the bottom of the filler neck. 10. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks. Page 7890 Page 5427 Valve Body: Service and Repair Valve Cap Installation - Caps with one projected tip and one flat end are installed with the flat end toward the inside of the valve body. - Caps with a projected tip on each end are installed with the smaller tip toward the inside of the valve body. The small tip is a spring guide. - Caps with one projected tip and hollow end are installed with the tip toward the inside of the valve body. The tip is a spring guide. - Caps with hollow ends are installed with the hollow end away from the inside of the valve body. - Caps with notched ends are installed with the notch toward the inside of the valve body. - Caps with flat ends and a hole through the center are installed with the smaller hole toward the inside of the valve body. Page 947 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 2901 Page 7946 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8337 Coupe: Check the guide pin for damage, and replace it if necessary. NOTE: Scribe a line around the guide pin to show the original location. 7. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. Page 3952 Page 8682 4. If necessary, remove the three screws and pull the latch out of the tailgate, then disconnect the connectors and rods from the latch. Page 1156 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6857 15. Assemble a 12 x 1.25 mm flange nut onto a 12 x 175 mm grade 10 flange bolt as shown. NOTE: Wrap the flange portion of the bolt with vinyl tape to protect the cylinder. 16. Install the flange bolt into the end of the steering rack until it bottoms in the hole, then back the flange bolt out 1/4 turn. Hold the flange bolt and tighten the flange nut against the rack by hand. 17. Press the cylinder end seal and steering rack out of the gearbox housing. NOTE: Hold the steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed clear. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder with the flange bolt. 18. Remove the 12 mm bolt and nut from the steering rack. 19. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering rack. Page 3088 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1467 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Page 5441 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 2. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it. 3. Measure the clutch disc thickness. - Standard (New): 8.4 - 9.0 mm (0.33 - 0.35 inch) - Service Limit: 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) NOTE: If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8371 4. Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way, and disconnect the inner handle rod and power window connector. 5. Remove the armrest pocket. 6. Release the clips that hold the door panel. Remove the door panel by pulling it upward. Page 8 C540 (18-GRY) Seats - Manual Seats Hard to Adjust Technical Service Bulletin # 97-016 Date: 970428 Seats - Manual Seats Hard to Adjust 97-016 April 28, 1997 Applies To: 1994-97 Accord - ALL Manually Adjustable Seats Hard to Release SYMPTOM The seat track release lever on a manually adjustable driver's or passenger's seat is hard to operate. PROBABLE CAUSE The inner seat track is not in alignment with the outer seat track. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the seat tracks first. If the symptom does not improve, then realign the inner seat track to the outer seat track with shims. PARTS INFORMATION Washer-bolt, 10 x 25 mm: P/N 93405-10025-08, H/C 2811651 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 81270-SV1-A02 H/C 4363370 Defect code: 030 Contention code: B99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Adjusting the Seat Tracks 1. Remove the three seat track end covers, then loosen the four seat track mounting bolts. 2. Move the seat to the rearmost position on both track rails. Page 6963 Page 4173 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral until the radiator fan comes ON, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer to the test tachometer connector. Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm with shift lever in neutral position (A/T: [N] or [P] position) an electrical systems turned OFF. 3. Adjust the idle speed if necessary. Page 1334 Page 8432 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 167 Page 2756 DTC P1586 thru P1678 A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 4734 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B1 ENGINE Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B2 ENGINE NOTE: ^ Perform an input test for the Ignition Control Module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. ^ The tachometer should operate normally if the ICM is OK. 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor, and the leak cover. 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the ignition switch and the ICM. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check: - ignition coil. - GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire between the ICM and ignition coil. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the 32-P connector from the ECM/PCM, and check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ICM and ECM/PCM. There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. Page 4359 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Specifications Mounting Nuts And Bolts ..................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (107 in. lbs.) Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair NOTE: Loosen the battery set bolt, and move the battery set plate before removing the ACL housing cover. Page 463 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3002 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Service Tips Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Service Tips NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original locations. ^ Inspect rocker shafts arms. ^ Rocker arms must be installed in the same position if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ When reassembling, fit the projection on the intake rocker shaft to the notch in the camshaft holder. Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply lubricant to any contact parts. Page 5452 4. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 5. Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. See: Service and Repair Page 1421 No. 4 Piston At Top Dead Center 7. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. No. 2 Piston At Top Dead Center 8. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Page 5223 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in Fuel and Emissions. Page 4221 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Testing and Inspection Map Light: Testing and Inspection 1. Pry off the lens. 2. Remove the two mounting screws. Spotlights Test 3. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the housing. Spotlights Test 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 9261 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Photo 109 Electronic Noise Suppressor: Locations Photo 109 Left Side Of Rear Shelf Page 3692 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 2398 Page 4561 Page 4417 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2568 Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications R-134a Capacity 650 g (-50g) 23 oz (-2oz) Page 5938 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Electrical Diagrams Page 1054 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Page 1368 Page 6884 Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Deployed Air Bag Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. Driver Airbag Assembly After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain a powdery residue. This powder consists primarily of cornstarch (used to lubricate the bag as it inflates) and by products of the chemical reaction. Sodium hydroxide dust (similar to lye soap) is produced as a by product of the deployment reaction. The sodium hydroxide then quickly reacts with atmospheric moisture and is converted to sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate (baking soda). Therefore, it is unlikely that sodium hydroxide will be present after deployment. Passenger Airbag Assembly The passenger inflator requires no special precaution after deployment. 95% of the particulate emission are potassium chloride (KCL), which is commonly sold as an edible salt-substitutes. even if water is applied. Post deployment products are relatively pH neutral. Disposing the inflator by burying it in a landfill will not products any hazardous products. As with any dusty environment, safety goggles, dust mask and gloves should be worn. Page 895 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 2961 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 3122 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2375 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator - Component Location Index Page 9186 Page 8443 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4614 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 847 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect the backup light switch connectors. 2. Remove the backup light switch. 3. Install the new washer and backup light switch. 4. Connect the backup light switch connectors. Page 2898 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5610 Page 5789 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 389 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Page 1788 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1253: A problem in the Variable Valve Timing and Valve Lift Electronic Control (VTEC) Solenoid Valve circuit. Page 1307 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Page 8564 In warranty: American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under these conditions: ^ It is done during PDI ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading) Operation number: 812355 Flat rate time: 1.0 hour Failed P/N: PDI-PAINT, H/C 3173994 *Defect code: 08103 Symptom code 08811* Skill level: Repair Technician *NOTE: When submitting the claim, make sure you enter the vehicle's date of receipt in the customer contention comment section. The claim will be rejected without this information.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Wash and dry the vehicle out of direct sunlight. 2. Tear off a piece of clay. Shape the piece with your hands into a flat disk about 3 inches in diameter. 3. Spray a 2-to 3-square-foot area of the affected panel with the manufacturer's lubricant. 4. Clean a 1-square-foot section of the sprayed area by rubbing it with the clay. Page 1111 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 586 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3060 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 381 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Page 1060 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 4523 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 542 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B1 ENGINE Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B2 ENGINE NOTE: ^ Perform an input test for the Ignition Control Module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. ^ The tachometer should operate normally if the ICM is OK. 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor, and the leak cover. 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the ignition switch and the ICM. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check: - ignition coil. - GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire between the ICM and ignition coil. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the 32-P connector from the ECM/PCM, and check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ICM and ECM/PCM. There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. Page 7061 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Page 2933 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Page 9219 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7702 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8272 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 7783 Upper Anchor Bolt - Sedan Lower Anchor Bolt - Sedan Retractor Bolt - Sedan 9. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - If the threads on the retractor mounting ET screw are worn out, use an oversized ET screw made specifically for this application. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. Page 5016 Clutch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases the friction discs and steel plates, and they are free to slide past each. This allows the gear to spin independently on its shaft, transmitting no power. 1st CLUTCH The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the center of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft. 1st-HOLD CLUTCH The 1st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1st-hold or 1 position, and is located at the end of the countershaft, just behind the torque converter housing. The 1st-hold clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the countershaft. 2nd CLUTCH The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the center of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit. 3rd CLUTCH The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the center of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit connected to the regulator valve body. 4th CLUTCH The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the center of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft. ONE-WAY CLUTCH The one-way clutch is positioned between the countershaft 1st gear and 3rd gear, with the 3rd gear splined to the countershaft. The 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 3rd gear provides the inner race surface. The one-way clutch locks up when power is transmitted from the mainshaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear ranges in the D4, D3 or 2 position. However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th clutches/gears are applied in the D4, D3 or 2 position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the countershaft overrides the locking "speed range" of the one-way clutch. Thereafter, the one-way clutch free-wheels with the 1st clutch still engaged. Locations Purge Flow Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 9385 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7729 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test Key Interlock Solenoid Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 8794 Page 2153 Page 3861 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3993 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3160 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Mechanical Specifications Condenser HVAC: Mechanical Specifications DISCHARGE HOSE TO CONDENSER 6 X 1.0 mm bolt torque ........................................................................................................................ ............................................ 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb ft) CONDENSER PIPE TO CONDENSER 6 X 1.0 mm bolt torque ........................................................................................................................ ............................................ 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb ft) Page 4602 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1589 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3108 Page 82 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Testing and Inspection Rear Defogger Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the rear window defogger switch from the instrument panel. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 6705 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Installation 1. Install the steering knuckle on the driveshaft outboard joint. 2. Install the steering knuckle on the tie-rod end, upper arm and lower arm, then tighten the castle nuts and install the new cotter pins. CAUTION: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. 3. Install the steering knuckle protector with the 6 mm bolt. 4. Install the wheel sensor with the sensor mounting bolts (for cars with ABS). 5. Install the wheel sensor wire bracket with the two flange bolts (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Be careful when installing the sensors to avoid twisting wires. 6. Install the caliper with the caliper bracket mounting bolts. Page 8933 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Photo 59 Power Door Lock Control Module: Locations Photo 59 Front Of Driver's Door Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 9497 Page 51 C540 (18-GRY) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Relay Box: Locations Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator: Testing and Inspection Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment With A/C Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (With A/C) Deflection Method: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection: 8 - 10.5 mm (0.32 - 0.41 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 5 - 7 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the belt deflection. Page 7383 Page 762 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1214 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 2870 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9787 Page 8891 Fuel Gauge: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge - Gauge Test 1. Check the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Remove the access panel from the floor. 3. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. 4. Connect the voltmeter positive probe to the YEL/BLU terminal and the negative probe to the BLK terminal, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V. ^ If the voltage is as specified, go to step 5. ^ If the voltage is not as specified, check for: - an open in the YEL/BLU or BLK wire. - poor ground (G751). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Attach a jumper wire between the YEL/BLU and BLK terminals, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the "F" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge. NOTE: The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, hence the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type. ^ If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at all, replace the gauge. ^ If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. Page 2586 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity (approx) 5.0 oz (US) Page 807 Page 8459 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 2007 Valve Spring: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: Identify valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket and plastic mallet, lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers before installing the valve spring compressor. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keepers. 3. Install the tool as shown. Page 1293 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 4062 Top Left Side Of Engine Page 3226 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2480 Page 5930 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5255 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 6854 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Overhaul Disassembly TOOL REQUIRED - 07NAD-SR3020A Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment - 07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar CAUTION: - Before disassembling the gearbox, wash it off with solvent and a brush. - Do not dip seals and O-rings in solvent. 1. Remove the steering gearbox. 2. Remove the air tube and clips. 3. Remove the tie-rod end and locknut. 4. Remove the boot bands and tie rod clips. Pull the boots away from the ends of the gearbox. 5. Unbend the lock washer. Page 1913 ^ Torque to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Page 6661 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 2053 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9487 Page 5721 h. Attach the mainshaft holder to the mainshaft as follows: NOTE: Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt and loosen the two hex bolts. - Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is towards the transmission. - Align the mainshaft holder's lip around the groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines, then tighten the hex bolts. i. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping its end with a plastic hammer. j. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base. k. Zero a dial gauge on the end of the mainshaft. l. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt clockwise; stop turning when the dial gauge has reached its maximum movement. The reading on the dial gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play. CAUTION: Turning the mainshaft holder bolt more than 60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge stops moving may damage the transmission. m. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance is correct. If the reading is not within the standard, recheck the shim thickness. Standard: 0.10 - 0.16 mm (0.004 - 0.006 inch) Page 2396 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Specifications Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Thermoswitch "ON" Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................... 196-203°F (91-95°C) Thermoswitch "OFF" Temperature [1] .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-15°F (3-8°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. ABS Fail-Safe Relay Fail Safe Relay: Locations ABS Fail-Safe Relay Front Behind Right Side Of Dash Rear Page 9394 Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Without Moonroof 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the four screws and the housing. Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 4. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the housing. Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 6051 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Relieving System Pressure CAUTION: - Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely before performing the modulator function check, disposing the modulator unit, and ABS pump motor replacement. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Do not reuse the drained brake fluid. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. Modulator Unit Location 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Page 2307 4. Install the timing belt tightly in the sequence shown. (1) Timing belt drive pulley (crankshaft) -> (2) Adjusting pulley -> (3) Water pump pulley -> (4) Camshaft pulley. NOTE: Make sure the timing belt drive pulley and camshaft pulley are at TDC. 5. Loosen and retighten the adjusting nut to tension the timing belt. 6. Install the timing balancer belt drive pulley and lower cover. 7. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 8. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 9. Adjust the timing belt tension. 10. Make sure the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are at TDC. 11. If the camshaft or crankshaft pulley is not positioned at TDC, remove the timing belt and adjust the positioning, then reinstall the timing belt. 12. Remove the crankshaft pulley and lower cover. 13. Set the timing belt drive pulley so that the No.1 piston at TDC. Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS Operation The safing sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Page 6796 Page 4937 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the shift lock solenoid 3-P connector from the main wire harness. NOTE: Do not connect power to the B (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 2. Connect battery power to the A terminal and ground to the 8 terminal momentarily. Check the solenoid. If it does not work, replace it. NOTE: ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (O.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. ^ If it is not, adjust the position of the shift lock solenoid. Page 1109 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8336 6. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Page 3893 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8355 8. Remove the glass run channel. Page 7238 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4641 Page 952 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2295 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Diagrams Timing Components Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns Constant Velocity Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns 91-029 January 26, 1999 Applies To: ALL 1988 and later Models* Clicking Noise While Turning (Supersedes 91-029, dated April 17, 1992) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A clicking noise is heard while making right or left turns at 10 mph or less. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn outboard driveshaft joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the noisy outboard driveshaft joint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Failed part: Use the replacement Part Number Skill level: Repair Technician PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS DIAGNOSIS (Driving method) 1. Drive the car in a circle in an open parking lot at approximately 10 mph with the brakes slightly applied. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9278 Page 2048 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3772 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 7075 Part 1 Of 2 Page 2894 Page 5781 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Removal and Installation/Replacement Alternator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation/Replacement Alternator Replacement NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable. 2. Remove the power steering pump. 3. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the alternator. 4. Remove the terminal nut and the BLK (WHT) wire from the B terminal. Alternator Replacement 5. Loosen the through bolt, then loosen the adjustment locknut, and then the adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the belt from the alternator. 7. Remove the adjustment bolt and nut. 8. Remove the through bolt, then remove the alternator. 9. After installing the alternator, adjust the alternator belt tension. Page 9763 Switch Test 5. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the 20-P connector of the combination switch harness and body ground with the horn switch pressed. ^ If there is continuity, the horn switch is OK. ^ If there is no continuity, go to step 6. 6. Remove the steering column covers. 7. Disconnect the combination switch harness 4-P connector from the cable reel. Switch Test 8. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the 20-P connector and the No. 3 terminal of the 4-P connector. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the combination switch harness. ^ If there is continuity, go to step 9. Switch Test 9. Carefully remove the cruise control set/resume switch cover by prying between the cover and the switch in the sequence shown. Page 1480 Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Locations Cruise Control Servo: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 9351 Dash And Console Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4415 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2895 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6514 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 3609 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7071 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Page 9194 Page 8326 5. Remove the armrest screw. Page 3303 Page 10008 8. Disconnect the connector, then remove the regulator through the center hole in the door. 9. Remove the glass run channel. Page 2494 Removal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: ^ Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of the right side cover and oil pump case before installing them. ^ Use liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001, or equivalent. Page 4381 Page 7070 Part 2 Of 2 Page 7475 Housing Assembly HVAC: Diagrams Page 5935 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1059 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 8232 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6797 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5081 2. Select the 2.60 mm (0.102 inch) thrust shim from the middle of the table. 3. After installing the thrust shim, install the outer race in the transmission housing, using the special tools as shown. NOTE: Install the outer race squarely in the transmission housing. - Check that there is no clearance between the outer race, shim and transmission housing. 4. With the mainshaft, countershaft and secondary shaft removed, install the differential assembly and torque the transmission housing. NOTE: Install the gasket when checking starting torque. Torque to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) 5. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to seat the bearings. Page 7954 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2812 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Testing and Inspection Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 8961 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4795 Key Interlock Solenoid Test 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No. 4 and No. 7 terminals. ^ If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. ^ If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Page 5798 Page 1701 Wheels: Service and Repair WHEEL RUNOUT NOTE: These dimensions ONLY apply to factory equipment. 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the wheel runout by turning the wheel. Front and Rear Wheel Axial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Front and Rear Wheel Radial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) 5. If the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Page 1287 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 3433 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 3263 Valve Clearance: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. Page 7438 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3951 Page 6595 Relay Box: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 5355 12. Release the trigger and rinse the cooler with water only for one minute. 13. Turn the water valve off and turn off the water supply. 14. Turn the air valve on to dry the system out with air for two full minutes or until no moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. CAUTION: Residual moisture in the ATF cooler or pipes can damage the transmission. 15. Remove the flusher from the cooler line. Attach the drain hose to an ATF container. 16. Install the transmission and leave the drain hose attached to the cooler line. 17. Make sure the transmission is in P position. Then fill the transmission with ATF and run the engine for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 l (1.0 US qt.) is discharged. 18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler return hose to the transmission. 19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level. Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge and Fuel Gauge The ECT gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 1, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the engine coolant temperature sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes, pulling the gauge needle toward the coil with the stronger magnetic field. The fuel gauge works the same way. The resistance of the sending unit for the engine coolant temperature gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high engine temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the ECT gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the fuel gauge varies from about 2-5 ohms at full, to about 110 ohms at empty. When you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), the gauge remains at the last reading until you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or START (III) again. Page 3363 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Page 8753 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7314 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7625 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 1115 Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm - 07MAC-SL00100 Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts, and hang the caliper to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. Page 5408 Valve Body: Diagrams Main Valve Body Page 6618 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 3266 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve clearance Valve clearance Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.009 to 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 to 0.013 in Page 8785 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 872 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 7201 Page 6286 Modulator Unit Location 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Removal and Installation WARNING: - The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. CAUTION: - When removing the modulator unit or after removing it, be careful not to turn it upside down or lean it excessively. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. REMOVAL Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Controled Idle Speed Man. Trans. 750 RPM Auto Trans. (N) 750 RPM Page 7103 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 4783 2. Check the electrode gap. ^ Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. ^ Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown below: 3. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N-m (1.8 Kgf.m, 13 lb.ft). Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Specifications Countershaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Specifications Valve Guide: Specifications INTAKE GUIDE Standard (New) Service Limit Inside Diameter 5.515 - 5.530 mm 5.55 mm Installed Height 21.20 - 22.20 mm EXHAUST GUIDE Inside Diameter 5.515 - 5.530 mm 5.55 mm Installed Height 20.63 - 21.63 mm Page 3343 Page 4654 Ignition Coil: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Page 3031 Page 2340 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Left Kick Panel Page 5551 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape to prevent damage to the boots and dynamic damper. 2. Install the outboard boot, dynamic damper and inboard boot to the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the boots and dynamic damper. 3. Install the stop ring into the driveshaft groove. NOTE: Always rotate the stop ring in its groove to be sure it is fully seated. 4. Install the spider on the driveshaft by aligning the marks on the spider and end of the driveshaft. 5. Fit the circlip into the driveshaft groove. NOTE: Always rotate the circlip in its groove to be sure it is fully seated. 6. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease included in the new driveshaft set. Grease quantity: 130 - 140 g (4.6 - 4.9 oz) Page 2753 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Page 6045 Turning Point TURNING POINT The cut valve seat in the rear brake system has a shoulder between sections A, and B. Section A, where pressure from the master cylinder is applied, has a smaller diameter than section B, where pressure from the rear brake caliper is applied. This design provides the proportioning control valve function as follows. Master Cylinder Pressure Below When the fluid pressure from the master cylinder is below the turning point, the cut valve seat is pushed by the spring force and the cut valve is open. Therefore, the fluid pressure from the master cylinder is transmitted to the rear brake caliper side. Under these conditions, fluid pressure from the master cylinder is equal to the pressure to the rear brake caliper, but because of the diameter difference between sections A and B, the force on the cut valve overcomes the spring force, moving the cut valve seat toward the cut valve slowly. Master Cylinder Pressure Exceeds When the fluid from the master cylinder exceeds the turning point, the fluid pressure from the master cylinder rises, while the pressure to the rear brake caliper remains at the turning point value. As a result, the cut valve seat moves away from the cut valve and the cut valve opens. The passage between the master cylinder and caliper opens momentarily, but it is blocked again because the fluid pressure to the brake caliper rises, and the cut valve seat moves to close the cut valve. As described above, when the pressure in the master cylinder is above the turning point, the cut valve seat reduces the pressure in the rear brake caliper to the prescribed amount by repeating this process. Rear Brake Caliper Reaches When the fluid pressure to the rear brake caliper reaches the turning point, the cut valve is closed by the cut valve seat, blocking the fluid passage between the master cylinder side and rear wheel cylinder side. Page 593 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Electrical Diagrams Page 3038 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information ATF Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Page 8433 Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 6791 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2724 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Page 209 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 364 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Page 10067 Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement 5. Remove the three mounting bolts and the nut from the wiper linkage to remove the windshield wiper motor. 6. Install the windshield wiper motor in the reverse order of removal. Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement 7. Install the windshield wiper arms as shown. Page 5644 16. Install the steel balls, springs, washers and setting screws. 17. Install the shift arm cover assembly. 18. Shim the transmission through all the gears before installing it. Page 503 Page 4606 Page 7976 In-Dash Cellular Phone Input Test Page 6617 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 5577 Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play 0 - 0.05 mm Note: Front and Rear. Page 9265 Brake Lights Page 7546 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Preliminary Checks Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Checks INSPECTION Before making any adjustments affecting caster, camber or toe-in, the following front end inspection should be made. 1. Inspect the tires for proper inflation pressure. 2. Inspect the front wheel bearings for proper adjustment. 3. inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends. If excessive looseness is noted, correct before adjusting. 4. Inspect the wheel and tires for run-out. 5. Inspect the trim height. If not within specifications, the correction must be made before adjusting caster. 6. Inspect the steering unit for looseness at the frame. 7. Inspect shock absorbers for leaks or any noticeable noise. 8. Inspect the control arms or stabilizer bar attachment for looseness. 9. Inspect the front end alignment using alignment equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 10. Alignment must be performed on a level surface. - Check that the suspension is not modified. - Check the tire size and tire pressure. Page 2897 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2329 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3486 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2944 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5640 Transmission Housing: Service and Repair Installation 1. Install the differential assembly in the clutch housing. 2. Install the spring washer and washer with the angle against the clutch housing as shown. 3. Insert the mainshaft and countershaft into the shim forks, and install them as an assembly. NOTE: Before installing the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies, tape the mainshaft splines to protect them. Page 2798 Page 902 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 465 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3904 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7480 Removal Step Two Removal Step Three 6. Remove the mounting bolts and mounting nuts in sequence shown, then remove the steering hanger beam. Heater Duct Page 8047 Integrated Control Unit Power Window Key-off Timer System Power Window Key-Off Timer System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Entry Light Timer System Entry Light Timer System Page 5233 the torque converter housing; you must install the seal dry. 5. Slide the tool over the mainshaft as far as it will go. 6. With a soft-face hammer, lightly tap the driver until the seal is fully seated in the torque converter housing. 7. Reinstall the transmission. Disclaimer Page 1998 5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of head. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 inch) bit, then try again. CAUTION: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks. 6. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them. 7. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to drive the guide in to the specified installed height. If you have all 16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. ^ Valve Guide Installed Height: Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.871 inch) - Exhaust: 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812-0.852 inch) Page 5639 8. Separate the transmission housing from the clutch housing, and wipe it clean of the sealant. 9. Remove the 78 mm shim and oil guide plate, then remove the oil gutter plate. Page 4527 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4836 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8425 Page 5425 Valve Body: Service and Repair General Assembly NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly. 1. Install the valve, valve spring and cap in the valve body, and secure with the roller. 2. Set the spring in the valve and install them in the valve body. Push the spring in with a screwdriver, then install the spring seat. Technician Safety Information Steering Gear: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of severe frontal collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized mechanic. - Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the air bags. - Do not bump the SRS unit. Otherwise, the system may fail in cause of a collision, or the ai bags may deploy when the ignition switch is ON (II). - All SRS electrical wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Related components are located in the steering column, front console, dashboard lower panel, and in the dashboard above the glove box. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits. Page 1268 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Relay Box: Locations Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 1159 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Locations Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Locations Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 4474 Page 8626 Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection 6-Way Power Adjustable CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat, interior trim or body. 1. Remove the driver's seat. 2. Disconnect the 6-P connector of the driver's power seat wire harness A from the power seat switch. Motor Test - Slide Motor 3. Test the motor: CAUTION: When the motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. Page 6967 7. Remove the wheel sensor wire bracket, then remove the wheel sensor from the steering knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use ball joint removers to separate the ball joints from the suspension or tie-rod end. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 8. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 9. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod end ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 10. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 11. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. 12. Use the ball joint remover, 28 mm, as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. 13. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Page 4645 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Specifications Torque Converter: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Stall Speed 2650 rpm 2500 - 2800 rpm Note: Check with vehicle on level ground. Page 8115 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4034 Page 9493 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Parking Brake Switch Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch Rear Console Page 1530 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid ............................................................................................................................. Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Page 4726 Page 4002 Page 196 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6121 Installation WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: Coat piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. Pad Spring Location 1. Install the pad spring on the caliper. Grease Caliper Pin & Boot 2. Apply rubber grease to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. 3. Install the pin boots into the groove in the caliper bracket properly. 4. Insert the pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 5. Install the pin boots into the groove in the pins properly. 6. Install the brake pad retainers and brake pads. 7. Align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad. Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 8576 C540 (18-GRY) Page 2880 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3132 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Page 10000 10. Coupe: If necessary, remove the lower center glass run channel from the center channel. NOTE: When installing the lower center glass run channel, apply clear sealant to location ® on the center channel. Photo 82 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Photo 82 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 3572 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7240 Page 1303 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Page 4829 Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 2111 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 1058 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 6749 2. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with mounting bolts. 3. Install the pump belt. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that the power steering belt is securely on the grooves of the pulleys. ^ Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the power steering belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease before installation. 4. Adjust the pump belt. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. NOTE: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. CAUTION: Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. a. Start the engine, let it run at idle, then turn the steering wheel lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. Page 1396 2. Check the electrode gap. ^ Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool. ^ Replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown below: 3. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N-m (1.8 Kgf.m, 13 lb.ft). Page 8450 operation. 8. Remove: - Dashboard lower cover - Glove box 9. Remove the screws. 10. Remove the front console. NOTE: Wrap the shift lever and A/T gear position indicator panel with a shop towel to prevent damage. 11. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Page 8960 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7203 Page 4072 With Keyless Entry Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection With Keyless Entry Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) Control Unit Input Test (With Keyless Entry) 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Leave the harness connected and make the test shown by probing the back of the connectors. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Page 944 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Customer Safety Information Brake Pad: Customer Safety Information WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 8540 Power Door Lock Actuator: Service and Repair Latch Replacement NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: See: Doors, Hood and Trunk Door Handle - Door panel - Plastic cover - Outer handle 2. Sedan/Wagon: Disconnect the inner handle rod from the latch. Coupe: Disconnect the inner handle rod and lock rod from the latch. Detach the inner handle rod and lock rod from the clips, then remove the inner lock knob. NOTE: Take care not to bend the rods. Sedan/wagon Coupe 3. Remove the bolt then move the center channel forward. Front Front Brake Caliper Page 7209 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4833 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4515 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3810 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3677 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Page 9612 Page 7723 Knee Diverter: Description and Operation Knee Bolster The knee bolsters are used to absorb energy to protect knees and control the forward movement of the vehicle's front seat occupants during a frontal crash, by limiting leg movement. Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheels: Customer Interest Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. A/C Suction Hose/Line Page 3458 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Page 3153 Page 2657 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection NOTE: Replace the thermostat if it is open at room temperature. 1. Suspend the thermostat in a container of water as shown. 2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open. CAUTION: Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of hot container. 3. Measure lift height of the thermostat when fully open. ^ STANDARD THERMOSTAT Lift height: above 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) - Starts opening: 169-176°F (76-80°C) - Fully open: 194°F (90°C) Page 8864 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8461 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 9284 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7316 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Service and Repair Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. a. Attach a hose to the bleeder screw, and suspend the hose in a container of brake fluid. b. Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid at the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the bleeder hose. c. Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when done. d. Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Page 5752 Shift Fork: Specifications DIMENSIONS Clearance Between Shift Fork And Synchro Sleeve Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ............................................................................................................... 1.00 mm (0.039 inch) Shift Fork Fingers Thickness ............................................................................................................................................. 6.2-6.4 mm (0.24-0.25 inch) Clearance Between Fork And Shift Arm Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 0.2-0.5 mm (0.008-0.020 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ................................................................................................................. 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) Shift Arm Width .......................................................................................................................................................... 12.9-13.0 mm (0.508-0.512 inch) Page 6087 Brake Pedal Assy: Service Precautions CAUTION: If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. Page 5643 11. Lower the transmission housing with the snap ring pliers, and set the snap ring into the groove of the countershaft bearing. 12. Check that the snap ring is securely seated in the groove of the countershaft bearing. Dimension A as installed: 3.60 - 6.32 mm (0.142 - 0.249 inch) 13. Install the 32 mm sealing bolt. NOTE: Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718- 0001) to the threads. 14. Install transmission hangers A and B. then tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps as shown. a. 8 x 1.25 mm bolts: 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) b. 10 x 1.25 mm bolts: 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) 15. Install the reverse idler gear shaft bolt. Page 679 ABS Component Locations Page 5783 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5201 Page 4805 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the shift control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up Torque Converter Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up 97-025 March 24, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - All with A/T (except HX) 1996-97 Accord - All with A/T (except V6) Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up SYMPTOM The torque converter doesn't lock up in cold weather. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty thermostat keeps the engine from reaching normal operating temperature in cold weather. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the thermostat. PARTS INFORMATION Thermostat and Gasket Kit: P/N 19301-P08-316, H/C 4286167 Honda Antifreeze/Coolant: P/N CU08730, H/C 1066588 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 114150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 19301-F10-307 H/C 4344792 Defect code: 030 Contention code: D02 Template ID: 97-025A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 7494 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Page 9197 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5939 Page 5528 2. Install the three flange bolts, then tighten them. Page 7264 Compressor Clutch Overhaul 1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure plate. Compressor Clutch Overhaul 2. Remove the pressure plate and shim(s), taking care not to lose the shims. Compressor Clutch Overhaul 3. Remove the snap ring B with snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley. Page 4840 Page 532 Page 9230 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2843 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Bracket ................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Cover Bolts ..................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Mounting Nuts .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.) Page 4419 Component Locations Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC: Component Locations Above Left Kick Panel Diagram Information and Instructions General Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 829 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Key-in Reminder System - Ignition Key Switch Test When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper in the integrated control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch. With ground at the "BLU/WHT" and "A1" terminals, the beeper sounds. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 5 and No. 8. ^ There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. ^ There should be no continuity with the key removed. Page 2974 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel tank pressure sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Page 3456 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Page 4215 Page 2137 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection OIL PRESSURE TESTING If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install an oil pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: - Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) - Engine Oil Pressure: - At Idle: 69 kPa (10 psi) minimum - At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (50 psi) minimum If oil pressure is within specifications, replace the oil pressure switch and recheck. - If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect the oil pump. Page 2164 Door Switch Test Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Test Door Switch Test 1. Remove the cover and the screw, then pull the switch out. 2. Disconnect the 1-P connector, and remove the switch. Door Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 744 Page 4368 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 3300 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4116 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7265 NOTE: ^ Be careful not to damage the pulley and compressor during removal/installation. ^ Once the snap ring B is removed, replace it with a new one. Compressor Clutch Overhaul 4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal. Remove the snap ring A with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to damage the field coil and compressor during removal/installation. ^ Once the snap ring A is removed, replace it with a new one. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. ^ Install the field coil with the wire side facing down (see above). ^ Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with non-petroleum solvent. ^ Make sure the snap rings are in the grooves properly. ^ Apply locking agent to the threads of the center bolt, and tighten it securely. ^ Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled. Page 502 Page 7105 Wheels: Service and Repair WHEEL RUNOUT NOTE: These dimensions ONLY apply to factory equipment. 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the wheel runout by turning the wheel. Front and Rear Wheel Axial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Front and Rear Wheel Radial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) 5. If the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Page 265 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Use a Steamer to Smooth Out Fabric Upholstery A garment steamer and a stiff-bristle brush make a great team for removing those nasty wrinkles, lines, or impressions in fabric upholstery. You can buy an inexpensive, small, hand-held garment/ fabric steamer from a number of different manufacturers. Some of these units even come with a handy built-in brush. Once you've got your steamer, follow the manufacturer's instructions to get it ready for use. Then apply a generous amount of steam to the problem area. Keep the steamer moving slowly over the area until it's hot and moist. A Word of Caution: Go easy on the steam if you're cleaning the front passenger seat in a vehicle with side airbags. Moisture can adversely affect or damage the OPDS sensors in the seatback. While the area is hot and moist, use a stiff-bristle brush, or the built-in brush if your steamer has one, to work the fabric back and forth and up and down. Stubborn areas might need more steam and brushing, so be patient and stay with it. It's worth the effort. Page 1256 Switch Removal 2. Remove the steering column covers. Switch Removal 3. Disconnect the connector from the wiper/washer switch, then remove the two screws and the switch. Page 9594 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9362 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Page 9917 Rear Defogger Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Rear Window Defogger Relay ^ Rear window defogger relay Page 3946 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Replacement 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). 2. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the VSS. NOTE: The VSS drive link is a very small part; be careful not to lose it. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 8446 Console: Service and Repair NOTE: SRS wire harnesses are routed near the front console. CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. FRONT AND REAR CONSOLE REPLACEMENT NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front and rear consoles, front seats and dashboard. CAUTION: When prying with a flat tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Open the armrest and remove the inner panel. Page 9296 Brake Lights And High Mount Brake Light - Circuit Diagram Page 3816 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 4831 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8294 Testing and Inspection Ignition Switch Lamp: Testing and Inspection Entry Light Timer System - Ignition Key Light Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. The LED should come on when power is connected to terminal No. 4, and ground is connected to terminal No. 2. ^ If the LED does not come on, remove the steering column covers, and replace the LED. Component Locations Page 6798 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5835 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 3281 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Center Rear of Engine Page 7895 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Page 3610 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7415 5. Disconnect the connector from the A/C thermostat. Remove the four self-tapping screws, two mounting nuts and the mounting bolt. Disconnect the drain hose, then remove the evaporator. 6. Pull out the A/C thermostat sensor from the evaporator fins. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - Install the A/C thermostat sensor to its original location. Page 8681 Tailgate Latch: Testing and Inspection Tailgate Latch Switch Test/Replacement 1. Open the tailgate and remove the tailgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the tailgate lock actuator. Tailgate Latch Switch Test/Replacement 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Tailgate Latch Switch Test/Replacement Page 9258 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6528 Relay Box: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 478 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1834 Page 4212 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2844 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9309 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2841 Mechanical Specifications Hose/Line HVAC: Mechanical Specifications Torque Specifications Discharge Hose to Compressor ....................................................................... ........................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Discharge Hose to Condenser ........................................................................................................................................... ......................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Condenser Pipe to Condenser ...................................................... .............................................................................................................. 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Condenser Pipe to Receiver/Dryer .............................................................................................................................................................. 13 Nm (9.4 ft-lb) Receiver Pipe to Receiver/Dryer .............................................................................. ................................................................................... 13 Nm (9.4 ft-lb) Receiver Pipe to Evaporator . .............................................................................................................................................................. ........ 13 Nm (9.4 ft-lb) Suction Pipe to Evaporator .............................................................................. ............................................................................................ 31 Nm (23 ft-lb) Suction Hose to Suction Pipe ..................................................................................................................................................... .................. 31 Nm (23 ft-lb) Suction Hose to Compressor .................................................................. .................................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair NOTE: Loosen the battery set bolt, and move the battery set plate before removing the ACL housing cover. Page 5941 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in Fuel and Emissions. Page 899 Headlight Switch (Part 2 Of 2) Page 271 Page 5154 Page 163 Engine Mount Control Unit: Electrical Diagrams LEGEND BATTERY: 100 A No. 4*: Engine Control Unit (ECU)/Engine Air Temperature (EAT) ECU (Powertrain Control Module [PCM]) Page 9498 Page 4644 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7300 Page 2125 Oil Pressure Indicator Light Page 4164 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the 12 mm sealing nut from the fuel rail. Attach the fuel pressure adapter nut, 12 mm (90201 - P0A - 003) and the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch on, wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kgf/sq.cm, 38 - 48 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 210 - 250 kPa (2.1 - 2.8 kgf/sq.cm, 30 - 37 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Page 1053 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 10073 Wiper Relay: Locations Photo 26 Beneath Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8654 5. Tighten the outer seat track's front mounting bolt, then tighten the inner seat track's rear mounting bolt. 6. Use a caliper to measure the distance from the face of the inner seat track to the mounting boss. 7. Subtract 2.5 mm from your measurement to allow for the thickness of the inner seat track. Then select the proper size suspension alignment shim or shims (commercially available from most auto parts stores) to take up the measured gap. Do not exceed 5 mm. NOTE: Suspension alignment shim thickness is normally measured in fractions of an inch. Use this table to select the proper thickness. Calculated clearance Shim thickness 1.5 - 1.9 mm 1/16 in. 2.0 - 2.5 mm 3/32 in. 2.6 - 3.3 mm 1/8 in. 3.4 - 4.2 mm 5/32 in. 4.3 - 5.0 mm 3/16 in. 8. Install the 10 x 25 mm washer-bolt (see PARTS INFORMATION) in the inner seat track front mounting hole. Thread the bolt in only two or three turns. 9. Place the selected shim(s) over the bolt, between the inner seat track and the mounting boss. 10. Torque the four seat track mounting bolts to 34 N.m (25 lb-ft). 11. Check the seat for proper operation. Make sure it slides smoothly and releases easily. Page 7261 Compressor Illustrated Index Photo 80 Engine Control Module: Locations Photo 80 Right Front Of Floor, Under Carpet Page 1667 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Page 9593 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 508 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8909 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6001 ABS Component Locations Page 2863 Locations Impact Sensor: Locations SRS Operation The impact sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Photo 38 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Specifications Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications Arm to Shaft Clearance Arm to Shaft Clearance Standard (New) Service Limit Arm to Shaft Clearance Intake 0.026 - 0.067 mm 0.08 mm Exhaust 0.018 - 0.054 mm 0.08 mm Page 2578 Page 1120 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8985 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 555 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before disconnecting any part of the SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - During installation or replacement, do not bump (impact wrench, hammer etc.) the area near the SRS unit. - Do not damage the SRS unit terminals or connectors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit; it has no serviceable parts. - Store the SRS unit in a clean, dry area. - Do not use any SRS unit which has been subjected to water damage or shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. SRS Unit Replacement Driver's Airbag: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. SRS Unit Replacement Front Passenger's Side: Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 5559 11. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess 5 to 10 mm (0.2 to 0.4 in.) from the clip. 12. Secure the end of the boot band by tapping it down over the clip with a hammer. 13. Make sure that the boot band and clip do not interfere with anything and that the band does not move. 14. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 13 to install the boot band on the small end of the boot. Disclaimer Page 897 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9821 Trunk Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Heater Blower Motor Gets Hot or Blows a Fuse APPLIES TO: 1990-04 Accords, 1992-04 Civics, 1997-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2000-04 Insights, 1995-04 Odysseys, 1996-02 Passports, 2003-04 Pilots, 1997-01 Preludes, and 2000-04 S2000s SERVICE TIP: A blocked cooling hose for the heater blower motor can cause the motor to overheat, draw more current, blow a fuse, or even melt its plastic impeller. Before you order a replacement blower motor, make sure the cooling hose isn't blocked. On some models, you'll find the cooling hose molded into the blower motor housing; on other models, it's a separate piece. Check the S/M for the vehicle you're working on to determine the actual location of the cooling hose. Page 262 Page 6476 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9592 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3954 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 249 Headlamp Relay: Locations Photo Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 1329 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 4828 Page 6378 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, perform the input test for the daytime running lights control unit. Page 7243 Page 9382 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8911 Page 8569 Japan-Produced Cars Canada-Produced Civics, paint code ends in -4 Page 7020 NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 2. Position the damper mounting base on the rear damper unit as shown. 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 4. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. 6. Lower the rear suspension, and position the rear damper with the welded nut pointed toward the front of the vehicle. Page 3484 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8278 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8764 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4331 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3443 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 5149 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2446 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 8308 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5547 11. To drive the outboard joint on the rest of the way, pick up the assembly and let it fall from about 10 cm (4 to 5 in.) onto a hard surface. NOTICE Do not use a hammer; excessive force may damage the driveshaft. 12. Measure distance "A" (from the splines to the inner race of the joint). If the distance is more than your measurement in Step 3, repeat Step 11. 13. When distance "A" equals your measurement in Step 3, the "C" clip should be seated in the joint. Tap on the inner race with a plastic hammer to make sure the joint does not move on the driveshaft. 14. Fit the small end of the boot into the boot groove on the driveshaft. 15. Install the small boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 16. Pack the outboard boot with the grease included in the kit. Pack the outboard joint with the remaining grease, then fit the boot over the outboard joint. 17. Install the large boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 18. Reinstall the driveshaft assembly into the car. Refer to Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Page 9215 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4292 Page 2003 7. Insert intake and exhaust valves in the head and measure valve stem installed height. ^ Intake Valve Stem Installed Height: Standard (New): 46.75-47.55 mm (1.841-1.872 inch) - Service Limit: 47.80 mm (1.921 inch) ^ Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height: Standard (New): 46.68-47.48 mm (1.838- 1.869 inch) - Service Limit: 47.73 mm (1.879 inch) 8. If valve stem installed height is over the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If still over the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep. Page 266 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3738 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Mechanical Specifications Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Mechanical Specifications Modulator Bracket Bolts ...................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 21 Nm (15 lb.ft.) Page 7269 Compressor Clutch Coil: Testing and Inspection CLUTCH FIELD COIL INSPECTION Check resistance of the field coil, as shown. Field Coil Resistance: 3.6 +/- 0.2 ohms at 68°F (20°C) If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Page 5084 1. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque converter housing by heating the housing to about 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun. CAUTION: Do not heat the housing in excess of 212°F (100°C). NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the outer race is to be replaced. - Do not use shims on the torque converter housing side. - Adjust preload after replacing the bearing outer race and bearing. 2. Install the new bearing outer race flush with the housing using the special tools. Page 3268 4. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 5. Tighten the locknut and check clearance again. Repeat adjustment if necessary. No. 3 Piston At Top Dead Center 6. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (Camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. Page 4460 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4984 1st/2nd Accumulator Body Page 6328 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove the master cylinder. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster, then remove the vacuum hose bracket. 3. Remove the throttle control cable bracket. 4. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors, then remove the harness clamp. Booster Removal 5. M/T only: Remove the clutch reservoir and reservoir bracket. Do not disconnect the clutch hose from the reservoir. 6. Loosen the pushrod locknut, then remove the cotter pin and joint-pin. 7. Remove the clevis from the operating rod of the brake booster. Cabin View 8. Remove the four booster mounting nuts 13 Nm (9 lb ft). 9. Pull the brake booster forward, then turn it to the right until the operating rod is clear of the bulkhead. Page 7341 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5356 ATF Cooler: Tools and Equipment TRANSMISSION COOLER FLUSHER TOOL MAINTENANCE 1. Empty and rinse after each use. Fill the can with water and pressurize the can. Flush the discharge line to ensure that the unit is clean. 2. If discharge liquid does not foam, the orifice may be blocked. 3. To clean, disconnect the plumbing from the tank at the large coupling nut. 4. Remove the in-line filter from the discharge side and clean if necessary. 5. The fluid orifice is located behind the filter. Clean it with the pick stored in the bottom of the tank handle, or blow it clean with air. Securely reassemble all parts. Page 9712 3. Disconnect the connector from the combination light switch, then remove the two screws and the switch. Page 1669 Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Front Coil Spring Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Coil Spring TOOL REQUIRED - Strut Spring Compressor REMOVAL CAUTION: The spring of the damper springs are different left and right. Be sure to mark the springs R and L before disassembling the front dampers. 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts from the front damper. 3. Remove the flange bolt. 4. Remove the flange bolt and self-locking nut, then remove the damper fork 5. Remove the front damper by removing the three flange nuts. Page 8103 Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test Key Interlock Solenoid Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair NOTE: Loosen the battery set bolt, and move the battery set plate before removing the ACL housing cover. Page 8375 5. Detach the inner handle rod and lock rod from the clip. Remove the screws and clip, then move the latch down. 6. Remove the bolts. 7. Pull out the outer handle. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Raise the glass fully. Latch Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover Page 4421 Page 1851 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3611 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7346 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4576 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 8001 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4360 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1816 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal 1. Loosen the adjusting screws, then remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: ^ Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. ^ When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts. Page 6800 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1693 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 697 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 6743 3. The fluid volume that flows thorough oil passage A and the pressure difference applied to the sub-valve increase in proportion to the engine speed. The sub-valve lowers overcoming the spring force, and it starts to close the variable orifice to regulate the discharge volume. Therefore, the fluid volume flowing to the steering gearbox decreases as the engine speed increases. At the same time, the flow control valve continues to control the fluid volume to the return port. 4. As the engine speed increases further, the pressure difference at the sub-valve increases further, too. The sub-valve then closes the variable orifice completely, regulating the discharge volume further. Therefore, the fluid volume discharged from the pump to the steering gearbox is regulated and maintained at a given level until the engine speed reaches the high speed range. The flow control valve functions continues to control the fluid volume to the return port. PRESSURE RELIEF Pressure at the discharge side of the fixed orifice is directed to the bottom of the flow control valve. When the pressure builds up, the relief valve in the flow control valve opens to release the pressure at the bottom of the valve. This allows the flow control valve to be pushed back by the pressure difference, and the fluid volume to the pump return port increases. As explained above, the system keeps the pump discharge pressure (relief pressure) Page 9590 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3786 Right Rear Of Engine Page 2200 Engine Mount Control Unit: Electrical Diagrams LEGEND BATTERY: 100 A No. 4*: Engine Control Unit (ECU)/Engine Air Temperature (EAT) ECU (Powertrain Control Module [PCM]) Page 3512 Sedan KL (LX With ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe Two-Way Valve: Testing and Inspection Sedan KL (LX With ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Remove the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve (located above the EVAP control canister), and connect it to a T-fitting from vacuum gauge and vacuum pump as shown. 3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize momentarily at 0.8 - 2.1 kPa (6 - 16 mmHg, 0.2 - 0.6 in.Hg). If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.8 kPa (6 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.1 kPa (16 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. 4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure side as shown. 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The pressure should be stabilize momentarily above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg). If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve opens) above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), the valve is OK. - If the pressure stabilizes below 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. Page 9439 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Headlight Relay ^ Headlight relay Page 5162 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7144 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 4841 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8266 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2912 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B1 ENGINE Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B2 ENGINE NOTE: ^ Perform an input test for the Ignition Control Module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. ^ The tachometer should operate normally if the ICM is OK. 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor, and the leak cover. 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the ignition switch and the ICM. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check: - ignition coil. - GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire between the ICM and ignition coil. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the 32-P connector from the ECM/PCM, and check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ICM and ECM/PCM. There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 8374 2. Remove the rod protector. 3. Remove the lock crank. 4. Remove the bolt and loosen the nut, then move the rear channel forward. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Customer Safety Information Brake Hose/Line: Customer Safety Information WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. Specifications Reverse Gear Shaft: Specifications DIMENSIONS Clearances Between Reverse Fork And 5th/Reverse Shift Piece Pin Standard: A: 0.05-0.35 mm (0.002-0.014 inch) B: 0.40-0.80 mm (0.02-0.03 inch) Service Limit: A: 0.50 mm (0.02 inch) B: 1.00 mm (0.04 inch) Widths Of Groove In Reverse Shift Fork Standard: A: 7.05-7.25 mm (0.278-0.285 inch) B: 7.40-7.70 mm (0.290-0.300 inch) Clearance Between Reverse Idler Gear And Reverse Shift Fork Standard: 0.5-1.1 mm (0.02-0.04 inch) Service Limit: 1.8 mm (0.07 inch) Width Of Reverse Shift Fork Page 1568 NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. 10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. When the brake fluid is completely drained from the reservoir (air enters in the modulator unit) during brake fluid replacement, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. 11. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 12. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container (see the previous page). 13. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 14. Tighten the bleeder when the fluid starts to flow out of the bleeder. 15. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. With Anti-Lock Brakes (Using ALB Checker) CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. 1. Place the vehicle on level ground with the wheels blocked. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL for manual transmission models, and in PARK position for automatic transmission models. Release the parking brake. ALB Checker Installation 2. Disconnect the ABS inspection connector (6P) from the cross-member under the passenger's seat and connect the ABS inspection connector (6P) to the ALB checker. Filling The Reservoir With Brake Fluid 3. Fill the modulator reservoir to the MAX level line and install the reservoir cap. 4. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few minutes, then stop it. Check the fluid level in the modulator reservoir and refill to the MAX level line if necessary. Page 1555 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Page 9894 Dash And Console Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2847 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7571 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Sedan KL (LX With ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe Fuel Line: Testing and Inspection Sedan KL (LX With ABS, DX, EX), KA, KC/Coupe NOTE: Check fuel system lines, hoses and fuel filter for damage, leaks or deterioration, and replace if necessary. NOTE: Check all hose clamps and retighten if necessary. Page 6019 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 9881 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2227 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. Remove the middle cover (DOHC Prelude) or the upper cover (all other affected models). 4. Use a flashlight to look inside the lower cover at the front balancer shaft oil seal. Look for an oil seal retainer above it bolted to the oil pump housing. ^ If you see an oil seal retainer, go to step 23. ^ If you do not see an oil seal retainer, go to step 5. ^ *If the seal is cocked or backed out, replace the seal. Replace the timing belt and balancer belt if they are contaminated with oil (refer to section 6 of the appropriate service manual). Then go to step 14. This repair requires DSM approval. ^ *If the oil seal has backed out, causing internal engine damage from extended driving with a complete loss of oil, contact your DSM.* 5. Loosen the mounting hardware for the power steering pump and the alternator. Then loosen the adjusting bolts 20 turns (this is for reference during reassembly). 6. Remove the power steering pump belt and the alternator belt. 7. DOHC Prelude only: Remove the power steering reservoir and the power steering pump, and set them aside. Do not disconnect any power steering fluid lines. Page 9141 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3457 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Page 5075 Page 7382 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4728 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8502 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6638 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Page 4372 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3423 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Page 4750 Page 5619 Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing Noise 97-018 March 31, 1997 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Rear Wheel Bearing Noise SYMPTOM A whining noise from the rear wheels. At first, only at highway speeds, but, over time, becoming noticeable at low speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear bearing hub caps were not manufactured correctly, allowing water to leak into the hub bearing assemblies, and contaminating the bearings. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1992 - 96 Prelude - ALL 1990 - 96 Accord - ALL 1997 Accord - 2-door thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA009547 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGCD5... VA069560 - V6 thru VIN 1HGCE6... VA007445 - Wagon thru VIN 1HGCE1 ... VA003363 1995 - 96 Odyssey - ALL 1997 Odyssey - Thru VIN JHMRA1 ... VC003933 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the failed hub bearing assembly, then install new rear bearing hub caps. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Bearing Hub Cap (2 required): P/N 42326-SG0-000, H/C 2589950 Spindle Nut: All except Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-692-010, H/C 1483627 Accord V6 and Wagon P/N 90305-SD4-003, H/C 2399723 Rear Hub Bearing Assembly: Prelude Si/Si 4WS/SE/VTEC P/N 42200-SS0-981, H/C 3943206 S model P/N 42200-SM4-A01, H/C 3943198 1990-93 Accord 4-door and 2-door w/ABS P/N 42200-SM4-J51, H/C 3607140 4-door and 2-door w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 Wagon w/ ABS P/N 42200-SM5-A51, H/C 3920493 Page 158 Engine Mount Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7085 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Tire Rotation Page 3563 Page 3553 Page 6177 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Installation 1. Clean the mating surfaces of the hub unit and brake disc. 2. Install the hub unit on the brake disc and tighten the flange bolts. 3. Install the knuckle on the hub unit and tighten the self-locking bolts. Page 8786 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8178 Page 3944 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7204 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1433 4. Install the timing belt tightly in the sequence shown. (1) Timing belt drive pulley (crankshaft) -> (2) Adjusting pulley -> (3) Water pump pulley -> (4) Camshaft pulley. NOTE: Make sure the timing belt drive pulley and camshaft pulley are at TDC. 5. Loosen and retighten the adjusting nut to tension the timing belt. 6. Install the timing balancer belt drive pulley and lower cover. 7. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 8. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 9. Adjust the timing belt tension. 10. Make sure the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are at TDC. 11. If the camshaft or crankshaft pulley is not positioned at TDC, remove the timing belt and adjust the positioning, then reinstall the timing belt. 12. Remove the crankshaft pulley and lower cover. 13. Set the timing belt drive pulley so that the No.1 piston at TDC. Service Specifications * Balance Shaft: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit No.1 Front Journal Diameter 42.722 - 42.734 mm 42.71 mm No.1 Rear Journal Diameter 20.938 - 20.950 mm 20.92 mm No.2 Front and Rear Journals Diameter 38.712 - 38.724 mm 38.70 mm No.3 Front and Rear Journals Diameter 34.722 - 34.734 mm 34.71 mm Journal Taper 0.005 mm --End Play (Front) 0.10 - 0.40 mm --End Play (Rear) 0.04 - 0.15 mm --- Total Runout 0.02 mm 0.03 mm Page 3373 Page 2187 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1994 Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection VALVE MOVEMENT 1. Measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). ^ Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.04-0.09 mm (0.002-0.004 inch) - Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 inch) ^ Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.11-0.16 mm (0.004-0.006 inch) - Service Limit: 0.24 mm (0.009 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck using a new valve. ^ If measurement is now within service limit, reassemble using a new valve. ^ If measurement still exceeds limit, recheck using alternate method below, then replace valve and guide, if necessary. NOTE: An alternate method of checking guide to stem clearance is to subtract the Outer Diameter of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge. 2. Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. ^ The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit. ^ Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.020-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 inch) - Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) ^ Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 inch) - Service Limit: 0.12 mm (0.005 inch) Page 9222 Page 1274 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Page 7212 Blower Motor (Part 2 Of 3) Page 8596 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 3565 Page 9056 Oil Pressure Indicator Light Page 1983 7. Stop applying air pressure and push up the timing plate; the synchronizing pistons will snap back to their original positions. ^ Visually check the disengagement of the synchronizing pistons A/B. NOTE: ^ When the timing plate is pushed up, it releases the timing piston, letting the return spring move the synchronizing pistons to their original positions. ^ Replace the intake rocker arms as an assembly if either does not work correctly. 8. Remove the special tools. 9. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion assembly. It is compressed slightly when the intake mid rocker arm is lightly pushed and compressed deeply when the mid rocker arm is strongly pushed. ^ Replace the lost motion assembly if it does not move smoothly. 10. After inspection, check that the MIL does not come on. Lost Motion Assemblies Inspection 1. Remove the lost motion assembly from the cylinder head and inspect it. Pushing it gently with the finger will cause it to sink slightly. Increasing the force on it will cause it to sink deeper. ^ If the lost motion assembly does not move smoothly, replace it. Page 6334 Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection - Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose at the booster or at the booster side of the valve. Check Valve Location - Start the engine and let it idle. There should be vacuum. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the check valve and retest. Page 3017 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4677 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Test Ignition Coil Test F22B1 engine: 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 2. Remove the two screws to disconnect the BLK/YEL and WHT/BLK wires from terminals A (+) and B (-) respectively. 3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is not within specifications. NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil temperature; specifications are at 68° F (20° C) Primary Winding Resistance (Between the A and B terminals): 0.45-0.55 Ohms Secondary Winding Resistance (Between the A and secondary winding terminals): 16.8-25.2 Ohms Page 7307 Service and Repair Antenna Mast: Service and Repair Removal: NOTE: The antenna mast alone can be replaced without having to remove the power antenna motor. 1. Remove the antenna nut, spacer and bushing. Antenna Mast Replacement 2. Carefully withdraw the antenna mast while extending it by turning the radio switch ON. Page 9476 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Horn Relay ^ Horn relay Page 274 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Testing and Inspection Ventilation Switch: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 7403 Evaporator Core: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity 40 mL Page 5106 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 743 Page 8516 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Alpine of America by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form (found in Parts Information Bulletin A91 -0031) along with a dealer check for $59.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Honda/Alpine V.S.S. P.O. Box 2859 Torrance, CA 90509 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 2 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Relay Box: Locations Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Unit Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 3767 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2485 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4881 Belt Deflection Drive Belt: Specifications Belt Tension and Deflection Belt Tension and Deflection When using a new belt, adjust deflection or tension to new values. Run the engine for 5 minutes then turn it off. Readjust deflection or tension to used belt values. Used Belt New Belt Alternator Belt Deflection 10.5 - 12.5 mm 8.0 - 10.0 mm Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Tension 290 -440 N 540 - 740 N Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. A/C Compressor Belt Deflection 8.0 - 10.5 mm 5.0 - 7.0 mm Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Tension 440 - 590 N 930 - 1130 N Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Power Steering Belt Deflection 13.0 - 16.0 mm 11.0 - 12.5 mm Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Note: With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) between pulleys. Tension 390 - 540 N 740 - 880 N Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Note: Measured with belt tension gauge. Recall 99V069000: Lower Ball Joint Replacement Ball Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 99V069000: Lower Ball Joint Replacement Certain vehicles were manufactured with ball joints that can prematurely wear out and, in the worse case, the ball joint would separate causing the front suspension to collapse. This condition would result in vehicle deceleration and a sudden loss of power. Also steering controllability would be reduced. Dealers will replace the front suspension lower ball joints. Owner notification began May 17, 1999. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009 or Acura 1-800-382-2238. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Page 5424 NOTE: Do not let any of the seven check balls fall out of the secondary valve body when removing the secondary valve body. 7. Remove the seven bolts securing the throttle valve body, then remove the throttle valve body and separator plate. 8. Remove the regulator valve body (one bolt). 9. Remove the stator shah and stop shaft. 10. Remove the detent spring from the detent arm, then remove the control shaft from the torque converter housing. 11. Remove the detent arm and detent arm shaft from the main valve body. 12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts). NOTE: Do not let any of the three check balls fall out of the main valve body when removing the main valve body. 13. Remove the 1st/2nd accumulator body (six bolts). 14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then remove the ATF pump gears. 15. Remove the main separator plate with three dowel pins. 16. Clean the inlet opening of the ATF strainer thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not clogged. 17. Replace the ATF strainer if it is clogged or damaged. NOTE: The ATF strainer can be reused if it is not clogged. Page 4755 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8396 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 13. Install the glass run channel and center channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel on the door as shown. Page 8012 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Remove the printed Circuit board from the housing. 3. Remove the bulb. Page 3073 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7534 Page 4936 Key Interlock Solenoid Test 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No. 4 and No. 7 terminals. ^ If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. ^ If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Component Tests and General Diagnostics Keyless Entry Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Unit Input Test Page 7771 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Page 7359 Heater Control Panel: Description and Operation Mode Selection Mode selection is controlled by the mode switches in the heater control panel and the mode control motor. When you select a specific mode, voltage is applied through the dimming control circuit to the LED, which comes ON, indicating the mode selected. Ground is provided to the mode control motor though that mode switch. The motor then runs until the air control door reaches the proper position. Fresh/Recirculation Selection When you press the recirculation button, a ground signal is sent from the heater control panel to the recirculation control motor. The motor then runs until the recirculation door reaches the proper position. Battery voltage is also applied through the dimming control circuit to the corresponding LED, and the LED comes ON. Page 5436 1ST/2ND ACCUMULATOR BODY NOTE: - Clean all part thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out ail passages. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check ball; it may magnetize the ball. Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Page 3041 Page 3364 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 1024 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07GAD-PG40100 Driver Attachment - 07JAD-PH80400 Pilot, 28 x 30 mm - 07JAD-PH80101 Driver Attachment - Or Equivalent REMOVAL 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing. 3. Remove the oil seal from the clutch housing. INSTALLATION Page 2662 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Check that the water pump pulley turns counterclockwise. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. NOTE: A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole is normal. Page 9788 Page 3834 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Mechanical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 6033 Fail Safe Relay: Testing and Inspection - Remove the fail-safe relays and motor relay. See: Brake Fluid Pump Relay/Locations Relay Identification - Check for continuity between the terminals C and D. There should be continuity. - Check for continuity between the terminals A and B. There should be continuity when the battery is connected between the terminals C and D. There should be no continuity when the battery is disconnected. Page 6586 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 77 Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 3009 Page 3508 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 959 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Page 7322 Condenser Fan (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7718 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On (Part 2 Of 3) Page 2171 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 913 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 8514 Technical Service Bulletin # 96-046 Date: 961021 Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Bulletin No. 96-046 Issue Date OCT 21, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To Refer to the list below File Under ACCESSORIES Keyless Remote Transmitter Information This Service Bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering*, and transmitter batteries. A transmitter quick reference guide is included. Use this index to find the information for the vehicle you are working on. Vehicle: Procedure Number: Civic 1992-93 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 8 del Sol 1993 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 7 Accord 1990-93 (except Wagon) 2 1991-93 EX Wagon 3 1991-93 LX Wagon 4 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1994-97 EX Wagon 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Prelude 1988-91 1 1992-93 (with optional security system) 2 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Odyssey 1995 (with optional security system) 5 1995-97 EX 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Passport 1994-95 (with optional security system, not applicable to 1995.5 model) 9 1996-97 (with optional security system) 10 *Transmitter prices are subject to change without notice. PARTS INFORMATION Transmitter ordering information and battery part numbers are in each transmitter section. Page 2068 Engine Mount Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Page 933 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Page 9596 Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams License, Parking, Side Marker Lights And Taillights (Part 1 Of 2) Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 6600 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 1286 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 7998 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3184 Idle Speed: Adjustments NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: M/T: 550 ± 50 rpm A/T: 550 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the idle adjusting screw. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector to the IAC valve, then remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to reset the ECM/PCM. 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: Page 680 Wheel Sensor: Description and Operation WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Wheel Sensor Operation PURPOSE The wheel sensor is a contactless type that detects the rotating speed of a wheel. It consists of a permanent magnet and coil. FUNCTION When the gear pulsers attached to the rotating parts of each wheel turn, the magnetic flux around the coil in the wheel sensor alternates, generating voltages with frequency in proportion to wheel rotating speed. These pulses are sent to the ABS control unit, and the ABS control unit identifies the wheel speed. Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 238 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 3991 Page 1963 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 4216 Page 29 Page 3902 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 400 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Photo 46 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 46 Behind Front Grille Page 9754 Headlamp Switch: Electrical Diagrams Headlight Switch (Part 1 Of 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2447 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve clearance Valve clearance Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.009 to 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 to 0.013 in Page 6220 WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Pad Spring Location 1. Remove the pad spring from the caliper body. Using Special Tool 2. Remove the piston by rotating the piston counterclockwise with the special tool, and remove the piston boot. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston. Page 4533 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Electrical Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 1531 Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection OIL CHECK NOTE: Check the transmission oil with the engine OFF and the vehicle on level ground. 1. Remove the oil filler plug, then check the level and condition of the oil. 2. The oil level must be up to the filler hole. If it is below the hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. 3. If the transmission oil is dirty, remove the drain plug and drain the oil. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission oil to the proper level. NOTE: The drain plug washer should be replaced at every oil change. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. Oil Capacity: a. 1.9 l (2.0 US qt.) at oil change b. 2.0 l (2.1 US qt.) at overhaul NOTE: Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Page 5097 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 3961 Page 5642 7. Install the oil guide plate and 78 mm shim into the transmission housing. 8. Apply liquid gasket to the surface of the transmission housing as shown. NOTE: Use liquid gasket (P/N 08718 - 0001). - Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. - Seal the entire circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil leakage. - If 20 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it and assemble the housings. Allow it to cure at least 20 minutes aver assembly before filling the transmission with oil. 9. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins. 10. Set the taper cone ring as shown. Place the transmission housing over the clutch housing, being careful to line up the shafts. Page 4513 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3873 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1541 Engine Oil: Service and Repair CAUTION: Remove the drain bolt carefully while the engine is hot; the hot oil may cause scalding. 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill with the recommended oil. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the drain bolt. NOTE: Use "Energy Conserving II" SH grade oil. SAE 5 W - 30 preferred. You can also use an oil that bears the API CERTIFICATION mark. - Oil Capacity: 4.0 (4.2 qt.) at oil change. - 4.3 (4.5 qt.) at oil change including filter. - 5.6 (5.9 qt.) after engine overhaul. SERVICE NOTES: - For normal conditions change every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months. - For severe conditions change every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months. NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. The numbers in the middle of the API Service label tell you the oil's SAE viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart. An oil with a viscosity of 5 W - 30 is preferred for improved fuel economy and year-round protection in the car. You may use a 10 W - 30 oil if the climate in your area is limited to the temperature range shown on the chart. Page 6175 16. Use the ball joint remover, 32mm, as shown to separate the lower ball joint and lower arm. NOTE:If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Remove the knuckle protector. 18. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 19. Install a 10mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 20. Use the ball joint remover as shown to separate the upper ball joint and knuckle. NOTE:If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Page 8724 Cruise Control Module: Locations Photographs Left Side Of Dash - Photo 79 Page 6135 Brake Pad Thickness Check 4. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. Specs: Front Brake Pad Thickness 10.5 - 11.5 mm (0.41 - 0.55 in) Service Limit 1.6 mm (0.06 in) NOTE: ^ Measurement does not include pad backing plate thickness. ^ If the brake pad thickness is less than service limit, replace the front pads as a set. 5. If the brake pad thickness is less than service limit, replace the front pads as a set. Page 5591 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Drive Plate (A/T) Torque/Sequence REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the eight drive plate bolts. 2. Then separate the drive plate from the crankshaft flange. 3. After installation, tighten the bolts to 74 Nm (54 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown (see image). Page 2328 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2495 Page 8910 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9283 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8489 Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations A/C Pressure Switch Photo 138 - A/C Pressure Switch Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Specifications Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lever .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 8 Nm (72 inch lbs.) Cable Bracket ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Page 2333 Page 6670 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 5112 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection FLUID LEVEL CHECK NOTE: Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Turn off the engine. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 3. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 4. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. 5. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid* into the dipstick tube to bring it to the upper mark. 6. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. Page 6928 6. Remove the axle from the front wheel hub. If the axle is stuck to the hub, go to step 7. If the axle comes out easily, go to step 10. 7. Reinstall the knuckle on the lower control arm and loosely install the castle nut. 8. Using a heavy-duty hub puller, free the axle from the hub. Do not press it all the way out. 9. Remove the castle nut, lift and support the knuckle (to prevent damaging the ABS sensor wire harness), and press the axle out of the hub. 10. Lift the knuckle, then place a block of wood (about 2-3/4" x 1-1/2" by 5") between the upper control arm and the damper assembly. 11. Remove the boot from the lower ball joint. Page 7358 Page 6704 22. Use the ball joint remover as shown on step 10 to separate the upper ball joint and steering knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 23. Pull the steering knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the steering knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end using a plastic hammer, then remove the steering knuckle. Page 2028 Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection: 10.5 - 12.5 mm (0.41 - 0.49 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 8 - 10 mm (0.32 - 0.39 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the belt deflection. Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (Without A/C) Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension: 294 - 441 N (30 - 45 kgf, 66 - 99 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 540 - 735 N (55 - 75 kgf, 121 - 165 lbf) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Page 5892 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Adjustments Carrier Bearings: Adjustments TAPERED ROLLER BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT NOTE: If any of the items listed below were replaced, the tapered roller bearing preload must be adjusted. - Transmission housing - Clutch housing - Differential carrier - Tapered roller bearing and bearing outer race - Thrust shim - 75 mm shim 1. Remove the bearing outer race and thrust shim from the transmission housing. NOTE: Install the thrust shim only on the transmission housing side. CAUTION: Do not reuse the thrust shim if the bearing outer race was driven out. NOTE: Before adjusting the tapered roller bearing preload, let the transmission cool to room temperature if the bearing outer race was removed by heating the clutch housing. 2. First try the same size thrust shim that was removed. CAUTION: Use only one thrust shim. 3. After installing the thrust shim, install the bearing outer race in the transmission housing. NOTE: - Install the bearing outer race squarely. - Check that there is no clearance between the bearing outer race, thrust shim and transmission housing. 4. With the mainshaft and countershaft removed, install the differential assembly, and torque the clutch housing and transmission housing. NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent between the housings. Torque 10 x 1.25 mm to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) and 8 x 1.25 mm to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 5. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to seat the tapered roller bearings. Page 7987 Page 3440 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 1121 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Parking Brake Switch Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch Rear Console Page 7439 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2574 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7206 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations At Battery - Photo 6 Page 4113 Page 7791 Retractor Bolt - Coupe 8. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. Page 388 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 6870 NOTE: Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of line connection). 53. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. 54. Install the cylinder lines A and B. NOTE: ^ Clean the joints of the cylinder lines A and B thoroughly. The joints must be free of foreign material. ^ Install the cylinder lines A and B by fighting the flare nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 55. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide, and install it onto the gearbox housing. 56. Apply a thin coat of grease to the new O-ring, and install it on the rack guide screw. 57. Install the spring, rack guide screw and locknut on the gearbox housing. 58. Adjust the rack guide screw. NOTE: After adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding the rack right and left. 59. Install the stop washer with the chamfered side facing out. Page 5545 2. Have an assistant stand in the center of the circle and listen for the clicking noise. 3. Drive the car in the opposite direction. The assistant should be able to tell which axle is making the noise. DIAGNOSIS (On-hoist method) 1. Raise the car on a hoist and start the engine. 2. With the transmission in first gear (manual transmission) or D4 (automatic transmission), increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm. 3. Apply the brakes to load the engine speed to 1,500 rpm while maintaining the same throttle position. 4. Turn the wheels slowly to full left and full right positions. Have an assistant listen to determine which axle is making the noise. NOTE: A driveshaft with a light degree of noise may not be detected by this on-hoist method. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driveshaft as described in Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Use diagonal cutters to cut the two boot bands and the outboard joint boot, then remove them from the driveshaft. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the outboard joint. Measure and record distance "A" (from the splined end of the driveshaft to the inner race) as a reference for reassembly. Page 2486 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4588 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 6042 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service Precautions CAUTION: - When removing the modulator unit or after removing it, be careful not to turn it upside down or lean it excessively. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. - Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. - Do not reuse the drained brake fluid. WARNING: The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. Page 2805 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2300 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection NOTE: ^ The original radio has a coded them protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before: disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. ^ After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Disconnect the alternator terminal and the connector, then remove the engine wire harness from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the upper cover. 5. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: ^ Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. ^ Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 6. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt to 245 Nm (181 ft. lbs.). Page 6215 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Akebono Calipers WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. REMOVAL Caliper Shield ^ Remove the caliper shield. Brake Cable Removal & Installation ^ Remove the lock pin and clevis pin. Remove the cable clip and disconnect the cable from the arm. ^ Remove the banjo bolt and two sealing washers. Page 2927 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 5995 Brake Fluid Accumulator: Description and Operation Accumulator Exploded View PURPOSE The high-pressure brake fluid discharged from the pump is fed to the solenoids and pistons, but the passages to the solenoids and pistons are normally closed. Consequently, the high-pressure brake fluid accumulates in the accumulator. FUNCTION The accumulator consists of two chambers separated by a free piston; that is, the fluid chamber where the brake fluid is accumulated, and the chamber filled with high-pressure nitrogen gas to maintain the fluid at a given pressure. When the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) operates, the constant high-pressure brake fluid in the accumulator is supplied to the piston. Page 9080 Page 4756 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 5936 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 723 Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 10. Remove the two screws and set/resume switch. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 11. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. ^ If there is continuity and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. Page 7972 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Handset Microphone Is Inoperative) (No Audio) (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1825 9. Install the key and the camshaft pulley onto the camshaft, then tighten the retaining bolt to the torque shown. Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the clutch switch. Clutch Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Mechanical Specifications ABS Pump Motor: Mechanical Specifications PUMP TO MODULATOR Flange Bolt .......................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Page 7968 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Handset Microphone Is Inoperative) (No Audio) (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2423 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................ZFR5F-11 Denso .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................KJ16CR-L11 Page 1966 4. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 5. Tighten the locknut and check clearance again. Repeat adjustment if necessary. No. 3 Piston At Top Dead Center 6. Rotate crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (Camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. Page 146 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1908 8. Check clearance with plastigage, then tighten the bearing cap bolts in 2 steps. ^ In the first step, tighten all bolts in sequence to about 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.); in the final step, tighten in same sequence, to 74 Nm (54 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Coat the bolt threads with engine oil. CAUTION: Whenever any crankshaft bearing or connecting rod bearing is replaced, it is necessary after reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes. 9. Apply liquid gasket to the block mating surface of the right side cover, then install it on the cylinder block. NOTE: ^ Use liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001, or equivalent. ^ Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry before applying liquid gasket. ^ Apply liquid gasket evenly, being careful to cover all the mating surface. ^ To prevent leakage of oil, apply liquid gasket to the inner threads of the bolt holes. ^ Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket aver removing the old residue. ^ After assembly, wait at least 20 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Page 344 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Photo 80 Engine Control Module: Locations Photo 80 Right Front Of Floor, Under Carpet Photo 102 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Photo 102 Below Left Center Of Dash Campaign - Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00-073 Date: 010313 Campaign - Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal Replacement 00-073 March 13, 2000 Applies To: SEE VEHICLES AFFECTED Product Update: Front Balancer Shaft Oil Seal (Supersedes 00-073, dated October 6, 2000) BACKGROUND The front balancer shaft oil seal may back out of the oil pump housing over time. If this happens, the oil can be rapidly pumped out of the engine without warning, causing serious engine damage if you continue to drive. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Page 5756 4. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the width of the reverse shift fork. Standard: 13.0 - 13.3 mm (0.51 - 0.52 inch) NOTE: If the width is not within the standard, replace the reverse shift fork with a new one. - If the width is within the standard, replace the reverse idler gear with a new one. Page 3681 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 9203 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3049 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1903 1. Remove the right side cover. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position/Top Dead Center (CKP/TDC) sensors, then remove the timing belt drive pulley. 3. Remove the balancer gear case. 4. Remove the front balancer driven pulley as shown. 5. Align the bolt hole and the balancer shaft hole, then insert a 6 x 100 mm bolt to hold the rear balancer shaft. Page 2902 Page 3903 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1665 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis By Symptom Part 1 Of 2 Radio - Static When Adjusting the Volume Radio/Stereo: Customer Interest Radio - Static When Adjusting the Volume 97-008 BODY FEB 3, 1997 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Static When Adjusting the Radio Volume PROBLEM Static from the speakers when the radio volume knob is first adjusted. After you move the knob a few times, the static usually stops. If the vehicle sits for several hours, the problem may recur. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Accord: LX: Coupe - ALL LX: Wagon - ALL LX: 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGCD5... TA274904 EX:ALL 1997 Accord: LX: Coupe -Thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA000775 EX: 4-door -Thru VIN 1HGCD5. . . VA016515 V6 -Thru VIN 1HGCE6. . . VA002045 Coupe -Thru VIN 1HGCD7... VA003007 Wagon-Thru VIN 1HGCE1 . . . VA001323 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with the correct remanufactured unit listed under PARTS INFORMATION. For radio removal, refer to page 23-211 of the 1996 or 1997 Accord Service Manual. NOTE: To return a removed radio, follow the appropriate steps in Service Bulletin 89-029, Audio Unit In Warranty Exchange/Out of Warranty Repair; dated May 6, 1996. PARTS INFORMATION Auto Radio Tuner: LX: P/N 39100-SV4-A01RM H/C 4260428 EX: 4-door - P/N 391 00-SV4-A00RM H/C 4435046 Coupe - P/N 391 00-SV2-A00RM H/C 4435020 Wagon - P/N 39100-SV5-A40RM H/C 4435087 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 9576 Page 7084 Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Balancing Page 3380 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 479 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3004 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5722 Mainshaft: Service and Repair MAINSHAFT, COUNTERSHAFT REMOVAL 1. Remove transaxle from car. See: Service and Repair 2. Remove transmission housing. See: Transmission Housing/Service and Repair 3. Remove reverse idler gear shaft. See: Reverse Gear Shaft 4. Remove the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies with the shin forks from the clutch housing. NOTE: Tape the mainshaft splines before removing the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies. NOTE: The 3rd/4th, and 5th synchro hubs, and the ball bearing are installed with a press. Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact surfaces. The 3rd/4th and 5th synchro hubs, however, should be installed with a press before lubricating them. MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY CLEARANCE INSPECTION NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and hub as a set. 1. Support the bearing inner race with a socket, and push down on the mainshaft. Page 1372 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2499 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3739 PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) Page 7191 Page 3756 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5430 Part 2 Of 2 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls. Secondary Page 7639 Air Bag: Description and Operation SRS AIRBAG The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and frontal impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, and side airbags (if equipped). Recall 99V069000: Lower Ball Joint Replacement Ball Joint: Recalls Recall 99V069000: Lower Ball Joint Replacement Certain vehicles were manufactured with ball joints that can prematurely wear out and, in the worse case, the ball joint would separate causing the front suspension to collapse. This condition would result in vehicle deceleration and a sudden loss of power. Also steering controllability would be reduced. Dealers will replace the front suspension lower ball joints. Owner notification began May 17, 1999. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009 or Acura 1-800-382-2238. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Driver Side Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Driver Side Motor Test: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. Driver's Window Motor Test 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the motor. Driver's Window Motor Test 3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: When the motor stops running, disconnect one lead immediately. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Pulser Test: 5. Connect the test leads of an analog ohmmeter to the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. 6. Run the motor by connecting power and ground to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. The ohmmeter needle should move back and forth alternately. Locations Pressure Switch: Locations Connector, Control Unit And Relay Locations Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 3888 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4161 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Page 2588 3. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater unit. CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage paint. Quickly rinse any spilled engine coolant from painted surfaces. NOTE: Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. 4. Remove the two mounting nuts from the heater unit. NOTE: When removing the mounting nuts, take care not to damage or bend the fuel pipes, brake pipes, etc. 5. Remove the dashboard. Removal Step One Removal Step Two Page 2804 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Page 4037 Page 5369 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3719 Page 5316 6. Check that the throttle control lever moves smoothly. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7979 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (Phone Will Not Switch To Hands-Free Mode) Page 8384 14. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 15. Install the rear channel and glass, and fit the glass run channel into the rear channel. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Page 4810 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 9276 Page 749 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2636 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R Page 3175 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Page 3540 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test 1. Remove the inside handle. 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Door Lock Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 892 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5680 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Locations Component/Wiring Location Index Page 1304 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Page 9783 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Recall - Lower Ball Joint Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 99-039 Date: 010327 Recall - Lower Ball Joint Replacement 99-039 March 21, 2001 Applies To: 1997-98 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996-98 Prelude - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-98 Odyssey - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Lower Ball Joints (Supersedes 99-039, dated June 29, 1999) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. BACKGROUND Certain vehicles were manufactured with front suspension lower ball joints that may prematurely wear out. In the worst case, the ball joints would separate without prior warning, causing the front suspension to collapse. Page 7561 A/C SWITCH REPLACEMENT Refer to illustration for A/C switch replacement. Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Capacity Automatic transmission 5.7 qt (US) Manual transmission 5.l6 qt (US) Type Ethylene glycol Page 3150 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 3788 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Page 4979 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 3558 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7941 Page 7288 A/C Pressure Switch Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Torque 33 ft.lb Page 5494 6. Measure the starting torque of the differential assembly with the special tool and a torque wrench. Standard to 1.4 - 2.5 Nm (12 - 23 inch lbs.). NOTE: Measure the tapered roller bearing preload at normal room temperature. - Measure the tapered roller bearing preload in both directions. 7. If the tapered roller bearing preload is not within the standard, select the thrust shim which will give the correct tapered roller bearing preload from the following table. NOTE: Changing the thrust shim to the next size will increase or decrease tapered roller bearing preload about 0.3 - 0.4 Nm (2.6 - 3.5 inch lbs.). 8. Recheck the tapered roller bearing preload. 9. How to select the correct thrust shim: a. Compare the tapered roller bearing preload you get with the thrust shim that was removed, with the specified preload of 1.4 - 2.5 Nm (12 - 23 inch lbs.). b. If your measured tapered roller bearing preload is less than specified, subtract yours from the specified. If yours is more than specified, subtract the specified from your measurement. For example with a 2.17 mm (0.0854 inch) thrust shim: (A) specified 2.5 Nm (23 inch lbs.) - you measure 0.6 Nm (5 inch lbs.) = 1.9 Nm (18 inch lbs.) less. (B) you measure 3.3 Nm (30 inch lbs.) - specified 2.5 Nm (23 inch lbs.) = 0.8 Nm (7 inch lbs.) more. c. Each shim size up or down from standard makes about 0.3 - 0.4 Nm (2.6 - 3.5 inch lbs.) difference in tapered roller bearings preload. In example (a), your measured tapered roller bearing preload was 1.9 Nm (18 inch lbs.) less than standard so you need a thrust shim five sizes thicker than standard (try the 2.32 mm (0.0913 inch) thrust shim, and recheck). In example (a), your measurement was 0.8 Nm (7 inch lbs.) Page 5581 3. Remove the four flange bolts, then separate the hub unit from the brake disc. 4. Separate the wheel bearing from the front hub using the special tools and a press as shown. CAUTION: Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 5. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the hub using the special tools and a commercially-available bearing separator as shown. 6. Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. NOTE: Wash the steering knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Page 1003 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 8777 Cigarette Lighter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Horn Relay ^ Cigarette lighter relay Page 6208 Brake Caliper: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Page 9139 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 7257 Compressor Clutch: Mechanical Specifications Clutch Air Gap 0.5 +/- 0.15 mm (0.020 +/- 0.006 in) Page 2483 Page 7129 9. If necessary, Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. NOTE: Align the projection in the splash guard with the hole on the steering knuckle. 10. Install the steering knuckle on the hub unit and tighten the flange bolts. Refer to Steering and Suspension. Page 4559 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8984 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3429 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Page 165 Above idle, passage 1 is closed, and liquid flows only through passage 2. Dampening increases, and vibration above idle is reduced. Alignment Piston Ring: Testing and Inspection Alignment 1. Install the rings as shown. Identify top and second rings by the chamfer on the edge. Make sure they are in their proper grooves on the piston. NOTE: The manufacturing marks must be facing upward. 2. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind. 3. Position the ring end gaps as shown. Page 9335 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1295 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Page 5345 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the lock-up control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 2838 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8663 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity with the lever released (hood opened). ^ There should be no continuity with the lever pushed down (hood closed). Page 7823 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2170 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7182 Air Door Cable: Adjustments Heater Valve Cable 1. Disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm and clamp, and from the heater control arm and clamp. 2. Set the temperature control dial to MAX. COOL. 3. Turn the heater control arm, as shown, then connect the end of the heater valve cable to the heater control arm. 4. Gently slide the heater valve cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the heater valve cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop, then snap the heater valve cable housing into the clamp. 5. Turn the heater valve arm, as shown, then connect the end of the heater valve cable to the heater valve arm. 6. Gently slide the heater valve cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the heater valve cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move, then snap the heater valve cable housing into the clamp. NOTE: The air mix control cable should always be adjusted whenever the heater valve cable has been disconnected. Page 8513 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Page 7650 6. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag, and seal it securely. CAUTION: Wear a face shield and gloves when handling a deployed airbag. - Wash your hands and rinse them well with water after handling a deployed airbag. Deployment Tool Check Procedure DEPLOYMENT TOOL CHECK PROCEDURE 1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery. 2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty. 3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips. Page 7549 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. System Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair System Bleeding Anti-Lock Brake System Modulator Unit Relieving System Pressure/Brake Fluid Replacement/Bleeding CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this section is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder. NOTE: Do not remove the rubber tube and wrench yet. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 7. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: The modulator has a capacity of approximately 150 ml (150 cc, 5 FL-oz). Approximately 40 - 45 ml (40 - 45 cc, 1.3 - 1.5 FL-oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. 9. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. Page 4694 Page 7239 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7385 Page 2758 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 3543 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3485 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Removal Crankshaft: Service and Repair Removal Page 4425 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7376 Page 8234 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4442 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 2399 Page 5710 Synchronizer Ring: Specifications DIMENSIONS Ring-to-Gear Clearance Standard: 0.85-1.10 mm (0.033-0.043 inch) Service Limit: 0.4 mm (0.016 inch) Double Cone-to-Gear Clearance Standard: A:(Outer Synchro Ring to Synchro Cone) 0.5-1.0 mm (0.020-0.039 inch) B:(Synchro Cone to Gear) 0.5-1.0 mm (0.020-0.039 inch) C:(Outer Synchro Ring to Gear) 0.95-1.68 mm (0.037-0.066 inch) Service Limit: A: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Page 3812 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Right Side Of Tailgate Page 2334 Page 4185 Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Testing and Inspection NOTE: The fast idle thermo valve is factory adjusted; it should not be disassembled. 1. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body. 2. Start the engine. 3. Put your finger over the lower port in throttle body, and make sure that there is air flow with the engine cold (engine coolant temperature below 86 °F, 30°C). If there is no air flow, replace the fast idle thermo valve and retest. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Check that valve is completely closed. If the valve is leaking, the idle speed will drop when you cover the lower port. Check engine coolant level and for air in the engine cooling system. If the cooling system is OK, replace the fast idle thermo valve and recheck. Close Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Close Photo 89 Above Left Kick Panel Page 8168 Page 5308 4. If not perfectly aligned, loosen the locknut on the cable adjuster, and adjust as required. 5. Tighten the locknut. 6. Install the lock pin on the adjuster. If you feel the lock pin binding as you reinstall it, the cable is still out of adjustment and must be readjusted. 7. Make sure the lock pin is seated securely in the adjuster. 8. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the A/T gear position switch. 9. Start the engine and check the shift lever in all gears. 10. Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder on the A/T gear position indicator panel, and verify that the shift lock lever is released. Page 5290 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 6872 66. Adjust the air hose fitting position of the boots by turning it as shown below. 67. Connect the air tube between the right and left boot, then install the clips on the cylinder line B as shown. 68. Install new boot bands on the boot and bend both sets of locking tabs. 69. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to reduce their height. CAUTION: Stake the band locking tabs firmly. 70. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted. In-Line Diode A Diode: Locations In-Line Diode A Below Left Side Of Dash Page 1266 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Page 1765 Page 8957 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 37 General Module: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit - Circuit Diagram Page 2732 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Page 8744 ABS Light: Description and Operation ABNORMALITY DETECTION The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control unit turns the ABS indicator light on when one or more of the following abnormalities are detected. This is only a partial list. When the operating time of the motor in the power unit exceeds the specified period. - When vehicle running time exceeds 30 seconds without releasing the parking brake. - When absence of speed signals from any of the four wheel sensor is detected. - When the activation time of all solenoids exceeds a given time, or an open circuit is detected in the solenoid system. - When solenoid output is not detected in the simulated ABS operation when the engine is started or the vehicle is driven. BULB CHECK To check the indicator light bulb, the light is activated when the ignition switch is first turned on. The light goes off after the engine is started if there is no abnormality in the system. Page 2816 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8521 NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on one of the transmitters. (A non-programmed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times with the transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the same transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 7. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on each transmitter. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle) Check that the power door locks cycle after you push each transmitter button, confirming that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 8 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Page 155 Page 8546 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 5217 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5628 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4868 Page 5741 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 6267 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity (approx) ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 150 ml (5.0 fl.oz) Page 1242 Master Switch Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the power window master switch, and only controls driver's door window operations. 1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the 14-P and 1-P connectors from the master switch. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Page 4822 Page 536 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Page 10021 3. Adjust the front channel. 4. Adjust the window regulator. 5. Adjust the glass. 6. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. Page 1643 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair ECM/PCM (MIL) RESET PROCEDURE WITH HONDA PGM TESTER OR OBDII SCANTOOL ^ Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. ^ NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. WITHOUT HONDA PGM TESTER OR OBDII SCANTOOL Page 8102 Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator - Component Location Index Page 270 Page 1780 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3387 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. ABS Fail-Safe Relay Fail Safe Relay: Locations ABS Fail-Safe Relay Front Behind Right Side Of Dash Rear Page 7906 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Page 6485 Fuse: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Removal Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Removal 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of the car and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. Page 6196 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Hydraulic Component Bleeding and Fluid Service Modulator Unit Relieving System Pressure/Brake Fluid Replacement/Bleeding CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this section is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder. NOTE: Do not remove the rubber tube and wrench yet. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 7. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: The modulator has a capacity of approximately 150 ml (150 cc, 5 FL-oz). Approximately 40 - 45 ml (40 - 45 cc, 1.3 - 1.5 FL-oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. 9. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. 10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. When the brake fluid is completely drained Page 9388 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 8994 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4238 Page 3478 Page 2932 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Page 2243 5. Measure taper at the edges of each journal. ^ The difference between measurements on each journal must not exceed the standard. Journal Taper ^ Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) 6. Measure runout on the No. 2 journal of each balancer shaft to make sure the balancer shafts are not bent. ^ Balancer Shaft Total Indicated Runout Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 inch) - Service Limit: 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) Page 1431 10. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing belt and timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. NOTE: When removing the timing balancer belt only: ^ Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. ^ Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing belt. Page 9669 Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Capacity Automatic transmission 5.7 qt (US) Manual transmission 5.l6 qt (US) Type Ethylene glycol Page 6110 Grease Caliper Pin & Boot 2. Apply rubber grease to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. 3. Install the pin boots into the groove in the caliper bracket properly. 4. Insert the pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 5. Install the pin boots into the groove in the pins properly. 6. Install the brake pad retainers and brake pads. 7. Align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad. 8. Install the caliper on the caliper bracket, and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. 9. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. Specs ^ Caliper Bracket Mounting Bolts 38 Nm (28 lb.ft.) ^ Banjo Bolts 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) ^ Caliper Mounting Bolts 25 Nm (18 lb.ft.) Brake Cable Removal & Installation 10. Insert the cable through the arm, and connect the cable to the lever with the clevis pin and lock pin. Install the cable clip securely. Page 9152 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 116 Right Side Of Cargo Area (Left Similar) Page 9097 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6562 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 10002 Coupe: Note: Make sure the lower center glass run channel is fitted into the center channel. 13. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 14. Install the glass. 15. Coupe: Install the center channel guide and channel guide cover. NOTE: Make sure the guide pin is installed in the center channel guide properly. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Main Control ABS Control Unit: Description and Operation Main Control ABS Control Unit Function PURPOSE The Anti-Lock Brake Sysytem (ABS) control unit consists of a main function, which controls the operation of the anti-lock brake system, and sub-function, which controls the pump motor and self-diagnosis". FUNCTION For safety, the main function consists of two systems, and the ABScontrol unit activates the solenoid valve only when the outputs of the two systems agree with each other. Main The main function section of the ABS control unit performs calculations on the basis of the signals from each wheel sensor, and controls the operation of the anti-lock brake system by activating the solenoid valves in the modulator unit for each front brake and for the two rear brakes. The ABS has individual control of the front wheels and common control ("Select Low") for the rear wheels. "Select Low" means that the rear wheel that would lock first (the one with the lowest resistance to lock-up) determines the ABS activation for both rear wheels. Sub The sub-function section has the fail-safe function that monitors the system operation by inputting the brake switch, parking brake switch and pressure switch signals, and stops the anti-lock brake system when it detects an abnormality in the system. It also has a self-diagnosis function and controls the pump motor. Diagram Information and Instructions Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5905 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1498 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant/Anti-freeze Ethylene Glycol Based Coolant Concentration Minimum 50 % Maximum 60 % Page 333 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4743 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Photo 106 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 106 Left Rear Of Trunk Page 7454 Heater Core: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before: - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot; the engine coolant is under pressure and could severely scald you. 2. Open the clamp, then disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm. Page 8483 Control Unit Input Test 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Disconnect the 18-P and 12-P connectors from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace it. Page 4667 Page 9818 Page 995 Page 3843 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 1910 13. Hold the front balancer shaft with a screwdriver, then install the timing balancer belt driven pulley. 14. Before installing the balancer driven gear and the balancer gear case, apply molybdenum disulfide to the thrust surfaces of the balancer gears as shown. Page 9371 Page 1336 Idle Speed: Adjustments NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: M/T: 550 ± 50 rpm A/T: 550 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the idle adjusting screw. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector to the IAC valve, then remove the BACK UP (RADIO) (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to reset the ECM/PCM. 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: Page 6559 Fuses - Under-hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Page 8137 - If there is distortion coming from all four speakers, disregard this bulletin and follow normal troubleshooting procedures. 3. With the audio unit on and distortion coming from the front speaker(s), lightly press the speaker cone with your fingers. To prevent damage to the speaker, do not restrict movement of the cone for more than a few seconds. 4. If the noise subsides or is eliminated, replace the speaker(s). If the noise does not change, disregard this bulletin and follow normal troubleshooting procedures. 5. Reinstall the door panel(s) or the front speaker cover(s), and confirm the distortion is gone. Page 7368 Heater Control Panel - Replacement 5. Remove the five self-tapping screws and the heater control panel from the instrument panel. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the air mix control cable at the heater unit. If necessary, adjust the heater valve cable. Overhaul HEATER CONTROL PANEL OVERHAUL Refer to illustration for component replacement. Page 4120 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 6664 to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Page 3615 Page 4240 Page 1346 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 12 mm sealing nut on side of the fuel rail. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 12 mm sealing nut at the fuel rail. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 12 mm sealing nut. 6. Slowly loosen the 12 mm sealing nut one complete turn. NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the 12 mm sealing nut is loosened or removed. Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 4448 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5208 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair NOTE: Loosen the battery set bolt, and move the battery set plate before removing the ACL housing cover. Page 8814 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 3282 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Removal Piston: Service and Repair Removal Page 9338 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations Front Of Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Page 5969 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 1226 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5800 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in Fuel and Emissions. Page 2169 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5701 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Page 3995 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9358 Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada) 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 14-P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Page 1319 Alignment: Service and Repair Alignment Camber NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: - Front: (0°00' ± 1°) -1° to +1° - Rear: (-0°25' ± 30') -0.92° to +0.09° 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Caster NOTE: Caster angle can be adjusted by increasing/decreasing the number of the adjusting shims. Remove and install the radius rod each time the caster angle is adjusted. 1. Raise the front of the car, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the self-locking nut on the end of the radius rod. 3. Remove the flange bolts at the radius rod on the lower arm, and remove the radius rod. 4. Adjust the caster angle by increasing/decreasing the adjusting shims. NOTE: Do not use more than two adjusting shims. - One adjusting shim changes the caster angle by 35' and the caster angle can be adjusted by 1°10' maximum. - One adjusting shim is 3.2 mm (0.13 inch) in thickness. 5. After the adjustment, install the radius rod onto the lower arm, and tighten the flange bolts. 6. Tighten the new self-locking nut to specified torque. Toe-In NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the tire pressure. 2. Center steering wheel spokes. 3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe: (0 ± 3 mm /0 ± 1/8 inch) -0.13 to +0.13 inch. a. If adjustment is required, go on to step 4. b. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. 4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts, and turn both tie-rods in the same direction until the front wheels are in straight ahead position. 5. Turn both tie-rods equally until the toe reading on the turning radius gauge is correct. Page 9651 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3378 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6679 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe-In Toe-in is the turning of the front wheels. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Page 1592 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 2507 Fans (Without A/C) Page 5472 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07LAF-PT00110 Clutch Alignment Shaft - 07JAF-PM7011A Clutch Alignment Disc - 07936-3710100 Remover Handle - 07LAB-PV00100 Ring Gear Holder - 07924-PD20003 Ring Gear Holder - Or Equivalent REMOVAL 1. Assemble the special tools as shown. NOTE: Assemble the Clutch Alignment Disc with side "A" facing the diaphragm spring as shown. 2. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tools and a feeler gauge. - Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) max. - Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 inch). NOTE: If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 3. Install the special tools as shown. 4. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate. 5. Inspect the pressure plate surface for wear, cracks, and burning. Photo 71 Cigarette Lighter Relay: Locations Photo 71 Behind Front Console Page 6497 Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3527 Page 9717 Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch At Left Rear Door Striker (Right Similar) Page 466 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Main Valve Body Valve Body: Testing and Inspection Main Valve Body Part 1 Of 2 Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage 99-062 January 15, 2007 Applies To: ALL Paint Damage From Environmental Fallout (Supersedes 99-062, dated October 12, 1999 to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The exterior paint surface does not feel smooth after the vehicle is washed. PROBABLE CAUSE Environmental fallout (airborne metallic particles, tree sap, paint overspray, road tar, insect residue, etc.) has adhered to the exterior paint surface. NOTE: This form of paint damage should not be confused with acid rain damage. Unlike environmental fallout damage, acid rain damage appears on the paint surface as pits or water spots-possibly black or brown in the center-which may feel smooth to the touch. PREVENTION The shipping wax/wrap guard applied to the vehicle at the factory provides the best protection for the paint finish from environmental fallout and acid rain damage. American Honda strongly recommends that you leave the shipping wax/wrap guard on the vehicle for as long as possible. Your dealership is responsible for maintaining the vehicle's finish after the shipping wax/ wrap guard is removed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a product line from one of the manufacturers listed in REQUIRED MATERIALS to clean the paint surface and to wax it after cleaning. Make sure you follow the manufacturer's instructions for each of the products you use. REQUIRED MATERIALS Each of the clays listed should do at least three vehicles. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 7978 In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (In-Dash Phone Does Not Power Up) Page 7547 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 10001 11. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 12. Install the front and center channels, and the glass run channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel into the front and center channels, and on the door as shown. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 2651 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge - Gauge Test 1. Check the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then disconnect the YEL/GRN wire from the ECT gauge sending unit and ground it with a jumper wire. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the pointer of the ECT gauge starts moving toward the "H" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "H on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge. ^ If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all, check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the wires are OK, replace the ECT gauge. ^ If the ECT gauge works, test the ECT sending unit. Page 801 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 5309 Shift Cable: Service and Repair WARNING: - Make sure lifts, jacks and safety stands are placed properly, and hoist brackets are attached to the correct position on the engine. - Apply parking brake and block rear wheels so vehicle will not roll off stands and fall on you while working under it. CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console. 2. Shift to N position, then remove the lock pin from the cable adjuster. 3. Remove the bolts securing the bracket. 4. Remove the shift cable cover. Page 6716 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair FLUID REPLACEMENT NOTE: Check the reservoir at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. CAUTION: Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose to drain the reservoir. 2. Connect a hose of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. CAUTION: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. CAUTION: Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Page 2827 Page 8249 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams Trailer Lighting Connector (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1119 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8292 Page 6742 1. When the engine starts, fluid discharged from the discharge port starts to flow through oil passage A, the fixed orifice and the variable orifice to the steering gearbox. When the engine speed is extremely low, the return port is closed by the flow control valve. Fluid pressure discharged from the discharge port is applied to the top of the sub-valve, and the fluid pressure that passed through oil passage A is applied to the bottom of the sub-valve. Therefore, the pressure difference between the ends of oil passage A, which is caused by the resistance oil passage A when the fluid flows through the passage, is applied to the sub-valve. However, the pressure difference applied to the sub-valve, that is, the force that pushes the sub-valve down, is too small to overcome the spring force, and the variable orifice is fully open when the engine speed is extremely low. 2. Because the fluid volume flowing through the fixed orifice and variable orifice increases, a pressure difference is created between the ends of these orifices, and it increases in proportion to the engine speed. As the fluid pressure that passed the fixed orifice and variable orifice is directed to the bottom of the flow control valve, a pressure difference is created between the top and bottom of the valve, which pushes down the flow control valve and opens the return port. As a result, part of the fluid discharged from the discharge port returns to the pump suction port, keeping the discharge volume constant. In this condition, the sub-valve does not move, and the variable orifice stays fully open. Page 9119 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Page 2309 18. Align the groove on the front balancer shaft pulley with the pointer on the oil pump housing as shown. 19. Install the timing balancer belt. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn to tension the timing balancer belt. 20. Remove the 6 x 100 mm bolt from the rear balancer shaft, then install the 12 mm sealing bolt. 21. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley about one turn counterclockwise, then tighten the adjusting nut. 23. Remove the 6 x 1.0 mm bolt from the timing belt adjuster arm. 24. Remove the crankshaft pulley, then install the lower cover. 25. Install the rubber seal around the adjusting nut. NOTE: Do not loosen the adjusting nut. 26. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 27. After installation, adjust the tension of each belt. Page 1314 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Caster is the tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward from the vertical (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Page 9205 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Indicator Input Test Page 9262 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1113 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4369 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6535 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 3032 Photo 102 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Photo 102 Below Left Center Of Dash Page 1657 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Page 8834 Page 4615 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - The original radio has a coded then protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7:5 A) fuse from the underhood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. - After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then the positive terminal. 2. Remove the left front tire/wheel and the splash shield. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolt and mounting nuts, then remove the P/S pump belt. 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 7. Remove the cylinder head cover. 8. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. 9. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut, then remove the upper and lower covers. NOTE: Do not use the upper and lower covers for storing removed items. 10. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place by installing one of the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts. 11. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing balancer belt, then retighten the adjusting nut. 12. Remove the timing balancer belt and timing balancer belt drive pulley. 13. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP)/Top Dead Center (TDC) sensors connector, then remove the CKP/TDC sensor. 14. Install the CKP/TDC sensors in reverse order of removal. Page 9223 Page 6842 Steering Gear: Vehicle Damage Warnings NOTE: - If an intact airbag assembly has been removed from a scrapped vehicle or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed. - Before removing the gearbox, remove the driver's airbag assembly and steering wheel. - After installing the gearbox, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Page 5860 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Mount Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5838 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 890 Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Resistance 25 K ohms Note: Resistance at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) Page 2259 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Installation, Engine Removed NOTE: The seal surface on the block should be dry. Apply a light coat of oil to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 1. Drive in crankshaft oil seal against right side cover. NOTE: Drive the crankshaft oil seal in squarely. 2. Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way around with a feeler gauge. ^ Clearance: 0.5-0.8 mm (0.02-0.03 inch) NOTE: Refer oil pump for installation of the oil pump side crankshaft oil seal. Page 2331 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7455 3. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater unit. CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage paint. Quickly rinse any spilled engine coolant from painted surfaces. NOTE: Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. 4. Remove the two mounting nuts from the heater unit. NOTE: When removing the mounting nuts, take care not to damage or bend the fuel pipes, brake pipes, etc. 5. Remove the dashboard. Removal Step One Removal Step Two Page 3539 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6867 36. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gear housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder housing with the rack edges. 37. Install the flange bolt into the end of the steering rack until it bottoms in the hole, then back the flange bolt out 1/4 turn. Hold the flange bolt and tighten the flange nut against the rack by hand. 38. Install the cylinder end seal into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the bolt with a press as shown. CAUTION: Do not push on the bolt with excessive force as it may damage the cylinder end seal. 39. Remove the flange bolt, and center the steering rack. 40. Install the special tool onto the end of the steering rack, then coat the special tool with power steering fluid. 41. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal with power steering fluid. 42. Install the cylinder end seal onto the steering rack with its grooved side toward the piston. 43. Remove the special tool. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. NOTE: Take care not to damage the cylinder end seal with the threads and burrs at the staked position of the gearbox. Page 3467 Page 6101 Brake Caliper: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - Keep grease off the discs and pads. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Page 3649 Page 3630 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 8754 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 267 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7765 4. Place the flat portion of the jaws over the tongue stopper, and squeeze until the vise-grip jaws lock and deform the stopper shaft. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Belt Tongue Stopper: WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Warranty Coverage: Seat belts that fail to function properly during normal use are covered under warranty for the useful life of the car. Warranty Does Not Cover: ^ Malfunction due to abuse, alteration, accidental damage or damage resulting from a collision or misuse. ^ Replacement of a properly functioning seat belt for cosmetic or comfort reasons. Operation number: 854125 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour (one or two sides) Failed part: P/N 04814-SM1-AO2ZA [NEW] H/C 3919289 Defect code: L18 Contention code: A02 Page 8908 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4850 Connector Pin Color And Function Chart CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly, and disconnect all connectors from it. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 22-P (C6O9) and 16-P (C6O7) connectors. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board A. Page 7587 Heater Fan Switch: Testing and Inspection Heater Fan Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table below. Page 8469 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Passenger's Door Lock Actuator Test 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the actuator does not work properly, replace it. Page 55 Control Unit Input Test 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Disconnect the 18-P and 12-P connectors from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace it. Page 6406 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Testing and Inspection Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Light Controller Input Test Controller Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash lights brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard, then disconnect the 3-P connector from the controller. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Page 4443 Page 8599 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof Open/Close Relay ^ Moonroof open relay ^ Moonroof close relay Page 2193 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9674 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6702 7. Remove the wheel sensor wire bracket, then remove the wheel sensor from the steering knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use ball joint removers to separate the ball joints from the suspension or tie-rod end. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 8. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 9. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod end ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 10. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 11. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. 12. Use the ball joint remover, 28 mm, as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. 13. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Page 8231 Page 2777 Page 7086 Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Inflation of Tires Tire pressure, in cold condition (after vehicle has set for three hours or more, and driven less than one mile) should be checked monthly or before any extended trip. Tire pressure increases approximately 15% when the tires become hot during driving. Tire pressure specification is shown on the label located on the left door lock pillar. NOTE: Check the tire pressure whenever irregular wear is found. Tire inflation greatly affects tire wear. If the alignment check does not reveal any alignment problems, check the condition of the shock absorbers and wheel/tire balance. Tire Replacement TIRE REPLACEMENT When replacement is necessary, the original metric the size should be used. Most metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. It is recommended that new tires be installed in pairs on the same axle. If necessary to replace only one tire, it should be paired with tire having the most tread, to equalize braking traction. CAUTION: Do not mix different types of tires such as radial, bias and bias-belted tires except in emergencies, because vehicle handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control. Tire Dismounting Remove valve cap on valve step and deflate the tire. Then use a tire changing machine to mount or dismount tires. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instruction. Do not use hand tools or tire lever alone to change tires as they may damage the tire beads or wheel rim. Page 3480 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Security Horn Alarm Horn: Locations Security Horn Left Side of Engine Compartment Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 3916 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 3358 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1000 Main Control ABS Control Unit: Description and Operation Main Control ABS Control Unit Function PURPOSE The Anti-Lock Brake Sysytem (ABS) control unit consists of a main function, which controls the operation of the anti-lock brake system, and sub-function, which controls the pump motor and self-diagnosis". FUNCTION For safety, the main function consists of two systems, and the ABScontrol unit activates the solenoid valve only when the outputs of the two systems agree with each other. Main The main function section of the ABS control unit performs calculations on the basis of the signals from each wheel sensor, and controls the operation of the anti-lock brake system by activating the solenoid valves in the modulator unit for each front brake and for the two rear brakes. The ABS has individual control of the front wheels and common control ("Select Low") for the rear wheels. "Select Low" means that the rear wheel that would lock first (the one with the lowest resistance to lock-up) determines the ABS activation for both rear wheels. Sub The sub-function section has the fail-safe function that monitors the system operation by inputting the brake switch, parking brake switch and pressure switch signals, and stops the anti-lock brake system when it detects an abnormality in the system. It also has a self-diagnosis function and controls the pump motor. Page 8356 NOTE: If necessary, remove the glass stopper. 9. Remove the front and center channels. Page 3676 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Page 2166 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 7429 Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments 1. Disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm and clamp, and from the heater control arm and clamp. 2. Set the temperature control dial to MAX. COOL. 3. Turn the heater control arm, as shown, then connect the end of the heater valve cable to the heater control arm. Heater Valve Cable - Adjustment 4. Gently slide the heater valve cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the heater valve cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop, then snap the heater valve cable housing into the clamp. 5. Turn the heater valve arm, as shown, then connect the end of the heater valve cable to the heater valve arm. Heater Valve Cable - Adjustment 6. Gently slide the heater valve cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the neater valve cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move, then snap the heater valve cable housing into the clamp. NOTE: The air mix control cable should always be adjusted whenever the heater valve cable has been disconnected. Page 4299 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3945 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 1 through the YEL wire to the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts or more to the ORN wire. The VSS intermittently grounds the ORN wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Page 8700 Cruise Control Module: Locations Photographs Left Side Of Dash - Photo 79 Page 4293 Page 9184 Page 9381 Page 6105 Caliper Piston Removal ^ If necessary, apply compressed air to the caliper fluid inlet to get the piston out. Place a shop rag or wooden block as shown to cushion the piston when it is expelled Use low pressure air in short spurts. ^ Remove the piston from the caliper, and check the piston for scoring on surface. Caliper Seal & Boot Orientation ^ Remove the piston boot and piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. Installation Page 9736 Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Carefully pry the hazard warning switch out of the front console panel. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 9260 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1316 Page 3693 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 6457 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 9860 Turn Signal And Hazard Warning Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8296 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 954 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3507 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 4251 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 5027 13. Measure the clearance between the clutch end plate and top disc with a dial indicator. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end plate lowered, then lift it up to the snap ring. The distance that the clutch end plate moves is the clearance between the clutch end plate and top disc. NOTE: Measure at three locations. Page 3119 Page 4862 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 206 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4248 Page 8711 Actuator Disassembly Page 4953 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 1081 Page 437 Page 3726 Page 2638 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Page 9792 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 978 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Mechanical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 8835 Removal and Installation Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm NOTE: Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the valve body unit and its lines, and the end if the gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air. 1. Drain the power steering fluid. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it on safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the front wheels. 4. Remove the driver's airbag assembly and steering wheel. 5. Remove the steering joint cover. 6. Remove the steering joint bolts, then disconnect the steering joint by moving the joint toward the column. 7. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. Page 327 Page 6957 NOTE: - Wipe off the dirt, oil or grease on the threads before tightening the fasteners. - The right and left damper forks are not interchangeable. The left damper fork is marked with "V4L" while the right damper fork is marked with "V4R". - The right and left upper arms are not interchangeable. The left upper arm is marked with "VL" or "VLG" while the right arm is marked with "VR" or "VRG". - The stabilizer bar is symmetrical. Install with the paint mark facing rear of the vehicle. - After installing the suspension arm, check the front wheel alignment, and adjust if necessary. Page 3313 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5604 Page 1085 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Front Wheel Sensor: Locations Front Behind Left Front Wheel (Right Similar) Page 3231 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Top End Inspection 1. Check for rough or pitted distributor ignition (DI) rotor and distributor ignition (DI) cap terminals. 2. Scrape or file off the carbon deposits. Smooth the distributor ignition (DI) rotor terminal with an oil stone or #600 sandpaper if rough. 3. Check the distributor ignition (DI) cap for cracks, wear and damage. If necessary, clean or replace it. Page 4649 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Left Side Of Dash Page 3584 Page 6139 Pad Retainer Installation - Install the pad retainers. Pad And Shim Installation - Apply Molykote M77 grease to the both sides of the pad shims and the back of the pads. Wipe excess grease off the shim. - Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. NOTE: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Install the pad with the wear indicator on the inside. WARNING: Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 2184 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 6492 Fuse Block: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 8026 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 7487 Receiver Dryer: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity 10 mL Page 6995 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 2. Position the damper mounting base on the rear damper unit as shown. 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 4. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. Page 148 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1842 Page 8328 7. Disconnect the following: ^ Power window connectors ^ Power mirror connector (driver's) ^ Courtesy light connector Page 424 Page 7678 7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove the column covers (B, C). 8. Disconnect the SRS main harness 2P connector (A) from the cable reel 2P connector (B), then disconnect the dashboard harness 4P connector (C) from the cable reel (D). Page 2776 Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 5667 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid ............................................................................................................................. Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations Driver's Door (Right Front Similar) Page 4398 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9624 License, Parking, Side Marker Lights And Taillights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3098 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Page 3554 Page 2455 Water Pump: Service and Repair NOTE: Use new O-rings when reassembling. 1. Remove the timing belt. Refer to Engine. 2. Remove the camshaft pulley and the back cover. Page 8319 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Pull out the outer handle. Pry the outer handle rod out of its joint using diagonal cutters. NOTE: ^ To ease reassembly, note location A of the outer handle rod on the joint before disconnecting it. ^ Take care not to bend the outer handle rod. ^ Use a shop towel to protect the opening in the door. 6. Disconnect the cylinder rod as shown. NOTE: Take care not to damage the lock cylinder joint. Page 5021 NOTE: For 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th clutches. CAUTION: If either end of the compressor attachment is set over an area of the spring retainer which is unsupported by the return spring, the retainer may be damaged. Be sure the special tool is adjusted to have full contact with the spring retainer. 4. Compress the return spring. Page 9319 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3081 Page 476 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 499 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Service Precautions Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings: Service Precautions WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly connects the in-tank fuel pump with the fuel feed pipe. For removing or installing the fuel pump and fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to following: - The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly is not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage it during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly is not acid-proof; do not touch it with a shop towel which was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace the fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly if it came into contact with electrolyte or something similar. - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly, be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. Replace it if damaged. A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating pipe cannot be reused once it has been removed from the pipe. Replace the retainer when - Replacing the fuel pump. - Replacing the fuel feed pipe. - It has been removed from the pipe. - It is damaged. Mainshaft Speed Sensor Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Side Of Transmission, Beneath Battery Page 5118 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair Specifications Steering Wheel: Specifications Torque Specifications Steering wheel Bolt .............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 38 Nm (28 ft lb) Page 588 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9885 Page 1415 Valve Clearance: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. Page 92 Relay Identification Page 9979 10. Coupe: If necessary, remove the lower center glass run channel from the center channel. NOTE: When installing the lower center glass run channel, apply clear sealant to location ® on the center channel. Page 1579 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 9475 Horn Relay: Locations Picture Location Behind Front Console - Photo 72 Mainshaft Speed Sensor Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Side Of Transmission, Beneath Battery Diagrams Page 9320 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5297 Page 5025 CAUTION: If either end of the compressor attachment is set over an area of the spring retainer which is unsupported by the return spring, the retainer may be damaged. Be sure the special tool is adjusted to have full contact with the spring retainer. 6. Compress the return spring. 7. Install the snap ring. 8. Remove the special tools. Page 1806 ^ Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance: - Standard (New): 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 inch) - Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 7. If camshaft-to-holder oil clearance is out of tolerance: ^ And the camshaft has already been replaced, you must replace the cylinder head. ^ If camshaft has not been replaced, first check total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks. ^ Camshaft Total Runout: Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. - Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) ^ If the total runout of the camshaft is within tolerance, replace the cylinder head. ^ If the total runout is out of tolerance, replace the camshaft and recheck. If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head. 8. Measure cam lobe height. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1393 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque 13 ft lb (18 Nm) Page 3915 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 6153 3. Attach the driveshaft on the drive motor assembly to the mounting yoke, making sure the center line of the driveshaft is level with the spindle nut on the wheel hub. 4. Set the lower toggle switch on the drive motor assembly to FWD (counterclockwise rotation) or REV (clockwise rotation). Setting Up and Adjusting the Brake Lathe Use Kwik-Way cutting bits, P/N KWY-109109223, and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped KW and are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Before you use the brake lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure the tips are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. If a tip is worn, rotate the bit, and use a new tip. A worn tip produces a poor finish and may cause chattering. Page 3577 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 901 Headlight Switch (Part 2 Of 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Coil: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4735 7. Reconnect the ECM/PCM 32-P connector. 8. Disconnect the 22-P connector from the gauge assembly, and check for continuity on the BLU wire between the ICM and tachometer. There should be continuity. 9. Check for continuity on the BLU wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. 10. If all the tests are normal, reconnect the 22-P connector to the gauge, and replace the ICM. * F22B1 ENGINE Page 442 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 3475 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 4666 Page 7188 Blower Motor: Locations Behind Right Side Of Dash Page 6793 A/C Suction Hose/Line Page 164 Engine Mount Control Unit: Description and Operation NOTE: Unlike previous liquid engine mounts, this engine mount control system reduces vibration at idle range without affecting vibration damping above idle. DESCRIPTION The system is comprised of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the solenoid valve and the rear mount with built-in diaphragm actuator. OPERATION The PCM receives the engine rpm signals and sends a signal to the solenoid valve to open only at idle. When the solenoid valve opens, intake manifold vacuum is applied to the diaphragm actuator, and the rotor valve located in the rear mount rotates 80 degrees. The mount has Chamber A on its upper part and Chamber B on the lower part. The rotor valve located between these two chambers controls the quantity of liquid that flows between them. At idle, the rotor valve opens, and liquid flows through passages 1 and 2. Dampening decreases, and vibration at idle is reduced. Page 5022 5. Remove the snap ring. Then remove the special tools, spring retainer and return spring. 6. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the piston. Place a finger tip on the other end while applying air pressure. ASSEMBLE NOTE: Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. - Blow out all passages. - Lubricate all parts with ATF before assembly. 1. Inspect the check valve; if it's loose, replace the piston. Page 5200 Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Mounting Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 12 Nm (107 in. lbs.) Page 4612 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6073 Rear Wheel Sensor Remove & Install Page 9889 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4151 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 8931 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Page 2110 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3330 Right Rear Of Engine Page 84 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 7679 9. Remove the screws (A) from the cable reel, then remove the cable reel from the column. Page 10043 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper Switch Wiper/Washer Switch Test Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7-P and 20-P connectors from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the wiper/washer switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Page 9626 Page 1925 1. Remove the right side cover. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position/Top Dead Center (CKP/TDC) sensors, then remove the timing belt drive pulley. 3. Remove the balancer gear case. 4. Remove the front balancer driven pulley as shown. 5. Align the bolt hole and the balancer shaft hole, then insert a 6 x 100 mm bolt to hold the rear balancer shaft. Page 1198 Page 8627 Motor Test - Front Up-Down Motor 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in power seat wire harness A between the 6-P connector and the 2-P connectors. If the harness is OK, replace the motor. Electrical Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Specifications Torque and Resistance Values Torque and Resistance Values Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 5461 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments NOTE: - Check the clutch interlock switch and clutch switch. - The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. CAUTION: If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing is held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen locknut A, and back off the clutch switch (or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal. 2. Loosen locknut C, and turn the push rod in or out to get the specified stroke (A) and height (C) at the clutch pedal. 3. Tighten locknut C. 4. Turn the clutch switch (or adjusting bolt) in until it contacts the clutch pedal. 5. Turn the clutch switch in an additional 1/4 -1/2 turn. 6. Tighten locknut A. 7. Loosen locknut B and the clutch interlock switch. 8. Measure the clearance between the floor board and clutch pedal with the clutch pedal fully depressed. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 inch) from the fully depressed position and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Turn the clutch interlock switch in an additional 1/4 -1/2 turn. 11. Tighten locknut B. Page 6539 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 6009 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Electrical Specifications Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Electrical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 2839 Page 110 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 3097 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Page 8307 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9824 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8280 Trailer Lighting Connector (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8983 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 5377 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9598 Marker Lamp: Service and Repair 1. Remove the screw, and separate the front parking in front side marker lights from the headlight assembly. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the headlight and the front fender. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connectors from the light. 3. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise, remove it from the light housing, then replace the bulb. Page 8782 Page 2590 7. Remove the heater duct or the evaporator. 8. Disconnect the mode control motor connector, then remove the mounting bolt and the heater unit. 9. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the vent/ defroster duct. 10. Remove the self-tapping screw and pipe clamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 584 Page 4866 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1922 Piston: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. NOTE: If the cylinder is bored, an oversized piston must be used. 2. Measure the piston diameter at a point 21 mm from the bottom of the skirt. NOTE: There are two standard-size pistons (No Letter (A) or B). The letter is stamped on the top of the piston. Letters are also stamped on the block as cylinder bore sizes. ^ Piston Diameter: Standard (New): ^ No Letter (A): 84.980-84.990 mm (3.3457-3.3461 inch) ^ B: 84.970-84.980 mm (3.3453-3.3457 inch) - Service Limit: ^ No Letter (A): 84.970 mm (3.3453 inch) ^ B: 84.960 mm (3.3449 inch) 3. Calculate the difference between cylinder bore diameter and piston diameter. ^ Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance: Standard (New): 0.020-0.040 mm (0.0008-0.0016 inch) - Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) - If the clearance is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and cylinder block for excessive wear. ^ Oversize Piston Diameter: 0.25: 85.230-85.240 mm (3.3555-3.3559 inch) - 0.50: 85.480-85.490 mm (3.3653-3.3657 inch) Page 7803 Retractor Bolt - Coupe 8. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. Page 7045 Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play 0 - 0.05 mm Note: Front and Rear. Page 7078 Waddle is side-to-side movement at the front and/or rear of the car. It can be caused by the steel belt not being straight within the tire, or by excessive lateral runout of the tire or wheel. It is most noticeable at low speed, about 8 to 48 km/h (5 to 30 mph). It may also cause rough ride at 80 to 113 km/h (50 to 70 mph). The car can be road tested to see which end of the car has the faulty tire. If the tire causing the waddle is on the rear, the rear end of the car will "waddle". From the driver's seat, it feels as if someone is pushing on the side of the car. If the faulty tire is on the front, the waddle is more easily seen. The front sheet metal appears to be moving back and forth. It feels as if the driver's seat is the pivot point in the car. Another more time-consuming method of determining the faulty tire is substituting tire and wheel assemblies that are known to be good. Follow these steps: 1. Drive the car to determine if the waddle is coming from the front or rear. 2. Install tire and wheel assemblies known to be good (from a similar car) in place of those on the end of the car which is waddling. If the waddle cannot be isolated to front or rear, start with the rear tires. 3. Road test again. If improvement is noted, install the original tire and wheel assemblies one at a time until the faulty tire is found. If no improvement is noted, install tires known to be good in place of all four. Then, install the originals one at a time until the faulty tire is found. Page 7087 Tire Mounting Rim bead seats should be cleaned with a wire brush or coarse steel wool to remove lubricants, and light rust. Before mounting a tire, the bead area should be well lubricated with an approved tire lubricant. After mounting, inflate the tire to 196 kPa (28 psi) so that beads are completely seated. Inflate the air to specified pressure and install valve cap to the stem. WARNING: Never stand over tire when inflating. bead may break when bead snaps over rim's safety hump and cause serious personal injury. never exceed 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure when inflating. if 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure will not seat beads, deflate, re-lubricate and re-inflate. over inflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Tire Repair There are many different materials on the market used to repair tires. Manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. These instructions can be obtained from the tire manufacturer if they are not included with the repair kit. Wheel Inspection Damaged wheels and wheels with excessive run-out must be replaced. Wheel run out at rim (Base on hub Bore): General Balance Procedure Page 1284 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Locations Body Control Module: Locations Left Kick Panel Testing and Inspection Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch Test 1. If one of the brake lights does not go on, check the bulb in the taillight or the high mount brake light. 2. If none of the brake lights go on, check the No. 30 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Brake Switch Test 3. If the fuse and bulbs are OK, disconnect the 2-P or 4-P connector from the brake switch. Brake Switch Test 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity, adjust the pedal height, and recheck. ^ If there is still no continuity, replace the switch. ^ If there is continuity, but the brake lights do not go on, check for: - poor ground (G551, G552) - an open in the WHT/YEL or GRN/WHT wire - faulty brake light failure sensor Page 1808 NOTE: Refer to the illustrations for removal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ^ Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with valves when torquing rocker assembly bolts. ^ Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. ^ To prevent rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. Page 8590 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Without Keyless Entry Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14-P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Control Unit Input Test (Without Keyless Entry) Disconnect the 14-P connector from the power door lock control unit. Page 2751 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Page 8062 Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (Passport only) One-piece door model: 1. Open the changer door. 2. Check to see if all the trays are in the magazine. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and inspect for a jammed tray. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Handling and Inspecting Compact Discs Page 9324 Cornering Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9529 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4610 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4088 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5526 2. Seat the 58 mm internal circlip in the groove of the bearing support. 3. Press the intermediate shaft inner seal into the bearing support using the special tools and a press as shown. 4. Press the intermediate shaft into the shaft bearing using the special tool and a press as shown. Page 5151 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2008 4. Remove the valve seal. INSTALLATION NOTE: Exhaust and intake valve seals are NOT interchangeable. Page 3030 Page 5861 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Front Of Transmission Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: Be careful not to damage the switch and the instrument panel. Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switches out of the instrument panel, and disconnect the connectors. Main Switch Test/Replacement 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Page 1335 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral until the radiator fan comes ON, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer to the test tachometer connector. Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm with shift lever in neutral position (A/T: [N] or [P] position) an electrical systems turned OFF. 3. Adjust the idle speed if necessary. Page 9052 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8796 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3464 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 6223 Remove Special Tool 9. Hold the plate with your fingers, and turn the shaft counterclockwise. Remove the special tool from the caliper. 10. Remove the adjusting bolt. Caliper Disassembly 11. Remove the spring cover, adjusting spring B, spacer, bearing A and cup from the adjusting bolt. Sleeve Piston Placement 12. Remove the sleeve piston, and remove the pin from the cam in the caliper body. 13. Remove the return spring. CAUTION: Do not loosen the parking nut with the cam installed in the caliper body. If the lever and shaft must be separated, hold the lever in a vise and loosen the parking nut. Page 2759 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Page 2391 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 5401 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 3668 DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). ^ If the mainshaft speed value is higher than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is zero, as shown, check the sensor connectors and terminals for a good fit and for a short or open in the wiring. Do the mainshaft speed sensor troubleshooting in the Transmission section of the appropriate service manual. ^ If the engine speed value is zero, and the countershaft speed and VSS values are identical, as shown, ask your customer if the engine has ever stalled while driving. If it has, the problem may be engine-related, not A/T-related. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE A Replace the PCM. Refer to the chart in PARTS INFORMATION to select the correct replacement. When you remove the PCM, find its part number in the chart, and order the part number in the far right column. For Accord L4 models only, the chart includes replacement PCMs listed in S/B 98-040, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0740, filed under Transmission/Driveline. One of those PCMs may have been previously installed. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Accord L4 1. Drain the ATF 2. Loosen the 11 bolts for the A/T right side cover, and slide back the cover. 3. Look at the 4th clutch feed pipe inside the cover. Is the bushing for the feed pipe visible? YES - Replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline. (The feed pipe bushing should stay stationary inside the mainshaft.) NO - Reinstall the cover, and torque the bolts to 12 Nm (8.7 lb-ft). Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, and flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Odyssey Clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see Flushing the A/T). If the DTC comes back, replace the A/T with a remanufactured Page 2266 16. Remove the valve seals. 17. Install the valve seals. 18. Install the springs, the retainers and the keepers in reverse order of removal. 19. Repeat steps 6 to 18 on the other cylinders. Page 4087 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5384 Connector Pin Color And Function Chart CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly, and disconnect all connectors from it. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 22-P (C6O9) and 16-P (C6O7) connectors. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board A. Page 7801 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt Buckle CENTER BELT AND REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES 1. Slide the front seat forward fully. 2. Remove these items: - Rear seat-backs - Rear seat cushion 3. Remove these items: - Rear bulkhead cover - Rear side trim panel - High mount brake light - Lock cylinder trim - Center belt cover - Rear shelF 4. Remove the side trim, both sides as necessary. Center Seat Belts - Coupe 5. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B). Diagram Information and Instructions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Driver's Door Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Lock Actuator Test 2. Disconnect the 6-P connector from the actuator. Driver's Door Lock Actuator Test 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator fails to work properly, replace it. Driver's Door Lock Actuator Test Page 9952 Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's window motor. Passenger's Window Motor Test NOTE: The illustration shows the left rear window motor; the right rear window motor is similar. Passenger's Window Motor Test 3. Check window motor operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: When the motor slops running, disconnect one lead immediately. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Page 9026 VSS Test Page 2405 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9133 Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations At Battery - Photo 6 Page 1517 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 9289 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 1766 Page 3682 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Page 3033 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 130 Radiator Fan Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Test Relays - Test There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the B and D terminals, and there should be no continuity when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Radiator fan relay Specifications Shifter A/T: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Gear Position Indicator Panel Screws ........................................................................................................................................... 3.0 Nm (24.0 inch lbs.) Shift Lever Knob ......................................................................................................... .................................................................. 3.0 Nm (24.0 inch lbs.) Gear Position Switch ................... .................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 Nm (48.0 inch lbs.) Lever Mounting Bolts ............................................................................................ ......................................................................... 22.0 Nm (16.0 ft. lbs.) Parking Pin Switch ................. ....................................................................................................................................................... 3.0 Nm (24.0 inch lbs.) Shift Lock Solenoid ............................................................................................... ........................................................................ 9.8 Nm (86.4 inch lbs.) Adjuster Lock Nut .................. ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.0 Nm (60.0 inch lbs.) Select Lever Assembly ......................................................................................... ......................................................................... 9.8 Nm (86.4 inch lbs.) Page 6213 Caliper Pin, Boot Replacement - Install the pin boots into the groove in the caliper bracket properly. - Install the brake pads in their original positions. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the pin boots when installing the caliper. - Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads, and install the caliper. - Coat the caliper bolts (pin A and pin B) with seal grease and insert them into the caliper. - Tighten the caliper bolts (pin A and B) 74 Nm (54 lb.ft.). Caliper Bolt Replacement - Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) . - Fill the brake reservoir and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair - After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and Page 4657 Page 7069 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis By Symptom Part 1 Of 2 Page 4703 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4223 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 4007 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3701 * REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid: P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 1994-00 Accord, 1992-01 Prelude - 2 quarts required 1997-01 Prelude Type SH - 2.2 quarts required* REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Bearing Separator: T/N OTC-1123 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23626-P16-306 H/C 5200852 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see the Manual Transmission section of the appropriate service manual). You do not need to disassemble the differential. 3. Remove any metal particles from the transmission's internal parts and from the inside of the case. Page 6817 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6522 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations Center Of Roof Page 3151 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2197 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 1821 NOTE: ^ The synchronizing piston can be seen in the gap between the mid, secondary and primary rocker arms. ^ With the timing plate engaged in the groove on the timing piston, the piston is locked in the pushed out position. ^ Do not apply too much force when pushing up the timing plate. 6. Make sure that the intake primary and secondary rocker arms are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm does not move when pushed manually. ^ If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set. Page 3076 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 197 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2875 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Page 199 Page 3298 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2389 Page 4845 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6831 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 841 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Pin Switch Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 2734 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Specifications Countershaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 8586 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 9809 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8158 C540 (18-GRY) Page 7675 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Adjustments STEERING WHEEL AND CABLE REEL ALIGNMENT Center the cable reel whenever the following is performed. (Refer to centering the cable reel.) Misalignment of the cable reel (the cable reel is not centered) could cause an open in the cable reel, making the SRS system and the horns inoperative. Installation of the steering wheel - Installation of the cable reel - Installation of the steering column - Other steering-related adjustment or installation Do not disassemble the cable reel. Do not apply grease on the cable reel. If the cable reel shows any signs of damage for example, it does not rotate smoothly, replace the cable reel with a new one. Page 7312 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 511 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 6574 Fuse Block: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 7299 Page 3391 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 6203 Brake Caliper: Diagrams Rear Akebono Caliper Page 7870 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 180 Behind Front Grille Page 4603 Page 7527 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Condenser Fan Relay ^ Condenser fan relay Page 9347 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9815 Page 460 Testing and Inspection Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch Test 1. If one of the brake lights does not go on, check the bulb in the taillight or the high mount brake light. 2. If none of the brake lights go on, check the No. 30 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Brake Switch Test 3. If the fuse and bulbs are OK, disconnect the 2-P or 4-P connector from the brake switch. Brake Switch Test 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity, adjust the pedal height, and recheck. ^ If there is still no continuity, replace the switch. ^ If there is continuity, but the brake lights do not go on, check for: - poor ground (G551, G552) - an open in the WHT/YEL or GRN/WHT wire - faulty brake light failure sensor Page 5688 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Page 9518 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6656 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 5539 11. To drive the outboard joint on the rest of the way, pick up the assembly and let it fall from about 10 cm (4 to 5 in.) onto a hard surface. NOTICE Do not use a hammer; excessive force may damage the driveshaft. 12. Measure distance "A" (from the splines to the inner race of the joint). If the distance is more than your measurement in Step 3, repeat Step 11. 13. When distance "A" equals your measurement in Step 3, the "C" clip should be seated in the joint. Tap on the inner race with a plastic hammer to make sure the joint does not move on the driveshaft. 14. Fit the small end of the boot into the boot groove on the driveshaft. 15. Install the small boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 16. Pack the outboard boot with the grease included in the kit. Pack the outboard joint with the remaining grease, then fit the boot over the outboard joint. 17. Install the large boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 18. Reinstall the driveshaft assembly into the car. Refer to Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 9308 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 827 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4721 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Photo 46 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 46 Behind Front Grille Page 9771 Lamp Out Sensor: Testing and Inspection Brake Light Failure Sensor Test 1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the brake pedal is pressed. ^ If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. ^ If one of the brake lights does not come on, check whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to step 2. ^ If none of the brake lights come on, check the brake light circuit. 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the side box. 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on, when the No. 1 terminal of the 6-P connector is grounded and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire between the safety indicator and the No. 1 terminal of the failure sensor, and whether the safety indicator circuit (printed circuit board) has a problem. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on and stay on, go to step 4. 4. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II) with the No. 2 terminal of the 6-P connector grounded and the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, replace the failure sensor. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP does not stay on, check for an open in the BLK wire between the No. 2 terminal of the failure sensor and ground, and check for a poor ground at G551. Page 6519 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 24 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7420 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Recover the refrigerant with a Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. 2. Disconnect the receiver line and the suction line from the evaporator. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting to avoid moisture and dust contamination into the system. 3. Remove the glove box. 4. Remove the glove box frame. Page 4749 Page 5409 Secondary Valve Body Page 2633 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 5626 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2878 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Mainshaft Speed Sensor Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Side Of Transmission, Beneath Battery Page 956 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 8872 Page 4544 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection Refer to Adjustments for inspection procedures. Page 5367 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 126 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 5578 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection BEARING END PLAY 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch). 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Page 8508 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch ............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Page 1904 6. Remove the bolt and the balancer driven gear. 7. Remove the oil screen and the oil pump. 8. Remove the baffle plate. Page 3534 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 9756 Headlight Switch (Part 1 Of 2) Page 615 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Power window relay Page 6217 Grease Caliper Pin & Boot 2. Apply rubber grease to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. 3. Install the pin boots into the groove in the caliper bracket properly. 4. Insert the pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 5. Install the pin boots into the groove in the pins properly. 6. Install the brake pad retainers and brake pads. 7. Align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad. 8. Install the caliper on the caliper bracket, and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. 9. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. Specs ^ Caliper Bracket Mounting Bolts 38 Nm (28 lb.ft.) ^ Banjo Bolts 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) ^ Caliper Mounting Bolts 25 Nm (18 lb.ft.) Brake Cable Removal & Installation 10. Insert the cable through the arm, and connect the cable to the lever with the clevis pin and lock pin. Install the cable clip securely. Page 864 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 2785 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1852 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2907 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2639 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift Synchronizer Hub: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - 5th Gear Grinds On Upshift 01-070 August 7, 2001 Applies To: 1994-00 Accord - ALL with M/T 1992-01 Prelude - ALL with M/T Fifth Gear Grinds During Upshift (Replaces 95-057, dated October 17, 2000) Updated information shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The transmission grinds when you shift into 5th gear. PROBABLE CAUSE Misalignment from the 5th shift fork. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace 5th gear, the sleeve set, and the 5th shift fork. PARTS INFORMATION 1994-97 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-PX5-307, H/C 4921607 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1998-00 Accord 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-A41, H/C 3858677 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P0S-306, H/C 5614011 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude S 5th Gear: P/N 23581-PX5-U41, H/C 3858693 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1992-96 Prelude Si, 1992-94 Prelude 4WS 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-S40, H/C 3940061 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 * 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-J02, H/C 6309942 1993-96 Prelude VTEC 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-A00, H/C 4113700 * Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465* 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959 *1997-01 Prelude, 1997-01 Prelude Type SH 5th Gear: P/N 23581-P16-540, H/C 3940061 Sleeve Set: P/N 23626-P16-307, H/C 6831465 5th Shift Fork: P/N 24200-P16-020, H/C 6309959* Page 7521 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Condenser Fan Relay ^ A/C compressor clutch relay Page 9999 NOTE: If necessary, remove the glass stopper. 9. Remove the front and center channels. Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Recall - Lower Ball Joint Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 99-039 Date: 010327 Recall - Lower Ball Joint Replacement 99-039 March 21, 2001 Applies To: 1997-98 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996-98 Prelude - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-98 Odyssey - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Lower Ball Joints (Supersedes 99-039, dated June 29, 1999) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. BACKGROUND Certain vehicles were manufactured with front suspension lower ball joints that may prematurely wear out. In the worst case, the ball joints would separate without prior warning, causing the front suspension to collapse. Page 4184 Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION To prevent erratic running when the engine is warming up, it is necessary to raise the idle speed. The fast idle thermo valve is controlled by a thermowax plunger. When the engine is cold, the engine coolant surrounding the thermowax contracts the plunger, allowing additional air to be bypassed into the intake manifold so that the engine idles faster. When the engine reaches operating temperature, the valve closes, reducing the amount of air bypassing into the intake manifold. Page 4498 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 2304 4. Loosen the adjusting bolt, mounting bolt and locknut, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the alternator terminal and connector. 6. Remove the side engine mount. NOTE: ^ Use a jack to support the engine before the side engine mount is removed. ^ Make sure to place a cushion between the oil pan and the jack. 7. Remove the dipstick and the pipe. 8. Remove the cylinder head cover. 9. Remove the pulley bolt and crankshaft pulley. Page 5307 Shift Cable: Adjustments CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. Remove the front console. 2. Shift to N position, then remove the lock pin from the cable adjuster. 3. Check that the hole in the adjuster is perfectly aligned with the hole in the shift cable. NOTE: There are two holes in the end of the shift cable. They are positioned 90° apart to allow cable adjustments in 1/4 turn increments. Page 7247 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4317 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Removal Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal CAUTION: - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Master Cylinder - Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connectors. - Remove the reservoir cap from the master cylinder. - The brake fluid may be sucked out through the top of the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. - Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. - Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and the master cylinder from the brake booster. Page 8963 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6573 Fuse Block: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 9288 Page 729 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Engine Low Oil Pressure Indicator System - Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire from the engine oil pressure switch. 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and the engine (ground). ^ There should be continuity with the engine stopped. ^ There should be no continuity when the engine runs. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure and, if necessary, inspect the oil pump. Page 7306 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3759 Page 5757 Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection 1ST, 2ND, 3RD, 4TH and 5TH Shift Forks NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be replaced as a set. Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact parts. 1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork and its matching synchro sleeve. a. Standard: 0.35 - 0.65 mm (0.014 - 0.026 inch) b. Service Limit: 1.00 mm (0.039 inch) 2. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers. Standard: 6.2 - 6.4 mm (0.24 - 0.25 inch) NOTE: If the thickness of the shift fork finger is not within the standard, replace the shift fork with a new one. - If the thickness of the shift fork finger is within the standard, replace the synchro sleeve with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between the shin fork and the shift arm. a. Standard: 0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 - 0.020 inch) b. Service Limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) 4. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the width of the shift arm. Standard: 12.9 - 13.0 mm (0.508 - 0.512 inch) NOTE: If the width of the shift arm is not within the standard, replace the shift arm with a new one. - If the width of the shift arm is within the standard, replace the shift fork or shift piece with a new one. Page 2562 Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments 1. Disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm and clamp, and from the heater control arm and clamp. 2. Set the temperature control dial to MAX. COOL. 3. Turn the heater control arm, as shown, then connect the end of the heater valve cable to the heater control arm. Heater Valve Cable - Adjustment 4. Gently slide the heater valve cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the heater valve cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop, then snap the heater valve cable housing into the clamp. 5. Turn the heater valve arm, as shown, then connect the end of the heater valve cable to the heater valve arm. Heater Valve Cable - Adjustment 6. Gently slide the heater valve cable housing back from the end enough to take up any slack in the neater valve cable, but not enough to make the temperature control dial move, then snap the heater valve cable housing into the clamp. NOTE: The air mix control cable should always be adjusted whenever the heater valve cable has been disconnected. Page 9905 Rear Defogger Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Rear Window Defogger Relay ^ Rear window defogger relay Page 6359 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 9807 Page 3236 Distributor: Service and Repair Reassembly Distributor Reassembly 1. When reassembling distributor, install the distributor ignition (DI) rotor so that it faces in the direction shown (toward the No. 1 cylinder). 2. Align the index mark on the distributor ignition housing whit the index mark on the end of the shaft. Page 6294 Brake Master Cylinder: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Before reassembling; check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder assembly. - Replace the master cylinder assembly with a new part if necessary. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. Page 3157 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5362 Page 3224 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Specifications Clutch Disc: Specifications DIMENSIONS Disc Thickness Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................................... 8.4 - 9.0 mm (0.33 - 0.35 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) Rivet Depth From The Lining Surface To The Rivets Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 - 1.9 mm (0.05 - 0.07 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 0.2 mm (0.01 inch) Page 5880 Page 8468 Door Locks: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Door Lock Actuator 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the actuator. Passenger's Door Lock Actuator Test Front Passenger's Door: Passenger's Door Lock Actuator Test Rear Passenger's Door: Passenger's Door Lock Actuator Test Page 886 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8027 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Spindle Nut ................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 245 Nm. (181 lb. ft.) Rear Spindle Nut .............................................. ..................................................................................................................................... 181 Nm. (134 lb. ft.) Page 2544 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Inner trim cover ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 3. Remove the corner sash trim. 4. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. 5. Remove the bolt and nut. Peel the glass run channel out of the rear channel. C539 C539 (12-GRY) Page 3593 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 5940 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Testing and Inspection PCM Terminal Locations PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) General Description Alignment: Description and Operation General Description GENERAL DESCRIPTION "Front End Alignment" refers to the angular relationship between the front wheels, the front suspension attaching parts and the ground. Proper front end alignment must be maintained in order to insure efficient steering, good directional stability and to prevent abnormal tire wear. The most important factors of front end alignment are wheel toe-in, wheel camber and axle caster. CAMBER: Camber is the vertical tilting inward or outward of the front wheels. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle (1). If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. CASTER: This illustration shows view from the side of the vehicle. Caster (1) is the vertical tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Page 9199 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9200 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1986 9. Install the key and the camshaft pulley onto the camshaft, then tighten the retaining bolt to the torque shown. Page 535 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 4689 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 1297 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Page 2538 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 10012 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 19. Install the door panel. Page 4082 Locations Body Control Module: Locations Left Kick Panel Page 5719 NOTE: - Use a straight edge and depth gauge. - Measure at three locations and average the readings. 6. Select the proper 78 mm shim from the chart by using the formula below. Shim Selection Formula: From the measurements you made in steps 4 and 5: a. Add distance (C) (step 5) to distance (B) (step 4). b. From this number, subtract 0.93 (which is the midpoint of the flex range of the clutch housing bearing spring washer). c. Take this number and compare it to the available shim sizes in the chart. (For example) B: 2.39 + C: 0.22 = 2.61 - 0.93 = 1.68. Try the 1.68 mm (0.0661 inch) shim. Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch ............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Page 9928 Rear Defogger Switch: Service and Repair CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rear window defogger switch or the instrument panel when prying the switch out. 1. Carefully pry the switch out of the instrument panel. Switch Replacement 2. Disconnect the 6-P connector from the switch. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 9780 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9769 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4636 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 539 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. ABS Control Unit ABS Control Unit: Locations ABS Control Unit Right Kick Panel A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 3390 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8568 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Paint Codes Bulletin No. 96-058 Issue Date NOV 4, 1996 Model 1997 Applicable To ALL File Under BODY 1997 Honda Paint Codes Paint formulations are determined by each paint company. For questions about formulas or matching, contact your local paint distributor or the paint company's nearest regional office. American Honda does not endorse any paint company or type of paint; this information is provided for reference only. The original paint is acrylic enamel. Paint codes with "M" are metallic colors; those with "P" are pearlescent colors. NOTE: Herberts Standox uses the Honda Paint Code as its paint intermix code. Page 1045 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3312 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6792 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2987 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Rear Window Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Locations Rear Window Wiper Motor Center Of Tailgate Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 1254 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper Switch Wiper/Washer Switch Test Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7-P and 20-P connectors from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the wiper/washer switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Page 1118 Page 7800 seat cushion, and remove the harness. Take care not to damage the hinge bracket (D). Center Anchor Bolt - Sedan 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. Page 2867 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5898 Testing and Inspection Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Dash Light Controller Input Test Controller Input Test NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash lights brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard, then disconnect the 3-P connector from the controller. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Page 7332 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Condenser Fan Relay ^ Condenser fan relay Page 8041 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 276 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Right Side Of Tailgate Page 495 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4305 Fuel Pump Relay: Component Tests and General Diagnostics NOTE: If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 3. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 7 terminal and No. 6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No. 6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No. 5 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. - If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing on the next page. Page 8366 5. Detach the inner handle rod and lock rod from the clip. Remove the screws and clip, then move the latch down. 6. Remove the bolts. Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations Front Of Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Page 4837 Page 9855 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 3573 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 8060 CD Player/Changer Troubleshooting (Passport only) Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (All except Passport) One-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed disc. 3. If a disc is jammed between the player and the magazine, turn the loading gear until the disc returns to the player mechanism. Do not attempt to reload the disc back into the magazine. 4. After the disc is loaded into the player mechanism, turn the changer so that the front is facing you. Page 2846 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9778 Page 7950 Page 5268 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 5727 2. Install the 5th synchro hub using the special tools and a press as shown. 3. Install the ball bearing using the special tools and a press as shown. 4. To reassemble the components see the installation of case. See: Transmission Housing/Service and Repair Page 417 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) 22P Connector Description, Signal & Terminal Name Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine Page 4570 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Page 1215 A/T Gear Position Switch: Service and Repair A/T Gear Position Switch Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts and the switch. 3. Position the slider of the new switch to [P] as shown above. 4. Shift the lever to the [P] position. 5. Attach the switch, and tighten the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] positions. NOTE: The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. 7. Connect the 12-P and 2-P connectors, clamp the harness, and install the console. Page 9491 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7378 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6634 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Page 7377 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW 22P Connector Description, Signal & Terminal Name Page 3560 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 998 Page 3039 Page 6316 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Pin Switch Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 497 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7788 Retractor Bolt - Sedan 5. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If the threads on the retractor mounting ET screw are worn out, use an oversized ET screw made specifically for this application. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Page 6218 Caliper Shield 11. Install the caliper shield. 12. Fill the brake reservoir up, and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding 13. Operate the brake pedal several times, then adjust the parking brake. 14. After installation, perform the following checks. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the parking brake lever for operation, and adjust it if necessary. Removal WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Caliper Shield ^ Remove the caliper shield. Page 6538 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 5. Remove the door sill molding, left kick panel and access panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 6. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box away from the left kick panel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS main harness 2-P connector is double locked. To remove it, first lift the connector lid, then press the connector tab down and pull the connector out. Installation: 1. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box. Page 4089 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7234 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 4882 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Testing and Inspection PCM Terminal Locations PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 5811 Page 8567 repairing. Repairing and Polishing the Painted Surface The goal of a minor paint repair is to correct the damage to the upper layer of the painted surface. This is done by removing a thin layer of paint (no more than 0.5 mil) and then restoring the luster by polishing the repaired surface. A quick way to determine the depth of a scratch in the paint is to run your fingernail across the scratch. If your fingernail catches on the scratch, the area will need to be wet sanded and polished. When doing scratch or swirl mark repairs, use only quality products from one manufacturer. Each manufacturer has its own set of paint repair products that have matching materials. Mixing materials from different manufacturers, or using inexpensive products, compromises the repair quality. An electric polisher with an adjustable rpm control set between 1,500 and 1,800 rpm is best for polishing. When using a polisher, faster is not better. Too much polisher speed and too much applied force can cause swirl marks or may even burn the paint. Removing Swirl Marks Most swirl marks can be removed by using a foam polishing pad and polishing material. Use the polisher at 1,500 to 1,800 rpm with a small amount of polishing material on the pad. Always begin with the finest polishing material. If necessary, progress to the next coarser material only when the fine materials are ineffective. When polishing, work in small sections (approximately 24" x 24"). Avoid running the polishing pad over edges of a body panel or body lines where the paint is more susceptible to burning through. Let the cleaner do the work. Do not apply too much force! Forcing the polishing pad could cause deep cuts into the paint and might damage the surface so badly that it would need to be repainted. Polishing Dark Colors This additional procedure, after the polishing process described above, is important to reduce any chance of swirl marks, which show more on dark colors. When polishing is completed, use the same type of foam polishing pad on a random orbital polisher. Apply the finest polishing material to a 24" x 24" work area. Start the polisher, and make three to four passes over the work area. Remove the glaze residue with a cotton terry cloth or soft flannel cloth. Wet Sanding This process is used to repair scratches and acid rain damage deeper than 0.2 mil. The object is to remove as little paint material as possible. When wet sanding, stop frequently and dry the work area. This will allow you to see if the wet sanding has removed the damage. Start by soaking a 1500 or 2000 grit wet/dry sanding paper in water for 15 minutes. Wrap the soaked wet/dry sanding paper around a soft sanding pad. Lightly sand in one direction across (90 degrees) the scratched surface to highlight the surface damage. Flush the area with clean water. To remove any sanding scratches left by the wet sanding process, use a foam polishing pad and a polishing material. Refer to Removing Swirl Marks. Final Inspection When the polishing process is done, the paint surface may look perfect, but residue can hide very fine scratches that will become apparent after a few washings. This is especially true for darker colors. Start the final inspection by spraying a 50/50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water on the work area and then wiping it dry. NOTE: Avoid spraying the solution on any unpainted plastic parts such as taillights, turn signal lenses, reflectors, etc. The solution can cause cracking. Inspect the repaired area, and repeat the polishing process if necessary. Finish the inspection by waxing the completed vehicle with a high quality wax. Use the wax recommended by the paint repair supplies manufacturer you have chosen. Preventive Maintenance Avoiding scratches and dents while the vehicle is in your dealership inventory requires some preventive maintenance. To help reduce the occurrence of scratches and dents, follow these recommendations: Park vehicles far enough apart to prevent door dents and dings. - Leave the exterior shipping protection on the vehicle until it is ready to be sold. - Implement and use an inventory age control system. - Use deionized water to reduce water spotting. - Wash the vehicles with deionized water, soap, and a wash mitt at least once a week. NOTE: Using a wash mitt will remove any residual dirt from the paint surface. If a wash mitt is not used, the residual dirt on the painted surface will scratch the paint when the surface is dried with a chamois or towel. - Use a clean chamois or terry cloth towel to dry the vehicles. Page 3350 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6868 44. Install special tool to the gearbox housing, then clamp the tool in a vise with soft jaws as shown. CAUTION: Do not clamp the cylinder. 45. Grease the inside surface of the cylinder end, then install the cylinder end into the cylinder and tighten it to the specified torque. 46. Remove the tool from the gearbox housing. 47. Stake the point of the cylinder shown below. NOTE: Stake the cylinder in the position opposite from where the stake was removed during disassembly. 48. Select the 32 mm shim(s). NOTE: Only reinstall the original 32 mm shim(s) when the steering gearbox is reassembled without replacing the pinion shaft, valve housing, and gearbox housing with new ones. If the pinion shaft, valve housing, and gearbox housing are replaced, select the new shim(s) as follows. Shim Selection: a. Set the four 32 mm shims on the bearing surface of the gearbox housing. Total thickness of the four shims should equal no more than 0.70 mm. Shim set: four 32 mm shims (Thickness: 0.10 mm, 0.15 mm, 0.20 mm, 0.25 mm respectively) CAUTION: The four 32 mm shims do not have thickness identification marks. Measure the thickness of each shim using a micrometer, and mark the shim for identification. Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Bulletin No. 93-033 Issue Date JUNE 3, 1996 Model: 1992 and Later [NEW] Applicable To: ALL except PASSPORT [NEW] File Under: BODY Broken Seat Belt Tongue Stopper Button (Supersedes 93-033, dated October 22, 1993) PROBLEM The seat belt tongue stopper button is broken, allowing the tongue to slide down to the floor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new seat belt tongue stopper button listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 1. Slide the seat belt tongue up the seat belt past the tongue stopper button hole. Temporarily secure the seat belt tongue to the belt fabric with masking tape. 2. Insert the male section of the button through the hole in the belt fabric. Align and install the female section of the stopper to the male section. 3. Preset the closed gap on a pair of vise-grip pliers to 4.5 mm. Page 2512 Radiator Fan: Testing and Inspection Troubleshooting Chart Radiator Fan (Part 1 Of 2) Page 948 A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Page 1630 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 8076 Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (Passport only) One-piece door model: 1. Open the changer door. 2. Check to see if all the trays are in the magazine. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and inspect for a jammed tray. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Handling and Inspecting Compact Discs Page 8798 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 2454 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Check that the water pump pulley turns counterclockwise. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. NOTE: A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole is normal. Page 1848 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4454 Page 6229 Caliper Location 8. Install the caliper on the caliper bracket, and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. 9. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. Specs: Caliper Bracket Mounting Bolts 38 Nm (17 lb.ft.) Caliper Mounting Bolts 23 Nm (17 lb.ft.) Banjo Bolts 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) Brake Cable Removal & Installation 10. Insert the cable through the arm, and connect the cable to the lever with the clevis pin and lock pin. Install the cable clip securely. Page 5353 Disclaimer Page 4220 Fuel Injector Resistor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4861 Page 3016 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Below Center Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 5281 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the shift lock solenoid 3-P connector from the main wire harness. NOTE: Do not connect power to the B (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 2. Connect battery power to the A terminal and ground to the 8 terminal momentarily. Check the solenoid. If it does not work, replace it. NOTE: ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (O.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. ^ If it is not, adjust the position of the shift lock solenoid. Page 7471 Page 7905 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Page 9370 Page 9313 Page 8212 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Photo 180 Behind Front Grille Page 5014 Parking Brake Switch Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch Rear Console Page 3594 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Page 2196 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 5043 Page 4696 Page 320 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6311 Parking Brake Lever: Adjustments ^ Pull the parking brake lever with to fully apply the parking brake. The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified notches. Specs: Notches For Full Lock 7 - 11 ^ Adjust the parking brake if the lever notches are out of specification. Page 1013 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5620 Page 8063 ^ Handle a CD by its edges; never touch the flat surfaces. Contamination from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip pens, and labels can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ^ When cleaning a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside. Do not wipe the disc in a circular motion. ^ A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. ^ Various accessories are available to protect CDs and improve the sound quality of CDs. These accessories increase the thickness or diameter of the discs, and should not be used in CD changers. Disclaimer Page 9884 Locations Illustrated Index Page 7573 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 2585 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 9207 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. Page 1150 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes Compact Disc Player (CD): Customer Interest Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes 00-015 March 14, 2000 Applies To: All with CD Player/Changer Audio Unit Error Codes (Replaces 91-007, dated October 6, 1997) *If the audio unit displays an error code, use the troubleshooting tables in this service bulletin to troubleshoot the problem. Refer to service bulletin 98-019 for CD Player/Changer exchange information.* Page 7003 Testing and Inspection Rear Defogger Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the rear window defogger switch from the instrument panel. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 4640 Page 431 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8687 Disclaimer Specifications Cylinder Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 3796 Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 5317 Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Adjustments NOTE: Before adjusting the throttle control cable, make sure that: - Throttle cable free play is correct. - Idle speed is correct. - You warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 1. Check that the throttle control cable is routed correctly and held in place by the three clamps. 2. Check that the throttle linkage is in the fully-closed position. 3. Loosen the locknut on the throttle control cable at the throttle control lever. 4. Remove the free play in the throttle control cable with the locknut, while pushing the throttle control lever to the fully-closed position as shown. Page 3648 Page 5020 Clutch: Service and Repair 1ST, 1ST-Hold, 2ND, 3RD and 4TH Clutches TOOL REQUIRED - 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment - 07HAE-PL50100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment - 07GAE-PG40200 Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly - 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly - Or Equivalent DISASSEMBLE 1. Remove the snap ring, then remove the clutch end plate, clutch discs and plates. 2. Remove the disc spring. 3. Install the special tools as shown. NOTE: For 1st-hold clutch Page 7741 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 3145 Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Center Bolt ........................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) Page 9747 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2406 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Testing and Inspection Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Switch Test 4. Disconnect the 20-P connector between the combination switch harness and main wire harness. Page 7899 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Description and Operation Starter Switch Signal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the engine is cranking. Page 386 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Page 7014 4. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 5. Tighten the flange bolt. 6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the rear damper to the specified torque. 7. Install the rear seat (Sedan) or the rear seat cushion and side-bolsters (Wagon) or the rear bulkhead cover and right gusset cover (Coupe). 8. Install the rear wheels. Page 3218 Page 596 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in Fuel and Emissions. Ball Joint Removal and Installation Tools Ball Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Ball Joint Removal and Installation Tools 99-061 July 27, 1999 Applies To: 1994-99 Accord - ALL 1992-99 Prelude - ALL 1995-98 Odyssey - ALL Ball Joint Removal and Installation Tools The special tools required to remove and install lower ball joints on certain Honda vehicles are now available from American Honda through normal parts ordering procedures. Refer to Service Bulletin 99-039, Safety Recall: Lower Ball Joints, for lower ball joint removal and installation instructions. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Page 9989 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 13. Install the glass run channel and center channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel on the door as shown. Page 8271 [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Malfunction Indicator Lamp - A/T: Testing and Inspection [D4] Indicator Light Does Not Come On Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch A Page 7779 Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection IN-VEHICLE: 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, removE THE ANCHOR BOLTS AND CHECK THAT THE WASHERS AND OTHER PARTS ARE NOT DAMAGED OR IMPROPERLY INSTALLED. 3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build-up in the metal loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled Out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a sudden stop or impact. 5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released. 6. For each passenger's seat belt, make sure that the locking mechanism in the seat belt retractor will engage when the seat belt is pulled all the way out. 7. Replace the seat belt with a new one if there is any abnormality. Page 5886 Page 31 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6512 Relay Box: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Left Kick Panel Page 9501 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1035 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid .............................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 2.0 Qt Page 6834 Steering Lock Replacement 3. Remove the steering column covers. Steering Lock Replacement 4. Disconnect the connectors from the switch. Steering Lock Replacement 5. Remove the column holder mounting bolts and nuts. Page 3617 Page 7449 Heater Core: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Mechanical Specifications Receiver Dryer: Mechanical Specifications CONDENSER PIPE TO RECEIVER/DRYER Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 13 Nm (9.4 lb ft) RECEIVER PIPE TO RECEIVER/DRYER Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 13 Nm (9.4 lb ft) Page 9679 Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge and Fuel Gauge The ECT gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 1, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the engine coolant temperature sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes, pulling the gauge needle toward the coil with the stronger magnetic field. The fuel gauge works the same way. The resistance of the sending unit for the engine coolant temperature gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high engine temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the ECT gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the fuel gauge varies from about 2-5 ohms at full, to about 110 ohms at empty. When you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), the gauge remains at the last reading until you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or START (III) again. Page 701 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) switch. 1. Remove ECT switch A from the thermostat housing and ECT switch B from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend each ECT switch in a container of water or engine oil as shown. NOTE: The illustration shows ECT switch A. 3. Heat the water or engine oil, and check its temperature with a thermometer. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Switch Test 4. Check each ECT switch for continuity between the A and B terminals according to the table. Page 4575 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 8760 Page 8327 6. Release the clips that hold the door panel. Remove the door panel by pulling it upward. NOTE: Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. Page 6360 Fail Safe Relay: Description and Operation FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended by turning off the two fail-safe relays. This disconnects the ground circuits of all the solenoid valves to prevent ABS operation.Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one. RELAY The fail-safe relay's terminal side contact is normally open. When there is continuity at the relay coil, the fail-safe relay is closed, thereby connecting the ground circuit to the solenoid valve. Page 2731 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Page 9822 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 20 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Diagram Information and Instructions Console: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 1990 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Tighten nuts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step, tighten all nuts, in sequence to 9.8 Nm (87 in. lbs.) EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Canister Purge Control Valve: Locations EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 9048 Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3607 Page 809 Page 2087 4. Fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Page 255 Horn Relay: Locations Picture Location Behind Front Console - Photo 72 Page 4032 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6327 Booster Pushrod Adjustment 8. Remove the special tool. Brake Booster Length With Booster Removed 9. Adjust the pushrod length as shown if the booster is removed. 10. Install the master cylinder. Page 6585 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 76 Behind Center Of Dash Testing and Inspection Trunk/Liftgate Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection 1. Open the trunk lid, then remove the trunk lid inner trim. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the trunk key cylinder switch. 3. Check continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity when the trunk key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK with the key. ^ There should be no continuity when the keylock is released Page 2356 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 7282 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Condenser Fan Relay ^ A/C compressor clutch relay Ceiling Light Doesn't Work Dome Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Ceiling Light Doesn't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ceiling Light Doesn't Work APPLIES TO: 1990-02 Accord SERVICE TIP: If the ceiling light doesn't work when you open the doors even though the door monitor on the instrument panel says the doors are opening and closing correctly the problem could be a damaged printed circuit board in the door monitor. To check for a damaged circuit board, remove the gauge assembly, and ground the BLK/WHT wire in terminal A10 of the gauge assembly's 14P connector. If the ceiling light comes on when you ground the wire, the door monitor's printed circuit board is shot and must be replaced. So what causes this circuit board to go bad? Usually an aftermarket security system is to blame. Many of these aftermarket systems use the door monitor's BLK/WHT wire (it's also the main wire for the ceiling light circuit) to indicate when the doors are open. If the circuit board can't handle the amperage requirements of the aftermarket system, it gets damaged and the ceiling light doesn't work. Page 369 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 2799 Page 7482 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Overhaul HEATER UNIT OVERHAUL 1. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the vent/ defroster duct. 2. Remove the self-tapping screw and pipe clamp. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw and core clamp. 4. Pull out the heater core. NOTE: Be careful not to bend the inlet and outlet pipes during heater core removal. 5. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Page 5310 5. Remove the lock bolt securing the control lever, then remove the control lever with the shift cable. 6. Remove exhaust pipe B and the heat shield. 7. Remove the cable guide and grommet. 8. Remove the shift cable, then replace it. 9. Install the shift cable in the reverse order of removal. 10. Check the cable adjustment after installing the shift cable. Page 3894 Page 9858 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 5902 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1016 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 6067 Wheel Sensor: Locations Rear Behind Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar) Page 7786 seat cushion, and remove the harness. Take care not to damage the hinge bracket (D). Center Anchor Bolt - Sedan 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. Page 2910 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression [1] Nominal ............................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 1,230 KPa (178 psi) Minimum .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 930 KPa (135 psi) Maximum Variation .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 200 KPa (28 psi) [1] 200 rpm and wide open throttle Page 1460 Servo Body The transmission strainer (filter) is located on the valve body inside the torque converter housing and is not replaceable Page 7348 Page 9099 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4733 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4760 Page 9500 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5171 Page 6993 7. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 8. Loosely install the flange bolt into the damper fork. 9. Loosely install a new self-locking nut with the flange bolt. 10. Raise the steering knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 11. Tighten the flange bolt. 12. Tighten the self-locking nut. 13. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the front damper to the specified torque. 14. Install the brake hose mounts with the brake hose mounting bolts. 15. Install the front wheel. Page 953 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1192 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 2779 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6300 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation WARNING: Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when installing the master cylinder. NOTE: ^ When connecting the brake lines, make sure that there is no interference between the brake lines and other parts. ^ If replacing the master cylinder or brake booster, check and adjust the pushrod clearance before installing the master cylinder. Master Cylinder Installation & Specifications - Install the master cylinder on the brake booster with the mounting nuts. Specs Master Cylinder To Brake Booster Nuts 15 Nm (1.5 kg m, 11 lb ft). Brake Lines To Master Cylinder 19 Nm (1.9kg m, 14lb ft). - Connect the brake lines to the master cylinder. - Fill the master cylinder reservoir, and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair - Install the reservoir cap, and connect the brake fluid level switch connectors. - After installation, perform the following inspections and adjust if necessary. ^ Brake pedal height ^ Brake pedal free play Page 5119 Servo Body The transmission strainer (filter) is located on the valve body inside the torque converter housing. NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. - Blow out all passages. - When removing the valve body, replace the following: - 0-rings - Lock washer 1. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts). 2. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts). Page 277 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1717 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 6280 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Relieving System Pressure CAUTION: - Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely before performing the modulator function check, disposing the modulator unit, and ABS pump motor replacement. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Do not reuse the drained brake fluid. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. Modulator Unit Location 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder to the specified torque. Specs: Maintenance Bleeder 11 Nm (8 lb.ft.) Page 8011 Indicator Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 22-P (C6O9) connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the printed circuit board A must be faulty; replace it. Page 9720 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 1. Remove the door panel. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 3441 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2739 REQUIRED MATERIALS Page 7445 Page 1775 Page 6683 Alignment: Service and Repair Alignment Camber NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: - Front: (0°00' ± 1°) -1° to +1° - Rear: (-0°25' ± 30') -0.92° to +0.09° 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Caster NOTE: Caster angle can be adjusted by increasing/decreasing the number of the adjusting shims. Remove and install the radius rod each time the caster angle is adjusted. 1. Raise the front of the car, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the self-locking nut on the end of the radius rod. 3. Remove the flange bolts at the radius rod on the lower arm, and remove the radius rod. 4. Adjust the caster angle by increasing/decreasing the adjusting shims. NOTE: Do not use more than two adjusting shims. - One adjusting shim changes the caster angle by 35' and the caster angle can be adjusted by 1°10' maximum. - One adjusting shim is 3.2 mm (0.13 inch) in thickness. 5. After the adjustment, install the radius rod onto the lower arm, and tighten the flange bolts. 6. Tighten the new self-locking nut to specified torque. Toe-In NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the tire pressure. 2. Center steering wheel spokes. 3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe: (0 ± 3 mm /0 ± 1/8 inch) -0.13 to +0.13 inch. a. If adjustment is required, go on to step 4. b. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. 4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts, and turn both tie-rods in the same direction until the front wheels are in straight ahead position. 5. Turn both tie-rods equally until the toe reading on the turning radius gauge is correct. Page 9314 Page 2695 Electrical Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications Resistance 5 K ohms at 32 deg F 3 K ohms at 68 deg F 1 K ohms at 104 deg F 0.5 K ohms at 176 deg F 0.2 K ohms at 212 deg F Torque 13 ft.lb Page 6684 6. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. NOTE: Reposition the tie-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced. Turning Angle NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. Turning angle: - Inward wheel: (39°00' ± 2°) +37° to +42°. - Outward wheel: 30°00' (reference) 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: - Front: (0°00' ± 1°) -1° to +1° - Rear: (-0°25' ± 30') -0.92° to +0.09° 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Toe-In NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (that is, caster, camber, toe and/or turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release parking brake. NOTE: Measure difference in toe measurements with the wheels pointed straight ahead. - If the parking brake is engaged, you may get an incorrect reading. Rear toe-in: (2 ± 2 mm / 0.06 ± 0.06 inch) -0.06 to +0.06 inch. Page 980 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Page 4871 Page 8175 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 932 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Page 6848 8. Install the 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the 10 mm hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the special tool. NOTE: Remove the ball joint using the special tool. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the ball joint boot. 9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and steering knuckle using the special tool. 10. Remove the left tie-rod end, then slide the rack all the way to the right. 11. Disconnect the primary heated oxygen sensor (Primary H02S) connector. 12. Separate the three way catalytic converter by removing the self-locking nuts. NOTE: Always replace the gaskets with new ones. 13. Disconnect the shift linkage. Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain. Page 3155 Page 3352 Page 621 Wiper Relay: Locations Photo 26 Beneath Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8838 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3241 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque 13 ft lb (18 Nm) Page 528 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4492 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 3710 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Inner trim cover ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 3. Remove the corner sash trim. 4. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. 5. Remove the bolt and nut. Peel the glass run channel out of the rear channel. Page 8179 Page 3222 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4767 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 413 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5173 Mainshaft: Service and Repair NOTE: - Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly. - Inspect the thrust needle bearings and the needle bearings for galling and rough movement. - Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings. Page 5167 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. Page 5138 Page 7173 Mode Control Switch Mode Control Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Recirculation Control Motor 1. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal, and ground the No. 2 and No. 4 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. CAUTION: Never connect the battery in the opposite direction. Recirculation Control Motor - Test 2. Disconnect the No. 2 or No. 4 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at FRESH or RECIRCULATE. Page 10068 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Motor 1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel. Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement 2. Remove the trim cover, outer nut, wiper arm, pivot cap, inner nut, washer, and rubber seal as shown. 3. Disconnect the 4.P connector from the wiper motor. Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement 4. Remove the three mounting bolts and the wiper motor assembly. Page 665 ABS Component Locations Testing and Inspection Trunk/Liftgate Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection 1. Open the trunk lid, then remove the trunk lid inner trim. Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the trunk key cylinder switch. 3. Check continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity when the trunk key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK with the key. ^ There should be no continuity when the keylock is released Page 9586 Driver Side Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Driver Side Motor Test: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. Driver's Window Motor Test 2. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the motor. Driver's Window Motor Test 3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. CAUTION: When the motor stops running, disconnect one lead immediately. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Pulser Test: 5. Connect the test leads of an analog ohmmeter to the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. 6. Run the motor by connecting power and ground to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. The ohmmeter needle should move back and forth alternately. Page 6484 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7995 Page 4839 Torque Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Rod Bearing Cap Nuts 34 ft.lb Page 587 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1097 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 161 Top Left Side Of Engine Page 4395 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 5082 6. Measure the starting torque of the differential assembly with the special tool and a torque wrench. Standard: - New bearings: 2.7 - 3.9 Nm (24 - 35 inch lbs.) - Reused bearings: 2.5 - 3.6 Nm (22 - 32 inch lbs.) NOTE: Measure the starting torque at normal room temperature in both directions. - Changing the shim to the next size will increase or decrease starting torque about 0.3 - 0.4 Nm (2.6 - 3.5 inch lbs.). - To increase the starting torque, increase the thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting torque, decrease the thickness of the shim. Page 8919 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9739 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Torque 107 in.lb Page 8035 Page 280 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 9789 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6329 Remove Booster From Bulkhead 10. Remove the brake booster from the engine compartment. 11. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Adjust the pushrod length before installing the brake booster. 12. Install the master cylinder. 13. After installation, perform the following inspections and adjust if necessary. ^ Brake pedal height ^ Brake pedal free play Page 4288 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6777 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 4732 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 5172 Mainshaft: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly. - Inspect the thrust needle bearings and the needle bearings for galling and rough movement. - Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings. Page 5389 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 951 Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor: Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor The fillpipe restrictor is used to prevent leaded fuel from being added to the fuel tank. The gasoline pump for unleaded fuel has a smaller nozzle. The fillpipe restrictor will only allow the unleaded type nozzle to be inserted into the fuel tank. Page 6146 Akebono Caliper ^ Install and tighten the caliper bolts while holding the caliper pins with a thin, open-end wrench. ^ After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. ^ Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then road-test. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. Page 475 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1299 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls Page 3121 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 921 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 8259 Page 359 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Page 9516 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4522 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9793 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5433 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. 1. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly. CAUTION: The regulator spring cap can pop out when the stop bolt is removed. 2. Reassembly is the reverse order of disassembly. NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF. - Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve body, and tighten the stopper bolt. Servo Page 3804 Page 8268 Page 9257 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Testing and Inspection Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Switch Test 4. Disconnect the 20-P connector between the combination switch harness and main wire harness. Page 6170 Rear Disc Micrometer Setup - Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 in) in from the outer edge of the disc. Specs: Brake disc thickness 9.9-10.1 mm (0.39-0.40 in) Max refinishing limit 8.0 mm (0.31 in) Brake Disc Parallelism 0.015mm (0.31 in) max. NOTE: Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. - If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc. NOTE: Refer to Steering and Suspension for brake disc replacement. Page 8233 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8099 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.7 hour Defect code: 032 Contention code: F99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Page 5899 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 700 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Page 3555 Page 6598 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 4877 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 3643 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 3930 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5546 4. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 5. *Remove the outboard joint using the threaded adapter (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide hammer.* 6. Remove and discard the "C" clip from the driveshaft. Clean and inspect the driveshaft splines and ring groove for burrs or other defects. 7. Install the new outboard joint boot provided in the kit. Slide it slowly onto the driveshaft to avoid damaging the boot. 8. Install the new "C" clip onto the ring groove of the driveshaft. 9. Insert the driveshaft in the new outboard joint. Make sure the "C" clip is centered on the shaft and is resting against the chamfered edge of the inner race. 10. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Ex-R Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Ex-R Right Rear Of Engine Page 1614 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9988 10. Remove the rear channel. 11. Remove the center channel. Page 4595 Specifications Balance Shaft Bearing: Specifications Inner Diameter: No. 1 Front Journal: Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................... 42.800-42.820 mm (1.6850-1.6858 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................... .................................................................................................... 42.83 mm (1.686 inch) No. 1 Rear Journal: Standard (New) ............................................................................................................................................ 21.00-21.013 mm (0.8268-0.8273 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................... .................................................................................................. 21.02 mm (0.828 inch) No. 2 Front And Rear Journals: Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................... 38.800-38.820 mm (1.5276-1.5283 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................... .................................................................................................... 38.83 mm (1.529 inch) No. 3 Front And Rear Journals: Standard (New) .......................................................................................................................................... 34.800-34.820 mm (1.3701-1.3709 inch) Service Limit ....................................................................... .................................................................................................... 34.83 mm (1.371 inch) Page 6257 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Replace the brake hose if the hose is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks. 2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line using a 10 mm flare nut wrench. 3. Remove and discard the brake hose clip from the brake hose. Remove Brake Line 4. Remove the banjo bolt, and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. Specs: Brake Hose To Brake Caliper (Banjo Bolt) 34 Nm (25 lb.ft.) Brake Line To Brake Hose 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3564 Page 6801 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5785 Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 2873 Page 40 Intermittent Wiper System Intermittent Wiper System Integrated Control Unit Seat Belt Reminder And Key-in Reminder System Seat Belt Reminder And Key-In Reminder System Page 334 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7969 Cellular Phone: Testing and Inspection In-Dash Cellular Phone - Troubleshooting (All Handset Functions Are Inoperative) Page 8897 Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 5. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. If unable to obtain the above readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Use new O-rings and packing when reassembling. Page 6804 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5827 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 8978 Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Disc Runout Service Limit 0.004 in Max Refinish Limit 0.91 in Refinish new disc if runout is greater than 0.004 in Disc Thickness and Parallelism Brake Disc Thickness 0.98 - 0.99 in This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. Refinishing Limit 0.83 in Brake Disc Parallelism* 0.0006 in Page 4083 End Play Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection End Play ^ Connecting Rod End Play: Standard (New): 0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.012 inch) - Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) ^ If out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod. ^ If still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft Page 5108 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 6193 Bleeding The Brakes With The Special Tool 5. Bleed high-pressure fluid from the maintenance bleeder with the special tool. 6. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few minutes, then stop it. Check the fluid level in the modulator reservoir and refill to the MAX level line if necessary. 7. Turn the Mode Selector switch of the checker to 2. 8. While depressing the brake pedal firmly, push the "Start Test" switch to operate the modulator. There should be kickback on the brake pedal. If not, repeat steps 5 to 8. NOTE: Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly when operating the checker. 9. Turn the Mode Selector to 3, 4, and 5. Perform step 8 for each of the test mode positions. 10. Refill the modulator reservoir to the MAX level line and install the reservoir cap. WARNING: Disconnect the ALB Checker before driving the car. A collision can result from a reduction or complete loss of braking ability, causing severe personal injury or death. Without Anti-Lock Brakes CAUTION: - Use only clean Honda Genuine DOT 3 Heavy Duty brake fluid or an equivalent DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add clean new fluid from a sealed container as required. Reservoir MAX Level 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. Page 6131 Brake Pad: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. ^ When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. ^ Keep grease off the discs and pads. Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 5416 Part 2 Of 2 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls. Page 7644 Airbag Assembly Replacement Remove the five mounting nuts, then lift the front passenger's airbag out of the dashboard. NOTE: Do not confuse the lower mounting nuts with the upper mounting nuts. The upper mounting nuts are not self-locking. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS Wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. 5. Install the new airbags: Airbag Assembly Replacement - Place the front passenger's airbag assembly into the dashboard. - Loosely install all five mounting nuts. - Tighten the upper two nuts first, then tighten the lower three nuts. Page 9137 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Outlet Line Pump ................................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Valve Housing ........................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) Valve Housing Cylinder Line ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 17 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Return Line ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) Gearbox Housing Line ......................................................................................................................... ................................................. 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Page 18 Page 8325 4. Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way, and disconnect the inner handle rod and power door lock connector. Page 9390 Ceiling, Door Courtesy, Spot And Cargo Lights (Part 1 Of 2) Page 529 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9496 Electrical Specifications Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Electrical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 1943 Piston Ring: Testing and Inspection Ring-to-Groove Clearance After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearances: ^ Top Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.035-0.060 mm (0.0014-0.0024 inch) - Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) ^ Second Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 inch) - Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Page 4842 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3962 Specifications Fan Blade: Specifications Self Locking Nut [1] ............................................................................................................................. .................................................. 4.4 Nm (39 in. lbs.) Self Locking Nut [2] ........................................... .................................................................................................................................... 5.4 Nm (48 in. lbs.) [1] TOYO RADIATOR manufactured radiator. [2] NIPPONDENSO manufactured radiator. Page 3265 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer ABS Pump Motor Relay Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Locations ABS Pump Motor Relay Under-hood Anti-Lock Brake System Fuse/Relay Box Page 4022 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Transmission Page 8769 Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6520 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 7961 Cellular Phone: Electrical Diagrams In-Dash Cellular Phone (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2573 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 7311 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 8902 Page 7743 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Page 1906 14. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods and set them aside with their respective caps. 15. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine in proper order. 16. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer. Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 17. Use the wooden handle of a hammer to drive the pistons out. 18. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps aver removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 19. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to avoid mix-up on reassembly. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size. Page 3862 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 585 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 2326 Page 5429 Valve Body: Service and Repair Overhaul Main Part 1 Of 2 Description and Operation Odometer: Description and Operation Speedometer and Odometer The odometer and speedometer drive circuits receive pulses from the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates. The frequency and duration of these input pulses are measured and displayed by the speedometer, odometer, and tripmeter. Page 9583 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7122 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 7127 3. Remove the four flange bolts, then separate the hub unit from the brake disc. 4. Separate the wheel bearing from the front hub using the special tools and a press as shown. CAUTION: Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 5. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the hub using the special tools and a commercially-available bearing separator as shown. 6. Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. NOTE: Wash the steering knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Page 523 Page 315 Page 8790 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2930 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 37 Ex Right Rear Of Engine Ex-R Page 9146 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Key-in Reminder System - Ignition Key Switch Test When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper in the integrated control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch. With ground at the "BLU/WHT" and "A1" terminals, the beeper sounds. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 5 and No. 8. ^ There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. ^ There should be no continuity with the key removed. Page 4208 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9562 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4844 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4909 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 2348 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1253: A problem in the Variable Valve Timing and Valve Lift Electronic Control (VTEC) Solenoid Valve circuit. Page 1313 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the front wheels from the vertical. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle. If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. Page 6805 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1981 3. Remove the sealing bolt from the inspection hole, and connect the Valve Inspection Tool. NOTE: Remove any oil from the bolt threads and camshaft holder threads before retightening the sealing bolt. 4. Loosen the regulator valve on the valve inspection tool, and apply the specified air pressure to the rocker arm synchronizing piston A/B. Specified Air Pressure is 400 kPa (57 psi) 5. With the specified air pressure applied, push up the timing plate 2-3 mm (0.08-0.12 inch) at plate end; the synchronizing piston will pop out and engage the intake mid, primary and secondary rocker arms. Visually check the engagement of the synchronizing piston A/B. Locations Locations Page 6666 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 8739 Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 10. Remove the two screws and set/resume switch. Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 11. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. ^ If there is continuity and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. Page 1699 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 9285 Locations Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5934 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4115 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2416 Distributor Overhaul Page 9618 Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6426 Rectifier Test NOTE: The diodes are designed to allow current to pass in one direction while blocking it in the opposite direction. Since the alternator rectifier is made up of eight diodes (four pairs), each diode must be tested for continuity in both directions with an ohmmeter that has diode checking capability; a total of 16 checks. 1. Check for continuity in each direction, between the B and P, and between the E (ground) and P terminals of each diode pair. All diodes should have continuity in only one direction. 2. If any of the eight diodes fails, replace the rectifier assembly. (Diodes are not available separately.) ROTOR SLIP RING TEST Rotor Slip Ring Test 1. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings. 2. Check that there is no continuity between the slip rings and the rotor or rotor shaft. 3. If the rotor fails either continuity check, replace the alternator. STATOR TEST Stator Test 1. Check that there is continuity between each pair of leads. 2. Check that there is no continuity between each lead and the coil core. 3. If the coil fails either continuity check, replace the alternator. Page 9158 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Pin Switch Right Side Of Shift Lever Page 5624 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 8342 Coupe: Note: Make sure the lower center glass run channel is fitted into the center channel. 13. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 14. Install the glass. 15. Coupe: Install the center channel guide and channel guide cover. NOTE: Make sure the guide pin is installed in the center channel guide properly. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Page 1499 Coolant: Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT REFILLING AND BLEEDING CAUTION: When pouring engine coolant, be sure to shut the relay box lid and not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the paint. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 1. Set the heater temperature lever or control dial to maximum heat. 2. When the radiator is cool, remove the radiator cap. - Loosen the drain plug, and drain the coolant. 3. Remove the drain bolt from the rear side of the cylinder block to drain the block. 4. Apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 5. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. 6. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank halfway to the MAX mark with water, then up to the MAX mark with antifreeze. 7. Mix the recommended antifreeze with an equal amount of water in a clean container. NOTE: - For best corrosion protection, the coolant concentration must be maintained year-round at 50% minimum. Coolant concentrations less than 50% may not provide sufficient protection against corrosion or freezing. - Coolant concentrations greater than 60% will impair cooling efficiency and are not recommended. CAUTION: - Do not mix different brands of antifreeze/ coolants. - Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products; they may not be compatible with the genuine coolant. - Engine Coolant Refill Capacity: including reservoir (0.6 [0.6 qt.]). M/T: 5.4 (5.7 qt.) - A/T: 5.3 (5.6 qt.) 8. Loosen the air bleed bolt in the thermostat housing, then fill the radiator to the bottom of the filler neck with the coolant mixture. Tighten the bleed bolt as soon as coolant starts to run out in a steady stream without bubbles. 9. With the radiator cap off, start the engine and let it run until warmed up (radiator fan comes on at least twice). Then, if necessary, add more coolant mix to bring the level back up to the bottom of the filler neck. 10. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks. Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Replace Timing Belt, Balancer Belt, and inspect Water Pump every 105,000 miles. EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 7947 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5925 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 1071 Page 3015 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9091 Page 8167 Page 3311 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 601 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train Valve Clearance: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. Page 3532 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 500 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 5280 Key Interlock Solenoid Test 2. Disconnect the 8-P connector from the main wire harness. Key Interlock Solenoid Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No. 4 and No. 7 terminals. ^ If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. ^ If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Page 7198 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 380 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Page 750 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Testing and Inspection Speedometer Module: Testing and Inspection Speedometer/Trip Meter/Odometer - Troubleshooting NOTE: The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. VSS Input Test (At Harness Side Of 3-P Connector) VSS Test Page 7958 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7200 Page 4838 Page 4638 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9433 Page 2417 Distributor: Service and Repair Reassembly Distributor Reassembly 1. When reassembling distributor, install the distributor ignition (DI) rotor so that it faces in the direction shown (toward the No. 1 cylinder). 2. Align the index mark on the distributor ignition housing whit the index mark on the end of the shaft. Page 7349 Page 7391 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3301 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8372 NOTE: Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. 7. Disconnect the courtesy light connector. 8. Remove the bracket and detach the grommets, then carefully remove the plastic cover 9. Before installing the plastic cover, make sure the door harness and connectors are fastened correctly on the door. Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Page 9556 Page 1600 Fuse: Service and Repair Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection Circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under- hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connectors. Driver's Side: ^ Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2-P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box - Removal/Installation Front Passenger's Side: ^ Remove the glove box. ^ Disconnect the 2-P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the driver's foot rest. 4. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. Page 8238 Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test 1. Remove the inside handle. 2. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the switch. Door Lock Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 4662 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Photo View Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Photo View Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 9541 Lamp Out Sensor: Testing and Inspection Brake Light Failure Sensor Test 1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the brake pedal is pressed. ^ If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. ^ If one of the brake lights does not come on, check whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to step 2. ^ If none of the brake lights come on, check the brake light circuit. 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the side box. 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator does not come on and stay on, when the No. 1 terminal of the 6-P connector is grounded and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire between the safety indicator and the No. 1 terminal of the failure sensor, and whether the safety indicator circuit (printed circuit board) has a problem. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on and stay on, go to step 4. 4. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II) with the No. 2 terminal of the 6-P connector grounded and the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP light comes on and stays on, replace the failure sensor. ^ If the BRAKE LAMP does not stay on, check for an open in the BLK wire between the No. 2 terminal of the failure sensor and ground, and check for a poor ground at G551. Page 8184 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer Error Codes 00-015 March 14, 2000 Applies To: All with CD Player/Changer Audio Unit Error Codes (Replaces 91-007, dated October 6, 1997) *If the audio unit displays an error code, use the troubleshooting tables in this service bulletin to troubleshoot the problem. Refer to service bulletin 98-019 for CD Player/Changer exchange information.* Page 4484 Locations Page 9982 17. Attach the door harness to the door correctly. 18. Disconnect the power window switch from the door harness, then install the armrest (coupe, drivers) or power window switch on the door panel. 19. When reinstalling the plastic cover, apply adhesive along the edge where necessary to maintain a continuous seal and prevent water leaks. 20. Install the door panel. Locations A/T Gear Position Switch: Locations Left Side Of Shift Lever Page 6142 ^ Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. Specs Standard 8.5 - 9.5 mm (0.33 - 0.37 in) Service Limit 1.6 mm (0.06 in) Caliper Bolts 23 Nm (17 lb.ft.) ^ Remove the pad retainers. ^ Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. ^ Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. INSTALLATION Installing Shims ^ Make sure that the pad retainers are installed in the correct positions. ^ Apply Molykote M77 grease to the pad side of the shim. Wipe excess grease off the shim. WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. NOTE: Install the inner pad with its wear indicator facing downward. Page 6632 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 2740 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 8357 10. Coupe: If necessary, remove the lower center glass run channel from the center channel. NOTE: When installing the lower center glass run channel, apply clear sealant to location ® on the center channel. Service and Repair Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07974-SA50800 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the boot set ring and the boot. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the boot installation section with grease. 2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip with grease. 3. Wipe the grease off the sliding surface of the ball pin, then pack the lower area with fresh grease. CAUTION: ^ Keep grease off the boot installation section and the tapered section of the ball pin. ^ Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the boot in the groove of the boot installation section securely, then bleed air. 5. Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt until the end of the tool aligns with the groove on the boot. Slide the set ring over the tool and into position. CAUTION: After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination and wipe it if necessary. Page 6249 Pressure Switch: Description and Operation ABS Pressure Switch PURPOSE The pressure switch monitors the pressure accumulation in the accumulator. When the pressure in the accumulator rises, the Bourdon tube in the pressure switch deforms outward, which in turn activates the microswitch by the force of the spring attached to the sensing lever. FUNCTION When the pressure in the accumulator drops due to Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) operation, the Bourdon tube moves in the opposite direction, and the micro-switch is eventually turned off. The ABS control unit detects the fluid pressure in the accumulator by the ON/OFF signals from the pressure switch. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill .................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 2.9 Qt Page 2444 Valve Clearance: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. Page 3996 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9978 NOTE: If necessary, remove the glass stopper. 9. Remove the front and center channels. Page 2055 Page 9450 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9741 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Without filter ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 4.0 liters (4.2 quarts) Page 1671 Part 1 Of 2 Page 1936 1. Use a hydraulic press for installation. ^ When pressing the pin in or out, be sure to position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 2. Adjust the length B of the piston pin driver. ^ B: 51.5 mm (2.03 inch) Page 1110 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4860 Page 9748 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 8048 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Lights-On Reminder System Lights-On Reminder System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Rear Window Defogger Timer Circuit Rear Window Defogger Timer Circuit Page 8042 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2722 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Page 6002 ABS Pump Motor: Service Precautions WARNING: The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. Page 2994 Underside Center Of Vehicle Secondary HO2S Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Page 4016 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. - If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Page 8229 Page 6222 Brake Spring Compressor 7. Lower the locknuts fully and tighten them securely. NOTE: Keep the locknuts in this position until you reinstall the circlip. Snap Ring Removal & Installation 8. Remove the circlip with snap ring pliers. Page 10028 3. Adjust the front channel. 4. Adjust the window regulator. 5. Adjust the glass. 6. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. Page 8841 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1435 18. Align the groove on the front balancer shaft pulley with the pointer on the oil pump housing as shown. 19. Install the timing balancer belt. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3 - 1 turn to tension the timing balancer belt. 20. Remove the 6 x 100 mm bolt from the rear balancer shaft, then install the 12 mm sealing bolt. 21. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley about one turn counterclockwise, then tighten the adjusting nut. 23. Remove the 6 x 1.0 mm bolt from the timing belt adjuster arm. 24. Remove the crankshaft pulley, then install the lower cover. 25. Install the rubber seal around the adjusting nut. NOTE: Do not loosen the adjusting nut. 26. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 27. After installation, adjust the tension of each belt. Page 418 PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) Page 9369 Page 1607 Fuse Block: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Side Of Engine Compartment Page 8435 Page 1524 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection FLUID LEVEL CHECK NOTE: Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Turn off the engine. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 3. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 4. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. 5. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid* into the dipstick tube to bring it to the upper mark. 6. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. Page 8903 Page 4458 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1086 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6068 ABS Component Locations Page 9095 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 8457 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Page 7357 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 2172 Oil Pressure Indicator Light Page 8301 Page 9337 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8146 Speaker: Service and Repair Tweeter Rear Door Speaker Replacement 1. Carefully pry the tweeter out of the dashboard, then disconnect the 2-P connector from the tweeter. 2. Install in the reverse order of removal. Page 1980 4. Check that the intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary intake rocker arms. 5. Check the intake mid rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. ^ If the intake mid rocker arm does not move, remove the mid, primary and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. ^ If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary, mid, and secondary rocker arms as an assembly. Inspection Using Special Tools CAUTION: ^ Before using the Valve Inspection Tool, make sure that the air pressure gauge on the air compressor indicates over 400 kPa (57 psi). ^ Inspect the valve clearance before rocker arm inspection. ^ Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect the belt. ^ Check the intake primary rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Plug the relief hole with the special tool. Page 2693 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 382 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Service and Repair Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Lift the two access panels, and remove the two taillight mounting screws. 3. Pull the taillight assembly out away from the body to release the two mounting pins. 4. Remove the faulty bulb by pushing it in and then turning it 45 degrees counterclockwise. Page 8123 Radio/Stereo: Electrical Diagrams Stereo Sound System (Part 1 Of 2) Page 54 Control Unit Input Test Page 7880 C540 (18-GRY) Page 6647 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 2247 Balance Shaft Seal: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: ^ Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of the right side cover and oil pump case before installing them. ^ Use liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001, or equivalent. INSTALLATION NOTE: ^ The crankshaft and front balancer shaft oil seal housing surface should be dry. ^ Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft, the balancer shaft and to the lips of the seals. Specifications Valve Body: Specifications CLEARANCE SPECIFICATIONS ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance: Standard (New) ATF Pump Drive Gear ........................................................................................................................ 0.210 - 0.265 mm (0.0083 - 0.0104 inch.) ATF Pump Driven Gear ...................................................................................................................... 0.035 - 0.063 mm (0.0014 - 0.0025 inch.) ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard (New): .................................................................................................................................................... 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 inch.) Service Limit: ................................................................................. ......................................................................................... 0.07 mm (0.003 inch.) DIMENSIONS Lock-up Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.7 mm (0.028 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.260 inch) Free Length ............................................................................................................................................................. 38.0-39.0 mm (1.496-1.535 inch) Lock-up Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.299 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 73.7 mm (2.902 inch) Cooler Relief Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.4 mm (0.331 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ............................. 46.8 mm (1.843 inch) Modulator Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.4 mm (0.055 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 9.4 mm (0.370 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 33.0 mm (1.299 inch) CPC Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.4 mm (0.055 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 9.4 mm (0.370 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 33.0 mm (1.299 inch) Main Orifice Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.1 mm (0.280 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 46.7 mm (1.838 inch) 1-2 Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.6 mm (0.339 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 40.4 mm (1.591 inch) 2-3 Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.299 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 57.0 mm (2.244 inch) 4th Exhaust Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.1 mm (0.280 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... 48.8 (1.921 inch) 3-4 Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.299 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 57.0 mm (2.244 inch) 3rd Kick-Down Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.299 inch) Page 1612 Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 4607 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6120 Snap Ring Removal & Installation 12. Install the circlip in the groove, then remove the special tool. NOTE: Check that the circlip is seated in the groove properly. 13. Coat a new piston seal with recommended silicone grease in the caliper seal set, and install it in the caliper. Grease The Caliper 14. Apply rubber grease to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and install it in the caliper. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston and piston boot. Piston Installation 15. Coat the outside of the piston with brake fluid, and install it on the adjusting bolt while rotating it clockwise with the special tool. Page 8181 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3353 Page 4490 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 1900 - Crankshaft Total Indicated Runout: ^ Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. ^ Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) Page 5023 2. Install new O-rings on the piston. 3. Install the piston in the clutch drum. Apply pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating. NOTE: Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before installing. CAUTION: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the piston with too much force. 4. Install the return spring and spring retainer, and position the snap ring on the retainer. Page 3718 Page 4241 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 2066 Engine Mount Control Unit: Description and Operation NOTE: Unlike previous liquid engine mounts, this engine mount control system reduces vibration at idle range without affecting vibration damping above idle. DESCRIPTION The system is comprised of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the solenoid valve and the rear mount with built-in diaphragm actuator. OPERATION The PCM receives the engine rpm signals and sends a signal to the solenoid valve to open only at idle. When the solenoid valve opens, intake manifold vacuum is applied to the diaphragm actuator, and the rotor valve located in the rear mount rotates 80 degrees. The mount has Chamber A on its upper part and Chamber B on the lower part. The rotor valve located between these two chambers controls the quantity of liquid that flows between them. At idle, the rotor valve opens, and liquid flows through passages 1 and 2. Dampening decreases, and vibration at idle is reduced. Page 6069 Wheel Sensor: Description and Operation WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Wheel Sensor Operation PURPOSE The wheel sensor is a contactless type that detects the rotating speed of a wheel. It consists of a permanent magnet and coil. FUNCTION When the gear pulsers attached to the rotating parts of each wheel turn, the magnetic flux around the coil in the wheel sensor alternates, generating voltages with frequency in proportion to wheel rotating speed. These pulses are sent to the ABS control unit, and the ABS control unit identifies the wheel speed. Page 3346 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 3956 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4596 Page 3470 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Reverse Shift Fork Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection Reverse Shift Fork 1. Measure the clearances between the reverse shift fork and 5th/reverse shift piece pin. a. Standard: - A: 0.05 - 0.35 mm (0.002 - 0.014 inch) - B: 0.40 - 0.80 mm (0.020 - 0.030 inch) b. Service Limit: - A: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) - B: 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) 2. If the clearances are more than the service limit, measure the widths of the groove in the reverse shift fork. Standard: A: 7.05 - 7.25 mm (0.278 - 0.285 inch) - B: 7.40 - 7.70 mm (0.290 - 0.300 inch) NOTE: If the widths of the grooves are not within the standard, replace the reverse shift fork with a new one. - If the widths of the grooves are within the standard, replace the 5th/reverse shift piece with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler gear and reverse shift fork. a. Standard: 0.5 - 1.1 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) b. Service Limit: 1.8 mm (0.07 inch) Page 3980 A/T Gear Position Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 12-P and 2-P connectors from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ Move the lever back and forth at each position without touching the push button, and check for continuity within the range of free play. ^ If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch as described below. Page 5512 1998 DRUM 1990-97 DRUM Rear Page 3042 Page 4090 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Locations A/C Thermostat: Locations Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Service Precautions Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Page 4387 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 1768 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4757 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 8093 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.7 hour Defect code: 032 Contention code: F99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Page 1014 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Sedan/Wagon (Driver's): Remove the power window switch from the door panel. Coupe: Driver's: Remove the armrest from the door panel Passenger's: Remove the power window switch from the door panel. 3. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 4. Coupe: Lower the glass fully, then peel off the channel guide cover. Remove the screws, then remove the center channel guide by pulling it upward. NOTE: When installing the channel guide cover, apply the double-faced adhesive tape to it. 5. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Page 3955 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 8915 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3426 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Page 7498 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications HFC-134a R-134a Page 7707 Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Front Banjo Bolts 25 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 6.5 ft.lb Caliper Bolts 54 ft.lb Rear Akebono Banjo Bolts 25 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 6.5 ft.lb Caliper Bolts 18 ft.lb Caliper Bracket Bolts 28 ft.lb Flange Bolt 10mm 6.5 ft.lb Nissin Banjo Bolts 25 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 6.5 ft.lb Caliper Bolts 17 ft.lb Caliper Bracket Bolts 28 ft.lb Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Line: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 8105 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8128 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Stereo Sound System NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the No. 39 (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. 1. Remove the rear console. Removal 2. Remove the front console panel. 3. Remove the two screws. Pull the stereo radio/cassette player out part of the way. Removal 4. Disconnect the 16-P connector and antenna lead, then remove the stereo radio/cassette player. Page 1734 2. Remove the wheels, and replace the center caps. 3. Reinstall the wheels, torque the wheel nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). Page 9020 Page 428 Specifications Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Thermoswitch "ON" Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................... 196-203°F (91-95°C) Thermoswitch "OFF" Temperature [1] .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-15°F (3-8°C) [1] Subtract these values from the actual "ON" temperature. Page 527 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6128 Brake Pad: Specifications Pad Thickness Standard 0.33 - 0.37 in Service Limit 0.06 in Page 9696 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Relay Left Kick Panel - Photo 93 Page 1573 from the reservoir (air enters in the modulator unit) during brake fluid replacement, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. 11. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 12. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container (see the previous page). 13. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 14. Tighten the bleeder when the fluid starts to flow out of the bleeder. 15. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. Page 9263 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. ABS Control Unit ABS Control Unit: Locations ABS Control Unit Right Kick Panel Page 4210 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 2124 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4073 Page 8532 Driver's Door (Passenger's Similar) Page 4704 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B1 ENGINE Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test F22B2 ENGINE NOTE: ^ Perform an input test for the Ignition Control Module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. ^ The tachometer should operate normally if the ICM is OK. 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor, and the leak cover. 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the ignition switch and the ICM. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. ^ If there is no battery voltage, check: - ignition coil. - GRN (WHT/BLK)* wire between the ICM and ignition coil. ^ If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the 32-P connector from the ECM/PCM, and check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ICM and ECM/PCM. There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. There should be no continuity. Page 5879 Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Locations ABS Component Locations Testing and Inspection Ventilation Switch: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Switch - Test Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. Page 5630 A/T Gear Position Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 2864 A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0715 Set 01-012 May 15, 2001 Applies To: 1996-97 Accord L4 - ALL with A/T 1996-97 Odyssey - ALL MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0715 PROBLEM The MIL comes on, and A/T DTC P0715 (problem in the mainshaft speed sensor circuit) is set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve and record the A/T freeze data with the PGM Tester. Make sure you record the freeze data values on the repair order. Refer to DIAGNOSIS to determine which of these repair actions is needed: ^ Replace the PCM ^ Flush the A/T ^ Replace the A/T ^ Troubleshoot the mainshaft speed sensor circuit ^ Troubleshoot an engine problem PARTS INFORMATION Front Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper Motor 1. Open the hood, and remove the cap nuts and the wiper arms. 2. Disconnect the 5-P connector from the wiper motor. Windshield Wiper Motor Test 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. ^ If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. Windshield Wiper Motor Test 4. Connect an analog voltmeter between the C and E terminals, then run the motor. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V and 4 V or less alternately. Page 2954 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 10037 Wiper Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and C terminals when power and ground are connected to the D and E terminals ^ There should be continuity between the B and C terminals when power is disconnected. Intermittent Wiper Relay ^ Intermittent wiper relay Page 5099 unit (see S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, filed under Transmission/Driveline). Flushing the A/T 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D4, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the A/T shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 14. Refill the A/T with Honda ATF-Z1. Disclaimer Page 3934 Page 9045 Page 5293 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve assembly. 2. Check the shift control solenoid valve fluid passages for dust or dirt, and replace as an assembly, if necessary. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new filter/gasket. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Page 4085 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4476 Page 4079 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 2769 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8075 5. Insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1-1/2" from the right side of the opening. 6. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 7. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed tray. 3. If a tray is stuck in the player, reinstall the cover and replace the changer. If all the trays are in the magazine, insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 4. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 5. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Page 6049 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Flushing CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this article is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). Fluid replacement procedures for the rest of the brake system are incorporated into the brake bleeding procedures for the basic brake hydraulic system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 1. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 2. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 3. Use the steps below to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: Approximately 35 - 45 ml (1 1/6 - 1 1/2 fl.oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. Modulator Unit Location A) Attach a wrench to the maintenance bleeder. B) Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. C) While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 turn to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. D) Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. E) Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. F) Tighten the maintenance bleeder. 4. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. Page 5778 Page 7440 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4320 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6096 Brake Caliper: Diagrams Rear Akebono Caliper Page 7237 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5613 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Photo 38 EGR Valve Lift Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 9196 Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: Be careful not to damage the switch and the instrument panel. Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switches out of the instrument panel, and disconnect the connectors. Main Switch Test/Replacement 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Locations Illustrated Index Page 6673 Alignment: Service Precautions CAUTION: When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them at the same location from which they were removed. If a fastener needs to be replaced, use the correct part number fastener for that application. If the correct part number fastener is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used. Fasteners that are not reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be called out. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. If the above conditions are not followed, parts or system damage could result. Page 218 Cigarette Lighter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Horn Relay ^ Cigarette lighter relay Page 7662 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before disconnecting any part of the SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - During installation or replacement, do not bump (impact wrench, hammer etc.) the area near the SRS unit. - Do not damage the SRS unit terminals or connectors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit; it has no serviceable parts. - Store the SRS unit in a clean, dry area. - Do not use any SRS unit which has been subjected to water damage or shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. SRS Unit Replacement Driver's Airbag: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. SRS Unit Replacement Front Passenger's Side: Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. Page 2341 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3958 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 7082 Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Page 3777 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 9996 6. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Page 8763 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3235 Distributor Overhaul Page 4410 Page 6451 Starter Motor: Mechanical Specifications Brush Specifications Brush Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Automatic Transmission Brush Length 15.8 - 16.2 mm 11.0 mm Spring Tension 16 - 18 N --Manual Transmission Brush Length 15.0 - 15.5 mm 10.0 mm Spring Tension 18 - 24 N --- Page 2658 Thermostat: Service and Repair NOTE: Use new O-rings when reassembling thermostat cover. Description and Operation Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is on ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 1 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. The gauge circuit is grounded at G404. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Gauge and Fuel Gauge The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 1, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes, pulling the gauge needle toward the coil with the stronger magnetic field. The fuel gauge works the same way. The resistance of the sending unit for the engine coolant temperature (ECT) gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high engine temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the engine coolant temperature (ECT) gauge varies from about 137 ohms at low engine temperature to between 30-46 ohms at high temperature (radiator fan running). The resistance of the sending unit for the fuel gauge varies from about 2-5 ohms at full, to about 110 ohms at empty. When you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), the gauge remains at the last reading until you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or START (III) again. Page 4392 Page 4631 Photo 36 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 36 Right Side Of Engine Description and Operation Alternator FR Signal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the Alternator (ALT) is charging. Page 5870 Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 4568 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 3799 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 7825 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 4910 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 1849 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9886 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 8526 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Use the following procedure when replacing one or both remote transmitters: 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's master door lock switch down in the UNLOCK position. 3. Quickly insert and remove the key from the ignition switch five times, then insert the key the sixth time, and leave it in the ignition switch. (This routine must be done within 10 seconds.) All the doors will lock and unlock to indicate that the control unit is in the program mode. 4. Press either button on the replacement transmitter. All the doors except the driver's door will lock and unlock to indicate that the control unit has accepted the transmitter into its memory. If either transmitter button is pressed again, all the doors will lock and unlock. 5. To program a second transmitter, press either button on that transmitter. The doors should lock and unlock as described in step 4. 6. Release the driver's master door lock switch. 7. To exit the program mode, close the driver's door or remove the key from the ignition switch. Specifications Fan Shroud: Specifications Mounting Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 7.0 Nm (5.0 ft. lbs.) Condenser Fan Shroud Mounting Bolts .................................................................................................................................................. 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft. lbs.) Page 6659 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator/Glass Run Channel Replacement 1. Remove: ^ Inner trim cover ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Connect the power window switch to the door harness. 3. Remove the corner sash trim. 4. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. 5. Remove the bolt and nut. Peel the glass run channel out of the rear channel. Page 8914 Page 4717 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Door Switch Test Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Test Door Switch Test 1. Remove the cover and the screw, then pull the switch out. 2. Disconnect the 1-P connector, and remove the switch. Door Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Page 1553 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7072 Tires: Testing and Inspection Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Page 5203 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 2723 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3-P connector from the clutch switch. Clutch Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 5056 Page 5083 Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair NOTE: Check the bearings for wear and rough rotation. If the bearings are OK, removal is not necessary. BEARING REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the tapered roller bearings using a bearing puller. 2. Install the new tapered roller bearings, using the special tool and a press as shown. NOTE: Press the bearings on until they bottom. - Use the large end of the special tool for torque converter housing side bearing. - Use the small end of the special tool for transmission housing side bearing. NOTE: The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a set. - Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever a bearing is replaced. - Drive in the bearings securely so that there is no clearance between the bearings and differential carrier. BEARING OUTER RACE REPLACEMENT TOOL REQUIRED - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07HAD-SF10100 Driver Attachment Page 8205 Control Unit Input Test 1. Slide the driver's seat forward. 2. Disconnect the 18-P and 12-P connectors from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. - If a test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace it. Page 5616 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3307 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6599 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 6894 7. When the connector halves are completely connected, the pawl is released, and the spring-loaded sleeve locks the connector. 8. Attach the connector in the holder, then install the access panel on the steering wheel lower cover. 9. Connect the positive cable first, then the negative cable to the battery. 10. After installing the airbag assembly, confirm proper system operation: a. Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the instrument panel SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. b. Confirm operation of horn buttons. c. Confirm operation of cruise control set/resume/switches. Separating the Tire From the Wheel Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Page 2787 PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Page 8862 Page 2853 Specifications Compressor Clutch Coil: Specifications RESISTANCE Field Coil .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 3.6 +/- 0.2 ohm at 68°F (20°C) Page 5713 NOTE: Hold the synchro ring against the gear evenly while measuring the clearance. Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance: Standard: 0.85-1.10 mm (0.033-0.043 inch) - Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) Double Cone Synchro-to-Gear Clearance: Standard: A: (Outer Synchro Ring to Synchro Cone) 0.5-1.0 mm (0.020-0.039 inch) B: (Synchro Cone to Gear) 0.5-1.0 mm (0.020- 0.039 inch) C: (Outer Synchro Ring to Gear) 0.95-1.68 mm (0.037-0.066 inch) - Service Limit: A: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) B: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) C: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) NOTE: If the clearance is less than the service limit, replace the synchro ring and synchro cone. Page 4102 Page 2572 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9449 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 6145 ^ Remove the pad retainers. ^ Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. ^ Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. INSTALLATION Installing Shims ^ Make sure that the pad retainers are installed in the correct positions. ^ Apply Molykote M77 grease to the pad side of the shim. Wipe excess grease off the shim. WARNING: - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. NOTE: Install the inner pad with its wear indicator facing downward. Installing Pads And Shims ^ Install the brake pads and pad shims on the caliper bracket. ^ Rotate the caliper piston clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad by turning the piston back. CAUTION: Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it sits properly. ^ Install the brake caliper Page 3107 Page 409 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Front Brake Pad: Specifications Lining Thickness Standard 0.41 - 0.45 in Service Limit 0.06 in Page 3942 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 7065 Tires: Description and Operation GENERAL DESCRIPTION Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the originals in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All model are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear. TREAD WEAR INDICATORS The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators (1) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended. Page 5764 7. Remove the shim lever, shim arm, and interlock. NOTE: Turn the shim lever boot so the hole is facing down. 8. Install the shift arm assembly in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Use liquid gasket (P/N 08718 - 0001). - Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. - Seal the entire circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil leakage. - If 20 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it and assemble the housings. Allow it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly before filling the transmission with oil. Page 8002 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Condenser 25 ml (0.85 oz) Evaporator 40 ml (1.35 oz) Line or Hose 10 ml (0.34 oz) Receiver/Dryer 10 ml (0.34 oz) Leakage Repair 25 ml (0.85 oz) Compressor 130 ml (4.40 oz) Volume of old compressor should equal oil drain from new compressor, but not more than 50 ml. Page 7275 Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC: Testing and Inspection Diode - Test NOTE: The diode is designed to pass current in one direction while blocking it in the opposite direction. Use an analog ohmmeter or a digital ohmmeter equipped with a diode tester. Check for current flow in both directions between the A and B terminals; there should be current flow in only one direction. Page 4119 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1962 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 98-009 Date: 990413 Engine - Ticking Noise From The Valve Train 98-009 April 13,1999 Applies To: 1995-97 Accord-All Ohio-built LX and DX models Ticking Noise From the Valve Train (Supersedes 98-009, dated June 23, 1998) SYMPTOM Ticking noise from the valve train. PROBABLE CAUSE Intake rocker arm shaft clearance is excessive at the number two cylinder. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the valve clearances, or replace the cam holder and the adjoining intake rocker arm shafts at the number two cylinder. PARTS INFORMATION Cam Holder kit: P/N 12010-P0B-305, H/C 5686423 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 12100-P0B-A00 System Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair System Bleeding Anti-Lock Brake System Modulator Unit Relieving System Pressure/Brake Fluid Replacement/Bleeding CAUTION: Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. NOTE: Brake fluid replacement procedure explained in this section is for the brake fluid in the modulator unit (that is, the brake fluid in the high-pressure passage and in the reservoir). 1. Remove the bleeder cap from the maintenance bleeder on the modulator unit. 2. Attach the wrench to the maintenance bleeder. 3. Connect a rubber tube of the appropriate diameter to the maintenance bleeder, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a suitable container. 4. While holding the rubber tube with your hand, slowly loosen the maintenance bleeder 1/8 to 1/4 to collect the brake fluid in the container. CAUTION: Do not loosen the maintenance bleeder too much. The high-pressure brake fluid can burst out. 5. Tighten the maintenance bleeder. NOTE: Do not remove the rubber tube and wrench yet. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for a minute. Stop the engine. 7. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. It should be below the MAX (upper) level line. 8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 to drain the rest of the brake fluid from the modulator unit. NOTE: The modulator has a capacity of approximately 150 ml (150 cc, 5 FL-oz). Approximately 40 - 45 ml (40 - 45 cc, 1.3 - 1.5 FL-oz) of the fluid is drained at each try. 9. Remove the cap, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. Page 3807 Page 7627 Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main harness 2P connector (B). Page 3362 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7205 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 1935 Piston Pin: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Assemble the piston pin tools as shown. 2. Adjust the length A of the piston pin driver. ^ A: 51.5 mm (2.03 inch) 3. Place the piston on the piston base and press the pin out with a hydraulic press. INSTALLATION Page 65 Control Unit Input Test Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Page 7351 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9427 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 4106 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9294 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 1532 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair NOTE: Check the transmission oil with the engine OFF and the vehicle on level ground. 1. Remove the oil filler plug, then check the level and condition of the oil. 2. The oil level must be up to the filler hole. If it is below the hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. 3. If the transmission oil is dirty, remove the drain plug and drain the oil. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission oil to the proper level. NOTE: The drain plug washer should be replaced at every oil change. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. Oil Capacity 1.9 L (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt) at oil change 2.0 L (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt) at overhaul Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Page 2806 Page 2357 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Pressure Pressure With Regulator Vacuume Hose Disconnected 38-48 Psi Page 9587 Page 3880 This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 9579 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 1082 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 9345 Glove Box Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6784 Page 1131 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM, PCM. Mechanical Specifications Hose/Line HVAC: Mechanical Specifications Torque Specifications Discharge Hose to Compressor ....................................................................... ........................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Discharge Hose to Condenser ........................................................................................................................................... ......................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Condenser Pipe to Condenser ...................................................... .............................................................................................................. 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Condenser Pipe to Receiver/Dryer .............................................................................................................................................................. 13 Nm (9.4 ft-lb) Receiver Pipe to Receiver/Dryer .............................................................................. ................................................................................... 13 Nm (9.4 ft-lb) Receiver Pipe to Evaporator . .............................................................................................................................................................. ........ 13 Nm (9.4 ft-lb) Suction Pipe to Evaporator .............................................................................. ............................................................................................ 31 Nm (23 ft-lb) Suction Hose to Suction Pipe ..................................................................................................................................................... .................. 31 Nm (23 ft-lb) Suction Hose to Compressor .................................................................. .................................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft-lb) Page 6164 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. ^ When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. ^ Keep grease off the discs and pads. Page 5256 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 3337 Starter Switch Signal: Testing and Inspection This signals the ECM/PCM when the engine is cranking. NOTE: M/T: Clutch pedal must be depressed. - A/T: Transmission in [N] or [P] position. Page 7446 Specifications Fuel Injector Resistor: Specifications Resistance 5 - 7 ohms Note: Between terminals (6, 5, 3, and 2) and the power terminal 1. Page 4006 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 4722 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3386 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 4244 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 9958 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Power window relay Page 7192 Page 842 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake System Indicator - Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK, but the brake system indicator does not function, perform the input test for the daytime running lights control unit. Specifications Valve Cover: Specifications Cap Nut ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 9.8 Nm (87 in. lbs.) Page 1540 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection 1. Check engine oil with the engine off and the car parked on level ground. 2. Make certain that the oil level indicated on the dipstick is between the upper and lower marks. 3. If the level has dropped close to the lower mark, add oil until it reaches the upper mark. CAUTION: Insert the dipstick carefully to avoid bending it. Locations Steering Column Lock: Locations Right Side Of Steering Column Page 9459 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 4300 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Component Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Photo 9 Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 7908 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Page 7344 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 1820 3. Remove the sealing bolt from the inspection hole, and connect the Valve Inspection Tool. NOTE: Remove any oil from the bolt threads and camshaft holder threads before retightening the sealing bolt. 4. Loosen the regulator valve on the valve inspection tool, and apply the specified air pressure to the rocker arm synchronizing piston A/B. Specified Air Pressure is 400 kPa (57 psi) 5. With the specified air pressure applied, push up the timing plate 2-3 mm (0.08-0.12 inch) at plate end; the synchronizing piston will pop out and engage the intake mid, primary and secondary rocker arms. Visually check the engagement of the synchronizing piston A/B. Page 9526 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9468 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 9849 Page 7458 11. Remove the self-tapping screw and core clamp. 12. Pull out the heater core. NOTE: Be careful not to bend the inlet and outlet pipes during heater core removal. 13. Assemble heater unit in the reverse order of disassembly. 14. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items: - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses. Make sure that the clamps are secure. - Loosen the bleed bolt on the engine, and refill the radiator and coolant reservoir with the proper engine coolant mixture. Tighten the bleed bolt when all the trapped air has escaped and engine coolant begins to flow from it. - Connect all cables, and make sure they are properly adjusted. Page 2186 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5202 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations On Top Of Transmission - Photo 44 Page 5509 Axle Shaft: Specifications Spindle Nut 1990-91 Page 7810 Page 9310 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Locations Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations Page 6209 Brake Caliper: Application and ID Rear Caliper Identification Caliper I.D. There are two types of rear calipers: The caliper types can be identified by "NISSIN" or "AKEBONO" logo stamped on the caliper body. Check the type of caliper before servicing. Page 5177 Mainshaft Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Locations Purge Flow Sensor: Locations Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 2831 Page 644 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2-P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. ^ There should be continuity with the lever released (hood opened). ^ There should be no continuity with the lever pushed down (hood closed). Page 5662 Final Driven Gear: Service and Repair 1. Remove the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier. NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads. 2. Install the final driven gear by tightening the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Page 9343 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 6424 Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection: 10.5 - 12.5 mm (0.41 - 0.49 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 8 - 10 mm (0.32 - 0.39 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the belt deflection. Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (Without A/C) Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension: 294 - 441 N (30 - 45 kgf, 66 - 99 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 540 - 735 N (55 - 75 kgf, 121 - 165 lbf) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Page 9206 Connector Pin Color And Function Chart CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the gauge assembly, and disconnect all connectors from it. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 22-P (C6O9) and 16-P (C6O7) connectors. - If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board A. Page 8869 Page 525 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 356 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Page 1964 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve clearance Valve clearance Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.009 to 0.011 in Exhaust 0.011 to 0.013 in Page 2876 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6739 Power Steering Pump: Capacity Specifications System ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 1.1 liter (1.16 US.qt.) Reservoir ......................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... 0.4 liter (0.42 US.qt.) Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Mount Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9737 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 6154 Reinstall the tool bed on the brake lathe with the top of the cutting bits facing up and the feed knobs facing down. Adjust the tool bed until the brake disc is centered between the cutting bits. For proper refinishing, the brake disc must turn toward the top of the cutting bits. Do not set the cutting depth on the brake lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). This is two divisions on the cutting knob. Make sure you start your cut at least 3 mm (0.12 in.) beyond the worn area on the brake disc. If you are cutting larger diameter brake discs, make sure you use the 150 cutting bit holders. These bit holders, available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION), supersede the original bit holders and provide better cutting coverage for larger diameter brake discs. Each bit holder is clearly marked for proper installation on the tool holder. Cutting the Brake Disc To get the smoothest cut and the best brake disc finish, always use the slowest feed speed on the tool bed feed motor. Place the drive belt on the smallest pulley of the feed motor and on the largest pulley of the hand wheel. Make sure the lower toggle switch on the power drive system drive motor assembly is set to the proper rotation to turn the brake disc toward the top of the cutting bits. Plug the tool bed feed motor into the power outlet on the drive motor assembly, then turn on the drive motor with the upper toggle switch on the assembly. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure the transmission is in 1st gear (2nd gear on Preludes with ATTS) or Reverse and the engine is idling, but not at a fast idle. If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Turn on the tool bed feed motor, and snap it into place; there should be tension on the feed belt. Cut the brake disc until the cutting bits clear the outer edge of the disc. The cutting bits should produce a smooth, consistent finish with no chatter marks or grooves. If the disc did not clean up entirely on the first pass, reset the brake lathe and make a second pass. Page 5648 Page 5045 Page 908 Switch Test 10. Remove the two Torx bolts using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's airbag assembly. Switch Test 11. Check for continuity between the horn positive terminal and steering wheel bolt with the horn switch pressed. ^ If there is continuity, check: - the cable reel. - the set/resume switch. ^ If there is no continuity, replace the horn switch. Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Alloy Wheel - Center Cap Missing 98-005 January 12, 1998 Applies To: 1997 - 98 Odyssey - EX thru VIN JHMRA387.WC003663 1997-98 Prelude - thru VIN JHMBB6...WC004695 (non-Type SH only) 1997 Accord - SE Alloy Wheel Center Cap Missing SYMPTOM One or more of the center caps is missing, or the Honda logo in the center of the cap is lifting. PROBABLE CAUSE Heat from driving deforms the center cap. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center caps with the new type listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Alloy Wheel Center Cap (four required): Odyssey, Prelude P/N 44732-SX0-J01, H/C 5776455 Accord SE P/N 44732-SP1-J80, H/C 4622148 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 44732-SX0-J00 H/C 5255880 Defect code: 004 Contention code: A02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Page 4969 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 2185 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 9859 Turn Signal Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Turn Signal And Hazard Warning Light (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6850 2. Install the pinion shaft grommet. NOTE: Align the slot in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion on the valve housing. 3. Pass the right side of the steering gearbox above and through the right side of the rear beam. 4. Raise the left side of the steering gearbox above and through the left side of the rear beam. 5. Install the pinion shaft grommet, then insert the pinion shaft up through the bulkhead. 6. Install the right mounting bracket over the mounting cushion, then loosely install two gearbox mounting bolts. 7. Tighten the four mounting bolts on the stiffener plate first, then tighten the two mounting bolts on the right mounting brackets. NOTE: After installing the steering gearbox, make sure that there is no interference between the cylinder lines and rear beam. 8. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 3731 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7304 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 5299 Shifter A/T: Adjustments GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. 1. With the transmission in N position, check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the N mark on the A/T gear position indicator panel when the transmission is in N position. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel mounting screws, and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the A/T gear position indicator panel is removed, check the panel adjustment as described above. Page 7519 Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 6482 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3501 Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Page 7894 Page 5410 Regulator Valve Body Page 4162 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Pressure Pressure With Regulator Vacuume Hose Disconnected 38-48 Psi Component Tests and General Diagnostics Keyless Entry Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Unit Input Test Parking Brake Switch Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch Rear Console Page 1136 Cylinder Position Sensor: Description and Operation F22B1 Engine (VTEC) DESCRIPTION The CYP Sensor detects the position of No. 1 cylinder for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Page 4295 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2141 Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 185 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Condenser Fan Relay ^ Condenser fan relay Diagram Information and Instructions Glove Box Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 7716 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light comes on and goes off after about six seconds if the system is operating normally. If the light does not come on, or does not go off after six seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the memory will store the cause of the malfunction, and the data link circuit passes on the information from the memory to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester connected to the DLC (16P). Page 7289 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. 2. Remove the coolant reservoir. Remove the two bolts and the suction hose bracket. NOTE: Do not disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant reservoir and the radiator. Condenser Replacement 3. Remove the five self-tapping screws, and push the clips on each side with a flat tip screwdriver as shown, then remove the front grille. Page 1518 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the SYSTEM SELECT screen, select AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION. 4. From the TEST MODE MENU screen, select FREEZE DATA. 5. Read and record the freeze data values. (See the examples of PGM Tester displays.) Make sure you record the actual freeze data values on the repair order. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, as shown, and you have these conditions: - TP sensor value is off idle (more than 0.5 volts, more than 1%, or more than -2°, depending on the unit of measure), - ECT value is about 140°F - VSS value is between 20 to 40 mph, and - Shift signal is 3rd gear go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the mainshaft speed value is lower than the countershaft speed and VSS values, but one or more of the values in the conditions listed above are outside the parameters, clear the DTC with the PGM Tester, then flush the A/T (see REPAIR PROCEDURE B, Flushing the A/T). If the Page 6326 Vacuum Brake Booster: Adjustments PUSHROD CLEARANCE NOTE: Master cylinder pushrod4o piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before installing master cylinder. Master Cylinder Internal View 1. Set the special tool on the master cylinder body; push in the center shaft until the top of it contacts the end of the secondary piston by turning the adjusting nut. 2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position, install the special tool upside down on the booster. 3. Install the master cylinder nuts and tighten to the specified torque. 4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge 0-101 kPa (0-760 mmHg, 30 in Hg) to the booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg, 20 in Hg) vacuum. Brake Power Booster Check 5. With a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut as shown. NOTE: If the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 in), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 in), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 in) or more. Therefore it must be adjusted and rechecked. 6. If clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut and turn the adjuster in or out to adjust. NOTE: Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied to the booster. Hold the clevis while adjusting. 7. Tighten the star locknut securely. Page 2204 Page 9990 14. Install the regulator. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. 15. Install the rear channel and glass, and fit the glass run channel into the rear channel. 16. Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Page 8358 11. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. Check that the regulator moves smoothly by connecting a 12 V battery to the power window motor. 12. Install the front and center channels, and the glass run channel. NOTE: Fit the glass run channel into the front and center channels, and on the door as shown. Locations Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Locations Below Left Side Of Dash Removal and Replacement Strut Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Replacement Strut Front Strut TOOL REQUIRED - Strut Spring Compressor REMOVAL 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts from the front damper. 3. Remove the flange bolt. 4. Remove the flange bolt and self-locking nut, then remove the damper fork 5. Remove the front damper by removing the three flange nuts. DISASSEMBLE Page 3639 Alternate View Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 5709 11. Reinstall the transmission. 12. Refill the transmission with Honda MTF 13. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the transmission shifts properly. Disclaimer Page 4357 Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6518 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 7123 Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play 0 - 0.05 mm Note: Front and Rear. Page 9037 Photo 38 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 38 Ex Right Side Of Engine Ex-R Right Side Of Engine Page 1002 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9892 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 7943 Page 9513 Page 8235 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Specifications Heat Shield: Specifications Mounting Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Page 302 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 8445 Dash And Console Lights (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6729 2. Remove the fours bolts that secure the pump cover to the pump housing, and remove the cover. 3. Remove the old 0-ring. Coat a new 0-ring with clean power steering fluid, and install the new 0-ring onto the pump cover. 4. Align the rollers with the holes in the pump cover, and install the cover. Torque the four mounting bolts to 20 N.m (14 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the power steering pump, and adjust the belt tension. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 6. Start the engine, turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock, and check the power steering fluid level. Add fluid if necessary. 7. Make sure the power steering pump does not leak. Page 5917 Page 4555 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 2840 Page 5569 1. Determine which rear hub bearing assembly has failed, and replace it with the correct one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. Refer to section 18 of the appropriate service manual for instructions. 2. Install a new spindle nut, and tighten it to the correct torque specification. Use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. 3. Install new bearing hub caps on both sides. NOTE: Both bearing caps must be replaced; otherwise the bearings may fail again in the future. Page 1845 Page 2327 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 10061 Wiper Motor: Locations Photo 29 Left Side Of Air Scoop Page 5968 A/T Gear Position Switch: Adjustments A/T Gear Position Switch Test/Adjustment 1. Shift to [P] and loosen the mounting nuts. 2. Slide the switch rearward (up to 2.0 mm (0.08 in)] until there is continuity between the "F" and "I" terminals within the range of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between the terminals. NOTE: ^ If adjustment is not possible, check for a damaged shift lever detent and/or bracket. If there is no damage, replace the A/T gear position switch. ^ The engine should start when the shift lever is in [P] anywhere within the range of free play. Page 6924 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Page 4033 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 3036 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 6558 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 3768 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the left side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Page 1296 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Page 4105 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 4623 Distributor Overhaul Page 8255 Trailer Connector: Locations Photo 111 Left Rear Of Corner of trunk Page 4993 Torque Converter Housing: Service and Repair Secondary Gear Shaft Bearing Replacement TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52x55 mm - 07749-0010000 Handle Driver 1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing by heating the torque converter housing to 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun, then tap the housing until the bearing falls out. CAUTION: Do not treat the housing in excess of 212°F (100°C). 2. Install the ATF guide plate. 3. Install the new bearing into the housing using the special tools as shown. Page 6913 12. 1997 Accord and all Odyssey only: Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts and the caliper. Remove the four flange bolts, then remove the brake rotor/hub assembly. 13. Clean the recessed area around the ball joint with solvent and compressed air, then install the base remover adapter (Tool C or F). 14. Hold the remover installer adapter (Tool A) up to the ball joint, then install the castle nut to hold it in place. Install the remaining special tools on the lower ball joint and the knuckle. To avoid damaging the special tools, verify that they are correct for the vehicle you are working on and are aligned properly. NOTE: On the Prelude Type SH, make sure you are removing the ball joint that connects to the lower control arm. Do not remove the ball joint that connects to the radius rod. 15. Tighten the C-frame and press the lower ball joint out of the knuckle. Ball Joint Installation 16. Position the new ball joint in the knuckle. Do not remove the boot from the ball joint. 17. Install the special tools on the ball joint and the knuckle. Locations A/C Thermostat: Locations Photo 86 A/C Thermostat Behind Glove Box Service and Repair Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. a. Attach a hose to the bleeder screw, and suspend the hose in a container of brake fluid. b. Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid at the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the bleeder hose. c. Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when done. d. Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Page 1417 H/C 4288247 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Let the engine cool, then remove the valve cover. 2. Measure the intake valve clearance at the number two cylinder intake valve closest to cylinder number one. ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 3221 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 9684 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 6925 All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the front suspension lower ball joints. PARTS INFORMATION Ball Joint Kit, Accord and Odyssey: P/N 04510-S84-000, H/C 6194054 Page 9201 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5057 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Testing and Inspection PCM Terminal Locations PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Page 6371 ABS Component Locations Page 3262 ^ If clearance is more than 0.40 mm, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. ^ If clearance is less than 0.40 mm, go to step 3. 3. Adjust the valve clearance. If no adjustment screw threads are visible above the locknut, replace the cam holder. Refer to section 6 of the S/M. Disclaimer Page 5406 Free Length ......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 48.3 mm (1.902 inch) Servo Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.1 mm (0.319 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 52.6 mm (2.071 inch) Orifice Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.7 mm (0.028 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.260 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 52.5 mm (2.067 inch) 2nd Orifice Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.260 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 66.4 mm (2.614 inch) Regulator Valve Spring A Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.8 mm (0.071 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 14.7 mm (0.579 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... 87.8 (3.457 inch) Regulator Valve Spring B Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.8 mm (0.071 inch) I.D. .............................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 6.0 mm (0.236 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... 44.0 (1.732 inch) Stator Reaction Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 4.5 mm (0.177 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... 35.4 (1.394 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 30.3 mm (1.193 inch) Lock-Up Timing Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.260 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... 51.1 (2.012 inch) Torque Converter Check Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.4 mm (0.331 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 38.2 mm (1.504 inch) Throttle Valve B Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.4 mm (0.055 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.5 mm (0.335 inch) Free Length ............................................................................................................................................................. 41.5-41.6 mm (1.634-1.638 inch) Throttle Valve B Adjusting Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.2 mm (0.244 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 30.0 mm (1.181 inch) Relief Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.4 mm (0.331 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 39.1 mm (1.539 inch) 4th Accumulator Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.9 mm (0.114 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 22.0 mm (0.866 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 90.1 mm (3.547 inch) 1st-Hold Accumulator Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 4.0 mm (0.157 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 25.0 mm (0.984 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ....................................... 64.7 mm (2.547 Page 4318 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Outer Handle Replacement NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: ^ Door panel See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair ^ Plastic cover See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Coupe: Remove the rod protector. NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 3. Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness clips. Page 4491 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 9375 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 8256 Trailer Connector: Locations Photo 122 Left Side Of Cargo Area Page 8918 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7719 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On (Part 3 Of 3) CAUTION: Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Page 1162 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Page 9745 Page 4804 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the shift control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the shift control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 3 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 3932 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6423 Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (With A/C) Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension: 441-588 N (45-60 kgf, 99- 132 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt, (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the tension should be 932 - 1123 N (95 - 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Without A/C Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (Without A/C) Deflection Method: Page 7645 6. Reconnect the airbag connectors. Airbag Assembly Replacement Attach the airbag connector to the connector holder, then reinstall the glove box. 7. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 8. After installing the airbag assembly, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. - Make sure both horn buttons work. - Take a test drive, and make sure the cruise control switches work. 9. Enter the code number to restore radio operation. Page 6635 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Electrical Specifications Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Electrical Specifications Resistance 400 - 600 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 8382 10. Remove the rear channel. 11. Remove the center channel. Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal and Disassembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. REMOVAL ^ Remove the banjo bolt and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. Caliper Bolt Removal ^ Remove the caliper bolts (pin A and pin B), then remove the caliper from the bracket. Caliper Boot Removal ^ Remove the pin boots from the caliper bracket. DISASSEMBLY WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston. Do not use high air pressure; use an OSHA-approved 30 PSI nozzle. Page 8896 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Remove both rear seat-backs, the spare tire lid, and the mid-floor cover (Wagon). 2. Remove the fuel tank access panel. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 3. With the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the 3-P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. Fuel Gauge - Sending Unit Test/Replacement 4. Remove the five nuts, and take the fuel gauge sending unit out of the fuel tank. Page 6680 Page 4525 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 6361 Fail Safe Relay: Testing and Inspection - Remove the fail-safe relays and motor relay. See: Brake Fluid Pump Relay/Locations Relay Identification - Check for continuity between the terminals C and D. There should be continuity. - Check for continuity between the terminals A and B. There should be continuity when the battery is connected between the terminals C and D. There should be no continuity when the battery is disconnected. Page 1810 7. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. ^ Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) - 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 6 mm bolts are (11), (12), (13),(14) 8. Install the back cover. 9. Install the key and the camshaft pulley onto the camshaft, then tighten the retaining bolt to the torque shown. Page 1778 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 713 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Brake Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4-P connector from the switch. Brake Switch Test 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Page 9453 Power Relay Test Radiator Fan Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Radiator Fan Relay ^ Radiator fan relay Page 5611 Page 9043 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 6123 Caliper Shield 11. Install the caliper shield. 12. Fill the brake reservoir up, and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair 13. Operate the brake pedal several times, then adjust the parking brake. 14 After installation, perform the following checks. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the parking brake lever for operation, and adjust it if necessary. A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Page 2498 Radiator Fan: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9785 Locations Illustrated Index Page 2725 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Page 5862 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the shift control solenoid valve A/B. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the shift control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 3 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. 3. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Page 1625 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 184 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Photo 9 Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 1244 Master Switch Test Left Rear Switch: Master Switch Test Right Rear Switch: Page 1044 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 319 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 5364 Page 9625 Parking Lamp: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 20-P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. ^ If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. ^ If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the table. - If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch Turn Signal Switch Page 1371 Page 8431 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAF-SD40700 Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010400 Attachment 52 x 55 mm - 07965-6920201 Hub Dis/Assembly Base REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the steering knuckle from the hub unit. Refer to Steering and Suspension. 2. Remove the splash guard from the steering knuckle. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the splash guard for hub unit or wheel bearing replacement. Page 7526 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Photo 9 Left Front Of Engine Compartment Page 5274 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Page 6676 TOE-IN: This illustration shows view from the top of the vehicle. Toe-in is the measured amount the front wheels are turn in. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Page 3874 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and signals the ECM/PCM. In operation, the ECM/PCM receives the signals from the sensor and varies the duration during which fuel is injected. To stabilize the sensor's output, the sensor has an internal heater. The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in exhaust pipe A. Page 3379 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 2107 Page 6271 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service Precautions CAUTION: - When removing the modulator unit or after removing it, be careful not to turn it upside down or lean it excessively. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. - Do not loosen the relief plug on the accumulator. - Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. - Do not reuse the drained brake fluid. WARNING: The modulator unit contains high-pressure brake fluid. Be sure to drain the high-pressure brake fluid completely from modulator unit before performing the modulator function check, disposing of the modulator unit, or replacing ABS pump motor. Page 1078 Page 6652 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Page 9224 Page 736 3. Remove the cruise control main/moonroof, dash lights brightness controller and rear window defogger switches. 4. Remove the six self-tapping screws, then pull out the instrument/heater control panels. Disconnect the connectors from the heater control panel, then remove the instrument/heater control panels. 5. Remove the five self-tapping screws and the heater control panel from the instrument panel. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the air mix control cable at the heater unit. If necessary, adjust the heater valve cable. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 4076 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 5183 Page 408 Page 1079 Component Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Photo 9 Page 9255 Page 4108 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 9552 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 9280 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9711 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Replacement CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Remove the steering column covers. Page 1022 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Page 4284 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8839 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 207 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 5411 Throttle Valve Body Page 8440 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 9412 Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Hazard Flasher Relay Left Kick Panel - Photo 93 Page 5160 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Page 7310 Page 7821 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Page 3975 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Photo 39 Right Side Of Engine Page 2026 Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator With Air Conditioning Alternator Belt Inspection And Adjustment (With A/C) Deflection Method: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection: 8 - 10.5 mm (0.32 - 0.41 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 5 - 7 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the through bolt and adjustment locknut. 2. Turn the adjusting bolt to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the nut and through bolt. 3. Recheck the belt deflection. Page 9383 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6297 Booster Pushrod Adjustment 8. Remove the special tool. Brake Booster Length With Booster Removed 9. Adjust the pushrod length as shown if the booster is removed. 10. Install the master cylinder. Page 4729 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 83 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Open Photo 89 Above Left Kick Panel Page 868 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Warning Switch Replacement CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the hazard warning switch or the front console panel when prying the switch out. 1. Carefully pry the hazard warning switch out of the front console panel. 2. Disconnect the 10-P connector from the hazard warning switch. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Nuts ........................................................................................................................... .................................................... 108 Nm. (80 lb. ft.) Removal and Installation Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. NOTE: The blower motor, recirculation control motor and blower resistor can be replaced without removing the blower unit. Blower Unit - Replacement 1. Remove the glove box. 2. Remove the two bolts and the glove box frame, and disconnect the connectors from the radiator fan control module and the glove box frame. Page 6523 NOTE: To reinstall the SRS main harness connector, push it into position until it clicks, then close the connector lid. 2. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Reconnect the airbag 3-P connectors. 4. Reinstall the glove box. 5. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Page 5402 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the transmission housing, then remove the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. 2. Replace the O-ring with a new one before reinstalling the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor. Page 6504 Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Photo 76 Behind Center Of Dash Page 1040 Locations Distributor: Locations Right Side Of Engine Page 1072 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8921 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 1125 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 4769 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The CKP Sensor determines timing for fuel injection and ignition of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The TDC Sensor determines ignition timing at start-up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Page 7083 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Page 1597 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Page 7121 Wagon w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1995-97 Accord V6 P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 1994 - 97 Accord 4-door and 2-door, EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV1-J51, H/C 4225819 4-door and 2-door, DX and LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV1-008, H/C 4225900 1994-95 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N51, H/C 4461182 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV4-N02, H/C 4574877 1996 - 97 Accord Wagon EX and LX w/ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N51, H/C 4581492 LX w/o ABS P/N 42200-SV2-N01, H/C 4581484 Odyssey: P/N 42200-SX0-951, H/C 4621983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 42200-SV1-J51 H/C 4225819 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Page 8490 Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 7916 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This Service Bulletin is for information only. TRANSMITTER QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Procedure 1 Page 9132 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 7017 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. 6. Loosely install the front damper on the frame with the aligning tab facing inside, then loosely install the two flange nuts. Page 8006 Safety Indicator - Circuit Diagram Page 2842 Page 4943 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Mechanical Specifications Resistance 12 - 24 ohms Torque 8.7 ft.lb Page 3608 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Specifications Camshaft: Specifications DIMENSIONS Camshaft-To-Holder Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 inch) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) End Play: Standard (New): 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) Runout: 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Lobe Height: Intake: Primary: 37.775 mm (1.4827 inch) Mid: 39.725 mm (1.5640 inch) Secondary: 34.481 mm (1.3575 inch) Exhaust: 38.366 mm (1.5105 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Holder Loosening Sequence Tighten Bolt In Sequence To: 8 mm Bolts To 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) 6 mm Bolts To 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) 6 mm Bolts Are (11), (12), (13), (14) Page 3797 Page 8265 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 3545 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Lining Thickness Standard 0.15-0.18 in Service Unit 0.08 in Page 4209 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 3735 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8116 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 5044 Page 1289 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Page 7016 6. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. INSTALLATION 1. Install the front damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 2. Position the damper mounting base on the front damper unit as shown. 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 4. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. Page 2002 Valve Seat: Service and Repair 1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter. NOTE: If guides are worn, replace them before cutting the valve seats. 2. Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. 3. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30° cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the 60° cutter. Check width of seat and adjust accordingly. 4. Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutter. ^ Valve Seat Width: Standard (New): 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 inch) - Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.079 inch) 5. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound to the valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several times. 6. The actual valve seating surface, as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat. ^ If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 60° cutter to move it down, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. ^ If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it up, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45° cutter. Page 6078 NOTE: Pour the brake fluid slowly so that it does not foam, and wait for a few minutes. 10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 twice, and refill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. When the brake fluid is completely drained from the reservoir (air enters in the modulator unit) during brake fluid replacement, bleed the air from the modulator unit as follows. 11. Fill the reservoir to the MAX (upper) level with fresh brake fluid. 12. Connect the rubber tube to the bleeder on the modulator unit, and set the other end of the rubber tube in a container (see the previous page). 13. Loosen the bleeder, and start the engine to activate the pump motor NOTE: Take care not to spill the brake fluid from the container. 14. Tighten the bleeder when the fluid starts to flow out of the bleeder. 15. Stop the engine after the pump motor stops NOTE: If the ABS indicator light comes on and the pump motor stops, restart the engine and repeat steps 3 through 5 above. With Anti-Lock Brakes (Using ALB Checker) CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. 1. Place the vehicle on level ground with the wheels blocked. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL for manual transmission models, and in PARK position for automatic transmission models. Release the parking brake. ALB Checker Installation 2. Disconnect the ABS inspection connector (6P) from the cross-member under the passenger's seat and connect the ABS inspection connector (6P) to the ALB checker. Filling The Reservoir With Brake Fluid 3. Fill the modulator reservoir to the MAX level line and install the reservoir cap. 4. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a few minutes, then stop it. Check the fluid level in the modulator reservoir and refill to the MAX level line if necessary. Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Outer Handle Replacement NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: ^ Inner trim cover ^ Door panel ^ Plastic cover 2. Remove the rod protector. 3. Remove the lock crank. 4. Remove the bolt and loosen the nut, then move the rear channel forward. Locations Page 2091 The following explains the procedure for tightening filters using these numbers. 1) Make a mark on the cylinder block under the number that shows at the bottom of the filter when the rubber seal is seated. 2) Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven numbers from the marked point. For example, if a mark is made under the number 2 when the rubber seal is seated, the filter should be tightened until the number 1 comes up to the marked point. 5. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. CAUTION: Installation using other than the above procedure could result in serious engine damage due to oil leakage. Page 6818 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4632 Page 8169 Page 1282 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Page 2981 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Page 8874 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3354 Page 6789 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 4594 Page 34 Testing For a Short with A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the lowest "Ohms" range. Page 889 Page 2899 Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. COMPONENT LOCATIONS To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Component Location section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. Page 8310 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAF-SD40700 Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010400 Attachment 52 x 55 mm - 07965-6920201 Hub Dis/Assembly Base REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the steering knuckle from the hub unit. Refer to Steering and Suspension. 2. Remove the splash guard from the steering knuckle. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the splash guard for hub unit or wheel bearing replacement. Page 9348 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 7744 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning the following procedures. Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D). Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and cable reel 2P connector (B). Page 264 How to Read and Use the Circuit Schematics OVERVIEW Page 8993 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 2402 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 457 Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Reminder Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 4361 The second half of power distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If power distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. GROUND DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Page 4086 Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 1723 3. Remove the four flange bolts, then separate the hub unit from the brake disc. 4. Separate the wheel bearing from the front hub using the special tools and a press as shown. CAUTION: Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 5. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the hub using the special tools and a commercially-available bearing separator as shown. 6. Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. NOTE: Wash the steering knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill .................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 2.9 Qt Page 9143 Testing For Voltage Drop 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Page 3216 Page 3183 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral until the radiator fan comes ON, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer to the test tachometer connector. Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm with shift lever in neutral position (A/T: [N] or [P] position) an electrical systems turned OFF. 3. Adjust the idle speed if necessary. Page 8541 4. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip from the door. Remove the latch through the hole in the door. NOTE: Take care not to bend the outer handle rod, cylinder rod and lock rod (sedan/wagon). 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the inner handle rod and connector are connected properly. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Page 9344 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 6601 Fuses - Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Page 9100 Seat Belt, Lights-On, And Ignition Key Reminders (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2543 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Photo 40 Right Rear Of Engine Page 1539 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ GF-1, SG or SH Above -7° C (20° F) ......................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... 10W-30 All temperatures ..................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 5W-30 (preferred) Specifications Fuel: Specifications FUEL OCTANE RATING (UNLEADED FUELS) Accord All Models Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 86 AKI (91 RON) Civic All Models Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 86 AKI (91 RON) Del Sol All Models Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 86 AKI (91 RON) Prelude 2.2L SOHC Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................. 86 AKI (91 RON) 2.2L DOHC VTEC Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................. 91 RON or higher 2.3L DOHC Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................. 91 RON or higher Page 552 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard And Floor Page 8000 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: ^ Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. ^ Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure multiple terminal connectors are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. (Part Number: 08798-9001) 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it clicks into place. CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. ^ Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10 megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short to Ground NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing With a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Page 9843 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 208 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 256 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relays - Relay Test 1. Remove the power relay from its socket. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals. ^ There should be continuity between the A and terminals when power and ground are connected to the C and D terminals. ^ There should be no continuity between the and B terminals when power is disconnected. Horn Relay ^ Horn relay Page 5700 4. Remove the angular ball bearing from the mainshaft using the special tool and a press. 5. Press the mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub. 6. Install the new 5th gear on the mainshaft. 7. Install the new sleeve set (synchro ring, hub, and sleeve) on the mainshaft. 8. Reassemble the rest of the removed parts on the mainshaft. Refer to the appropriate service manual for the correct reassembly procedure. 9. Replace the 5th shift fork. 10. Reassemble the transmission. Page 7917 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Alpine of America by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form (found in Parts Information Bulletin A91 -0031) along with a dealer check for $59.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Honda/Alpine V.S.S. P.O. Box 2859 Torrance, CA 90509 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 2 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. Page 7673 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Inserting the probe into the terminal side of the connector, and tampering the connector could cause malfunction of the SRS system or an error in inspection. Use a probe with a tapered tip. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using tools which are not specified standard design could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. Page 9253 Page 145 Page 7012 2. Push on the rear damper as shown. 3. Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. NOTE: The rear damper should move smoothly. If it does not (no compression or no extension), the gas is leaking, and the rear damper should be replaced. 4. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises or binding during these tests. CAUTION: The spring of the damper springs are different left and right. Be sure to mark the springs R and L before disassembling the rear dampers. ASSEMBLE 1. Install the rear damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Assemble the rear damper in reverse order of disassembly, except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 3. Position the damper mounting base on the rear damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 5. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. Page 7604 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser outlet line where refrigerant is in a high temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and open the circuit. This removes ground, and the compressor will stop running. Page 8118 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Close Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Close Photo 89 Above Left Kick Panel Page 4225 Testing and Inspection Speedometer Module: Testing and Inspection Speedometer/Trip Meter/Odometer - Troubleshooting NOTE: The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. VSS Input Test (At Harness Side Of 3-P Connector) VSS Test Page 9342 Page 3679 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Page 2364 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P] position, M/T in neutral until the radiator fan comes ON, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer to the test tachometer connector. Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm with shift lever in neutral position (A/T: [N] or [P] position) an electrical systems turned OFF. 3. Adjust the idle speed if necessary. Page 5267 Mainshaft/Countershaft Speed Sensors: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Page 5922 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 898 Headlamp Switch: Electrical Diagrams Headlight Switch (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4569 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage and Voltage Drop TESTING FOR VOLTAGE When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Testing For Voltage 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC Volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. Page 8034 Page 1443 Drive Belt: Specifications A/C BELT DEFLECTION [1] Used Belt: 8.0 - 10.5 mm (0.31 - 0.41 in) New Belt: 5.0 - 7.0 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) BELT TENSION [2] Used Belt: 440 - 590 N (45 - 60 kgf, 99 - 132 lbf) New Belt: 930 - 1130 N (95 - 115 kgf, 209 - 254 lbf) [1] As measured between pulleys with 10 Kg (22 lbs) of force. "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. [2] Using tension gauge. Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 9645 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test CAUTION: ^ All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. ^ Whenever the ignition switch ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. ^ For additional precautions, refer to Air Bag and Seat Belts. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Page 43 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Flasher System Page 4103 Page 4270 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Page 7581 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 7442 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 747 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top of the image, to ground, at the bottom. Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. All connectors are numbered (C709, C416, etc.). Below each connector number (except those for components) is the number of a photo showing the connector's location on the car. Connector cavities are also numbered. The numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Page 9036 Page 2999 Page 7414 A/C Thermostat: Service and Repair CAUTION: - All SRS wire harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Before you disconnect any part of an SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connectors. - Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - For additional precautions, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 1. Recover the refrigerant with a Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. 2. Disconnect the receiver line and the suction line from the evaporator. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting to avoid moisture and dust contamination into the system. 3. Remove the glove box. 4. Remove the glove box frame. Page 7010 4. Remove the flange bolt. 5. Lower the rear suspension and remove the rear damper. DISASSEMBLE 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. Diagram Information and Instructions Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Page 5641 4. Install the reverse idler gear and reverse idler gear shaft in the clutch housing. 5. Install the reverse shim fork in the clutch housing with the 5th/reverse shift piece pin positioned in the slot of the reverse ship fork. NOTE: Check that the steel ball is in the proper position. 6. Install the oil gutter plate in the transmission housing. NOTE: Select the 78 mm shim according to the measurements. Page 9770 Lamp Out Sensor: Locations Photo 116 Right Side Of Cargo Area (Left Similar) Page 1328 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Pressure Pressure With Regulator Vacuume Hose Disconnected 38-48 Psi 1ST/2ND Clutch Assembly Page 2246 ^ Bearing-to-shaft Oil Clearance - Standard (New): ^ No. 1 front journal, No. 3 front and rear journals: 0.066-0.098 mm (0.0026-0.0039 inch) ^ No. 2 front and rear journals: 0.076-0.108 mm (0.0030-0.0043 inch) ^ No. 1 rear journal: 0.050-0.075 mm (0.0020-0.0030 inch) - Service Limit: ^ No.1 front journal, No.3 front and rear journals: 0.12 mm (0.005 inch) ^ No.2 front and rear journals: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) ^ No.1 rear journal: 0.09 mm (0.004 inch) Page 4938 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 1. Remove the solenoid pin. 2. Remove the self-locking nuts and shift lock solenoid. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement 3. Install the new shift lock solenoid in the reverse order of removal, and adjust its position. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is ON, check that there is a clearance of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.165 ± 0.020 in) between the top of the shift lock lever and the lock pin groove, and tighten the self-locking nuts. NOTE: Use brand-new self-locking nuts. ^ When the shift lock solenoid is OFF, make sure that the lock pin is blocked by the shift lock lever. Shift Lock Solenoid Test/Replacement NOTE: Test the solenoid after you assembled it. Page 4297 Testing For A Short To Ground With A Test Light Or DVOM 2. Connect a test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC Volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes OFF, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero (0.0 volts), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or Digital Volt/Ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Use Use this chart to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all in-line-connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in this chart, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. In-Line-Connector Circuit Identification Example: The horn, A/C, and the right headlight don't work. List all in-line-connectors in the horn circuit and check this chart. You find that C211 is common to the A/C circuit and the headlight circuit, so you inspect C211 and find the problem: bent terminals. Connector/Circuit ID Specifications Countershaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Page 1302 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Page 5523 1. Remove the intermediate shaft outer seal from the bearing support. 2. Remove the external circlip. 3. Press the intermediate shaft out of the intermediate shaft bearing using the special tools as shown. 4. Remove the intermediate shaft inner seal. 5. Remove the internal circlip. Page 3652 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 2338 The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT = White YEL = Yellow BLK = Black SLU = Blue GRN = Green RED = Red ORN = Orange PNK = Pink BRN = Brown GRY = Gray PUR = Purple LT BLU = Light Blue LT GRN = Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Page 3302 Component Location If there is no photo number below or beside a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that connector, ground, or terminal number in the appropriate Connector Identification Chart. The chart will tell you the color of a connector, how many cavities it has, where it's located, and what component or harness it connects to. Along with this chart you'll find an image giving illustration of the related harness. Key to Symbols Page 261 Page 6141 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Nissin Calipers WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Block the front wheels before lacking up the rear of the vehicle. REMOVAL ^ Block the front wheels, loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, support the rear of vehicle on safety stands, then remove the rear wheels. ^ Release the parking brake. Caliper Removal ^ Hold the caliper pins with a thin, open-end wrench, and remove the two caliper bolts and the caliper from the bracket. CAUTION: Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to prevent dust and dirt from entering inside. Support the caliper with a piece of wire so that it does not hang from the brake hose. Pad Removal ^ Remove the pad shim and brake pads. INSPECTION Page 4604 Page 4112 Page 817 Page 1243 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the driver's door panel. Master Switch Test 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures No. 1, 2, 3 and 7. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Master Switch Test Front Passenger's Switch: Page 8107 Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Refer to "Wire Color Abbreviations". POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATICS Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the power distribution diagrams to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Power Distribution Schematics-From Battery To Ignition Switch, Fuses,and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of power distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. From Fuses to Relays and Components Page 7670 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbag components. they have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: IF THE AIRBAG IS IMPROPERLY STORED FACE DOWN, ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT COULD PROPEL THE UNIT WITH ENOUGH FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Locations Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations Page 2366 M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T: 770 ± 50 rpm A/T: 770 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Diagnosis by Symptom. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Page 4003 Schematic Symbols Wire Color Codes Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Bolts And Nuts [1] ................................................................................................................... ................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) [1] See Service and Repair for tightening sequence. Page 2755 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Locations Pressure Switch: Locations Connector, Control Unit And Relay Locations Page 1809 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. ^ Lubricate cam lobes after reassembly. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up. (No. 1 piston Top Dead Center (TDC)). 4. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 or No. 6 camshaft holders. ^ Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. ^ Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. 6. Install the camshaft oil seal using the special tools as shown. Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Main Journal Diameter No. 1 and 4 Journals 49.984 - 50.008 mm --No. 2 Journal 49.976 - 50.000 mm --No. 3 Journal 49.972 - 49.996 mm --No. 5 Journal 49.988 - 50.012 mm --- Main Journal Taper 0.005 mm 0.006 mm Note: (0.0002) max. Rod Journal Diameter 47.976 - 48.000 mm --Rod Journal Taper 0.005 mm 0.006 mm Note: (0.0002) max. Out of Round 0.005 mm 0.006 mm Note: (0.0002) max. End Play 0.10 - 0.35 mm 0.45 mm Runout 0.03 mm 0.04 mm Note: (0.001) Max. Page 472